idoc.pub manual-electrologixs-vlc-and-ec5-100373-010-rev-ar0

GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 System Operation and Maintenance 100373-010 AR0 VOLUME ONE © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. The information contained in this publication is the property of GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC ("GETS") and is disclosed in confidence. This publication is intended for use by GETS customers solely for purposes of operating, training and performing routine maintenance of purchased or licensed GETS products, and it shall not be reproduced, redistributed, retransmitted, translated, abridged, adapted, condensed, revised or otherwise modified, in any form, in whole or in part, or used for any other purpose or disclosed to others, without the express written consent of GETS. However, if a GETS customer (“Customer”) requires additional copies of this document or portions thereof for internal use, GETS hereby grants to Customer a limited right to reproduce this publication, in whole or in part, and Customer agrees to use such authorized copies (“Copies”) solely for its intended purposes. Any Copies made under this limited reproduction right shall contain this notice and any other legal notices appearing in this publication. The Customer shall be responsible for complying with U.S. export control laws with respect of distribution of all Copies. GETS and Customer agree that the information contained herein does not purport to cover all details or variations in GETS products or to provide for every possible contingency with installation, operation or maintenance. Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise that are not covered sufficiently for the user’s purposes, the matter should be referred to GETS. Any applicable Federal, State or local regulations or company safety or operating rules must take precedence over any information or instructions given in the Technical Documentation. GETS has no obligation to keep the material up to date after the original publication. GE TRANSPORTATION SYSTEMS GLOBAL SIGNALING, LLC EXPLICITLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ACCURACY, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE IN CONNECTION WITH THIS PUBLICATION AND USE THEREOF. Reproduction and Use Restrictions Agreement The information contained in this Technical Manual (the “Document”) is the property of GE Transportation Global Signaling (“GETSGS”) and is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws. Any unauthorized use or reproduction of this Document without the prior written consent of GETSGS, whether in hard copy or in an electronic form, is strictly prohibited [except as otherwise set forth below]. Notwithstanding the foregoing, GETSGS hereby grants to the purchaser of the GETSGS equipment, or licensee of the GETSGS software (such purchaser of licensee referred to herein as “You”), to which the Document pertains, the following limited reproduction rights. By reproducing any portion of the Document, You expressly agree to the following terms and conditions. You may make additional copies of the Document solely for use in connection with the GETSGS equipment or GETSGS software to which it pertains, provided that each copy is a complete copy and does not alter the content or meaning of the Document in any way, and provided further that each such copy preserves unaltered all trademark, copyright, patent designations and proprietary or confidentiality notices contained therein, including this Reproduction and Use Restrictions Agreement. Any other use or reproduction of any portion of the Document without the prior written authorization of GETSGS is expressly prohibited. Without limiting any other rights or remedies of GETSGS, in the event that You or any of Your employees, agents or contractors copies any portion of the Document in violation of this Reproduction and Use Restrictions Agreement, You agree to indemnify, defend and hold harmless GETSGS from and against any and all claims, damages, losses, liabilities and expenses (including reasonable attorney’s fees) that may be incurred or awarded by reason thereof. Revision History This document supersedes all previously issued versions, providing new or revised information. The most recent publication can be determined by comparing the last three characters at the end of the part number and the date issued. ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 System Operation and Maintenance Part Number: 100373-010 AR0 Revision Level Date Issued AA0 02/28/03 Initial Release AB0 02/01/05 Re-brand manual revise track circuit transmit and receive procedure. AC0 02/01/06 Added new modules (VLD-R16S, VIO-44R, and VIO-86S) AD0 01/16/07 Minor typographical errors fixed AE0 07/02/07 Updated ElectrologIXS CIO key Pins to remove when CIO-2A and CIO-MDA are installed in the system and also updated as per the markup’s. AF0 12/03/07 Incorporated VPM-3 module, CI-2 module and Web GUI information. AG0 04/16/08 Added CI-2 Flash Memory application download. AH0 06/16/08 Incorporated 4-Slot Chassis. AI0 09/08/08 Added BCS Protocol and description of CIO-2AB module. AJ0 12/03/08 Incorporated Connector Probing and 1-Slot Chassis. AK0 12/15/08 Incorporated Connector Probing and 4-Slot Chassis. AL0 06/01/09 Update for EDVP release of ElectroLogIXS. AM0 08/26/09 Update for EDVP 2 release of ElectroLogIXS. AN0 03/08/10 Added DHCP Server Details. AO0 05/19/10 Added EC5 Details. AP0 09/07/10 Add PTC Functionality. AQ0 07/01/11 Added PTC2, 100373-U001, 100373-U002, and 100373-U003 Updates. AR0 11/05/12 Added PTC3 Updates. General Description of Changes © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. , UCI-3 UCI-3 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. Update (Boot) Mode GUI (Recommended Method) The Update (Boot) Mode GUI is the recommended method for updating software on the VPM-3. Executive Software, Boot Software, PTC Config Files and PTC Mapping Files can all be updated from the Update (Boot) Mode GUI. For directions in using the Update (Boot) Mode GUI, please see the Update (Boot) Mode Web GUI instructions below. Web GUI 1. 2. 3. Connect to Web GUI diagnostic interface 5. Connect to VPM3 with RJ45 cable (Crossover or Straight) Open 'Local Area Network Properties', Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and click 'Properties'. Enter IP address of 192.168.1.100 and a SubNet Mask of 255.255.255.0 if using default ELX port address. Open a Browser and Enter 192.168.1.12 for Port 2 or 192.168.0.11 for Port 1 access. Default user name is 'ADMIN', Default password is 'ADMIN' * VPM3 GE Connect Software tool automates this. P/N: 203630-000 4. Executive Software Update using Update (Boot) Mode GUI 1. Prior to uploading the new VPM-3 Executive Software, ensure the values for all configurable parameters are available from the site documentation or have been recorded from the values shown on the CDU or Web GUI. 2. Place the VPM-3 in Update (Boot) Mode as follows: a. Turn off the power switch on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 b. Press and hold the PROG button on the VPM-3 c. Turn on the power switch on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 d. Release the PROG button 3. Connect the computer Ethernet RJ45 port to one of the VPM-3 Ethernet RJ45 ports, using an Ethernet cable. Note: 4. The default VPM-3 IP addresses are 192.168.0.11 for the ENET1 (upper) RJ45 port and 192.168.1.12 for the ENET2 (lower) RJ45 port. These default IP address values are the typical values used in Update (Boot) Mode. Changing the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 IP addresses from the CDU or Web GUI during normal operation does not change the IP addresses used in Update Mode. If values other than the default IP address values must be set / used in Update (Boot) mode, they may be changed using the Update Mode command line. However, the IP address used in Update (Boot) mode is not visible on the CDU, so use of the default values whenever possible is recommended. Using a Web Browser, navigate to the IP address of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 unit. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 UCI-3 UCI-3 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 SO F T W A R E A C TI V A TI O N Software Activation -- Activate Executive and PTC Mapping files 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. *(76*6+20(0(18 65[!7[ 7[5[ 67,&. ) ) 775$&.&85,17 6/27 6<67(0 &21) , * 85$7 , 21 75$&.6 /$036 SNMP Traps /$030$,17(1$1&( /,*+728767$786 /$03'5,9(567$786 75$&. 75$&. )/$6+67$786 $/7)/$6+67$786 9,7$/672367$786 75$&.75$160,77(5 75$&.5(&(,9(5 7(6702'( $/7(51$7,1*&2'( ;0,79 9 , $ 75$&.5(6 2+0 5(&(,9(, $ 5()(5(1&( 75$160,77(6702'( 7;7(6702'( 2)) $/7(51$7,1*&2'( &2'( 121$/7 6&$%2)) &$%&$%B5 /$03$63(&766 )))))))))))))))) SNMP Traps - Enable/Disable Traps /$03'(7(&7,216 )))))))))))))))) 69,7,1 7) 6&2'(6(/(&7 69,7287 7))7 6'(&2'(52876 0 $33,' © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Important Information Important Information Conventions Safety Alert Symbols The symbol indicates that important personal safety information follows. Carefully read this text for the warnings information it contains. The signal word next to each safety alert symbol is defined as: WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. This signal word may also be used to identify unsafe practices. Static Sensitive Symbols for Equipment Handling Instructions The and symbols indicate important handling guidelines established by the AREMA (American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association) for proper handling of electronic equipment modules and sensitive components for the prevention of potential damage that could be caused by ESD (electrostatic discharge) during routine maintenance, handling and transportation. Module ESD Notice To protect against ESD damage to electronic equipment containing modules, follow the field procedures in AREMA C&S Manual, Part 11.4.5. Failure to use protective measures could result in permanent equipment damage, either immediate or latent, when handling modules. Component ESD Notice To protect against ESD damage to electronic equipment containing components, follow the field procedures in AREMA C&S Manual, Part 11.4.5. Failure to use recommended protective measures could result in permanent equipment damage, either immediate or latent, when handling components. Important/Notable Information Important: Indicates an operating procedure, practice, or condition which, if not strictly followed, may cause equipment damage. Note: Indicates additional information or emphasizes a topic related to the subject being discussed. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. iii ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 General Safety Instructions WARNING No information in this manual supersedes or replaces your railroad’s operating rules. If there is a difference in instructions between this manual and the railroad’s operating rules, follow the most restrictive instruction. Only qualified personnel should work on or around this equipment. To ensure the highest degree of safety, all personnel are required to become thoroughly familiar with all personal safety instructions contained in this manual. Successful and safe operation of this equipment is dependent upon correct handling, operation, maintenance, repair, and application of associated railroad equipment. Deliberate misuse or abuse of electronic equipment and components may result in death or serious injury Do not use this equipment until you are sure the application logic is properly programmed and functionally tested. Test it according to United States DOT (Department of Transportation) FRA (Federal Railroad Administration) Code of Federal Regulation, Title 49 procedures, or other equivalent tests, as deemed necessary by other appropriate regulatory agencies. Railroad Configuration Management Procedures must ensure that all ElectroLogIXS/EC5 units are configured with the proper revisions of modules and firmware (application, PTC, and executive) and that updates are completed in a timely manner when made available by GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling. Operating with incorrect firmware may result in death or serious injury. Timely is defined as without undue delay per 49 CFR 236.1023(j). Railroad Configuration Management Procedures must ensure that the proper values are set for each vital timer, vital configuration setting (vital soft switches), PTC applicability setting, PTC debounce time, PTC WIU address, and vital remote parameter in their ElectroLogIXS/EC5 units. Incorrect settings may result in death or serious injury. Updating or modifying modules, firmware, and values (both application and executive) must be performed by qualified personnel that are physically present at the site being updated. Track circuit troubleshooting interferes with signal system operation. Always obtain proper authorization prior to performing track circuit troubleshooting. If any failure of the equipment is detected, it is the railroads responsibility to ensure the failure is reported in a timely manner. Once the failure is reported the appropriate steps must be taken to ensure the equipment is repaired or replaced promptly. Failure to report and repair unit/module in a timely fashion may result in death or serious injury. Timely is defined as without undue delay per 49 CFR 236.1023(j). Follow your railroad's operating rules while moving a locomotive with inoperative equipment or during irregular operating situations. Failure to follow your railroad’s operating rules may result in death or serious injury. iv © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Important Information FCC Compliance This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequence energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. CAUTION Modifications or changes not expressly approved by GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling could affect the compliance of the equipment with the FCC Rules and void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Foreword There are no electronic components or modules in the ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 system that can be repaired by the customer. Defective or damaged modules should be sent to GE Transportation Global Signaling, Customer Service Department, 2712 S. Dillingham Road, Grain Valley, MO 64029-0600. Technical Support GE Transportation Global Signaling will accept telephone calls between 7:30 AM and 5:30 PM CST. Call TOLL FREE (800) 825-7090 regarding installation, maintenance, calibration, adjustment, or repair of any components. Scope GE Transportation Global Signaling, Technical Information Department under the direction of the designated equipment Product Manager, issues this document. The manual introduces you to the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 by providing specific information related to Installation, Maintenance, Troubleshooting, CDU Program, Web Graphical User Interface, Terminal Program, Retest Guide, Specifications and Appendix A – Ethernet / IP Application Guidelines. Please read carefully and thoroughly understand the instructions and processes before making any adjustments or modifications to the equipment. Carelessness may result in loss of life or property damage. How to Order an Additional Copy or a Revised Printing Additional copies of this document may be ordered by directing all correspondence to GE Transportation Global Signaling, Customer Service Department, 2712 S. Dillingham Road, Grain Valley, MO 64029-0600 or calling (800) 825-7090 or by FAX (816) 650-9501. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. v ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 vi © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Important Information Contents Volume One Chapter 1 – Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Chapter 2 – Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Chapter 3 – Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Chapter 4 – Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Chapter 5 – CDU Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Volume Two Chapter 6 – Web Graphical User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Chapter 7 – Terminal Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Chapter 8 – Secure Shell Program (SSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Chapter 9 – ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Retest Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 Chapter 10 – Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Appendix A – Ethernet / IP Application Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix A-1 Appendix B – Network ID Usage Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-1 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. vii ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 viii © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction Chapter 1 – Introduction Contents Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 ElectroLogIXS/EC5 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 ElectroLogIXS Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 ElectroLogIXS Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 EC5 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 EC5 Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 ElectroLogIXS General Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 EC5 General Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Track Circuit Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Train Control Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Event 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Event 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Event 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Event 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Event 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 1-11 1-12 1-12 1-12 1-12 1-12 Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Track Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Freight Code Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Vital Code Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Code 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Code 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alternating Code 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-Alternating Code 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard (Short) Code 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Long Code 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Smart Code 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 1-16 1-16 1-16 1-16 1-16 Code M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Vital Remote Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Positive Train Control EMP Class D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 VPM-2/VPM-2+ Vital Peripheral Master Module P/N: 251395-000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Diagram Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPU A and CPU B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPU C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/O Module Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CI Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-20 1-21 1-21 1-21 1-21 1-21 1-i ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 CDU Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CIO Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ElectroLogIXS/EC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recorder Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 1-22 1-22 1-22 1-22 1-22 1-22 1-23 VPM-3 Vital Peripheral Master Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Diagram Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPU A and CPU B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPU C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/O Module Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CI Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CDU Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CIO Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ElectroLogIXS/EC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ethernet Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recorder Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 1-24 1-25 1-25 1-25 1-25 1-25 1-25 1-25 1-25 1-26 1-26 1-26 1-26 CPS-1 Central Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Diagram Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Surge Protection and Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC/DC Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Converter Run Enable and Soft Start Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Undervoltage Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28 1-28 1-28 1-28 1-28 1-29 CPS-2 Central Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Diagram Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Surge Protection and Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC/DC Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Converter Run Enable and Soft Start Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Undervoltage Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30 1-30 1-30 1-30 1-30 1-31 CPS-3 Central Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Diagram Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Surge Protection and Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC/DC Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Converter Run Enable and Soft Start Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Undervoltage Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32 1-32 1-32 1-32 1-32 1-33 CI-1 Chassis Information Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34 Block Diagram Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34 Application EPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34 CI-2 Chassis Information Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35 Block Diagram Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35 Application EPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35 UCl-3 Universal Chassis Information Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36 Block Diagram Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36 Application EPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37 CDU-1 Control Display Unit P/N: 251124-000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38 Block Diagram Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38 RS232 Interface Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38 1-ii © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38 1-38 1-38 1-39 GFD-1 Ground Fault Detector-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Diagram Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery Input Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40 1-40 1-40 1-40 1-41 1-42 Communications Input/Output Module - 1/1A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Diagram Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optocouplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RS232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolated Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Office Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42 1-43 1-43 1-43 1-43 1-43 1-44 1-45 1-45 Communications Input/Output Module - 2/2A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Diagram Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optocouplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RS232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolated Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46 1-46 1-46 1-46 1-46 1-46 1-47 1-48 Communications Input/Output Module - MD/MDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Diagram Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optocouplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RS485 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolated Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vital Data Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49 1-49 1-49 1-49 1-49 1-49 1-50 1-51 CIO-2AB Communications Input/Output P/N: 251467-000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optocouplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RS232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolated Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52 1-52 1-52 1-52 1-52 1-52 1-53 1-54 CIO-3 Communications Input/Output Module-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Diagram Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optocouplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RS232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolated Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55 1-55 1-55 1-55 1-55 1-55 1-56 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-iii ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Data Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57 CIO-3 Connector Keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58 Communications Input/Output Module - CLA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Diagram Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optocouplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RS232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLA Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolated Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LCP Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-59 1-59 1-59 1-59 1-59 1-60 1-60 1-61 1-62 1-62 Communications Input/Output Module - PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Diagram Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optocouplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protocol Converter CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RS232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolated Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CIO-PCA Specific ElectroLogIXS Platform Configuration ............................. CIO-PCA First Time Installation ................................................ 1-63 1-64 1-64 1-64 1-64 1-64 1-64 1-65 1-65 1-66 1-68 1-69 VTI-2S Vital Track Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Diagram Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolated DC/DC Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Signal Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cab Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-74 1-74 1-74 1-74 1-74 1-74 1-75 TIP-2 Track Inductor Panel P/N: 800-096000-011 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Diagram Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TSS-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cab Signal Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-76 1-76 1-76 1-76 1-77 1-77 VLD-C6S Vital Lamp Driver Module P/N: 251125-000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filament Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feedback Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Diagram Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolated DC/DC Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp Output Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-Vital Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-78 1-78 1-78 1-79 1-79 1-79 1-79 1-80 VLD-R16S Vital Lamp Driver Module P/N 251381-000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-81 Block Diagram Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-81 Lamp Power Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82 1-iv © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction Lamp Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VSSR Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filament Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feedback Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82 1-82 1-82 1-83 1-83 1-84 VIO-1010S Track Code Select Input / Track Code Decoder Output Module P/N: 251132-000 . . . . Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Diagram Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Track Code Select Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signature Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signature Decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolated DC/DC Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Track Code Decoder Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-85 1-85 1-85 1-85 1-85 1-85 1-86 1-86 1-86 1-86 1-86 1-86 1-87 VIO-44S Vital Input/Output Module P/N: 251134-000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Diagram Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolated DC/DC Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signature Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signature Decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-88 1-88 1-88 1-88 1-88 1-89 1-89 1-89 1-90 VIO-44R Vital Input/Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolated DC/DC Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signature Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signature Decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slow Release/Slow Pick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-91 1-91 1-91 1-91 1-91 1-91 1-91 1-91 VIO-86S Vital Input/Output Module P/N 251380-000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolated DC/DC Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signature Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signature Decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slow Release/Slow Pick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-93 1-93 1-93 1-93 1-93 1-93 1-93 1-93 CAB-16S Cab Enable Output Module P/N: 251334-000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Diagram Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cab Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-95 1-95 1-95 1-96 ElectroLogIXS Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-97 CI, Power Switch, and Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-99 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-v ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 VTI-2S Personality Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VTI-2S Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Track Interface Connector - J3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cab and Vital Input Connector - J4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-100 1-101 1-101 1-101 VLD-C6S Personality Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VLD-C6S Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp Connector - J3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-Vital I/O and Battery Connector - J4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-102 1-103 1-103 1-103 VLD-R16S Personality Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-104 VLD-R16S Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-105 VIO-44S Personality Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIO-44S Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vital Output Connector - J3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vital Input Connector - J4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-106 1-107 1-107 1-107 VIO-44R Personality Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIO-44R Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vital Input Connector -J3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vital Output Connector - J4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-108 1-109 1-109 1-109 VIO-86S Personality Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIO-86S Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vital Input Connector -J3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vital Input/Output Connector - J4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vital Output Connector - J5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-110 1-111 1-111 1-111 1-112 VIO-1010S Personality Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIO-1010S Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Code Output Connector - J3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Code Input Connector - J4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-113 1-114 1-114 1-114 CAB-16S Personality Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAB-16S Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cab 1-8 Output Connector - J3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cab 9-16 Output Connector - J4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-115 1-116 1-116 1-116 EC5 Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chassis ID Dip shunt pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EEPROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backplane (BP-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BP-1 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/O Slot 1 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/O Slot 2 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/O Slot 3 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/O Slot 4 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backplane (BP-2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BP-2 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/O Slot 1 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/O Slot 2 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-117 1-117 1-117 1-117 1-117 1-118 1-118 1-119 1-120 1-121 1-122 1-123 1-124 1-125 1-126 1-127 1-vi © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction I/O Slot 3 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-128 I/O Slot 4 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-129 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-vii ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 1-viii © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction Chapter 1 – Introduction Introduction This manual contains information describing the components of an ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 system. Included in this manual are introduction (including theory of operation), installation, module description, and specification information for the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. For information regarding system software setup, refer to Chapter 5 - CDU Program or Volume Two, Chapter 6 - Web Graphical User Interface. The ElectroLogIXS XP4 used for railroad crossing applications is covered in its own manual part number 100323-010. ElectroLogIXS/EC5 General Description The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 product family is compatible with EC4 (Electro Code 4), and Electro Code 4-Plus train control systems. The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 is modular in design and can be configured to support a wide range of applications. Capabilities of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 include: ground fault detection, train detection, broken rail detection, light out protection, approach lighting control, AC (Alternating Current) power off detection, cab signal output control, vital two-wire inputs for track switch controller protection, and HR relay drives for release of electric locked switches. ElectroLogIXS/EC5 at each end of a control block send and receive coded pulses through the tracks. DC track circuits are used to inject and extract coded pulses on and off the tracks. Using the tracks as conductors, makes it possible to detect trains (tracks shunted), provide broken rail protection, and eliminate the need for external line wires. The coded pulses are used to establish a hand shaking protocol between ElectroLogIXS/EC5 and allow synchronization between ElectroLogIXS/EC5 systems to alternately send and receive data in both directions. Both hardware protection and software detection schemes are employed to ensure fail-safe communications and system signaling. Adjacent control blocks are powered with reverse polarity current, to prevent code detection from an adjacent block. Synchronizing and decoding coded pulses, provides the vital information required to operate the system signal. The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 determines train presence by detecting the absence of track codes (tracks shunted), and maintains space between trains so that adequate stopping distance is ensured and conflicting traffic routes are positively avoided. Train control is achieved primarily through sequential control and illumination of track-side aspects. Positive train control can be achieved by adding cab signal capability to the system, or a messaging interface that complies with the Interoperable Train Control (ITC) Wayside Interface Unit (WIU) Requirements. Inputs to the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 include coded signals from track circuits, inputs from relay contacts or other solid-state devices with digital outputs. The inputs are read in a fail-safe manner, and are processed by multiple microprocessors in a vital manner to provide fail-safe control outputs. The outputs consist of track codes, lamp driver signals, cab signal enables, and vital DC device drive voltages. Ethernet ports and serial I/O ports allow the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 to communicate with other Positive Train Control ITC compliant nodes, ElectroLogIXS, EC5, or VHLC systems. The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 has a built in recorder that logs time-stamped vital and non-vital events as well as state changes and failures. All recorded events are user printable both track-side and in the office. A set of resident diagnostic programs provide the tools necessary to perform system trouble analysis and repair. The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 has provisions for expansion to add radio signaling capabilities, and to operate remotely via a serial data port and either of two Ethernet ports. The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 consists of a chassis, motherboard, plug in modules, a CDU-1 (Control Display Unit) and Personality modules with terminal blocks for hard wiring the system to external relays, hazard detectors, and signal aspects. All modules have front panel indicators that display module health status, and function indicators for monitoring active I/O signals. Parameter setup and modification can be performed via the VPM-3 Web Graphical User Interface (Web GUI) or via the CDU-1. The Web GUI is operated by a separate computer / PDA device running an Internet Explorer (or compatible) web browser. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-1 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 ElectroLogIXS Physical Description The ElectroLogIXS may be received as a separate assembly or as part of a pre-assembled rack. It is designed for mounting in a standard 19-inch rack, wall mounting, or installation on a shelf. Operating power is supplied from a standard 12 volt battery. The battery terminals are conveniently located in the upper right corner of the 9-Slot ElectroLogIXS chassis, and are labeled N (negative) and B (battery positive). The battery terminals are located in the upper left section of the 1-Slot and 4-Shot Chassis. The ElectroLogIXS is available in 9-slot, 4-slot or 1-slot configurations, providing flexibility and scalability depending on the application. Each configurations support the same number of system modules, but have the capability for nine (9) I/O modules (9-slot), four (4) I/O modules (4-Slot), one (1) I/O module (1-Slot) respectively. When using a VPM-2+ processor with the ElectroLogIXS 4-slot chassis, it must be hardware revision DAO or later. An ElectroLogIXS system consists of a chassis assembly with plug-in modules. The system (small) card slots are dedicated for the Central Power Supply (CPS-2 or CPS-3), Vital Peripheral Master (VPM-2+ or VPM-3) Module, GFD-1 (Ground Fault Detector), CIO-1A (Communication Input/Out) Module and the CIO-CLA Module. Two additional slots are available and each will accommodate a CIO-2A, CIO-2AB, CIO-MDA or CIO-PCA module. The Chassis Information Module (CI-1, CI-2 or UCI-3) is located in the lower right section of the 9-Slot Chassis and the upper left section of the 1-Slot and 4-Slot Chassis. The larger I/O module slots may have the following modules installed: VLD-C6S (Vital Lamp Driver), VLD-R16S (Vital Lamp Driver), VTI-2S (Vital Track Interface), VIO-1010S (Track Code Select Input /Track Code Decoder Output), VIO-44S (Vital Input/Output), VIO-44R, VIO-86S or CAB-16S (Cab Enable Output). Personality modules are installed in the upper portion of the I/O slots. The personality module installed in a slot will depend on the I/O modules installed in the chassis. ElectroLogIXS Chassis The open-frame ElectroLogIXS chassis allows easy access to all modules and plug in connections. Mounted in the back of the chassis is a one piece backplane that provides interconnections to all the modules of the ElectroLogIXS system. Personality modules (Figure 1-3) attach to the backplane and connect the modules to the field wiring. Quick disconnect clips secure modules to the chassis and all personality module connectors are keyed to insure that modules are placed into the correct slot. In addition, the personality module field wiring connectors are keyed. I/O module slots can include: • XTI-1S modules • VIO-44S modules • VIO-44R modules • IXC-20S modules • VTI-1S modules • VIO-1010S modules • VIO-86S modules • VLD-C6S modules • VLD-R16S modules • CAB-16S modules System module slots can include: 1-2 Figure 1-1, ElectroLogIXS VLC 9-Slot with Modules. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction System module slots can include: • • • • • • • • CPS-2 or CPS-3 module NSM-1 module VPM-2+ or VPM-3 module GFD-1 module CIO-1A module, CIO-CLA module CIO-2A module, CIO-2AB module CIO-MDA module CIO-PCA module 323-PH01a Figure 1-1a, ElectroLogIXS VLC 4-Slot. Figure 1-2, Lower Row of Modules with CDU-1 Detached 100373-010 AR0 Figure 1-1b, ElectroLogIXS VLC 1-Slot. Figure 1-3, Installed Personality Module © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-3 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 or UCI-3 CIO-2A OR CIO-2A OR GFD-1 CIO-1A OR CIO-PCA OR CIO-PCA OR SLOT CIO-CLA CIO-MDA SLOT CIO-MDA SLOT Figure 1-3a, ElectroLogIXS VLC 9-slot chassis (P/N 300752-000) CI or UCI-3 ON/OFF MODULE SWITCH CHASSIS CPS SLOT PERSONALITY MODULES (MAXIMUM OF 4) NSM-1 SLOT SLOT 4 VPM SLOT BACKPLANE GFD-1 SLOT CIO-1A or CIO-CLA SLOT CIO-2A OR CIO-PCA OR CIO-MDA SLOT SLOT 1 CIO-2A OR CIO-PCA OR CIO-MDA SLOT Figure 1-3b, ElectroLogIXS VLC 4-slot chassis (P/N 251464-000) 1-4 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction ON/OFF SWITCH CI or UCI-3 MODULE CHASSIS PERSONALITY MODULES CIO-1A or CIO-CLA SLOT CIO-2A OR CIO-PCA OR CIO-MDA SLOT CIO-2A OR CIO-PCA OR CIO-MDA SLOT BACKPLANE SLOT 1 VPM SLOT CPS-3 GFD-1 Figure 1-3c, ElectroLogIXS VLC 1-slot chassis (P/N 251473-000) EC5 Physical Description The EC5 may be received as a separate assembly or as part of preassembled rack. It is designed for mounting in a standard 19-inch rack, wall mounting, or installation on a shelf. Operating power is supplied from a standard 12 volt battery. The battery terminals are conveniently located in the upper left corner of the EC5 motherboard, and are labeled N (negative) and B (battery positive). The EC5 consists of a chassis assembly and several plug-in modules. The left side of the chassis contains four card slots that are dedicated for the Central Power Supply (CPS-1), Vital Peripheral Master (VPM-2+ or VPM-3) Module, Chassis Information (CI-1, CI-2 or UCI-3) Module, and the Communication Input/Out (CIO-1 or CIO-CLA) Module. One additional slot is available and it will accommodate a CIO-2, CIO-3, CIO-MDA module. The right side of the chassis has four module I/O slots. The following modules may be installed in the I/O slots: VLD-C6S (Vital Lamp Driver), VTI-2S (Vital Track Interface), VIO-1010S (Track Code Select Input /Track Code Decoder Output), or VIO-44S (Vital Input/Output). Up to two slots may be used for VLD-C6S or VIO-1010S Modules, depending on the application. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-5 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 EC5 Chassis Figure 1-3d, EC5 Chassis The open-frame EC5 chassis allows easy access to all of the modules and plug in connections. Mounted in the back of the chassis is a one-piece backplane that provides interconnections to all of the modules of the EC5 system. Quick disconnect clips secure modules to the chassis and all connectors are keyed to insure that modules are placed into the correct slot. Global Signaling Global Signaling Figure 1-3e, EC5 Colorlight Backplane (BP-1) 1-6 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction Global Signaling Global Signaling Figure 1-3f, EC5 Endbox Backplane (BP-2) 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-7 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 ElectroLogIXS General Block Diagram The ElectroLogIXS System Block Diagram in Figure 1-4 shows how the ElectroLogIXS modules interconnect, and the main inputs and outputs. Notice how all the modules are connected to and controlled by the VPM. Brief descriptions of the modules are provided later in this chapter. Dashed lines indicate optional modules whose use is dependent upon ElectroLogIXS system configuration. Note: Optional modules are denoted by dashed lines. Figure 1-4, ElectroLogIXS System Block Diagram 1-8 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction EC5 General Block Diagram The EC5 System Block Diagram in Figure 1-4a shows how the EC5 modules interconnect, and the main inputs and outputs. Notice how all the modules are connected to and controlled by the VPM. Brief descriptions of the modules follow. Refer to the individual module descriptions, in this section, for more detailed information of the modules. CDU-1 Display Key Pad VPM CI-1/CI-2/UCI-3 CPS-1 CIO-1/CIO-CLA SLOT 1 CIO-PCA CIO SLOT 2 Application Equations Battery Diagnostic Port Office Port (LCP Port for CIO-CLA) Office Port CIO-2 CIO-3 CIO-MD I/O SLOT 1 VT1-2S Battery Monitor TIP-2 Track I/O Vital two-wire Inputs Cab Outputs I/O SLOT 2 VLD-C6S VIO-1010S I/O SLOT 3 VLD-C6S VIO-1010S I/O SLOT 4 VIO-44S Figure 1-4a, EC5 System Block Diagram 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-9 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Theory of Operation The Electro Code is a DC track circuit coded at each end to control block signals. It is similar to a coded relay track circuit with bi-directional coding synchronized to work in both directions continuously. It operates without line wires, using fail-safe electronic circuits and microprocessor logic to send and receive track code pulses. Secure operation is obtained through the use of codes and polarity of the track currents. Synchronizing and decoding code pulses applied to the rails provides vital track information required to operate the signal system. Codes are transmitted through the rails between signals, making it possible to detect a train and provide broken rail protection. Electro Code uses a synchronizing technique to effect two-way control of signals. The receiver responds to DC currents like a code following track relay. The polarity and level of current must be correct before the receiver will respond. Triple microprocessors are the heart of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 signaling system. Input signals from track 1 and track 2 are interpreted by microprocessors on the VPM (Vital Peripheral Master) Module. The VPM controls all bi-directional system logic functions. The VPM controls the track code transmitted on the rails, the lamp drive voltages, and vital outputs. DC/DC converters provide isolated drive voltages for the signal lamps and auxiliary devices. Track Circuit Theory A track circuit is a section of rails used to detect the local presence of a train and also a broken rail. An electric signal is placed on the rails at one end of the track circuit, passes through the rails as the physical conductor, and is detected at the other end of the track circuit. A train on the track shorts out the conductors (rails) indicating train presence. Similarly, the track circuit detects a broken rail if the conductor is broken between the ends of the circuit. Track circuits are separated from each other by insulated joints, which insulate the adjacent sections of rails. The length of each track circuit is typically determined by the braking distance of the heaviest train that could possibly travel on the track, when it is moving at its highest possible speed. The detection of occupancy in sequential track circuits provide control information for trains moving on these sections. When the signal is not received through the rails, the track circuit is considered occupied. Occupied track circuit sections send signals to adjacent track circuits to prevent train movement into them and provide a slow approach to them by an oncoming train. 1-10 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction Train Control Example We will now go through an example of how the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 is used to control trains that follow one another between control points. The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 allows the fastest safe train speed while it maintains safe following distances between trains. The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 (with associated wayside equipment) forms an integrated train control and signal system. DC Track codes are transmitted through the tracks. They send and receive status information and aspect control signals (track codes). Status information includes train presence and location, track circuit integrity (broken rail detection), block occupancy, and maintenance information, such as a light out. With respect to railroad signaling: • aspect = what the signal displays (red, yellow, green). • indication = what the aspect means (its definition). • name = what you call the aspect. For our example, Table 1-1 defines the aspects: Table 1-1 Aspect Definitions Indication Aspect Name Proceed at maximum authorized speed Green Proceed (Clear) Proceed, prepared to stop at next signal Yellow Approach Proceed, prepared to stop at the second signal ahead Flashing Yellow Advance Approach Stop Red Stop Figure 1-5 shows an example with four rail blocks and two trains. Figure 1-5, ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Train Control Example. This example shows how the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 is used to close the distance between the trains to a minimum safe distance of two blocks. This increases traffic flow and corridor capacity. The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 at all locations are synchronized and there is a constant hand-shake protocol through the rails using electro code track codes. The example below follows Train 1 and Train 2 through different “conditions” and shows how the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 controls the trains. The system will always maintain a safety distance behind the train. This safety distance is a one block with a yellow aspect, followed by a one block with a red aspect. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-11 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Event 1 • • • • • Train 2 is stopped in Block 4. Train 1 approaches Block 1 at the corridor’s maximum safe speed. There are no trains in Blocks 1 through 3. The aspect at Block 1 is green. The aspects at Blocks 2, 3, and 4 are flashing yellow, yellow, and red, respectively. Event 2 • • Train 1 enters Block 1. The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 at Block 1 sets the aspect behind Train 1 to red. Event 3 • • • Train 1 enters Block 2 at a speed prepared to stop at the second signal ahead. The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 at Block 2 sets the aspect at Block 2 to red. The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 at Block 1 sets the aspect to yellow. Event 4 • • • • Train 1 enters Block 3 at a speed prepared to stop at the next signal. The aspect at Block 3 is set to red. The aspect at Block 2 is set to yellow. The aspect at Block 1 is set to flashing yellow. Event 5 • • Train 1 arrives at Block 4. Train 1 stops before passing the red aspect. Note: 1-12 If Train 2 were not stopped, but was traveling at maximum authorized speed, the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 behind Train 2 would maintain a safe distance behind Train 2 of three blocks, one flashing yellow aspect block, one yellow aspect block and one red aspect block. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction Timing The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system uses a synchronizing technique for two-way communications. Transmitted code pulses are approximately 112 ms (milliseconds) long and are repeated every 2.8 seconds (for freight). In a typical track circuit, the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 transmission cycle at one end is offset 1.4 seconds from the transmit cycle at the opposite end. One transmit/receive cycle is completed every 2.8 seconds. Figure 1-6, Control Timing Diagram. Figure 1-7, Alternating Control Code Timing Diagram 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-13 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Track Codes The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 signaling system employs a DC transmitter and receiver at each end of a railroad block to transmit and receive track code pulses. Electro Code uses time division multiplexing in order to send track codes bi-directionally on the rails between two locations. This scheme has the advantage of operating without the need for line wires between track joints that other systems have historically used. ElectroLogIXS/EC5 code rates are directly track compatible with the same code rates of Electro Code II, III, 4, Electro Logic 1, and VHLC (Vital Harmon Logic Controller) products. The track codes contain vital and non-vital data used by the signaling system to control and monitor for train presence, track circuit integrity (broken rail), and aspect setting and status of distant signals. Loss of track codes indicate train presence, broken rails, and convey vital aspect data used to activate wayside signal equipment. Non-vital track codes convey non-vital information such as failed AC power, track occupancy information, and other conditions that require maintenance action. Tracks codes have inherent timing characteristics that represent vital and non-vital functions. The reverse polarity employed at insulated joints prevents adjacent blocks from inadvertently detecting codes on adjacent rails in the event of insulated joint failure. Each track code performs a specific task in the signal control system. Ten track code rates are used to send information between Electro Code signal locations. Freight Code Rates Most freight code pulses are approximately 112 ms wide with the following exceptions: Code 5 Code 6 refer to Code 5 in this chapter 600 ms pulse width Vital Code Rates Vital codes are defined by a two pulse transmission in a transmit cycle window. The vital code rate is calculated from the leading edge of the first pulse to the leading edge of the second pulse. WARNING 1-14 Certain track equipment may create waveforms that can mimic single pulse track codes (e.g. code 1 or code 5). Single pulse track code receive statuses MUST NOT be used for vital functions (where the track code receive status allows a permissive action or condition). © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction *Inclusion of code 1 in this diagram does not indicate it is a vital code but is shown for timing reference. Figure 1-8, ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Vital Code Examples. Code 1 Code 1 is used as the first pulse or the synchronizing pulse of the Electro Code, and it is typically used for three functions: 1. 2. 3. The leading edge of Code 1 is used to synchronize the turn on time of the return code pulses from the opposite end of the track circuit. Timing of control code values is measured from the leading edge of the first pulse (Code 1) to the leading edge of the second pulse (Codes 7, 4, 3, 2, 9, or 8) as shown in Figure 1-8. The first pulse is called Code 1 and can be used to provide non-vital track circuit status or in conjunction with another vital code (e.g. Code 1 + Code 8) to provide block occupancy status. Width: 115 ms Rides on: 1 pulse per code cycle Code 5 Code 5 is typically used for non-vital block indication in all applications. There are two types of code 5 available: alternating code 5, and non-alternating code 5. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-15 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Alternating Code 5 Alternating code 5 is recommended for new EC4, EC5, and ElectroLogIXS applications. It is suitable for long or short track circuits and all track conditions. Code 5 is transmitted with every other transmit cycle. Alternating code 5 has the following specifications: Width Rides on 225 ms 1 pulse per code cycle - every other code cycle Non-Alternating Code 5 Non-Alternating code 5 is used to be compatible with older Electro Code applications; Electro Code II and III. Non-Alternating code 5 is compatible with the following older code 5 rates: Standard (Short) code 5, Long code 5, and Smart code 5. Non-alternating code 5 in ElectroLogIXS/EC5 is somewhat similar to EC4 and EC5's smart code 5. Non-alternating code 5 is adaptive to decode standard and long code 5 sent by other Electro Code transmitters. Non-alternating code 5 transmits a 350 ms pulse with every code cycle. Standard (Short) Code 5 Standard code 5 is typically used with Electro Code II and III applications. Standard code 5 has the following specifications: Width Rides on 225 ms 1 pulse per code cycle Long Code 5 Long code 5 is used for Electro Code 4 applications and is more robust than short code 5. Long code 5 has the following specifications: Width Rides on 350 ms 1 pulse per code cycle Smart Code 5 Smart code 5 is used with a mixture of Electro Code II, III, and Electro Code 4 applications. The purpose of smart code 5 is to interface applications using both standard and long code 5. Smart code 5 will receive either standard or long code 5, but only transmits long code 5. Smart code 5 has the following specifications: Width Rides on 350 ms 1 pulse per code cycle Code M Code M is a maintenance code similar in nature to the alternating code 5. Its purpose is to convey non-vital maintenance data over track circuits to head block locations. Code M, like alternating code 5, is transmitted every other cycle Width Rides on 1-16 Code 1 + Code M 350 ms Code 1 + Code 5 + Code M 304 ms 1 pulse per code cycle - every other code cycle © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction Figure 1-9, ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Standard Code 5 Timing Diagram 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-17 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Figure 1-10, Long Code 5 Timing Diagram 1-18 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction Figure 1-11, Alternating Code 5 Timing Diagram 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-19 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Vital Remote Protocols WARNING Serial to Ethernet converters allow for messages to be buffered. This buffering could allow messages to be transmitted out of sequence and incorrectly received if the Vital Remote protocol is set to "RP2000 w/ RP1992 Fallback". Therefore, it is necessary that the Vital Remote protocol be set to "RP2000 Only" or "RP2009" for an application whose vital communications employ serial to Ethernet conversion. RP2000 In this mode the controller will communicate with the remote unit using RP2000. RP2000 messages are sent continually whether or not the message contents have changed. RP2000 can be used on serial point-to-point connections, serial multi-drop connections, serial-to-Ethernet connections, direct Ethernet connections, and Radio links. RP2000 with RP1992 Fallback In this mode the controller will start remote communications using the RP2000 protocol. If it detects that the remote unit is communicating using the RP1992 protocol, the controller will switch to the RP1992 protocol to enable it to communicate with the remote unit. RP1992 can only be used over hard-wired point to point networks where it is impossible for remote messages to be received out of order. RP2009 In this mode the controller will communicate with the remote unit using RP2009. When using RP2009, messages are not sent continually. Rather, messages are only sent when: 1) the message contents changes, 2) a Heartbeat Message Interval (HMI) time has elapsed since the last message was sent, or 3) in acknowledgement of receiving a message from a remote device. RP2009 can be used on serial connections, serial-to-Ethernet connections, direct Ethernet connections, and Radio links. RP2009 does not support serial multi-drop connections. Positive Train Control EMP Class D In this mode the controller will communicate with other PTC enabled nodes to receive Locomotive Request messages and send PTC mapped Wayside Interface Unit (WIU) statuses. VPM-2/VPM-2+ Vital Peripheral Master Module VPM-2: P/N: 251135-000 VPM-2+: P/N: 251395-000 The VPM-2/VPM-2+ is a microprocessor-based module comprised of three CPUs (A, B, and C) that control the operation of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system. The VPM-2/VPM-2+ contains ElectroLogIXS/EC5 executive software that is common to all VPM-2/VPM-2+ based ElectroLogIXS/EC5 products. The VPM-2/VPM-2+ is responsible for downloading the application EPROM and running the application vitally along with maintaining system safety checks and providing diagnostic features. 1-20 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction Block Diagram Theory (CI) or UCI-3 CI or UCI-3 INTERFACE Figure1-12, VPM-2/VPM-2+ Block Diagram. CPU A and CPU B CPU A and CPU B are responsible for the system’s vital application logic processing, communication, and control of the installed ElectroLogIXS/EC5 I/O modules, and the continual performance of the system safety checks. User supplied configuration information such as track and lamp settings, vital configuration settings, etc. are used by CPU A and CPU B during application program execution and are vitally stored in non-volatile memory on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 backplane. All modules, with the exception of the CI and backplane modules may be replaced without loss of the system configuration information. CPU C CPU C is the processor primarily responsible for the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system diagnostics and user interface. CPU C provides the communication control interface for the CDU-1, CI or UCI-3, and CIOModules. CPU C also maintains system wide, non-volatile diagnostic logging in the Error, Recorder, Communication, and Configuration logs. The non-vital configuration settings, such as baud rates, port settings, etc. are maintained by CPU C and are stored in non-volatile memory on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 backplane. I/O Module Interface The VPM-2/VPM-2+ contains an interface by which the CPU A and CPU B can communicate with all of the I/O modules. The VPM-2/VPM-2+ acts as a master while all of the I/O modules in the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 product family act as slave modules. CI or UCI-3 Interface The CI or UCI-3 Interface is the means by which the VPM-2/VPM-2+ ret rieves the applicatio n program from the CI or UCI-3 module. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-21 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 CDU Interface The CDU-1 connector on the front of the VPM-2/VPM-2+ (see Figure 1-13) provides the communication path between the CPU C and the CDU-1. CIO Interface ElectroLogIXS/EC5 The CIO Interface is used for communication between CPU C and the CIO Modules (CIO-1/CIO-1A, CIO-CLA, CIO-2/CIO-2A, CIO-2AB, CIO-3, CIO-MD/CIO-MDA, CIO-PCA) that are present in the system. The CIO Interface shown on the VPM provides a generic connection to the CIO Modules, where the specific CIO Module converts the signals into a specific electrical interface such as RS-232, RS-485, RS-422 and current loop. Note: Not all modules are available for various configurations of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Error Log The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Error Log captures error / system event information when a detected error / event occurs. The Error Log entries indicate the date and time of the event, the processor that declared the error / event and a description of the error / event. The VPM-2/VPM-2+ is capable of storing up to 1,000 Error Log entries. Recorder Log The Recorder Log captures the state / state change of application statuses as indicated in the application program defined by the application design engineer. To have the values of a particular status recorded in the Recorder Log, the application engineer must, while programming the application in the GETS-GS ACE: • Give a name to the status to be recorded. • Indicate that the named status is to be recorded, and • Use the status in an equation. A named status that is indicated in the application program as a recorded status has its value logged in the Recorder Log each time the status changes state. The VPM2+ Recorder Log is sized to provide 5,000 entries of up to 440 recorded statuses with a log entry indicating name of the status, the current state of the status and the time / date that the status was set to the indicated state. Configuration Log The Configuration Log captures parameter / configuration setting changes as they are made to the system configuration information used by the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system. Examples of the configuration information are track settings, lamp settings, vital configuration settings, and vital timer settings. When parameters such as these are changed, CPU C captures the change and the date / time of the change in the Configuration Log. The VPM-2/VPM-2+ Configuration Log is sized to capture the most recent 500 Configuration change events. Memory Battery The VPM-2+ has an internal battery for retaining the stored data logs in the absence of power to the VPM2/VPM-2+. The VPM-2/VPM-2+ also has a LOW MEMORY BATTERY indicator for denoting when the internal battery is nearing its end of life. When the battery voltage is low the LED will illuminate. 1-22 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction LEDs The VPM-2/VPM-2+ has three LED indicators for the three different CPUs, A, B, and C. The indicators are for diagnostic purposes only. There are three possible states for the indicator and their definitions are: OFF – ON – FLASHING – the CPU is not functioning. the CPU is initializing (only valid status during startup). If continuously illuminated during normal operation, the CPU is not functioning. the CPU is running normally. B A C G D F E 373-PH14 Figure 1-13, VPM-2 A B C D E F G Processor A LED: Processor B LED: Processor C LED: CDU Connector: Low Memory Battery LED: Diagnostic connector: PROG switch: Is flashing when Processor A is active and functioning normally. Is flashing when Processor B is active and functioning normally. Is flashing when Processor C is active and functioning normally. Modular connector used for CDU interface. Is lit when the log memory battery is low Serial interface connector used for the Diagnostic Terminal A switch, when depressed during a power cycle, places the VPM-2/VPM-2+ in a state to accept a new executive program. VPM-3 Vital Peripheral Master Module P/N 251432-XXX The VPM-3 is a microprocessor-based module comprised of three CPUs (A, B, and C) that control the operation of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system. The VPM-3 contains ElectroLogIXS/EC5 executive software that is common to all VPM-3 based ElectroLogIXS/EC5 VLC and EC5 products. The VPM-3 is responsible for downloading the selected vital and non-vital applications from the CI module and running these applications along with maintaining system safety checks and providing diagnostic features. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-23 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 The last 3 digits of the P/N specify the VPM-3 Executive software: 251432-050 No Software Loaded 251432-100 Interlocking 251432-200 Crossing 251432-300 Combine Interlocking & Crossing The following table lists the modules that operate in each executive type. XCI-1 XCI-2 Interlocking * * Crossing * * * * Combine Interlocking & Crossing CI-1 Note: CI-2 UCI-3 GFD-1 NSM-1 CIO-1/ CIO-1A CIO-CLA CIO-2/ CIO-2A CIO-3** CIO-MD/ CIO-2AB CIO-MDA CIO-PCA XTI-1S IXC-20S VIO-44R VIO-44S VIO-86S VTI-2S CAB-16S VIO-1010S VLD-C6S *If a XTI-1S is used in the application, the UCI-3, XCI-1 or XCI-2 must be used instead of CI-1 or CI-2 **EC-5 Module Only-2. Block Diagram Theory (CI) or UCI-3 CI or UCI-3 INTERFACE Figure 1-14, VPM-3 Block Diagram. 1-24 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 VLD-R16S Introduction CPU A and CPU B CPU A and CPU B are responsible for the system’s vital application logic processing, communication and control of the installed ElectroLogIXS/EC5 I/O modules, and the continual performance of the system safety checks. User supplied configuration information are used by CPU A and CPU B during application program execution and are vitally stored in non-volatile memory on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 backplane. All modules, with the exception of the CI and backplane modules may be replaced without loss of the system configuration information. CPU C CPU C is the processor responsible for the non-vital application logic processing and is the processor primarily responsible for the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system diagnostics and user interfaces. CPU C provides the communication control interface for the CDU-1, CI, and CIO Modules along with the two Ethernet interfaces. CPU C also maintains system-wide, non-volatile diagnostic logging in the Error, Recorder, Communication, and Configuration logs. The non-vital configuration settings, such as baud rates, port settings, etc. are maintained by CPU C and are stored in non-volatile memory on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 backplane. I/O Module Interface The VPM-3 contains an interface by which the CPU A and CPU B communicate with all of the I/O modules. The VPM-3 directs and controls communication to and from each of the I/O modules in the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. CI or UCI-3 Interface The CI Interface is the means by which the VPM-3 retrieves the vital and non-vital application programs from the CI or UCI-3 module. CDU Interface The CDU-1 connector on the front of the VPM-3 provides the communication path between the CPU C and the CDU-1. CIO Interface ElectroLogIXS/EC5 The CIO Interface is used for communication between CPU C and the CIO Modules (CIO-1/CIO-1A, CIO-CLA, CIO-2/CIO-2A, CIO-2AB, CIO-3, CIO-MD/CIO-MDA, CIO-PCA) that are present in the system. The CIO Interface shown on the VPM provides a generic connection to the CIO Modules, where the specific CIO Module converts the signals into a specific electrical interface such as RS-232, RS-485, and RS-422 and current loop. Note: Not all modules are available for various configurations of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Ethernet Interface The VPM-3 provides two Ethernet connections that can operate at 10 or 100 Mbps. These interfaces auto-negotiate the speed at which to operate with the connected network device and auto-detect whether the connecting cable is a ‘cross-over’ cable or is a straight connection. Note: 100373-010 AR0 Ferrites have been provided and must be applied to Ethernet cables in all installations. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-25 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Error Log The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Error Log captures error / system event information when a detected error / event occurs. The Error Log entries indicate the date and time of the event, the processor that declared the error / event and a description of the error / event. The VPM-3 is capable of storing the most recent 5,000 Error Logs entries. Recorder Log The Recorder Log captures the state / state change of application statuses as indicated in the application program defined by the application design engineer. To have the values of a particular status recorded in the Recorder Log, the application must have the named status indicated as a recorded status. A named status that is indicated in the application program as a recorded status has its value logged in the Recorder Log each time the status changes state along with the date and time of the change. The VPM-3 Recorder Log is sized to record the most recent 100,000 entries of up to 512 Vital and 512 Non-vital recorded statuses. Configuration Log The Configuration Log captures parameter / configuration setting changes as they are made to the system configuration information used by the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system. When lamp settings, vital configuration settings, or other configuration items such as these are changed, CPU C captures the change and the date / time of the change in the Configuration Log. The VPM-3 Configuration Log is sized to capture the most recent 1000 Configuration change events. LEDs The VPM-3 has three LED indicators for the three different CPUs; A, B, and C. The indicators are for diagnostic purposes only. There are three possible states for the indicator and their definitions are: OFF – STEADY ON – FLASHING – the CPU is not functioning. The CPU is initializing (only valid status during startup). If one or more are continuously illuminated during normal operation, the CPU is not functioning. the CPU is running normally. The VPM-3 indicates that it is operating in update mode (the mode used to update VPM-3 executive software or application programs) by flashing all three CPU LEDs in an alternating amber / red pattern. 1-26 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction A Processor A LED: Is flashing when Processor A is active and functioning normally. B Processor B LED: Is flashing when Processor B is active and functioning normally. C Processor C LED: Is flashing when Processor C is active and functioning normally. D CDU Connector: Modular connector used for CDU interface. E Ethernet Connectors: Modular connectors used for Ethernet network connections. Each Ethernet connection has LEDs to indicate connection & activity (green) and connection speed (amber LED indicates 100Mbs / off equals 10Mbs) F Prog Button: Dual-purpose switch: (1) If depressed during a power cycle, causes the VPM-3 to enter update mode and (2) Used to confirm Local Presence when so indicated via the Web GUI interface. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-27 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 CPS-1 Central Power Supply P/N: 251122-000 The CPS-1 (Central Power Supply) Module supplies +5 VDC for all the components in the EC5 that require a non-isolated 5-volt source. Components that require an isolated 5-volt power have dedicated power sources. The CPS-1 may be used in applications that require up to 25 Watts of 5VDC power. Block Diagram Theory Figure 1-16, CPS-1 Block Diagram Surge Protection and Filtering The Battery Input from the system battery is applied to the Surge Protection and Filtering circuit. This circuit prevents the DC/DC Converter from sending switching noise out on the battery input wires. The filtered battery voltage is sent to the DC/DC Converter Circuit. DC/DC Converter The DC/DC Converter is a step-down DC/DC converter that converts the filtered battery voltage into regulated +5 VDC. The +5 VDC signal exits the CPS-1 via the backplane connector and is applied to the rest of the EC5. Converter Run Enable and Soft Start Circuit The Converter Run Enable and Soft Start Circuit monitors the filtered battery voltage signal. This circuit disables the DC/DC Converter until the filtered battery voltage reaches +7.5 VDC. When the filtered battery voltage reaches +7.5 VDC the DC/DC Converter is enabled and allowed to operate. If, for any reason, the filtered battery voltage drops to below +6.75 VDC, the Converter Run Enable and Soft Start Circuit disables the DC/DC Converter. This allows time for the system charger to charge the battery. When the battery reaches +7.5 VDC, the Converter Run Enable and Soft Start Circuit again enables the DC/DC Converter. 1-28 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction Undervoltage Detector The Undervoltage Detector monitors the DC/DC Converter output. Under normal conditions (CPS voltage within tolerance), it sends a CPS OK signal to the 5V PWR indicator on the CDU-1 to give a visual indication of the status of the CPS. If the output voltage drops below the preset undervoltage threshold, the Undervoltage Detector sends a CPS LV signal to the VPM-1. This informs the VPM-1 that the CPS-1 output voltage is out-of-tolerance and can no longer be considered reliable. When the output voltage is out-of-tolerance, the 5V PWR LED on the CDU-1 extinguishes to provide a visual indication of the out-of tolerance condition. Figure 1-16a, CPS-1 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-29 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 CPS-2 Central Power Supply P/N: 251327-000 The CPS-2 (Central Power Supply) Module supplies +5 VDC for all the components in the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 that require a non-isolated 5-Volt source. Components that require an isolated 5-Volt power have their own power sources. The CPS-2 may be used in applications that require up to 60 Watts of 5VDC power. Block Diagram Theory Figure 1-17, CPS-2 Block Diagram. Surge Protection and Filtering The Battery Input from the system battery is applied to the Surge Protection and Filtering circuit. This circuit prevents the DC/DC Converter from sending switching noise out on the battery input wires. The filtered battery voltage is sent to the DC/DC Converter Circuit. DC/DC Converter The DC/DC Converter is a step-down DC/DC converter that converts the filtered battery voltage into regulated +5 VDC. The +5 VDC signal exits the CPS-2 via the backplane connector and is applied to the rest of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. Converter Run Enable and Soft Start Circuit The Converter Run Enable and Soft Start Circuit monitors the filtered battery voltage signal. This circuit disables the DC/DC Converter until the filtered battery voltage reaches +7.5 VDC. When the filtered battery voltage reaches +7.5 VDC the DC/DC Converter is enabled and allowed to operate. If, for any reason, the filtered battery voltage drops to below +6.75 VDC, the Converter Run Enable and Soft Start Circuit disables the DC/DC Converter. This allows time for the system charger to charge the battery. When the battery reaches +7.5 VDC, the Converter Run Enable and Soft Start Circuit again enables the DC/DC Converter. 1-30 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction Undervoltage Detector The Undervoltage Detector monitors the DC/DC Converter output. Under normal conditions (CPS voltage within tolerance), it sends a CPS OK signal to the 5V PWR indicator on the CDU-1 to give a visual indication of the status of the CPS. If the output voltage drops below the preset undervoltage threshold, the Undervoltage Detector sends a CPS LV signal to the VPM. This informs the VPM that the CPS-2 output voltage is out-of-tolerance and can no longer be considered reliable. When the output voltage is out-oftolerance, the 5V PWR LED on the CDU-1 extinguishes to provide a visual indication of the out-of tolerance condition. 373-PH15 Figure 1-17a, CPS-2. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-31 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 CPS-3 Central Power Supply P/N: 251456-000 The CPS-3 (Central Power Supply) Module supplies +5 VDC for all the components in the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 that require a non-isolated 5-Volt source. Components that require an isolated 5-Volt power have their own power sources. The CPS-3 may be used in applications that require up to 70 Watts of 5VDC power. Block Diagram Theory Figure 1-18, CPS-3 Block Diagram. Surge Protection and Filtering The Battery Input from the system battery is applied to the Surge Protection and Filtering circuit. This circuit prevents the DC/DC Converter from sending switching noise out on the battery input wires. The filtered battery voltage is sent to the DC/DC Converter Circuit. DC/DC Converter The DC/DC Converter is a step-down DC/DC converter that converts the filtered battery voltage into regulated +5 VDC. The +5 VDC signal exits the CPS-3 via the backplane connector and is applied to the rest of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. Converter Run Enable and Soft Start Circuit The Converter Run Enable and Soft Start Circuit monitors the filtered battery voltage signal. This circuit disables the DC/DC Converter until the filtered battery voltage reaches +7.5 VDC. When the filtered battery voltage reaches +7.5 VDC the DC/DC Converter is enabled and allowed to operate. If, for any reason, the filtered battery voltage drops to below +6.75 VDC, the Converter Run Enable and Soft Start Circuit disables the DC/DC Converter. This allows time for the system charger to charge the battery. When the battery reaches +7.5 VDC, the Converter Run Enable and Soft Start Circuit again enables the DC/DC Converter. 1-32 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction Undervoltage Detector The Undervoltage Detector monitors the DC/DC Converter output. Under normal conditions (CPS voltage within tolerance), it sends a CPS OK signal to the 5V PWR indicator on the CDU-1 to give a visual indication of the status of the CPS. If the output voltage drops below the preset undervoltage threshold, the Undervoltage Detector sends a CPS LV signal to the VPM. This informs the VPM that the CPS-3 output voltage is out-of-tolerance and can no longer be considered reliable. When the output voltage is out-oftolerance, the 5V PWR LED on the CDU-1 extinguishes to provide a visual indication of the out-of tolerance condition. 373-PH15a Figure 1-19, CPS-3. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-33 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 CI-1 Chassis Information Module P/N: 251121-000 The CI-1 Module provides a non-volatile storage area for the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. It contains a non-volatile memory device that stores the application equations. CI-1 373-0062 Figure 1-20, Chassis Information Module Block Diagram Theory Figure 1-21, CI-1 Block Diagram. Application EPROM Application equations are stored in an EPROM that is placed in the 32-pin, DIP socket on the CI module. Application EPROMs may be 1Mbit (P/N: 003662-000 / 001), 2Mbit (P/N: 003662-005 / 006 / 010) or 4Mbit (P/N: 003662-020) densities. 1-34 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction CI-2 Chassis Information Module P/N: 251441-000 The CI-2 Module provides a non-volatile storage area for the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. It contains a removable non-volatile memory device (EPROM) that stores the application equations and has two DIP shunt sockets for setting the value of the Application ID. In addition, the CI-2 module has 8 MBytes of non-volatile memory that can be used for application equation storage. If an EPROM with a valid application equation file is installed on the CI-2, the EPROM equations are used. If no EPROM is installed, the CI-2 non-volatile memory is used for application equations. CI-2 373-0062a Figure 1-22, Chassis Information Module Block Diagram Theory 373-0016a Figure 1-23, CI-2 Block Diagram. Application EPROM Application equations are stored in an EPROM that is placed in the 32-pin, DIP socket on the CI module. Application EPROMs may be 1Mbit (P/N: 003662-000 / 001), 2Mbit (P/N: 003662-005 / 006 / 010) or 4Mbit (P/N: 003662-020) densities. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-35 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 UCl-3 Universal Chassis Information Module P/N: 251495-000 The UCI-3 may be used in place of any XCI or CI modules. The UCI-3 Module provides a non-volatile storage area for the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. It contains a removable non-volatile memory device (EPROM) that stores the application equations and has two DIP shunt sockets for setting the value of the Application ID. In addition, the UCI-3 module has 8 MBytes of non-volatile memory that can be used for application storage. If an EPROM with a valid application equation file is installed on the UCI-3, the EPROM equations are used. If no EPROM is installed, the UCI-3 non-volatile memory is used for application equations. UCl-3 373-0062a Figure 1-24, Chassis Information Module Block Diagram Theory 373-0016a Figure 1-25, UCl-3 Block Diagram. 1-36 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction Application EPROM Application equations are stored in an EPROM that is placed in the 32-pin, DIP socket on the CI module. Application EPROMs may be 1Mbit (P/N: 003662-000 / 001), 2Mbit (P/N: 003662-005 / 006 / 010) or 4Mbit (P/N: 003662-020) densities. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-37 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 CDU-1 Control Display Unit P/N: 251124-000 The CDU-1 provides a user-to-system interface and is the primary interface for VPM based ElectroLogIXS/EC5 systems. The CDU has a vacuum fluorescent display of two rows of 20 characters, a 16-button keypad, and two LED indicators for system health and 5V power status (Figure 1-26). The CDU connects to the VPM via an RJ45 modular connector and uses RS-232 signaling. CDU-1 modules are able to be removed and installed while the ElectroLogIXS system is powered on. The CDU-1 menus for interfacing with the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system are shown in Section 5. Block Diagram Theory Figure 1-26, CDU Block Diagram. RS232 Interface Circuit System control and diagnostic information from the VPM is sent serially through the RS-232 Interface Circuit. The RS-232 Interface Circuit converts RS-232 signals from the VPM to digital signals useable by the CDU-1. In addition, it converts digital signals from the CDU-1 into RS-232 signals for transmission to the VPM. CPU The CPU coordinates activity between the display, keypad, and the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system. Display The Display is the output for the user interface. This 40-character display contains 2 rows of 20 characters. Keypad The keypad allows access to system setup, maintenance, and diagnostic utilities. 1-38 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction Controls and Indicators Figure 1-27, CDU Controls and Indicators. A Alphanumeric Keys: Used for selecting menu options, entering information, or canceling operations. B Arrow Keys: Used for scrolling menu options and navigating from menu to menu. Simultaneously pressing the Left and Right Arrow Keys returns to the top-level menu item of the current menu category. Simultaneously pressing the Up and Down Arrow Keys jumps to the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Home Menu. C Health Indicator: LED is illuminated when the system’s CPUs are operating normally. LED is extinguished during system resets or when a CPU has halted / is not operating. D 5V PWR: 100373-010 AR0 LED lit when output of Central Power Supply is within acceptable parameters. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-39 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 GFD-1 Ground Fault Detector-1 P/N: 251333-000 The optional GFD-1 (Ground Fault Detector-1) Module monitors up to three battery banks for ground faults. The GFD can detect faults on the plus and minus battery poles. The GFD monitors the battery connection to the ElectroLogIXS through the backplane and has a front panel field connector to connect up to two external batteries. The fault threshold and ground-fault time are programmable by the ElectroLogIXS user via the CDU-1. The GFD can only be installed in the dedicated GFD-1 slot on the backplane. Important: The earth ground connection to the GFD module must be removed prior to maintenance testing for grounds. If the earth ground connection is not removed, ground testing will likely fail. Block Diagram Theory BATT #1 { ElectrologIXS BACKPLANE EARTH GROUND } BATT #2 VPM } BATT #3 323-001D Figure 1-28, GFD-Block Diagram. Battery Monitor The GFD will monitor battery faults on both the plus and minus battery poles. The following battery monitor parameters are adjustable by using the CDU-1. Monitored Value Range Adjustment Increments Fault Threshold* 2 kohms to 20 kohms 2 kohm steps Ground Fault Time 5 to 30 seconds 1 second steps Low/High Battery Alarm 8V to 16.5V 0.1V steps *Note: An equivalent leakage current in mA is simultaneously displayed on the CDU-1. Surge Protection The GFD-1 provides surge protection from power surges that may occur at the battery inputs. 1-40 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction Indicators A B C D E F G 373-PH16 Figure 1-29, GFD-1 Indicators. A B1+: B B1-: C B2+: D B2-: E B3+: F B3-: G Note: 100373-010 AR0 Lit red indicates a fault on Battery #1 plus input. Lit green indicates no fault on Battery #1 plus input. LED off indicates no ground fault monitoring on this pole. Lit red indicates a fault on Battery #1 return input. Lit green indicates no fault on Battery #1 return input. LED off indicates no ground fault monitoring on this pole. Lit red indicates a fault on Battery #2 plus input. Lit green indicates no fault on Battery #2 plus input. LED off indicates no ground fault monitoring on this pole. Lit red indicates a fault on Battery #2 return input. Lit green indicates no fault on Battery #2 return input. LED off indicates no ground fault monitoring on this pole. Lit red indicates a fault on Battery #3 plus input. Lit green indicates no fault on Battery #3 plus input. LED off indicates no ground fault monitoring on this pole. Lit red indicates a fault on Battery #3 return input. Lit green indicates no fault on Battery #3 return input. LED off indicates no ground fault monitoring on this pole. Battery Input Connector Battery “B1" is associated with the ElectroLogIXS chassis battery, Batteries “B2" and “B3" correspond to additional battery sources input through the module front panel connector G. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-41 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Battery Input Connector The Battery Input Connector has 7 contacts. It is used to connect the GFD-1 to up to two external batteries and earth ground. The field connector is GETSGS part number 032773-653. The keying pins are part number 032773-492. A mating connector with keying pins installed is supplied with the GFD for field wiring. GFD-1 Battery Connector Pin Assignment Signal Pin Battery 2+ 1 Battery 2- 2 Battery 3+ 4 Battery 3- 5 Earth Ground 7 Figure 1-30, Battery Input Connector. Communications Input/Output Module - 1/1A EC5: CIO-1 P/N: 251126-000 ElectroLogIXS: CIO-1A P/N: 251329-000 The CIO-1/CIO-1A provides a non-vital, asynchronous, serial communication interface to/from the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system. It has two serial ports: • • a serial port for local interface to the system for diagnostic purposes. a serial port that can make a telemetry link between an office and a remote site for remote control of an ElectroLogIXS/EC5 location. This port can also interface to a HLC/LCP. The CIO-1/CIO-1A can provide communication links of up to 50 feet that do not extend beyond the instrument housing. The CIO-1/CIO-1A can only be installed in the dedicated CIO-1/CIO-1A slot on the backplane. These modules can be removed and replaced with the power switch ON if the serial Office Port is not being used. 1-42 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction Block Diagram Theory Figure 1-31, CIO-1/CIO-1A Block Diagram. Optocouplers Diagnostic and Office signals to/from the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 pass through the Optocouplers circuit. These Optocouplers provide 2000 VAC isolation for the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system from the Diagnostic and Office Ports. RS232 Interface The RS232 Interface converts the digital signals from the Optocouplers circuit into RS-232 signals. These are applied to the Diagnostic and Office Ports (via the Surge Protection circuit). Also, it converts RS-232 signals from the Diagnostic and Office Ports (via the Surge Protection circuit) into digital signals that are sent to the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system. Surge Protection The Surge Protection circuit provides secondary surge protection from power surges that may occur at the Diagnostic or Office Ports. Isolated Supply The Isolated Supply powers the RS-232 Interface portions of the CIO-1/CIO-1A. The CIO-1/CIO-1A has two Isolated Supplies, one for each port. Each port is isolated from the other and the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-43 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Indicators A F E B C D 373-PH17 373-PH17a Figure 1-32, CIO-1 indicators for EC5 1-44 Figure 1-32a, CIO-1A indicators for ElectroLogIXS. A Diagnostic Port: DB-9, RS-232 serial port. B Diagnostic RX: Receive data to ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when receiving data. C Office RX: Receive data to ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when receiving data. D Office Port: DB-9, RS-232 serial port. E Office TX: Transmit data from ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when transmitting data. F Diagnostic TX: Transmit data from ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when transmitting data. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction Diagnostic Port The Diagnostic Port is a DB-9, male connector. It is used to connect a diagnostic terminal or Personal Computer to the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 for to aid in system maintenance and troubleshooting. Diagnostic Port Pin Assignment Signal Signal Name Input/Output Pin CD Carrier Detect Input 1 RX Receive Data Input 2 TX Transmit Data Output 3 DTR Data Terminal Ready Output 4 GND Common Signal Return N/A 5 DSR Data Set Ready Input 6 RTS Request To Send Output 7 CTS Clear To Send Input 8 RI Ring Indicator Input 9 Figure 1-33, Diagnostic Port Connector. Office Port The Office Port is a DB-9, male connector. It is used for office connections and can be configured for UCE (Universal Code Emulation), GENISYS® or SCS-128 protocol. Office Port Pin Assignment Signal Signal Name Input/Output Pin CD Carrier Detect Input 1 RX Receive Data Input 2 TX Transmit Data Output 3 DTR Data Terminal Ready Output 4 GND Common Signal Return N/A 5 DSR Data Set Ready Input 6 RTS Request To Send Output 7 CTS Clear To Send Input 8 RI Ring Indicator Input 9 Figure 1-34, Office Port Connector. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-45 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Communications Input/Output Module - 2/2A EC5: CIO-2 P/N: 251127-000 ElectroLogIXS: CIO-2A P/N: 251330-000 The optional CIO-2/CIO-2A Module is a communications module that provides a synchronous, or asynchronous, point-to-point, RS-232 communications interface to/from the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system. It has one serial port for data communication. The CIO-2/CIO-2A is a serial interface through which the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 can communicate with other control equipment. The CIO-2/CIO-2A can provide communication links of up to 50 feet that do not extend beyond the instrument housing. The CIO-2 can only be installed in CIO Slot 2 in an EC5 system, and up to two CIO-2A modules may be installed in an ElectroLogIXS system in the CIO-2A/CIO-MDA/CIO-PCA slots on the backplane. Block Diagram Theory Figure 1-35, CIO-2/CIO-2A Block Diagram. Optocouplers Communication to/from the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 passes through the Optocouplers. This circuit provides 2000 VAC isolation between the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system and the Communication Port. RS232 Interface The RS232 Interface converts the digital signals from the Optocouplers into RS-232 signals. These are then applied to the Communication Port (via the Surge Protection circuit). Also, it converts RS-232 signals from the Communications Port (via the Surge Protection circuit) into digital signals that are sent to the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system. Surge Protection This circuit provides secondary surge protection from power surges that may occur at the Communications Port. Isolated Supply The Isolated Supply powers the RS-232 Interface Circuit. This ensures isolation between the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system and the outside world. 1-46 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction Indicators K J I H G B C D E F 373-PH18 373-PH18a Figure 1-36, CIO-2 Indicators for EC5 A B C D E F G H I J K 100373-010 AR0 Data: RX: CTS: DSR: RXC: CD: ETC: TXC: DTR: RTS: TX: Figure 1-36a, CIO-2A Indicators for ElectroLogIXS DB-25, RS-232 serial port. Receive data to ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when receiving data. Clear to Send to ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when CTS signal is present. Data Set Ready to ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when DSR signal is present. Receive Clock to ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when RXC is present. Carrier Detect to ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when CD is present. External Transmit Clock from ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when ETC is present. Transmit Clock to ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when TXC signal is present. Data Terminal Ready from ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when DTR is present. Request to Send from ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when CTS signal is present. Transmit data from ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when transmitting data. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-47 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Data Port The Data Port is a DB-25 male connector. It is used for communication with RS-232 compatible devices. Port Pin Assignment Signal 1-48 Signal Name Input/Output Pin PGND Protective Ground 1 TX Transmit Data Output 2 RX Receive Data Input 3 RTS Request To Send Output 4 CTS Clear To Send Input 5 DSR Data Set Ready Input 6 GND Common Signal Return N/A 7 CD Carrier Detect Input 8 TCLKIN Transmit Clock Input 15 RCLK Receive Clock Input 17 DTR Data Terminal Ready Output 20 TCLKOUT Transmit Clock Output 24 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. Figure 1-37, Data Port. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction Communications Input/Output Module - MD/MDA EC5: CIO-MD P/N: 251331-000 ElectroLogIXS: CIO-MDA P/N: 251332-000 The optional CIO-MD/CIO-MDA is a communications module that provides a full duplex, asynchronous or synchronous RS485 communication interface to/from the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system. It has one serial communications port. The CIO-MD/CIO-MDA is a serial interface through which the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 can communicate with other EC5, ElectroLogIXS, or VHLC units. The CIO-MD/CIO-MDA supports multi-drop communications and can communicate with multiple remote devices. The CIO-MD/CIO-MDA is capable of providing communication links of up to 4,000 feet that extend beyond the instrument housing with appropriate primary surge protection. The CIO-MD can only be installed in CIO Slot 2 in an EC5 system, and up to two CIO-MDA modules may be installed in an ElectroLogIXS system in the CIO-2A/CIO-MDA/CIO-PCA slots on the backplane. Block Diagram Theory Figure 1-38, CIO-MD/CIO-MDA Block Diagram. Optocouplers Communication to/from the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 passes through the Optocouplers. This provides 2000 VAC isolation between the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system and the Communications Port. RS485 Interface The RS485 Interface converts the digital signals from the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system into RS-485 signals. These are applied to the Communications Port. Also, it converts RS-485 signals from the Communications Port into digital signals that are sent to the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. Surge Protection The Surge Protection circuit provides secondary surge protection from power surges that may occur at the Communications Port. Isolated Supply The Isolated Supply circuit supplies an isolated operating voltage for the RS-485 Interface circuit. This ensures isolation between the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system and the outside world. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-49 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Indicators K J I H G 373-PH19 373-PH37a Figure 1-39, CIO-MD Indicators for EC5. 1-50 B C D E F Figure 1-39a, CIO-MDA Indicators for ElectroLogIXS. A B Data: RX: DB-25, RS-485 serial port. Receive data to ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when receiving data. C D E F G H I J K CTS: DSR: RXC: CD: ETC: TXC: DTR: RTS: TX: Clear to Send to ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when CTS signal is present. Data Set Ready to ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when DSR signal is present. Receive Clock to ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when RXC is present. Carrier Detect to ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when CD is present. External Transmit Clock from ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when ETC is present. Transmit Clock to ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when TXC signal is present. Data Terminal Ready from ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when DTR is present. Request to Send from ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when CTS signal is present. Transmit data from ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when transmitting data. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction Data Port The Data Port is a DB-25 male connector. It is used for communication with RS-422 compatible devices. Port Pin Assignment Signal Signal Name Input/Output Pin TXD (A) Transmit Data Output 2 RXD (A) Receive Data Input 3 RTS (A) Request To Send Output 4 CTS (A) Clear To Send Input 5 DSR (A) Data Set Ready Input 6 GND Signal Ground N/A 7 DCD (A) Data Carrier Detect Input 8 RXC (B) Receive Clock Input 9 DCD (B) Data Carrier Detect Input 10 ETXC (B) Transmit Clock Output 11 TXC (B) Transmit Clock Input 12 CTS (B) Clear To Send Input 13 TXD (B) Transmit Data Output 14 TXC (A) Transmit Clock Input 15 RXD (B) Receive Data Input 16 RXC (A) Receive Clock Input 17 RTS (B) Request To Send Output 19 DTR (A) Data Terminal Ready Output 20 DSR (B) Data Set Ready Input 22 DTR (B) Data Terminal Ready Output 23 ETXC (A) Transmit Clock Output 24 Figure 1-40, Data Port. 323-0655 Figure 1-41, Backplane key for CIO-MDA for ElectroLogIXS 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-51 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 CIO-2AB Communications Input/Output P/N: 251467-000 The optional CIO-2AB (Communications Input/Output) Module provides a non-vital asynchronous, point-to-point, RS-232 communications interface to/from the ElectroLogIXS. It has one serial port for data communication. The CIO-2AB is a serial interface through which the ElectroLogIXS can communicate with a BCS protocol modem. The CIO-2AB can provide communication links of up to 50 feet (15.2m) that do not extend beyond the instrument housing. One CIO-2AB module may be installed in an ElectroLogIXS system in either of the CIO-2AB/CIO-MDA/CIO-PCA slots on the backplane. Block Diagram Figure 1-42, CIO-2AB Block Diagram. Optocouplers Communication to/from the ElectroLogIXS passes through the Optocouplers. This provides 2000 VAC isolation between the ElectroLogIXS system and the Communications Port. RS232 Interface The RS232 Interface converts the digital signals from the Optocouplers into RS-232 signals. These are then applied to the Communication Port (via the Surge Protection circuit). Also, it converts RS-232 signals from the Communications Port (via the Surge Protection circuit) into digital signals that are sent to the ElectroLogIXS system. The DTR signal is controlled by the VPM to connect/disconnect a BCS modem. Surge Protection The Surge Protection circuit provides secondary surge protection from power surges that may occur at the Communications Port. Isolated Supply The Isolated Supply powers the RS-232 Interface Circuit. This ensures isolation between the ElectroLogIXS system and the outside world. 1-52 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction Indicators 323-0691 Figure 1-43, CIO-2AB Indicators and Connector DB-25, RS-232 serial port AB- RX: C- CTS: Clear to Send to ElectroLogIXS. LED is lit when CTS signal is present D- DSR: Data Set Ready to ElectroLogIXS. LED is lit when DSR signal is present E- CD: F- DTR: Data Terminal Ready from ElectroLogIXS. LED is lit when DTR is present. G- RTS: Request to Send from ElectroLogIXS. LED is lit when CTS signal is present. H- TX: 100373-010 AR0 Receive data to ElectroLogIXS. LED is lit when receiving data. Carrier Detect to ElectroLogIXS. LED is lit when CD is present. Transmit data from ElectroLogIXS. LED is lit when transmitting data. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-53 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Data Port The CIO-2AB Data Port is a DB-25 male connector. It is used for a serial port that can make a telemetry link between an office and a remote site for BCS protocol remote communication with an ElectroLogIXS location. Port Pin Assignment Signal Signal Name Input/Output Pin PGND Protective Ground 1 TX Transmit Data Output 2 RX Receive Data Input 3 RTS Request To Send Output 4 CTS Clear To Send Input 5 DSR Data Set Ready Input 6 GND Common Signal Return N/A 7 CD Carrier Detect Input 8 DTR Data Terminal Ready (Modem Connect) Output 20 Figure 1-44, Data Port. 323-0655a Figure 1-45, Backplane key for CIO-2AB 1-54 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction CIO-3 Communications Input/Output Module - 3 EC5: CIO-3 P/N: 251128-000 The optional CIO-3 Module is a communications module that provides a synchronous or asynchronous EIA-530 (RS-422) communication interface to/from the EC5 system. It has one serial communications port. The CIO-3 is a serial interface through which the EC5 can communicate with other train control equipment. The CIO-3 is capable of providing communicate links of up to 4,000 feet that extend beyond the instrument housing with appropriate primary surge protection. The CIO-3 can only be installed in CIO Slot 2. Block Diagram Theory Figure 1-46, CIO-3 Block Diagram. Optocouplers Communication to/from the EC5 passes through the Optocouplers. This provides 2000 VAC isolation between the EC5 system and the Communications Port. RS422 Interface The RS422 Interface converts the digital signals from the EC5 system into RS-422 signals. These are applied to the Communications Port. Also, it converts RS-422 signals from the Communications Port into digital signals that are sent to the EC5. Surge Protection The Surge Protection circuit provides secondary surge protection from power surges that may occur at the Communications Port. Isolated Supply The Isolated Supply circuit supplies an isolated operating voltage for the RS-422 Interface circuit. This ensures isolation between the EC5 system and the outside world. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-55 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Indicators Figure 1-47, CIO-3 Indicators for EC5. 1-56 A- Data: DB-25, RS-422 serial port. B- RX: Receive data to EC5. LED is lit when receiving data. C- CTS: Clear to Send to EC5. LED is lit when CTS signal is present D- DSR: Data Set Ready to EC5. LED is lit when DSR signal is present E- RXC: Receive Clock to EC5. LED is lit when RXC is present. F- CD: Carrier Detect to EC5. LED is lit when CD is present. G- ETC: External Transmit Clock from EC5. LED is lit when ETC is present. H- TXC: Transmit Clock to EC5. LED is lit when TXC signal is present. I- DTR: Data Terminal Ready from EC5. LED is lit when DTR is present. J- RTS: Request to Send from EC5. LED is lit when CTS signal is present. K- TX: Transmit data from EC5. LED is lit when transmitting data. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction Data Port The Data Port is a DB-25 male connector. It is used to connect the EC5 to other wayside equipment. Port Pin Assignment Signal Signal Name Input/Output Pin TXD (A) Transmit Data Output 2 RXD (A) Receive Data Input 3 RTS (A) Request To Send Output 4 CTS (A) Clear To Send Input 5 DSR (A) Data Set Ready Input 6 GND Signal Ground N/A 7 DCD (A) Data Carrier Detect Input 8 RXC (B) Receive Clock Input 9 DCD (B) Data Carrier Detect Input 10 ETXC (B) Transmit Clock Output 11 TXC (B) Transmit Clock Input 12 CTS (B) Clear To Send Input 13 TXD (B) Transmit Data Output 14 TXC (A) Transmit Clock Input 15 RXD (B) Receive Data Input 16 RXC (A) Receive Clock Input 17 RTS (B) Request To Send Output 19 DTR (A) Data Terminal Ready Output 20 DSR (B) Data Set Ready Input 22 DTR (B) Data Terminal Ready Output 23 ETXC (A) Transmit Clock Output 24 Figure 1-48, Data Port 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-57 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 CIO-3 Connector Keying The CIO-3 connector is keyed as shown below. Figure 1-49, CIO-3 Connector Keying for EC5 1-58 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction Communications Input/Output Module - CLA ElectroLogIXS: CIO-CLA P/N: 251329-100 The CIO-CLA provides a non-vital, asynchronous, serial communication interface to/from the ElectroLogIXS system. It has two serial ports: • • a serial port for local interface to the system for diagnostic purposes. a serial port that can interface to an LCP. The CIO-CLA is capable of providing communication links that extend beyond the instrument housing with appropriate primary surge protection. The CIO-CLA can only be installed in the dedicated CIO-1A slot on the backplane. These modules can be removed and replaced with the power switch ON if the serial LCP Port is not being used. Block Diagram Theory ISOLATED SUPPLY OPTOCOUPLERS (DIAGNOSTICS) RS232 INTERFACE (DIAGNOSTICS) SURGE PROTECTION DIAGNOSTICS (DB-9) OPTOCOUPLERS (DIAGNOSTICS) Current Loop Adapter (CLA) INTERFACE (LCP) SURGE PROTECTION LCP (DB-9) VPM ISOLATED SUPPLY Figure 1-50, CIO-CLA Block Diagram. Optocouplers Communication to/from the ElectroLogIXS passes through the Optocouplers. This provides 2000 VAC isolation between the ElectroLogIXS system and the communications port. RS232 Interface The RS232 Interface converts the digital signals from the Optocouplers circuit into RS-232 signals. These are applied to the Diagnostic Port (via the Surge Protection circuit). Also, it converts RS-232 signals from the Diagnostic (via the Surge Protection circuit) into digital signals that are sent to the ElectroLogIXS system. CLA Interface The CLA Interface converts the digital signals from the Optocouplers circuit into Current Loop Adapter (CLA) signals. These are applied to the LCP Port (via the Surge Protection circuit). Also, it converts Current Loop Adapter (CLA) signals from the LCP (via the Surge Protection circuit) into digital signals that are sent to the ElectroLogIXS system. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-59 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Surge Protection The Surge Protection circuit provides secondary surge protection from power surges that may occur at the Communications Port. Isolated Supply The Isolated Supply circuit supplies an isolated operating voltage for the optocouplers, the RS-232 interface, and the current loop interface. This ensures isolation between the ElectroLogIXS system and the outside world. 1-60 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction Indicators A F B C E LCP D CIO-CLA CIO-CLA Figure 1-51, CIO-CLA Indicators. A Diagnostic Port: DB-9, RS-232 serial port. B Diagnostic RX: Receive data to ElectroLogIXS. LED is lit when receiving data. C LCP RX: Receive data to ElectroLogIXS. LED is lit when receiving data. D LCP Port: DB-9, current loop serial port. E LCP TX: Transmit data from ElectroLogIXS. LED is lit when transmitting data. F Diagnostic TX: Transmit data from ElectroLogIXS. LED is lit when transmitting data. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-61 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Data Port The Diagnostic Port is a DB-9, male connector. It is used to connect a diagnostic terminal or Personal Computer to the ElectroLogIXS to aid in system maintenance and troubleshooting. Diagnostic Port Pin Assignment Signal Signal Name Input/Output Pin CD Carrier Detect Input 1 RX Receive Data Input 2 TX Transmit Data Output 3 DTR Data Terminal Ready Output 4 GND Common Signal Return N/A 5 DSR Data Set Ready Input 6 RTS Request To Send Output 7 CTS Clear To Send Input 8 RI Ring Indicator Input 9 Figure 1-52, DB-9 Connector. LCP Port The LCP Port is a DB-9, male connector. It is used to connect to a Local Control Panel (LCP). LCP Port Pin Assignment Signal 1-62 Signal Name Input/Output Pin TXD- Transmit Data Output 1 TXD+ Transmit Data Output 2 RXD+ Receive Data Input 4 RXD- Receive Data Input 5 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction Communications Input/Output Module - PCA ElectroLogIXS: CIO-PCA P/N: 251486-001 The CIO-PCA is a non-vital communications module that provides protocol conversion between an office system and the VLC system. The CIO-PCA contains a processor based module providing four external interfaces: one Ethernet and three serial data ports. The CIO-PCA is configured and managed as a CIO-MDA. The CIO-PCA can provide communication links of up to 50 feet that do not extend beyond the instrument housing. A single CIO-PCA module may be installed in an ElectroLogIXS system in any of the CIO-2A/CIO-MDA slots on the backplane. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-63 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Block Diagram Theory ISOLATED SUPPLY ETHERNET INTERFACE VPM OPTOCOUPLERS PROTOCOL CONVERTER CPU ETHERNET (RJ-45) RS232 INTERFACE SURGE PROTECTION DIAG PORT (RJ-45) RS232 INTERFACE SURGE PROTECTION ASYNC PORT (RJ-45) RS232 INTERFACE SURGE PROTECTION SYNC PORT (RJ-45) Figure 1-53, CIO-PCA Block Diagram. Optocouplers Communication to/from the ElectroLogIXS passes through the Optocouplers. This provides 2000 VAC isolation between the ElectroLogIXS system and the Protocol Converter CPU. Protocol Converter CPU The Protocol Converter CPU converts outgoing ElectroLogIXS system ATCS messages to ARES radio modem compatible messages and reverses the process for messages from the ARES radio modem to the ElectroLogIXS system. It also creates and terminates control messages for configuring ARES radios. Finally, the Protocol Converter CPU creates and terminates administrative traffic for configuring and monitoring the CIO-PCA. Ethernet The Ethernet Interface converts the digital signals from the Protocol Converter CPU into Ethernet signals. These are applied to the Ethernet data port. Also, it converts Ethernet signals from the Ethernet data port into digital signals that are sent to the Protocol Converter CPU. RS232 Interface The RS232 Interface converts the digital signals from the Protocol Converter CPU into RS-232 signals. These are then applied to the Data Port (via the Surge Protection circuit). Also, it converts RS-232 signals from the Communications Port (via the Surge Protection circuit) into digital signals that are sent to the Protocol Converter CPU. Surge Protection The Surge Protection circuit provides secondary surge protection from power surges that may occur at the Communications Port. 1-64 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction Isolated Supply The Isolated Supply circuit supplies an isolated operating voltage for the optocouplers, the protocol converter CPU, the Ethernet interface, and the RS-232 interfaces. This ensures isolation between the ElectroLogIXS system and the outside world. Indicators A G E H F I J B K L M C N O D P Figure 1-54, CIO-PCA Indicators A B C ENET: RJ-45, Ethernet port. DIAG: RJ-45, RS-232 serial port. ASYNC: RJ-45, RS-232 serial port. D SYNC: E BKP: Receive data from ElectroLogIXS (backplane). LED is lit when receiving data. F ASY: Receive data from Async (radio control) port. LED is lit when a valid frame (good CRC) is received. G LINK: RJ-45, RS-232 serial port. H 100: Physical Ethernet connected to ElectroLogIXS. LED is lit when an active Ethernet is connected and flashes with link activity. Ethernet data rate. LED is lit when connected at 100M and flashes when collisions are detected. I HLT: CIO-PCA Health. LED flashes approximately once per second when module is functioning properly J SYN: Receive data from SYNC (radio data) port. LED is lit when a valid frame (good CRC) is received. K RX: 100373-010 AR0 DIAG port receive data activity to ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when receive data is present. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-65 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 L TX: port transmit data activity to ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when transmit data is present. M RX: port receive data activity to ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when receive data is present. N TX: port transmit data activity to ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when transmit data is present. O RX: port receive data activity to ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when receive data is present. P TX: port transmit data activity to ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when transmit data is present. Data Ports Each Data Port connects through RJ-45 connectors mounted on the front panel. 8 1 Figure 1-55, RJ-45 Data Port RJ-45 Ethernet Port Pin Assignment Signal Signal Name Input/Output Pin TXD + Transmit Data Output 1 TXD - Transmit Data Output 2 RXD + Receive Data Input 3 RXD - Receive Data Input 6 RJ-45 RS-232 Port Pin Assignment Signal 1-66 Signal Name Input/Output Pin TXD Transmit Data Output 3 GND Signal Ground N/A 5 RXD Receive Data Input 6 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction RJ-45 Asynchronous Port Pin Assignment Signal Signal Name Input/Output Pin TXD Transmit Data Output 3 GND Signal Ground N/A 5 RXD Receive Data Input 6 DCD Data Carrier Detect Input 8 RJ-45 Synchronous Port Pin Assignment Signal Signal Name Input/Output Pin RTS Request To Send Output 1 TXC Transmit Clock Input 2 TXD Transmit Data Output 3 GND Signal Ground N/A 5 RXD Receive Data Input 6 RXC Receive Clock Input 7 CTS Clear To Send Input 8 Figure 1-56, DB-25 Data Port Adapter DB-25 Synchronous Port Adapter Cable (P/N 075111-000) Pin Assignments Signal Signal Name Input/Output Pin TXD Transmit Data Output 2 RXD Receive Data Input 3 RTS Request To Send Output 4 CTS Clear To Send Input 5 GND Signal Ground N/A 7 TXC Transmit Clock Input 15 RXC Receive Clock Input 17 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-67 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 DB-25 Asynchronous Port Adapter Cable (P/N 075111-001) Pin Assignments Signal Signal Name Input/Output Pin TXD Transmit Data Output 2 RXD Receive Data Input 3 GND Signal Ground N/A 7 DCD Data Carrier Detect Input 8 Figure 1-57, DB-9 Data Port Adapter DB-9 Diagnostic Port Adapter Cable (P/N 075064-000) Port Pin Assignments Signal Signal Name Input/Output Pin TXD Transmit Data Output 2 RXD Receive Data Input 3 GND Signal Ground N/A 5 CIO-PCA Specific ElectroLogIXS Platform Configuration Configure the port on the ElectroLogIXS platform as normal with the following restriction: the port BAUD rate must be set to 9600 or less. 1-68 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction CIO-PCA First Time Installation FIRST TIME INSTALL If you are starting with a new CIO-PCA module that has never had any firmware loaded onto it, you will need to use a Rabbit 3000 serial programming cable and the FlashIt utility. If you do not have the serial programming cable, you may purchase one here: http://www.rabbit.com/products/1_27_mm_rab_prog_cable/ The following are step-by-step instructions for loading firmware using the FlashIt utility. 1. Connect the serial programming cable to your PC. 2. Connect the “Prog” connector of the serial programming cable to the header on the Rabbit RCM3319 module. Take care to align the red stripe on the programming cable with pin 1 of the header. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-69 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 1-70 3. Start the FlashIt utility. 4. Under “Options, Serial”, select the desired COM port and speed. Choose the fastest baud rate your PC will support, but do not exceed 230400 bps. Make sure “Disable STATUS signal bootstrap check” checkbox is checked. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction 5. FlashIt will detect the RCM3319 and display information about it. Verify that the status bar at the bottom of the utility says “Rabbit connected on Com1 at 230400” or similar. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-71 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 1-72 6. Click the yellow folder icon to select the binary file. The binary file selected will be displayed in the lower right of the status bar. The middle icon, used to program the device, will enable. 7. Click the middle icon to program the device. You will see a status bar. The status bar may hang for a few seconds. Wait for the programming to finish. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction 8. You will see a success message when the programming is complete. 9. To program another module, click the far right icon to reset the connection for the next module. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-73 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 VTI-2S Vital Track Interface P/N: 251123-000 The VTI-2S (Vital Track Interface) Module provides a coded DC-track circuit interface for the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. It has two track circuit transceivers that communicate the Electro Code track circuit protocols. Also, the VTI-2S has two cab signal control outputs and two auxiliary vital inputs. All adjustments to track circuits are made using the CDU-1 or a terminal connected to the CIO-1/CIO-1A or CIO-CLA Module. No mechanical adjustments are required. Block Diagram Theory Figure 1-60, VTI-2S Block Diagram. Isolated DC/DC Converter The Isolated DC/DC Converter provides isolation between the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system and the rail. It is also used to apply DC coded signals to the rail. Digital Signal Processors The incoming track codes are converted into digital data and passed to the Digital Signal Processors, which attenuate all signals above 20 Hz. This virtually eliminates all induced track circuit noise, including power line noise, cab signals, audio frequency track circuits, and grade crossing predicator signals; no additional filtering is necessary. Vital Input The Vital Inputs are general purpose, two-wire inputs for the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. When an input rises above 8.0 ±0.5 volts, it is considered energized. The Vital Input remains energized until the input voltage falls below 6.5 ±0.5 volts. Vital inputs will accept voltages up to 32 VDC. Cab Output The VTI-2S Cab Outputs employ closed loop feedback, allowing the VPM to verify that the actual cab output agrees with the intended cab output. The Cab Outputs are two wire outputs used to drive cab signal generators with standard one-wire inputs. Each of the outputs are related to each track interface, i.e. CAB 1 with track 1 and CAB 2 with Track 2. Note: 1-74 If the cab generator battery is separate from the battery supply for the ElectroLogIXS/EC5, the battery negatives must be referenced to each other. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction Indicators Figure 1-61, VTI-2S Indicators. A TRACK 1 OUT: LED is lit when a code pulse is being transmitted by Track 1 transmitter. B TRACK 1 IN: LED is lit when Track 1 receives valid pulses. C CAB OUTPUT: LED is lit when transmitting cab codes. D HEALTH: LED is lit when module is functioning properly. E VITAL INPUT: LED is lit when the input is energized. F TRACK 2 IN: LED is lit when Track 2 receives valid pulses. G TRACK 2 OUT: LED is lit whenever a code pulse is being transmitted by Track 2 transmitter. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-75 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Figure 1-62, TIP-2 Block Diagram. TIP-2 Track Inductor Panel P/N: 800-096000-011 The TIP-2 (Track Inductor Panel) provides secondary surge protection that protects the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system from power surges and lighting strikes that may occur on the rails. Track connections are made through the use of AAR terminals. Primary surge protection such as arresters and equalizers are still required. Block Diagram Theory Inductor The Inductor passes the received coded track pulses from the tracks. Because of its high impedance, it reduces all other signals on the tracks (audio, cab, etc.). In addition, the Inductor prevents the VTI-2S from loading the track circuit while transmitting coded track pulses to the tracks. TSS-1 The TSS-1 (Track Surge Suppressor - 1) restricts fast power surges and lightning strikes that can occur on the tracks. 1-76 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction Fuses Fuses provide protection for the chassis in the event that a lightning strike or power surge exceeds the limiting capability of the TSS-1. Refer to the Fuse Chart below. TIP Fuse Chart Fuse Designation Manufacturer Value Quantity GETSGS Part Number Cartridge (FLNR9) Littelfuse® 9 Amp (thermal slo-blow) 2 141-005103-032 Automobile Style (257010) Littelfuse® 10 Amp 2 010101-004 Figure 1-63, Track Inductor Panel Component Location Diagram. The 9 Amp cartridge fuse protects against low voltage, high amp surges such as downed power lines or welders across the rails. The 10 Amp automobile-style fuse is the final level of protection against power surges. Cab Signal Filters Track Inductor Panels can also be ordered with built-in cab signal filters. The cab signal filters keep cab signal energy applied to the rail from interfering with the Electro Code track rates. TIP-2 Cab Signal Filter Chart Designation GETSGS Part Number Frequency TIP-2 W/100 FILTER 800-096000-012 100 Hz TIP-2W/60HZ 800-096000-013 60 Hz TIP-2W/40HZ FILTER 800-096000-014 40 Hz TIP-2W/83.3HZFILTER 800-096000-015 83.3 Hz 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-77 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 VLD-C6S Vital Lamp Driver Module P/N: 251125-000 The VLD-C6S (Vital Lamp Driver) Module is used to drive signal lamps at an intermediate signal location. The module has six lamp drive outputs, organized as two banks of three outputs. Only one lamp output per bank can be energized, and a maximum of two lamp outputs can be energized simultaneously (one lamp output per bank). Each bank has its own DC/DC Converter. This allows placement of signals at different distances from the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 chassis. Each lamp output is capable of driving an 18 to 25 Watt single filament lamp. For color position signaling, the VLD-C6S is capable of driving two 20 Watt lamps per single position light only; 40 Watts on the upper head and the lower head is limited to 20 Watts. Refer to Tables 2-2 through 2-4 for maximum wire lengths. Also, the VLD-C6S has 4 non-vital input/output ports. Filament Checks The VLD-C6S provides circuitry that allows the VPM to monitor and report the filament integrity of all signal lamp bulbs installed. An open filament on a signal lamp is detectable on both enabled and disabled signal lamps. An open filament on a signal lamp that should be on (Hot Filament Detection), is detected by the presence of two conditions: correct voltage levels on the lamp output, in combination with, low DC/DC converter output current levels. An open filament on a signal lamp that should be off (Cold Filament Detection) is detected by the failure to discharge a test capacitor that is connected to the output for a short period of time. Thus, the VLD-C6S provides circuitry that allows the detection of the filament integrity without lighting a signal lamp that should be off. Upon detection of an open filament, the VPM control will disable the lamp output and indicate an open filament to the user. If the bulb is replaced, the VPM will allow the signal lamp to be enabled after passing a minimum of 30 seconds of feedback checks. Feedback Checks The VLD-C6S provides feedback circuitry that allows the VPM to monitor and report the integrity of the lamp output switch operation. The response to a detected hardware failure is a shutdown of all lamp outputs on the module. During a module shutdown, the VLD-C6S Module ceases to drive lamps for a minimum of 30 seconds before the VPM attempts a VLD-C6S Module recovery. If the feedback checks are successful during recovery, the VLD-C6S will resume driving signal lamps as long as the feedback circuitry continues to indicate proper lamp output switch operation. 1-78 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction Block Diagram Theory As previously mentioned, the VLD-C6S has six lamp drive outputs, organized in two banks of three outputs. Since the operation of the two banks are identical, only the operation of bank 1 is discussed. Isolated DC/DC Converter Figure 1-64, VLD-C6S Block Diagram. The VPM controls the lamp drive voltage level needed to drive the signal lamps. The DC/DC Converter supplies the proper lamp drive voltage (according to the level specified by the VPM) to the Lamp Output Switch and isolates the lamp output power from the battery input. Adjustment of the lamp drive voltage is accomplished using the CDU-1. Lamp Output Switch The Lamp Output Switch contains three lamp switches. Only one output per bank can be energized at any given time. The lamp enable signal from the VPM enables (turns on) the appropriate Lamp Output which, in turn, drives the signal lamp using the voltage supplied by the DC/DC Converter. Non-Vital Input/Output In addition to its lamp driving capability, the VLD-C6S also has four non-vital I/O ports. Each of the four bidirectional ports can be configured as an input or an output. If used as an output the VPM can energize the output with 12V. If used as an input, voltages from 5 to 16 can energize the input. NVIO port 1 can be used for a POR (Power Off Relay) function, with an additional module for the AC interface, typically the ACP. The non-vital I/O ports can also be used for double track approach lighting and other non-vital functions implemented by non-vital relays and non-vital devices. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-79 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Indicators Figure 1-65, VLD-C6S Indicators. 1-80 A BANK 1 LAMP: Appropriate LED is lit when lamp of bank 1 is active (lit). B NON-VITAL INPUTS / OUTPUTS: Appropriate LED is lit I/O is energized. C HEALTH: LED is lit when module is functioning properly. D BANK 2 LAMP: Appropriate LED is lit when lamp of bank 2 is active (lit). © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction VLD-R16S Vital Lamp Driver Module P/N 251381-000 WARNING Power for the VLD-R16S lamp outputs via Lamp B/Lamp N must be supplied through the contacts of an AREMA compatible vital relay that is controlled by the VSSR driver circuit (VSSR1 and VSSR2 outputs) on the respective VLD-R16S module. The VLD-R16S (Vital Lamp Driver) Module is used to drive signal lamps in any signaling application. The module has sixteen lamp outputs, organized as two banks of eight outputs each, and is capable of energizing all outputs on both banks simultaneously as long as the total current output remains at or below 20 Amps per bank, 40 Amps for the module. Each lamp output is capable of driving single filament, incandescent lamps from 18 to 28 Watts or GELcore Model 92 LED signals, in any combination, as long as the maximum current per bank is not exceeded. Signals can be driven at varying distances depending upon wire gauge, bulb wattage, use of common returns, etc. Refer to the tables in Section 2 for more information on specific wire lengths. VLD-R16S modules are able to be removed and installed while the ElectroLogIXS system is powered on. Thus, a failed VLD-R16S module may be replaced and returned to normal operation without disrupting other functions provided by the system. Block Diagram Theory Figure 1-66, VLD-R16S Block Diagram 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-81 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 The voltage level delivered to the actual signal lamp itself is controlled via the Lamp Power Input voltage level. The Monitor Circuitry monitors the voltage level of the Lamp Power input and, if too low, disables the VSSR output and shuts the lamp bank down. Lamp Power Inputs Each lamp bank is supplied Lamp Power via a dedicated Lamp Power input. The Lamp Power input is a two-wire 12 VDC input (nominal) with an operational range 9.5 VDC to 16.5 VDC and a Lamp Power neutral (return) reference. The Lamp Power inputs are able to withstand application of 20 VDC in either polarity without damaging the module. The voltage level delivered to the actual signal lamp itself is controlled via the Lamp Power Input voltage level. The Monitor Circuitry monitors the voltage level of the Lamp Power input and, if too low, disables the VSSR output and shuts the lamp bank down. Lamp Outputs The Lamp Outputs switch the Lamp Power input of the lamp bank to the appropriate Lamp Output under control of the VPM. All Lamp Outputs in a bank can be energized simultaneously as long as the total bank current does not exceed 20 Amps. Each Lamp Output has short circuit protection (a short will not damage the module) and is able to survive externally applied voltages of 20 VDC in either polarity. A shorted lamp output or an external voltage that causes a lamp output to appear to be on when it should be off will cause the Lamp Bank to shut down. The Lamp Bank will return to normal operation after the short has been corrected or the external, positive polarity voltage source has been removed and the lamp bank has been down for at least 30 seconds. An externally applied reverse polarity voltage may cause the protective fuse to blow for the associated lamp bank. Normal operation returns once the fuse is replaced. VSSR Outputs The Vital Signal Stop (VSSR) outputs are two-wire, vital outputs that deliver output voltage in the range of 9.5 VDC to 16.5 VDC into relay loads from 50 Ω to 1150 Ω. The VSSR outputs are designed to allow independent operation. However, they can be programmed by the user to operate in a combined fashion should the application require it. The VSSR Outputs are powered by the ElectroLogIXS equipment power (not the Lamp Power Inputs) and are able to withstand short circuit, open circuit, or external application of 32 VDC positive polarity for a period of 24 hours. Monitor Circuitry Each lamp bank incorporates Monitor Circuitry that provides the VPM with the voltage and current levels of the Lamp Outputs, the voltage level of the Lamp Power input, and the voltage level of the internal module circuitry. If the Monitor Circuitry detects that the internal module circuitry voltage has dropped below the operational level, it disables the VSSR outputs for both lamp banks without VPM interaction. 1-82 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction Filament Checks The VLD-R16S provides monitor circuitry that allows the VPM to monitor, report, and respond to the filament integrity of all signal lamps installed. The circuitry allows open filaments to be detected on energized and de-energized lamps. An open filament on a signal lamp that should be on is detected by observing low output current while the energizing output voltage is being applied. For signal lamps that are off, an open filament is detected by energizing the output for a short (less than 2 milliseconds) time and observing the current on the output. This approach confirms filament integrity while allowing the signal lamp to remain off. Upon detection of any open filament, the VPM disables the lamp output and indicates the open filament condition to the user. When the bulb is replaced, the VPM allows the signal lamp to be energized if the bulb has been off for a minimum of 30 seconds. Feedback Checks The VLD-R16S contains feedback circuitry to allow the VPM to monitor and report on the integrity of the lamp output circuitry. The response to a detected fault (off when should be on, on when should be off, etc.) is a de-energizing of all the Lamp Outputs and a disabling of the Vital Signal Stop Relay (VSSR) output associated with that lamp bank. After a lamp bank has been shut down, the VPM disables the eight Lamp Outputs and the VSSR output for the bank for a minimum of 30 seconds. After 30 seconds have passed, the VSSR output is enabled and the VPM performs a health check of the lamp bank. If the lamp bank passes the health checks, the VLD-R16S resumes normal operation. Otherwise, if the lamp bank fails one or more health checks, the VSSR output is disabled and the VPM waits another 30 seconds before retrying. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-83 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Indicators Figure 1-67, VLD-R16S Indicators 1-84 A VSSR LED for Bank 1. LED is lit when Bank 1 VSSR is energized. B Bank 1 Lamp Output LEDs. LED is lit when corresponding Lamp Output is energized. C VSSR LED for Bank 2. LED is lit when Bank 2 VSSR is energized. D Bank 2 Lamp Output LEDs. LED is lit when corresponding Lamp Output is energized. E Bank Health LEDs. LEDs are lit when associated VSSR is energized and all internal self tests pass for that bank. F Module health LED. LED is lit when both banks are healthy. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction VIO-1010S Track Code Select Input / Track Code Decoder Output Module P/N: 251132-000 The VIO-1010S (Track Code Select Input/Track Code Decoder Output) Module provides an interface between a relay-based interlocking and the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system. The VIO-1010S has 10 code select inputs and 10 decoder outputs to interface with relay-based systems. Inputs This module produces an isolated battery voltage (REF+ and REF-) used to energize an input. This battery voltage used with vital relay contacts accomplish code selection. An open relay contact is defined as a deenergized input, and a closed relay contact is defined as an energized input. Based on the relay contact inputs (open/closed), the application equations select the code(s) to be transmitted. The isolated battery voltage connected to a track code select input will be de-energized when it is below 5.5 VDC and energized when it is above 7.5 VDC. Outputs With a battery supply voltage of 13.5 VDC and a track code decoder output connected to a 500 ohm load, a track code decoder output typically supplies 15 to 16.5 VDC (depending on the number of outputs energized) with no more than 100 mV peak to peak ripple. Each track code decoder output is capable of driving a load impedance of 150 ohms or greater. The VIO-1010S is capable of simultaneously energizing up to five track decoder outputs. Block Diagram Theory Track Code Select Inputs The track code select information from the relay-based interlocking system is sent to the Surge Protection Circuit. Surge Protection The Surge Protection Circuit protects the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system from voltage surges that may occur on the track code select inputs. The Surge Protection Circuits prevents damage if voltages exceed 32 VDC or are applied in reverse polarity, to a track code select input. From the Surge Protection Circuit, the track code select information is sent to the Signature Decoder Circuit. Figure 1-68, VIO-1010S Block Diagram. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-85 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Signature Generator The Signature Generator Circuit generates a continuous data string which is sent to the Signature Decoder Circuit. Signature Decoder The Signature Decoder Circuit mixes the analog track code select input voltage with a continuous data string generated by the Signature Generator Circuit. The resultant data is a 16-bit word for each input that is sent to the VPM for processing. Based on these 16-bit words, the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 application software determines which inputs are energized and which codes to send on the tracks. Isolated DC/DC Converter The Isolated DC/DC Converter isolates the track code decoder outputs from battery and supplies the voltage necessary to drive the outputs. Output Switches The Output Switches control which outputs are energized or de-energized. From the Output Switch Circuit, the track code decoder output voltages are sent to the Surge Protection Circuit. Surge Protection The Surge Protection Circuit protects the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system from voltage surges that may occur on the track code decoder outputs. The Surge Protection Circuits prevent damage if voltages do not exceed 32 VDC. Track Code Decoder Outputs From the Surge Protection Circuit, the Track Code Decoder Output information is sent to the relay-based interlocking system. Based on this information, the relay logic in the relay-based system determines which track codes were received by the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. 1-86 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction Indicators Figure 1-69, VIO-1010S Indicators. A CODE 1 - CODE M SEL: Track Code Select Input LEDs. LED is lit when corresponding input is active. B Health Indicator: LED is lit when the module functions properly. C CODE 1 - CODE M RELAY: Track Code Decoder Output LEDs. LED is lit when corresponding output is active. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-87 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 VIO-44S Vital Input/Output Module P/N: 251134-000 The VIO-44S (Vital Input/Output) Module contains four general purpose, two-wire, vital inputs and outputs. It is used for vital system control by monitoring vital inputs and supplying vital outputs according to the application equations. The inputs can be used for switch status, slide fences, and other vital controls while the outputs can be used for vital control of switch machines and other equipment. Block Diagram Theory Figure 1-70, VIO-44S Block Diagram. Surge Protection The Surge Protection protects the VIO-44S from power surges that may occur at a Vital Input or Vital Output. Isolated DC/DC Converter The Isolated DC/DC Converter provides isolation between the supply battery and the Vital Outputs. Vital Input The Vital Inputs are general purpose two-wire inputs for the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. When an input rises above 8.0 ±0.5 volts, it is considered energized. The Vital Input remains energized until the input voltage falls below 6.5 ±0.5 volts. Vital inputs will accept voltages up to 32 VDC. 1-88 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction Signature Generator The Signature Generator generates a continuous data string which is sent to the Signature Decoder for processing. Signature Decoder The Signature Decoder Circuit mixes the input signals with a continuous data string generated by the Signature Generator Circuit. The resultant data that is sent to the VPM for processing. Based on this data, the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 determines the input information. Vital Output The Vital Outputs are general purpose, two-wire outputs for the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. With a battery supply voltage of 13.5 VDC and a vital output connected to a 500 ohm load, a vital output typically supplies 12 to 13 VDC (depending on the number of outputs energized) with no more than 100mV peak-to-peak of ripple. Each vital output is capable of driving load impedances of 150 ohms or greater. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-89 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Indicators Figure 1-71, VIO-44S Indicators. 1-90 A VITAL INPUT: LED is lit when input is active. B Health Indicator: LED is lit when the module functions properly. C VITAL OUT: LED is lit when output is active. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction VIO-44R Vital Input/Output Module P/N 251379-000 The VIO-44R (Vital Input/Output) Module contains four redundant general purpose, two wire, Vital Inputs and outputs. It is used for vital system control by monitoring vital inputs and supplying vital outputs according to the application equations. The inputs can be used for switch status, slide fences, and other vital controls while the outputs can be used for vital control of switch machines and other equipment. Surge Protection The Surge Protection protects the VIO-44R from power surges that may occur at a Vital Input or Vital Output. Isolated DC/DC Converter The Isolated DC/DC Converter provides isolation between the supply battery and the vital outputs. Vital Input The Vital Inputs are redundant general purpose two-wire inputs for the ElectroLogIXS. When an input rises above 8.0 ± 0.5 Volts, it is considered energized. The vital input remains energized until the input voltage falls below 6.5 ± 0.5 Volts. Vital inputs will accept voltages up to 32 VDC. When a vital input fails the module transfers to the redundant vital input. If a failure occurs where the module loses the vital input redundancy, the IN REDUNDANCY LED will be turned off. Signature Generator The Signature Generator generates a continuous data string that is sent to the signature decoder for processing. Signature Decoder The Signature Decoder Circuit mixes the input signals with a continuous data string generated by the signature generator circuit. The resultant data is then sent to the VPM for processing. Based on this data, the ElectroLogIXS determines the input information. Slow Release/Slow Pick Each vital input can have a Slow Release and/or Slow Pick time set via the CDU or application logic. The slow release and slow pick times can be set from 0-30 seconds in 1 second increments. The slow release and slow pick times have a tolerance of ± 0.5 seconds. If the slow release/pick minimum and maximum are set at the same number in the application then the time is not selectable through the CDU. Vital Output The vital outputs are redundant general purpose, two-wire outputs for the ElectroLogIXS. With a battery supply voltage of 13.5 VDC and a two wire vital output connected to a 500 ohm load, a two-wire vital output typically supplies 12 to 13 VDC (depending on the number of outputs energized with no more than 300 mV peak-to-peak of ripple. All the Vital Outputs are capable of driving load impedances of 50 ohms. When a vital output fails all the vital outputs are shutdown for at least 30 seconds. After 30 seconds the vital outputs are transferred to the redundant vital outputs and they are set back to their energized or deenergized state. The vital outputs can be forced to switch to the redundant bank using the CDU. If a failure occurs where the module loses the vital output redundancy then the OUT REDUNDANCY LED is turned off. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-91 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Figure 1-72, VIO-44R Indicators 1-92 A Vital In: LED is lit when an input is energized B Vital Out: LED is lit when an output is energized C In Redundancy: LED is lit when health of both the active and redundant inputs are functioning properly. D Out Redundancy: LED is lit when health of both the active and redundant outputs are functioning properly. E Health: LED is lit when the module is able to function properly. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction VIO-86S Vital Input/Output Module P/N 251380-000 The VIO-86S (Vital Input/Output) Module contains eight gracefully degrading general purpose, two wire, vital inputs and six gracefully degrading general purpose, two wire, vital outputs. It is used for vital system control by monitoring vital inputs and supplying vital outputs according to the application equations. The inputs can be used for switch status, slide fences, and other vital controls while the outputs can be used for the vital control of switch machines and other equipment. VIO-86S modules are able to be removed and installed while the ElectroLogIXS system is powered on. Thus, a failed VIO-86S module may be replaced and returned to normal operation without disrupting other functions provided by the system. Surge Protection The Surge Protection protects the VIO-86S from power surges that may occur at a vital input or vital output. Isolated DC/DC Converter The Isolated DC/DC Converter provides isolation between the supply battery and the vital outputs. Vital Input The Vital Inputs are general purpose two-wire inputs for the ElectroLogIXS. When an input rises above 8.0 ± 0.5 Volts, it is considered energized. The vital input remains energized until the input voltage falls below 6.5 ± 0.5 Volts. Vital inputs will accept voltages up to 32 VDC. Signature Generator The Signature Generator generates a continuous data string that is sent to the Signature Decoder for processing. Signature Decoder The Signature Decoder Circuit mixes the input signals with a continuous data string generated by the Signature Generator Circuit. The resultant data is then sent to the VPM for processing. Based on this data, the ElectroLogIXS determines the input information. Slow Release/Slow Pick Each vital input can have a Slow Release and/or Slow Pick time set via the CDU or application logic. The slow release and slow pick times can be set from 0-30 seconds in 1 second increments. The slow release and slow pick times have a tolerance of ± 0.5 seconds. If the Slow Release/Pick Minimum and Maximum are set at the same number in the application, the time is not selectable through the CDU. Vital Output The Vital Outputs are gracefully degrading general purpose, two-wire outputs for the ElectroLogIXS. The vital outputs are grouped into 2 banks of 3 vital outputs. Each group is independent of the other and therefore can be shut down while not effecting the operation of the other bank. With a battery supply voltage of 13.5 VDC and a vital output connected to a 500 ohm load, a vital output typically supplies 12 to 13 VDC (depending on the number of outputs energized with no more than 300 mV peak-to-peak of ripple. All the Vital Outputs are capable of driving load impedances of 50 ohms. If a vital output fails, only the three vital outputs on the same bank as the failed vital output are shutdown. The remaining three vital outputs remain functional. When a bank has a vital output failure, the associated BANK HEALTH LED is turned off. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-93 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Figure 1-73, VIO-86S Indicators A Vital In: LED is lit when an input is energized B Vital Out: LED is lit when an output is energized C Bank 1 Health: LED is lit when Bank 1 vital outputs are functioning properly. D Bank 2 Health: LED is lit when Bank 2 vital outputs are functioning properly. E Health: LED is lit when the module is able to function properly. Note: 1-94 In some installations there is the possibility of radiated interference from nearby equipment. If engineering determines that a particular installation is susceptible, it is recommended that the provided ferrites be installed on all Input and Output cabling connected to the personality module. Place the ferrite around each I/O cable as close to the personality module as possible. If ferrites are placed in series, ensure they are as close as possible to each other. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction CAB-16S Cab Enable Output Module P/N: 251334-000 The CAB-16S (Cab Enable Output) Module provides 16 outputs to drive external cab generators. Block Diagram Theory Figure 1-74, CAB-16S Block Diagram Cab Output The Cab Outputs employ closed loop feedback, allowing the VPM to verify that the actual cab output agrees with the intended cab output. The Cab Outputs are single-wire outputs used to drive cab signal generators. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-95 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Indicators A B 373-0192 Figure 1-75, CAB-16S Indicators 1-96 A CAB OUT: LED is lit when transmitting cab codes. B HEALTH: LED is lit when module is functioning properly. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction ElectroLogIXS Chassis The ElectroLogIXS chassis contains the backplane and personality modules. The backplane is designed to allow any large module (VTI-2S, VLD-C6S, VLD-R16S, VIO-44S, VIO-44R, VIO-86S, VIO-1010S, and CAB-16S) to be installed in any of the 9 slots. Personality modules are installed into the upper section of the chassis and define which large module is installed in a slot for a particular application. The lower slots are used for the system modules (VPM, CPS, CIO-1A, CIO-CLA, CIO-2A, CIO-2AB, CIO-MDA, CIO-PCA and GFD-1). CHASSIS PERSONALITY MODULES (MAXIMUM OF 9) SLOT 1 SLOT 9 BACKPLANE CPS-2 SLOT FUTURE EXPANSION VPM SLOT RMM-1 CI OR UCI-3 CIO-2A OR CIO-2A OR CIO-PCA OR CIO-PCA OR (FUTURE) MODULE CIO-MDA CIO-1A OR CIO-MDA SLOT SLOT CIO-CLA SLOT GFD-1 SLOT Figure 1-76, ElectroLogIXS VLC 9-Slot Chassis and Backplane (P/N: 300752-000) 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-97 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 CIO-1A OR CIO-2A OR CIO-CLA CIO-2A OR CIO-PCA OR SLOT CIO-PCA OR CIO-MDA CIO-MDA SLOT SLOT Figure 1-76a, ElectroLogIXS VLC 4-Slot Chassis and Backplane (P/N: 251464-000) CI or UCI-3 MODULE ON/OFF SWITCH CHASSIS CIO-1A or CIO-CLA SLOT PERSONALITY MODULE CIO-2A OR CIO-PCA OR CIO-MDA SLOT CIO-2A OR CIO-PCA OR CIO-MDA SLOT BACKPLANE SLOT 1 VPM SLOT CPS GFD-1 Figure 1-76b, ElectroLogIXS VLC 1-Slot Chassis and Backplane (P/N: 251473-000) 1-98 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction CI or UCI-3, Power Switch, and Fuses The lower right section of the ElectroLogIXS 9-Slot chassis and upper left section of the 1-Slot and 4-Slot chassis is where the power switch, CI or UCI-3(chassis information) module and the fuses are located. The fuses on the ElectroLogIXS backplane are readily available automotive style fuses. CI-1 or UCI-3 MODULE Figure 1-77, CI or UCI-3, Power Switch, and Fuses 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-99 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 VTI-2S Personality Module P/N: 227442-000 The VTI-2S personality module is installed in slots that will require a VTI-2S module. It provides the external field connectors for the VTI-2S module. Figure 1-78, VTI-2S Personality Module 1-100 A - Track Interface Connector - J3 B - Cab and Vital Input Connector - J4 C - 15 amp battery fuse D - Battery Power LED: Lit to indicate battery power is present E - VTI-2S module keying pins F - Backplane connector - J1 G - VTI-2S connector - J2 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction VTI-2S Connectors Track Interface Connector - J3 The Track Interface Connector J3 is used to connect the VTI track circuits. Pre-wired cable assemblies are available in either 4-foot lengths (P/N: 814-096000-016) or 8-foot lengths (P/N: 814-096000-017) to connect the VTI track circuits to the TIP-2 panel. Track Interface Connector - J3 Signal Description Pin TK1+ Track 1+ 1 TK1- Track 1- 2 TK2+ Track 2+ 4 TK2- Track 2- 5 Cab and Vital Input Connector - J4 The Cab and Vital input connector is used to connect the VTI Cab outputs and Vital inputs. The field mating connector is P/N 032773-652 with keying pins P/N 032773-492. A mating connector, with keying pins installed, is supplied with the Personality module for field wiring. Cab and Vital Input Connector - J4 Signal Description CAB1+ Cab Output Enable 1+ 1 CAB1- Cab Output Enable 1- 2 CAB2+ Cab Output Enable 2+ 4 CAB2- Cab Output Enable 2- 5 IN1+ Vital Input #1+ 7 IN1- Vital Input #1- 8 IN2+ Vital Input #2+ 10 IN2- Vital Input #2- 11 100373-010 AR0 Pin © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-101 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 VLD-C6S Personality Module P/N: 227443-000 The VLD-C6S personality module is installed in slots that will require a VLD-C6S module. It provides the external field connectors for the VLD-C6S module. Figure 1-79, VLD-C6S Personality Module 1-102 A - Lamp Connector - J3 B - Non-Vital I/O and Battery Connector - J4 C - 20 amp battery fuse D - Battery Power LED: Lit to indicate battery power is present E - VLD-C6S module keying pins F - Backplane connector - J1 G - VLD-C6S connector - J2 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction VLD-C6S Connectors Lamp Connector - J3 The lamp connector is used to connect the VLD lamp output to the lamps. The mating connector is P/N 132338-201 with keying pins P/N 132338-901. A mating connector, with keying pins installed, is supplied with the personality module for field wiring. Lamp Connector - J3 Signal Description Pin B1L1 Bank one, Lamp one 1 B1L2 Bank one, Lamp two 2 B1L3 Bank one, Lamp three 3 COM1 Bank one common 4 B2L1 Bank two, Lamp one 6 B2L2 Bank two, Lamp two 7 B2L3 Bank two, Lamp three 8 COM2 Bank two common 9 Non-Vital I/O and Battery Connector - J4 The non-vital I/O and battery connector is used to connect the VLD non-vital I/O and battery power. The mating connector is P/N 032773-653 and keying pins P/N 032773-492. The VLD has a battery power input separate from the ElectroLogIXS battery power. A mating connector, with keying pins installed, is supplied with the personality module for field wiring. Non-Vital I/O and Battery Connector - J4 Signal Description NVIO1 non-vital I/O one 1 NVIO2 non-vital I/O two 2 NVIO3 non-vital I/O three 3 NVIO4 non-vital I/O four 4 B Battery Plus 6 N Battery Return 7 100373-010 AR0 PIN © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-103 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 VLD-R16S Personality Module P/N 227539-000 Figure 1-80, VLD-R16S Personality Module A Lamp Output Connectors J3 (Bank 1) and J4 (Bank 2) B Lamp Power Input Connections C VSSR Connections D Fuses: 2 for Lamp Power, 1 for VSSR Power E VLD-R16S Keying Pins F VLD-R16S Connector J2 G Backplane Connector J1 H Module Power LED The VLD-R16S personality module is installed in slots that require a VLD-R16S module. The personality module provides the external field connectors for the VLD-R16S as well as the backplane connections, mechanical keying protection, and module protection fuses. Each Lamp bank has a 30 Amp fuse and the VSSR connections are protected by a 3 Amp fuse. 1-104 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction VLD-R16S Connectors Lamp, Lamp Power Input, and VSSR Connectors - J3 and J4 Lamp Connector - J3 Signal Description Pin Lamp 1 Bank 1, Lamp 1 Output 1 Lamp 2 Bank 1, Lamp 2 Output 2 Lamp 3 Bank 1, Lamp 3 Output 3 Lamp 4 Bank 1, Lamp 4 Output 4 Lamp 5 Bank 1, Lamp 5 Output 5 Lamp 6 Bank 1, Lamp 6 Output 6 Lamp 7 Bank 1, Lamp 7 Output 7 Lamp 8 Bank 1, Lamp 8 Output 8 N/A Connection Not Used 9 LampB1 Lamp Power Input, Bank 1 10 LampB1 Lamp Power Input , Bank 1 11 LampN1 Lamp Neutral, Bank 1 12 N/A Connection Not Used 13 VSSR1+ Vital Signal Stop Relay Output Bank 1, Positive 14 VSSR1- Vital Signal Stop Relay Output Bank 1, Return 15 Lamp Connector - J4 Signal Description Pin Lamp 1 Bank 2, Lamp 9 Output 1 Lamp 2 Bank 2, Lamp 10 Output 2 Lamp 3 Bank 2, Lamp 11Output 3 Lamp 4 Bank 2, Lamp 12 Output 4 Lamp 5 Bank 2, Lamp 13 Output 5 Lamp 6 Bank 2, Lamp 14 Output 6 Lamp 7 Bank 2, Lamp 15 Output 7 Lamp 8 Bank 2, Lamp 16 Output 8 N/A Connection Not Used 9 LampB1 Lamp Power Input, Bank 2 10 LampB1 Lamp Power Input , Bank 2 11 LampN1 Lamp Neutral, Bank 2 12 N/A Connection Not Used 13 VSSR2+ Vital Signal Stop Relay Output Bank 2, Positive 14 VSSR2- Vital Signal Stop Relay Output Bank 2, Return 15 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-105 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 VIO-44S Personality Module P/N: 227444-000 The VIO-44S personality module is installed in slots that will require a VIO-44S module. It provides the external field connectors for the VIO-44S module. Figure 1-81, VIO-44S Personality Module 1-106 A - Vital Output Connector - J3 B - Vital Input Connector - J4 C - 3 amp battery fuse D - Battery Power LED: Lit to indicate battery power is present E - VIO-44S module keying pins F - Backplane connector - J1 G - VIO-44S connector - J2 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction VIO-44S Connectors Vital Output Connector - J3 The vital output connector is used to connect the VIO-44S vital output. The mating connector is P/N 032773-652 with keyed pins 032773-492. A mating connector, with keying pins installed, is supplied with the VIO-44S module for field wiring. Vital Output Connector - J3 Signal Description Pin Out 1+ Vital Output #1+ 1 Out 1- Vital Output #1- 2 Out 2+ Vital Output #2+ 4 Out 2- Vital Output #2- 5 Out 3+ Vital Output #3+ 7 Out 3- Vital Output #3- 8 Out 4+ Vital Output #4+ 10 Out 4- Vital Output #4- 11 Vital Input Connector - J4 The vital input connector is used to connect the VIO-44S vital input. The mating connector is P/N 032773-652 with keyed pins 032773-492. A mating connector, with keying pins installed, is supplied with the VIO-44S module for field wiring. Vital Input Connector - J4 Signal Description IN1+ Vital Input #1+ 1 IN1- Vital Input #1- 2 IN2+ Vital Input #2+ 4 IN2- Vital Input #2- 5 IN3+ Vital Input #3+ 7 IN3- Vital Input #3- 8 IN4+ Vital Input #4+ 10 IN4- Vital Input #4- 11 100373-010 AR0 Pin © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-107 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 VIO-44R Personality Module P/N 227538-000 The VIO-44R personality module is installed in slots that will require a VIO-44R module. It provides the external field connectors for the VIO-44R module. Figure 1-82, VIO-44R Personality Module 1-108 A -Vital Input Connector - J3 B -Vital Output Connector - J4 C -3 Amp Battery Fuse D -Battery Power LED, when lit indicates battery power is present E -VIO-44R module keying pins F -VIO-44R connector - J2 G -Backplane connector - J1 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction VIO-44R Connectors Vital Input Connector -J3 The Vital Input connector is used to connect the VIO-44R Vital Input. The mating connector is P/N 032773-652 with keyed pins 032776-492. A mating connector, with keying pins installed, is supplied with the VIO-44R module for field wiring. Vital Input Connector – J3 Signal Description Pin In 1+ Vital Input #1+ 1 In 1- Vital Input #1- 2 In 2+ Vital Input #2+ 4 In 2- Vital Input #2- 5 In 3+ Vital Input #3+ 7 In 3- Vital Input #3- 8 In 4+ Vital Input #4+ 10 In 4- Vital Input #4- 11 Vital Output Connector - J4 The Vital Output connector is used to connect the VIO-44R Vital Output. The mating connector is P/N 032773-652 with keyed pins 032773-492. A mating connector, with keying pins installed, is supplied with the VIO-44R module for field wiring. Vital Output Connector – J4 Signal Description Pin Out 1+ Vital Output #1+ 1 Out 1- Vital Output #1- 2 Out 2+ Vital Output #2+ 4 Out 2- Vital Output #2- 5 Out 3+ Vital Output #3+ 7 Out 3- Vital Output #3- 8 Out 4+ Vital Output #4+ 10 Out 4- Vital Output #4- 11 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-109 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 VIO-86S Personality Module P/N 227537-000 The VIO-86S personality module is installed in slots that will require a VIO-86S module. It provides the external field connectors for the VIO-86S module. Figure 1-83, VIO-86S Personality Module A -Vital Output Connector - J4 E -Battery Power LED, when lit indicates battery power is present B -Vital Input/Output Connector - J5 F -VIO-86S Module Keying Pins C -Vital Input Connector - J3 G -VIO-86S Connector - J2 D -4 Amp Battery Fuse H -Backplane Connector - J1 1-110 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction VIO-86S Connectors Vital Input Connector -J3 The Vital Input connector is used to connect the VIO-86S Vital Input. The mating connector is P/N 032773518 with keyed pins 132773-500. A mating connector, with keying pins installed, is supplied with the VIO86S module for field wiring. Vital Input Connector – J3 Signal In 1+ In 1In 2+ In 2In 3+ In 3In 4+ In 4In 5+ In 5- Description Vital Input 1+ Vital Input 1Vital Input 2+ Vital Input 2Vital Input 3+ Vital Input 3Vital Input 4+ Vital Input 4Vital Input 5+ Vital Input 5- Pin 1 2 5 6 9 10 13 14 17 18 Vital Input/Output Connector - J4 The Vital Input/output connector is used to connect the VIO-86S Vital Inputs and Vital Output. The mating connector is P/N 032773-518 with keyed pins 132773-500. A mating connector, with keying pins installed, is supplied with the VIO-86S module for field wiring. Vital Input/Output Connector – J4 Signal In 6+ In 6In 7+ In 7In 8+ In 8Out 6+ Out 6- 100373-010 AR0 Description Vital Input 6+ Vital Input 6Vital Input 7+ Vital Input 7Vital Input 8+ Vital Input 8Vital Output 6+ Vital Output 6- Pin 1 2 5 6 9 10 17 18 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-111 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Vital Output Connector - J5 The Vital Output connector is used to connect the VIO-86S Vital Output. The mating connector is P/N 032773-518 with keyed pins 132773-500. A mating connector, with keying pins installed, is supplied with the VIO-86S module for field wiring. Vital Output Connector – J5 Signal Out 1+ Out 1Out 2+ Out 2Out 3+ Out 3Out 4+ Out 4Out 5+ Out 5Note: 1-112 Description Vital Output 1+ Vital Output 1Vital Output 2+ Vital Output 2Vital Output 3+ Vital Output 3Vital Output 4+ Vital Output 4Vital Output 5+ Vital Output 5- Pin 1 2 5 6 9 10 13 14 17 18 In some installations there is the possibility of radiated interference from nearby equipment. If engineering determines that a particular installation is susceptible, it is recommended that the provided ferrites be installed on all Input and Output cabling connected to the personality module. Place the ferrite around each I/O cable as close to the personality module as possible. If ferrites are placed in series, ensure they are as close as possible to each other. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction VIO-1010S Personality Module P/N: 227445-000 The VIO-1010S personality module is installed in slots that will require a VIO-1010S module. It provides the external field connectors for the VIO-1010S module. Figure 1-84, VIO-1010S Personality Module 100373-010 AR0 A - Code Output Connector - J3 B - Code Input Connector - J4 C - 3 amp battery fuse D - Battery Power LED: Lit to indicate battery power is present E - VIO-1010S module keying pins F - Backplane connector - J1 G - VIO-1010S connector - J2 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-113 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 VIO-1010S Connectors Code Output Connector - J3 The code output connector is used to connect the VIO-1010 code outputs. The mating connector is P/N 032773-652 with keying pins P/N 032773-492. A mating connector with keying pins installed is supplied with the personality module for field wiring. Code Output Connector - J3 Signal Description Pin OCom Output Common 1 C1O Code 1 Out 2 C2O Code 2 Out 3 C3O Code 3 Out 4 C4O Code 4 Out 5 C5O Code 5 Out 6 HRO HR Out 7 C7O Code 7 Out 8 C8O Code 8 Out 9 C9O Code 9 Out 10 CMO Code M Out 11 Code Input Connector - J4 The code input connector is used to connect the VIO-1010 code inputs. The mating connector is P/N 032773-654 with keying pins P/N 032773-492. A mating connector with keying pins installed is supplied with the personality module for field wiring. Code Input Connector - J4 1-114 Signal Description Pin REF - Negative Reference Voltage 1 C1S Code 1 Input 2 C5S Code 5 Input 3 CMS Code M Input 4 C6S Code 6 Input 5 REF + Positive Reference Voltage 7 SCom Input Common 9 C2S Code 2 Input 10 C3S Code 3 Input 11 C4S Code 4 Input 12 C7S Code 7 Input 13 C8S Code 8 Input 14 C9S Code 9 Input 15 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction CAB-16S Personality Module P/N: 227466-000 The CAB-16S personality module is installed in slots that will require a CAB-16S module. It provides the external field connectors for the CAB-16S module. Figure 1-85, CAB-16S Personality Module 100373-010 AR0 A - Cab 1-8 Output Connector - J3 B - Cab 9-16 Output Connector - J4 C - 3 amp battery fuse D - Battery Power LED: Lit to indicate battery power is present E - CAB-16S module keying pins F - Backplane connector - J1 G - CAB-16S connector - J2 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-115 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 CAB-16S Connectors Cab 1-8 Output Connector - J3 The Cab 1-8 output connector is used to connect the CAB-16S Cab 1-8 outputs. The mating connector is P/N 032773-654 with keying pins P/N 032773-492. A mating connector with keying pins installed is supplied with the personality module for field wiring. Cab 1-8 Output Connector - J3 Signal Description Pin CAB1 Cab 1 Output 1 CAB2 Cab 2 Output 3 CAB3 Cab 3 Output 5 CAB4 Cab 4Output 7 CAB5 Cab 5 Output 9 CAB6 Cab 6 Output 11 CAB7 Cab 7 Output 13 CAB8 Cab 8 Output 15 Cab 9-16 Output Connector - J4 The Cab 9-16 output connector is used to connect the CAB-16S Cab 9-16 outputs. The mating connector is P/N 032773-654 with keying pins P/N 032773-492. A mating connector with keying pins installed is supplied with the personality module for field wiring. Cab 9-16 Output Connector - J4 1-116 Signal Description Pin CAB9 Cab 9 Output 1 CAB10 Cab 10 Output 3 CAB11 Cab 11 Output 5 CAB12 Cab 12 Output 7 CAB13 Cab 13 Output 9 CAB14 Cab 14 Output 11 CAB15 Cab 15 Output 13 CAB16 Cab 16 Output 15 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction EC5 Chassis The open-frame EC5 chassis allows easy access to all modules. Figure 1-86, EC5 Chassis Backplane The modules plug into the Backplane. The one-piece Backplane has minimal interconnections, which helps to make the EC5 more reliable. The plug couplers can address wiring from either side of the Backplane, depending on the way it is mounted. There are two types of Backplanes used for the EC5. They are: • BP-1 is used for Repeater, Colorlight, and Lock systems. • BP-2 is used for Endbox systems. General Features All Backplanes have the general features listed below: Power Power components are located in the upper left corner of the Backplane: • Battery (B) and Negative (N) AAR terminals. • 5 Vdc ON/OFF switch. • Automobile-style fuses (protect individual modules). • Test points for +5 Vdc and COM. +12 Vdc is supplied to the I/O module slots through the Backplane. Fuses 1, 2, 3, and 4 protect the system in event of an over-current condition. Chassis ID DIP Shunt Pack The Chassis ID DIP Shunt Pack is located on the Backplane under the CI or UCI-3 Module. This is configured with the same number as the Chassis ID Number in the Application EPROM (that is plugged into the CI or UCI-3 Module). 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-117 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Figure 1-87, DIP Shunt Pack EEPROMs Three Configuration EEPROMs contain FRC (Field Related Configuration) data. The FRC information is entered by the user via the CDU-1. Data is written/read to/from these EEPROMs by the VPM-1 Module. This data stored may be as simple as the date and time, or as specific as the track voltage/current settings. Backplane (BP-1) Global Signaling Global Signaling Figure 1-88, EC5 Colorlight Backplane (BP-1) 1-118 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction BP-1 Connectors BP-1 Connectors are shown in Figures 1-89 through 1-90. Connector signal names and pinouts are shown in Tables 1-2 through 1-9. EC5 ELECTRO CODE 5 COLORLIGHT GE T ransportation Systems Global Signaling Figure 1-89, BP-1 Connectors. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-119 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 I/O Slot 1 Connection Table 1-2 J16 Connector Definition Name Description CAB1+ Cab 1+ from the VTI-2S Module. CAB1- Cab 1- from the VTI-2S Module. CAB2+ Cab 2+ from the VTI-2S Module. CAB2- Cab 2- from the VTI-2S Module. IN 1+ Vital Input 1+ to the VTI-2S Module. IN 1- Vital Input 1 - to the VTI-2S Module. IN 2+ Vital Input 2+ to the VTI-2S Module. IN 2- Vital Input 2- to the VTI-2S Module. Table 1-3 J17 Connector Definition Name 1-120 Figure 1-90, I/O Slot 1 Connectors. Description TK 1+ Track 1+ to the VTI-2S Module. TK 1- Track 1- to the VTI-2S Module. TK 2+ Track 2+ to the VTI-2S Module. TK 2- Track 2- to the VTI-2S Module. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction I/O Slot 2 Connection Table 1-4 J26 Connector Definition Name Description B1L1 Bank 1 lamp 1 output for the VLD-C6S Module. B1L2 Bank 1 lamp 2 output for the VLD-C6S Module. B1L3 Bank 1 lamp 3 output for the VLD-C6S Module. COM1 Bank 1 common for the VLDC6S Module. B2L1 Bank 2 lamp 1 output for the VLD-C6S Module. B2L2 Bank 2 lamp 2 output for the VLD-C6S Module. B2L3 Bank 2 lamp 3 output for the VLD-C6S Module. COM2 Bank 2 common for the VLDC6S Module. Figure 1-91, I/O Slot 2 Connectors. Table 1-5 J27 Connector Definition Name Description NVIO1 NIVO 1 connection to the VLDC6S Module. NVIO2 NIVO 2 connection to the VLDC6S Module. NVIO3 NIVO 3 connection to the VLDC6S Module. NVIO4 NIVO 4 connection to the VLDC6S Module. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-121 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 I/O Slot 3 Connection Table 1-6 J36 Connector Definition Name Description B1L1 Bank 1 lamp 1 output for the VLD-C6S Module. B1L2 Bank 1 lamp 2 output for the VLD-C6S Module. B1L3 Bank 1 lamp 3 output for the VLD-C6S Module. COM1 Bank 1 common for the VLDC6S Module. B2L1 Bank 2 lamp 1 output for the VLD-C6S Module. B2L2 Bank 2 lamp 2 output for the VLD-C6S Module. B2L3 Bank 2 lamp 3 output for the VLD-C6S Module. COM2 Bank 2 common for the VLDC6S Module. Figure 1-92, I/O Slot 3 Connectors. Table 1-7 J37 Connector Definition 1-122 Name Description NVIO1 NIVO 1 connection to the VLDC6S Module. NVIO2 NIVO 2 connection to the VLDC6S Module. NVIO3 NIVO 3 connection to the VLDC6S Module. NVIO4 NIVO 4 connection to the VLDC6S Module. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction I/O Slot 4 Connection Table 1-8 J46 Connector Definition Name Description I/O 1+ I/O 1+ for the vital I/O module. I/O 1- I/O 1- for the vital I/O module. I/O 2+ I/O 2+ for the vital I/O module. I/O 2- I/O 2- for the vital I/0 module. I/O 3+ I/O 3+ for the vital I/O module. I/O 3- I/O 3- for the vital I/O module. I/O 4+ I/O 4+ for the vital I/O module. I/O 4- I/O 4- for the vital I/O module. Table 1-9 J47 Connector Definition Name Description I/O 5+ I/O 5+ for the vital I/O module. I/O 5- I/O 5- for the vital I/O module. I/O 6+ I/O 6+ for the vital I/O module. I/O 6- I/O 6- for the vital I/O module. I/O 7+ I/O 7+ for the vital I/O module. I/O 7- I/O 7- for the vital I/O module. I/O 8+ I/O 8+ for the vital I/O module. I/O 8- I/O 8- for the vital I/O module. Note: 100373-010 AR0 Figure 1-93, I/O Slot 4 Connectors (VIO-44S). When using the VIO-44S Module, connector J46 is used for outputs and connector J47 is used for inputs. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-123 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Backplane (BP-2) Global Signaling Global Signaling Figure 1-94, EC5 Endbox Backplane (BP-2). 1-124 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction BP-2 Connectors BP-2 Connectors are shown in Figures 1-95 through 1-99. Connector signal names and pinouts are shown in Tables 1-10 through 1-19. AUXILIA RY I/O VIO-1010S VTI-2S VIO-1010S (SLOT 3) (SLOT 4) (SLOT 1) (SLOT 2) EC5 END BOX SPAR E FUSES PS 7.5 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling 1 15 2 3 3 3 4 3 Figure 1-95, BP-2 Connectors. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-125 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 I/O Slot 1 Connection VTI-2S (S LOT 1 ) Table 1-10 J16 Connector Definition Name Description CAB1+ Cab 1+ from the VTI-2S Module. CAB1- Cab 1- from the VTI-2S Module. CAB2+ Cab 2+ from the VTI-2S Module. CAB2- Cab 2- from the VTI-2S Module. IN 1+ Vital Input 1+ for the VTI-2S Module. IN 1- Vital Input 1 - for the VTI-2S Module. IN 2+ Vital Input 2+ for the VTI-2S Module. EC5 Vital Input 2- for the VTI-2S Module. END BOX IN 2- ELECTRO CODE 5 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling Figure 1-96, I/O Slot 1 Connectors. Table 1-11 J17 Connector Definition Name 1-126 Description TK 1+ Track 1+ to the VTI-2S Module. TK 1- Track 1- to the VTI-2S Module. TK 2+ Track 2+ to the VTI-2S Module. TK 2- Track 2- to the VTI-2S Module. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction I/O Slot 2 Connection VIO-1010S (S LOT 2 ) Table 1-12 J26 Connector Definition Name Description OCOM Output common. C1O Code 1 output. C2O Code 2 output. C3O Code 3 output. C4O Code 4 output. C5O Code 5 output. HRO Home Relay output. C7O Code 7 output. C8O Code 8 output. C9O Code 9 output. CMO Code M output. Table 1-13 J27 Connector Definition Name CODE 5 OX GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling Figure 1-97, I/O Slot 2 Connectors. Description REF- Negative reference voltage. C1I Code 1 input. C5I Code 5 input. CMI Code M input. C6I Code 6 input. REF+ Positive reference voltage. Table 1-14 J29 Connector Definition Name Description ICOM Input common. C2I Code 2 input. C3I Code 3 input. C4I Code 4 input. C7l Code 7 input. C8I Code 8 input. C9I Code 9 input. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-127 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 I/O Slot 3 Connection Table 1-15 J36 Connector Definition Name Description OCOM Output common. C1O Code 1 output. C2O Code 2 output. C3O Code 3 output. C4O Code 4 output. C5O Code 5 output. HRO Home Relay output C7O Code 7 output. C8O Code 8 output. C9O Code 9 output. CMO Code M output. Table 1-16 J37 Connector Definition Name Description REF- Negative reference voltage. C1I Code 1 input. C5I Code 5 input. CMI Code M input. C6I Code 6 input. REF+ Positive reference voltage. Figure 1-98, I/O Slot 3 Connectors. Table 1-17 J39 Connector Definition Name 1-128 Description ICOM Input common. C2I Code 2 input. C3I Code 3 input. C4I Code 4 input. C7l Code 7 input. C8I Code 8 input. C9I Code 9 input. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Introduction I/O Slot 4 Connection Table 1-18 J46 Connector Definition Name Description I/O 1+ I/O 1+ for the vital I/O module. I/O 1- I/O 1- for the vital I/O module. I/O 2+ I/O 2+ for the vital I/O module. I/O 2- I/O 2- for the vital I/O module. I/O 3+ I/O 3+ for the vital I/O module. I/O 3- I/O 3- for the vital I/O module. I/O 4+ I/O 4+ for the vital I/O module. I/O 4- I/O 4-for the vital I/O module. Table 1-19 J47 Connector Definition Name Description I/O 5+ I/O 5+ for the vital I/O module. I/O 5- I/O 5- for the vital I/O module. I/O 6+ I/O 6+ for the vital I/O module. I/O 6- I/O 6- for the vital I/O module. I/O 7+ I/O 7+ for the vital I/O module. I/O 7- I/O 7- for the vital I/O module. I/O 8+ I/O 8+ for the vital I/O module. I/O 8- I/O 8- for the vital I/O module. Note: 100373-010 AR0 Figure 1-99, I/O Slot 4 Connectors (VIO-44S). When using the VIO-44S Module, connector J46 is used for outputs and connector J47 is used for inputs. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-129 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 1-130 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation Chapter 2 – Installation Contents ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Shipment, Unpacking, and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 ElectroLogIXS Chassis Mounting and Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chassis Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chassis Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting System Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 2-3 2-6 2-6 Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motion Detectors/Predictors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit Frequency below 156 Hz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filter Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cab Signal Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 2-7 2-7 2-7 2-9 EC5 Chassis Mounting and Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chassis Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chassis Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical EC5 Rack Mounted Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical EC5 Rack Mounted Wire Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EC5 Rack Mounted Installation Using Rear Chassis Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chassis Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting System Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chassis ID Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIP Number Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIP Shunt Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application ID Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application ID / DIP Number Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIP Shunt Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 2-10 2-10 2-11 2-12 2-13 2-13 2-13 2-14 2-15 2-16 2-16 2-16 2-17 2-17 EC5 Module Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 VPM-2/VPM-2+ Executive Software Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 VPM-3: Update Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Update (Boot) Mode GUI (Recommended Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Web GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-25 Executive Software Update using Update (Boot) Mode GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 CI-2 or UCI-3 Application Program Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 Application Program Update using Update Mode GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 Uploading and Applying PTC files using Update Mode GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36 Applying PTC Files from the "Apply Software" Page of the Update Mode GUI . . . . . . 2-38 Manage VPM-3 Flash via Update Mode GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. 2-41 Update Mode Z-Modem/Telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. 2-42 Z-Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 42 Executive Software Update using Zmodem over RS-232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 42 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-i ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 CI-2 or UCI-3 Application Program Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 45 Application Program Update using Zmodem over RS-232 . . . Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46 Uploading PTC Files using Zmodem protocol over RS-232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 Telnet/TFTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51 Executive Software Update using TFTP over Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -51 CI-2 or UCI-3 Application Program Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -54 Application Program Update using TFTP over Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -55 Uploading PTC Files using TFTP over Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -58 Set VPM-3 Ethernet Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Format Program/Log Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIP-2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/O Module Cable Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/O Module Cable Application Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EEPROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rail Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61 2-61 2-63 2-63 2-64 2-64 2-66 Lamp Wiring-VLD-C6S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66 VLD-C6S Battery Cable Supply Lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67 Lamp Wiring - VLD-R16S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68 VLD-R16S Battery Cable Supply Lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68 Track Termination and Lightning Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supply Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electro Code Track Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary Inputs and Outputs (VIO-44S Modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Track Code Select Inputs/Track Code Decoder Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Break Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Break Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69 2-69 2-69 2-69 2-69 2-70 2-70 2-71 2-72 Serial Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73 Vital Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial Point to Point Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial Multi-Drop Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ethernet Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74 2-74 2-77 2-79 Non Vital Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial Point-to-Point Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial Multi-Drop Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ethernet Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80 2-80 2-81 2-82 Initial Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Powering the System for the First Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Track Circuit Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recommended Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup for ElectroLogIXS to ElectroLogIXS or ElectroLogIXS to EC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 83 2-83 2-84 2-84 2-85 2-ii © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation Step 1. Estimating the Track Wire Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step 2. Determine the Total Track Circuit Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step 3. Set the Initial Receive Reference Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step 4. Set the Initial Transmit Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step 5. Read the Receive Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step 6. Refining the Track Transmitter and Receive Reference Values . . . . . . . . . Setup for ElectroLogIXS/EC5 to EC4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steps 1 to 3. Method for Determining total Track Circuit Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step 4. Set the Initial Transmit Voltage at the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step 4A. Determine and Set the 2R and 7K at the EC4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step 5. Read the Receive Current at the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step 6. Refining the Track Transmitter and Receive Reference Values . . . . . . . . . Alternating Code 5 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alternating Code 5 Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp Voltage Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Lamp Setup (VLD-C6S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automated Lamp Setup (VLD-C6S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timers Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vital Configuration Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Battery Alarm Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Date/Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Config Daylit Saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DST Strt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DST End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Request Time Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sync Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ethernet Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial Office Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UCE Office Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCS128 Office Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GENISYS® Serial Office Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BCS Serial Office Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GENISYS® Ethernet Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Local Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HAWK Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vital Communication Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Message Authentication Code (MAC) Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key Vault Update Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vital General Communication Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vital Serial Communication Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vital Ethernet Communication Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ground Fault Detector Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ground Fault Monitoring Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100373-010 AR3 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-85 2-85 2-85 2-85 2-86 2-86 2-90 2-90 2-90 2-90 2-90 2-91 2-96 2-96 2-97 2-97 2-98 2-99 2-101 2-102 2-103 2-104 2-104 2-105 2-105 2-106 2-106 2-107 2-107 2-108 2-108 2-109 2-110 2-112 2-112 2-113 2-114 2-115 2-117 2-118 2-119 2-120 2-120 2-121 2-121 2-121 2-122 2-123 2-123 2-123 2-iii ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 2-iv © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation Chapter 2 – Installation ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Shipment, Unpacking, and Inspection The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 chassis may be shipped either by itself or installed in a rack assembly with other items like a TIP-2 (Track Inductor Panel), depending on the system ordered. CAUTION If any shipping damage is detected, do not attempt to install or repair the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. Contact GETSGS (GE Transportation Global Signaling) for repair or replacement of the damaged equipment. The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 is shipped with all of the plug-in modules removed from the slots. The modules and the I/O cables are packed separately. Unpack the chassis assembly, plug-in modules and cables, and visually inspect each for shipping damage. WARNING After installation or update of an ElectroLogIXS/EC5 unit, adequate testing must be performed to detect any errors/failures of the application equations, PTC mapping rules, equipment, or installation. The tests should be performed before the unit is placed into service and in accordance with standard railroad, FRA, and/or other regulatory agency rules. This should include visual inspection of vital parameter values. The tests should be performed by qualified personnel that have the knowledge to correctly and safely discharge the tests. Failure to adequately test the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 unit after installation could result in death or serious injury. Railroad Configuration Management Procedures must ensure that all ElectroLogIXS/EC5 units are configured with the proper revisions of modules and firmware (application, PTC and executive) and that updates are completed in a timely manner when made available by GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling. Operating with incorrect firmware may result in death or serious injury. Timely is defined as without undue delay per 49 CFR 236.1023(j). Railroad Configuration Management Procedures must ensure that the proper values are set for each vital timer, vital Configuration setting (vital soft switches), PTC applicability settings, PTC debounce time, PTC WIU address, and vital remote parameter in their ElectroLogIXS/EC5 units. Incorrect settings may result in death or serious injury. WARNING 100373-010 AR0 Unauthorized modification of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 installation may result in unsafe conditions that could result in death or serious injury. Responsibility for physically securing the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 from unauthorized access lies with the railway authority. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-1 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 WARNING When an ElectroLogIXS/EC5 vital remote link is configured for anything other than point-to-point operation over a hard-wired serial cable, configuration management must ensure that duplicate Local Network IDs do not exist on that communications net. Examples of communications nets include, but are not limited to: · Multi-drop serial communications · Local Area Networks (LANs) · Wide Area Networks (WANs) · Fiber-Optic backbones · Radio communications This includes devices that may belong to other railway agencies (e.g. on radio links). Failure to ensure that there are no duplicate Local Network IDs on a communications net could result in death or serious injury. (See Volume Two, Appendix B for more detailed information) WARNING An ElectroLogIXS/EC5 must not be configured with identical Local/Remote Network ID pairs for different vital remote links, even if those vital remote links are on different communications nets. If duplicate Local/Remote Network ID pairs are used for redundancy, the application/installation must ensure that only one of the duplicate pairs is active/operational at a given time. Failure to ensure that there are no duplicate Local/Remote Network ID pairs within an ElectroLogIXS/EC5 or that redundant pairs cannot be active/ operational simultaneously could result in death or serious injury. (See Volume Two, Appendix B for more detailed information) When setting a vital remote link Local or Remote Network ID on an ElectroLogIXS/EC5, use only the value supplied on the application circuit plans. If this information is not available from the application circuit plans, do not put that vital remote link into service until this is corrected. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. (See Volume Two, Appendix B for more detailed information) WARNING The VPM-2 Diagnostic Port and the VPM-3 USB Port do not provide isolation protection against Ground Faults. These ports are intended for short-term use by on-site personnel who are trained to observe any operational anomalies. If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 is powered from Signal or Equipment battery, Ground Faults in external equipment attached to the VPM-2 Diagnostic Port or the VPM-3 USB Port may be passed through to the powering battery. Undetected Ground Faults to Signal or Equipment battery may result in hazardous rail operation. If connections to the VPM-2 Diagnostic Port or the VPM-3 USB Port are left unattended, the connected equipment must provide any required Ground Fault protection. Ground Fault testing must be performed after the connection is established, and at FRA mandated intervals thereafter. 2-2 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation WARNING The CIO-1/CIO-1A, CIO-CLA, CIO-2/CIO-2A, CIO-2AB, CIO-3, CIO-MD/CIO-MDA, CIO-PCA, and the VPM-3 Ethernet ports provide isolation protection against Ground Faults. If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 is powered from Signal or Equipment battery, Ground Faults in external equipment attached to the CIO-1/CIO-1A, CIO-CLA, CIO-2/CIO-2A, CIO-2AB, CIO-3, CIO-MD/CIO-MDA, CIO-PCA, or the VPM-3 Ethernet ports combined with a failure of the isolation protection of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 may be passed through to the powering battery under certain failure conditions. Undetected Ground Faults to Signal or Equipment battery may result in hazardous rail operation. If connections to the CIO-1/CIO-1A, CIO-CLA, CIO-2/CIO-2A, CIO-2AB, CIO-3, CIO-MD/CIO-MDA, CIO-PCA, or the VPM-3 Ethernet ports are left unattended, Ground Fault testing must be performed after the connection is established, and at FRA mandated intervals thereafter. WARNING An ElectroLogIXS unit must be configured with a unique Wayside Interface Unit (WIU) address for Positive Train Control (PTC) messaging. Failure to ensure the uniqueness of the WIU address could result in death or serious injury. When configuring an ElectroLogIXS unit for PTC operation, use only the WIU address value supplied on the site plans. If the WIU address value is not available from the site plans, do not enable PTC operation on the unit. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. ElectroLogIXS Chassis Mounting and Setup The ElectroLogIXS chassis assemblies (9-slot or 4-slot) consist of a rack or shelf mountable cabinet with integrated card rack for plug-in modules. The chassis assembly is factory assembled for both individually shipped ElectroLogIXSs and rack mounted units. If the ElectroLogIXS is received as a rack mounted unit, the following chassis mounting procedure can be ignored. However, verify that the chassis identification shunts match the Application Circuit Plan for the chassis. Refer to Chassis ID Setup in this section. For VPM-3 ElectroLogIXS systems that are using Application Identification shunts refer to Application ID Setup in this section. Chassis Mounting , The chassis may be installed on a standard 19 inch rack, wall mounted, or shelf mounted. If rack mounted provide at least two inches of space above and below for cooling air flow. Secure the cabinet to the rack with at least four ½-inch 10-32 machine screws. If wall or shelf mounted, provide at least two inches of space above the chassis for ventilation. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-3 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 B A B B C D 373-002G Figure 2-1, 9-Slot Chassis Installation Dimensions. Installation Dimensions: Maximum Overall Height Distance between mounting holes Depth Width 2-4 A B C D 24 ½" (622mm) 7" (178mm) 11 1/4" (286mm) 19 1/16" (484mm) © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation Figure 2-1a, 4-Slot Chassis Installation Dimensions. Installation Dimensions: Maximum Overall Height A 18.53" (~18 ½" or 470.7mm) Distance top mounting hole to middle mounting hole Distance middle mounting hole to bottom mounting hole Depth B1 8.05" (~8 1/16" or 204.5mm) B2 C 7.75" (~7 3/4" or 196.6mm) 11.10" (~11 1/8" or 281.9mm) Width D 16.04" (~16 1/16" or 407.42mm) 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-5 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Figure 2-1b, 1-Slot Chassis Installation Dimensions Installation Dimensions: Maximum Overall Height Distance top mounting hole to middle mounting hole Distance middle mounting hole to bottom mounting hole Depth Width A B1 B2 C D 18.53" (~18 ½" or 470.7mm) 8.05" (~8 1/16" or 204.5mm) 7.75" (~7 3/4" or 196.6mm) 11.10" (~11 1/8" or 281.9mm) 8.25” (~ 8 ¼” or 209.6 mm) Chassis Grounding The ElectroLogIXS power is isolated from the ElectroLogIXS chassis assembly. This allows the chassis to be connected to earth ground for shielding purposes. The ElectroLogIXS chassis must be connected to earth ground to ensure compliance with FCC requirements. Connecting System Battery The ElectroLogIXS requires a 12 VDC power source connected to the B and N terminals. Location of the B and N terminals are dependent upon the type of chassis used. The amount of power required for the ElectroLogIXS depends on the installation and the type of modules installed in the system. An ElectroLogIXS with all possible module slots used will require a charger rated for at least 25 amps. In addition, each VLD module requires a battery input connection via the VLD personality module for lamp power. 2-6 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation Filters A track filter may be required under the following conditions: Crossings: ! ! ! All crossing applications When motion detectors or predictors are used in conjunction with an approach If the transmit frequency of an audio circuit is below 156 Hz. Motion Detectors/Predictors Detectors and motion predictors use changing impedance to detect motion. When the VTI transmitter turns on there is a change in impedance on the track circuit which can trip a very sensitive motion detector. The code pulses may be misinterpreted and cause an unplanned crossing start. The filter blocks the frequency sensed by the detector /predictor so that the code pulses will not be detected or acted on. Transmit frequency below 156 Hz The pulse output from the Electro Code is considered a square wave, however some rounding on the leading edge of the pulse does occur. Since this may cause occasional erratic operation for equipment operating at low frequencies, we recommend installation of a track filter on all tracks with equipment operating at frequencies of 156 Hz and below. Filter Selection A track filter is a notch filter; it should be selected based on the transmit frequency. Install it in series with the positive lead of the track circuit. There is no polarity on the track filter. The number of filters which may be used in a track circuit are limited by the track circuit length and ballast conditions. The DC resistance of winding in a filter provides about1/10 of an ohm which appears to the Electro Code as approximately 1000 feet of track. This means that if three track filters are installed, the track length will be limited by approximately 3,000 feet. Figure 2-1c is a typical application drawing using two track filters. Table 2-1 lists Track Filters available from GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-7 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 J3_TRK+ P1_IN+ IXS VTI-2S J3_TRK- TRK+ TF-XX TF-XX To Track + TIP-2 P1_IN- TRK- To Track ‐ Figure 2-1c, Typical Track Filter Installation 2-8 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation Cab Signal Filters Cab signal filters are required in ElectroLogIXS applications with cab signaling. The cab signal filters keep cab signal energy applied to the rail from interfering with the Electro Code track rates. Cab signal filters are available built into the Track Inductor Panel (TIP-2) or can be installed separately. Table 2-1. Track Filters External Track Filters EPC Part Number Part Description Frequency 800-080055-100 TF-60 60 Hz 800-080055-107 TF-86 86 Hz 800-080055-101 TF-100 100 Hz 800-080055-106 TF-114 114 Hz 800-080055-102 TF-120 120 Hz 800-080055-108 TF-151 151 Hz 800-080055-103 TF-156 156 Hz 800-080055-104 TF-180 180 Hz 800-080055-109 TF-211 211 Hz 800-080055-105 TF-240 240 Hz 800-080055-110 TF-267 267 Hz TIP-2 Cab Signal Filters 100373-010 AR0 800-096000-012 TIP-2 W/100 Hz Filter 100 Hz 800-096000-013 TIP-2 W/60 Hz Filter 60 Hz 800-096000-014 TIP-2 W/40 Hz Filter 40 Hz 800-096000-015 TIP-2 W/83.3 Hz Filter 83.3 Hz © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-9 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 EC5 Chassis Mounting and Setup The EC5 chassis assembly consists of a rack mountable cabinet with integrated card rack for 4 plug-in I/O modules. The chassis assembly is factory assembled for both individually shipped EC5s and rack mounted units. If the EC5 is received as a rack mounted unit, the following chassis mounting procedure can be ignored. However, verify that the chassis identification shunts match the Application Circuit Plan for the chassis. Refer to Chassis ID Setup in this section. Chassis Mounting The chassis may be installed on a standard 19 inch rack or shelf mounted. If rack mounted, provide at least two inches of space above and below for cooling air flow. Secure the cabinet to the rack with at least four ½-inch 10-32 machine screws. If shelf mounted, provide at least two inches of space above the chassis for ventilation. Chassis Installation Figure 2-2, EC5 Chassis Installation Installation Dimensions: Width A Height B Depth C 2-10 18.31" 10.50" 7.50" © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation Typical EC5 Rack Mounted Installation Figure 2-3 illustrates a typical rack mounted installation. Your installation may differ depending site requirements and location. GETransportation Systems Global Signaling GETransportation Systems Global Signaling GETransportation Systems Global Signaling GETransportation Systems Global Signaling GETransportation Systems Global Signaling GETransportation Systems Global Signaling GETransportation Systems Global Signaling GETransportation Systems Global Signaling GETransportation Systems Global Signaling Figure 2-3, Typical rack mounted installation 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-11 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Typical EC5 Rack Mounted Wire Routing Figure 2-4 illustrates the wire routing for a typical installation. The routing of wires for your installation may differ depending site requirements and location. All wires should be routed to avoid electrical interference and should be routed to avoid unnecessary stress on the connectors. GETransportation Systems Global Signaling GETransportation Systems Global Signaling GETransportation Systems Global Signaling GETransportation Systems Global Signaling GETransportation Systems Global Signaling GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling GETransportation Systems Global Signaling GETransportation Systems Global Signaling Figure 2-4, Wire routing for a typical installation 2-12 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation EC5 Rack Mounted Installation Using Rear Chassis Connector Figure 2-5 illustrates the wire routing using the rear chassis connectors. The routing of wires for your installation may differ depending site requirements and location. All wires should be routed to avoid electrical interference and should be routed to avoid unnecessary stress on the connectors. Figure 2-5, Wire routing using the rare chassis connectors Chassis Grounding The EC5 power is isolated from the EC5 chassis assembly. This allows the chassis to be connected to earth ground for shielding purposes, if desired. Connecting System Battery The EC5 requires a 12 Vdc power source. For the EC5 with signals, the minimum charger rating required is 15 Amps. For a Repeater, a 10 Amp minimum is required. The System Battery may be connected any time after the EC5 Chassis has been mounted in its permanent location. 1. Verify the Power Switch is in the OFF position. AAR1 AAR2 B CIO-2 N 5V COM 2 3 4 20 1 20 7.5 PS Figure 2-6, 2. Connect the Positive (+) Battery lead to the B terminal. 3. Connect the Negative (-) Battery lead to the N terminal. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-13 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Chassis ID Setup The chassis must be configured with the Chassis ID value expected for the application loaded on the Application EPROM. The value of the Chassis ID is set by the DIP shunt located on the backplane underneath the CI module. The CI module must be removed to gain access to the DIP Shunts. If no DIP Shunt is installed in the socket, the Chassis ID value is “0.” If the application program does not have status names defined for the Chassis ID binary values, the Chassis ID must match the expected value or the VPM will not run the selected application program. If status names are defined for the Chassis ID values, the VPM will run the application and the application logic is responsible for determining the proper Chassis ID value. Figure 2-7, ElectroLogIXS Chassis Identification DIP Figure 2-7a, EC5 Chassis Identification DIP Shunt Location Shunt Location. Note: If the DIP Number does not match the Chassis ID Number of the Application EPROM, the CDU-1 will display "Incorrect Chassis ID" and the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 will not operate. Figure 2-8, DIP Shunt. To configure the chassis with the correct Chassis ID Number: 1. Locate the DIP Shunt underneath the CI Module. The DIP Shunt is a rectangular plastic IC package approximately one inch long that contains eight wire shunts, numbered from 1 thru 8. Note: 2-14 If the CI Module is installed, first remove the CI Module. The DIP is located underneath the CI Module. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation 2. Find the Chassis ID Number in the Application Circuit Plan. It is the Chassis ID Number that was determined when the Application EPROM logic equations were written. It is a number between 0 and 255. 3. Set the DIP Number to the same Chassis ID Number, as explained below: The shunt wires of the DIP represent binary digits. The binary digit number value of each shunt wire is shown in Figure 2-9. Figure 2-9, DIP Shunt Binary Digit Value. Note: The 1-slot chassis has a two sockets for the Chassis ID DIP. Only the rightmost socket (S2) is used for the Chassis ID. The DIP Number is the sum of the binary digits of the shunt wires that are not cut. The wire has a value if it is connected (shorted); the wire is not counted if it is cut (open). For example, if all the shunt wires are connected, the number is 255; if all the shunt wires are cut, the number is 0 (zero). DIP Number Setup 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Write down the Chassis ID Number. Subtract the largest Binary Digit Value available (128, 64, 32, 16, 8, 4, 2, 1) that will not give a negative answer from the Chassis ID. Mark the corresponding shunt wire with a felt pin. Write down the result. Subtract the largest Binary Digit Value available that will not give a negative answer from result. Mark the corresponding shunt wire with a felt pin. Write down the new result. Repeat the subtraction process until the remainder or result is zero. Add all the Binary Digit Values that were used. The answer should equal the Chassis ID. Leave all the shunt wires marked with the pen and cut all the remaining shunts. Note: 100373-010 AR0 To cut a shunt wire, insert a ball point pen, scribe, or similar pointed instrument. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-15 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Example The Chassis ID Number is 77. Set the DIP Number to 77. Follow the steps above and get the results below. The shunt wires to leave connected are indicated with a check (/). Shunts Chassis ID Number 77 Step 2 64 Step 3 77 - 64 = 13 13 Step 4 8 Step 5 13 - 8 = 5 5 Continue the Process: 4 5-4=1 / Step 2 / Step 4 / 1 1 1-1=0 / 0 64 + 8 + 4 + 1 = 77 Cut the other shunt wires, as indicated by the solid Os in Figure 2-10. Figure 2-10, DIP Shunts to be cut. The DIP above is now set for a Chassis ID Number of 77. DIP Shunt Ordering If more Chassis ID Number DIP shunt packs are needed, the P/N is 032625-004. Application ID Setup ElectroLogIXS/EC5 systems that have VPM-3 and CI-2 or UCI-3 modules may run application programs that use the Application ID. The 16-bit Application ID value is set using two, low-profile, 8-bit shunts located on the CI-2 or UCI-3 module under the EPROM. The Application ID settings are used as status inputs to the application program. Thus, the application program is responsible for the correctness of the Application ID settings. ElectroLogIXS/EC5 does not require a specific value for the Application ID as it may do for Chassis ID. 2-16 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation Figure 2-11, DIP Shunt. Application ID / DIP Number Setup The Application ID value is set in a similar fashion to the Chassis ID value. The difference is that the Application ID value is a 16-bit value allowing a range of 0 – 65,535. Refer to the Application Circuit Plan for the value to use for the Application ID. The binary digit number values of the shunts are shown in Figure 2-12. The process of determining which shunt wired to cut / leave is the same as described in Chassis ID Setup. Figure 2-12, DIP Shunt Binary Digit Value. DIP Shunt Ordering The Application ID uses two, low profile 8-bit DIP shunt packages. The P/N is 032625-005 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-17 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 EC5 Module Installation Refer to the Module Location Charts to determine module locations. Colorlight: Repeater Module Location Chart Module Vital Peripheral Master (VPM-2) Vital Peripheral Master (VPM-2+) Vital Peripheral Master (VPM-3) Chassis Information (CI-1) Chassis Information (CI-2) Chassis Information (UCI-3) Central Power Supply (CPS-1) Vital Track Interface (VTI-2S) Control Display Unit (CDU-1) Part Number 251135-000 251395-000 251432-XXX 251121-000 251441-000 251495-000 251122-000 251123-000 251124-000 Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Location VPM Slot VPM Slot VPM Slot CI Connector CI Connector CI Connector CPS Slot I/O Slot 1 Front of Chassis Part Number 251126-000 251127-000 251128-000 227462-000 251329-100 251486-001 251134-000 Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Location CIO Slot 1 CIO Slot 2 CIO Slot 2 CIO Slot 2 CIO Slot 1 CIO Slot 2 I/O Slot 4 Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Location VPM Slot VPM Slot VPM Slot CI Connector CI Connector CI Connector CPS Slot I/O Slot 1 Front of Chassis I/O Slot 2 Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Location CIO Slot 1 CIO Slot 2 CIO Slot 2 CIO Slot 2 CIO Slot 1 CIO Slot 2 I/O Slot 4 Colorlight: Repeater Optional Modules Module Communications Input Output (CIO-1) Communications Input Output (CIO-2) Communications Input Output (CIO-3) Communications Input Output (CIO-MD) CIO-CLA Communications Input Output CIO-PCA Communications Input Output VIO-44S Vital Input Output Colorlight: 6 Lamp Standard Module Location Chart Module Vital Peripheral Master (VPM-2) Vital Peripheral Master (VPM-2+) Vital Peripheral Master (VPM-3) Chassis Information (CI-1) Chassis Information (CI-2) Chassis Information (UCI-3) Central Power Supply (CPS-1) Vital Track Interface (VTI-2S) Control Display Unit (CDU-1) Vital Lamp Driver (VLD-C6S) Part Number 251135-000 251395-000 251432-XXX 251121-000 251441-000 251495-000 251122-000 251123-000 251124-000 251125-000 Colorlight: 6 Lamp Standard Optional Modules Module Communications Input Output (CIO-1) Communications Input Output (CIO-2) Communications Input Output (CIO-3) Communications Input Output (CIO-MD) CIO-CLA Communications Input Output CIO-PCA Communications Input Output VIO-44S Vital Input Output 2-18 Part Number 251126-000 251127-000 251128-000 227462-000 251329-100 251486-001 251134-000 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation Colorlight: 12 Lamp Standard Module Location Chart Module Vital Peripheral Master (VPM-2) Vital Peripheral Master (VPM-2+) Vital Peripheral Master (VPM-3) Chassis Information (CI-1) Chassis Information (CI-2) Chassis Information (UCI-3) Vital Track Interface (VTI-2S) Control Display Unit (CDU-1) Vital Lamp Driver (VLD-C6S) Part Number 251135-000 251395-000 251432-XXX 251121-000 251441-000 251495-000 251123-000 251124-000 251125-000 Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 Location VPM Slot VPM Slot VPM Slot CI Connector CI Connector CI Connector I/O Slot 1 Front of Chassis I/O Slot 2, I/O Slot 3 Colorlight: 12 Lamp Standard Optional Modules Module Communications Input Output (CIO-1) Communications Input Output (CIO-2) Communications Input Output (CIO-3) Communications Input Output (CIO-MD) CIO-CLA Communications Input Output CIO-PCA Communications Input Output VIO-44S Vital Input Output Part Number Quantity Location 251126-000 1 CIO Slot 1 251127-000 1 CIO Slot 2 251128-000 1 CIO Slot 2 227462-000 1 CIO Slot 2 251329-100 1 CIO Slot 1 251486-001 1 CIO Slot 2 251134-000 1 I/O Slot 4 Lock: Based on Colorlight Chassis Module Location Chart Module Vital Peripheral Master (VPM-2) Vital Peripheral Master (VPM-2+) Vital Peripheral Master (VPM-3) Chassis Information (CI-1) Chassis Information (CI-2) Chassis Information (UCI-3) Central Power Supply (CPS-1) Vital Track Interface (VTI-2S) Control Display Unit (CDU-1) Part Number Quantity Location 251135-000 1 VPM Slot 251395-000 1 VPM Slot 251432-XXX 1 VPM Slot 251121-000 1 CI Connector 251441-000 1 CI Connector 251495-000 1 CI Connector 251122-000 1 CPS Slot 251123-000 1 I/O Slot 1 251124-000 1 Front of Chassis Vital Lamp Driver (VLD-44S) 251134-000 1 I/O Slot 4 Lock: Based on Colorlight Chassis Optional Modules Module Communications Input Output (CIO-1) Communications Input Output (CIO-2) Communications Input Output (CIO-3) CIO-CLA Communications Input Output CIO-PCA Communications Input Output Communications Input Output (CIO-MD) 100373-010 AR0 Part Number Quantity Location 251126-000 1 CIO Slot 1 251127-000 1 CIO Slot 2 251128-000 1 CIO Slot 2 251329-100 1 CIO Slot 1 251486-001 1 CIO Slot 2 227462-000 1 CIO Slot 2 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-19 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Endbox: Repeater Module Location Chart Module Vital Peripheral Master (VPM-2) Vital Peripheral Master (VPM-2+) Vital Peripheral Master (VPM-3) Chassis Information (CI-1) Chassis Information (CI-2) Chassis Information (UCI-3) Central Power Supply (CPS-1) Vital Track Interface (VTI-2S) Control Display Unit (CDU-1) Part Number Quantity Location 251135-000 1 VPM Slot 251395-000 1 VPM Slot 251432-XXX 1 VPM Slot 251121-000 1 CI Connector 251441-000 1 CI Connector CI Connector 251495-000 1 251122-000 1 CPS Slot 251123-000 1 I/O Slot 1 251124-000 1 Front of Chassis Endbox: Repeater Optional Modules Module Communications Input Output (CIO-1) Communications Input Output (CIO-2) Communications Input Output (CIO-3) Communications Input Output (CIO-MD) CIO-CLA Communications Input Output CIO-PCA Communications Input Output VIO-44S Vital Input Output Part Number 251126-000 251127-000 251128-000 227462-000 251329-100 251486-001 251134-000 Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Location CIO Slot 1 CIO Slot 2 CIO Slot 2 CIO Slot 2 CIO Slot 1 CIO Slot 2 I/O Slot 4 Endbox: Single Direction Module Location Chart Module Vital Peripheral Master (VPM-2) Vital Peripheral Master (VPM-2+) Vital Peripheral Master (VPM-3) Chassis Information (CI-1) Chassis Information (CI-2) Chassis Information (UCI-3) Central Power Supply (CPS-1) Vital Track Interface (VTI-2S) Control Display Unit (CDU-1) Part Number Quantity Location 251135-000 1 VPM Slot 251395-000 1 VPM Slot 251432-XXX 1 VPM Slot 251121-000 1 CI Connector 251441-000 1 CI Connector 251495-000 1 CI Connector 251122-000 1 CPS Slot 251123-000 1 I/O Slot 1 251124-000 1 Front of Chassis Track Code Select Input/Track Code Decoder Output (VIO-1010S) 251132-000 1 I/O Slot 2 Endbox: Single Direction Optional Modules Module Communications Input Output (CIO-1) Communications Input Output (CIO-2) Communications Input Output (CIO-3) Communications Input Output (CIO-MD) CIO-CLA Communications Input Output CIO-PCA Communications Input Output VIO-44S Vital Input Output 2-20 Part Number Quantity Location 251126-000 1 CIO Slot 1 251127-000 1 CIO Slot 2 251128-000 1 CIO Slot 2 227462-000 1 CIO Slot 2 251329-100 1 CIO Slot 1 251486-001 1 CIO Slot 2 251134-000 1 I/O Slot 4 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation Endbox: Dual Direction Module Location Chart Module Vital Peripheral Master (VPM-2) Vital Peripheral Master (VPM-2+) Vital Peripheral Master (VPM-3) Chassis Information (CI-1) Chassis Information (CI-2) Chassis Information (UCI-3) Central Power Supply (CPS-1) Vital Track Interface (VTI-2S) Control Display Unit (CDU-1) Part Number Quantity Location 251135-000 1 VPM Slot 251395-000 1 VPM Slot 251432-XXX 1 VPM Slot 251121-000 1 CI Connector 251441-000 1 CI Connector CI Connector 251495-000 1 251122-000 1 CPS Slot 251123-000 1 I/O Slot 1 251124-000 1 Front of Chassis Track Code Select Input/Track Code Decoder Output (VIO-1010S) 251132-000 2 I/O Slot 2, I/O Slot 3 Endbox: Dual Direction Optional Modules Module Communications Input Output (CIO-1) Communications Input Output (CIO-2) Communications Input Output (CIO-3) Communications Input Output (CIO-MD) CIO-CLA Communications Input Output CIO-PCA Communications Input Output VIO-44S Vital Input Output 100373-010 AR0 Part Number Quantity Location 251126-000 1 CIO Slot 1 251127-000 1 CIO Slot 2 251128-000 1 CIO Slot 2 227462-000 1 CIO Slot 2 251329-100 1 CIO Slot 1 251486-001 1 CIO Slot 2 251134-000 1 I/O Slot 4 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-21 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 VPM-2/VPM-2+ Executive Software Update This procedure is used to update the VPM-2/VPM-2+ Executive Software. To perform this procedure, a computer with a serial port interface and a terminal emulation program (e.g. HyperTerminal) is required in addition to the VPM-2/VPM-2+ Executive software files. 1. Prior to uploading the new VPM-2/VPM-2+ Executive Software, ensure the values for all configurable parameters are available from the site documentation or have been recorded from the values shown on the CDU. 2. Connect the computer serial port to the VPM-2/VPM-2+ diagnostic port via serial cable. 3. Configure the Terminal Emulation program as follows: Baud Rate: 57600 bps Parity: None Data Bits: 8 Stop Bits: 1 Flow Control: None Terminal emulation: VT100 or ANSI BBS Data Transfer Protocol: ASCII (if a setting is required) 4. Place the VPM-2/VPM-2+ in Update mode as follows: a. b. c. d. 5. Turn off the power switch on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Press and hold the PROG button on the VPM-2+ Turn on the power switch on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Release the PROG button If the VPM-2/VPM-2+ is in Update mode and the computer is correctly connected to the VPM-2/VPM-2+ diagnostic terminal, information similar to the following example will be displayed in the terminal emulation window: VPM-2/VPM-2+ C Boot Block Program -- Version X.X. CPU CRC Status ---------------------C 5678abcd Ok A 1234feda Ok B abcd1234 Ok 6. To see the list of available update mode commands, type “?” and hit “Enter.” The following text will be displayed on the terminal emulation program: Help: ? | H - Help. IC - Query C Executive Software IA - Query A Executive Software IB - Query B Executive Software DC - Download C System image to DA - Download A System image to DB - Download B System image to <Esc> cancels download. 7. CRC. CRC. CRC. VPM-2. VPM-2. VPM-2. To upload the VPM-2/VPM-2+ C processor executive software, type “DC” and hit “Enter.” The following text will be displayed on the terminal emulation program: Begin C S-Record File download within 60 seconds... 2-22 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation 8. Use the terminal emulation program to select and send an ASCII text file. In HyperTerminal, the menu selection is Transfer->Send Text File. In ProComm, the menu selection is Data -> Send File. 9. Navigate to the location of the vpmcepm.out file. If the file is not selected within 60 seconds of entering the “DC” command, the “DC” command entry must be repeated. 10. When the file transfer begins, the following will be displayed: Software Download Started - Please Wait. ........... 11. The file transfer will take several minutes to complete. Note that if any keys are depressed while the file transfer is taking place the transfer may abort. 12. After the file transfer completes, the VPM-2/VPM-2+ will write the new executive software to the VPM-2/VPM-2+ memory. The following will be displayed: Writing New Software to Flash - Please Wait. 13. After the executive software has been written to memory, text similar to the following example will be displayed on the terminal emulation screen. Confirm that the displayed CRC value for CPU C matches the expected CRC value. Software Update Complete. CPU CRC Status ----------------------------C 16ba2705 Ok A 6596e903 Ok B 57ada17f Ok 14. If the CRC for CPU C matches the expected value, the VPM-2/VPM-2+ C processor executive software update procedure is complete. 15. To update the VPM-2/VPM-2+ A processor and VPM-2/VPM-2+ B processor, repeat steps 7 through 14 using the “DA” command and file vpmaepm.out for the VPM-2/VPM-2+ A processor and the “DB” command and file vpmbepm.out for theVPM-2/VPM-2+ B processor. The CRC values for the A and B processors must be confirmed after the download procedure to confirm the update completed successfully. WARNING After updating executive software for the VPM-2/VPM-2+ A and VPM-2/VPM-2+ B processors, all vital parameter settings must be at the correct values for the specific ElectroLogIXS/EC5 installation. Failure to verify the parameter settings after VPM-2/VPM-2+ A and VPM-2/VPM-2+ B executive software update could cause unsafe operation resulting in death or serious injury. VPM-3: Update Mode The VPM-3 PTC Files can be updated over a CIO-1/CIO-1A Serial Interface, over Ethernet connection using a Terminal Interface or Ethernet connection using Web GUI interface. Update Mode is used to update the Executive Software, Boot Software, PTC Config Files, and PTC Mapping Files. Update Mode can use the following 3 methods to update software on the VPM-3. • • • Update Mode GUI (Recommended Method) Z-Modem Telnet/TFTP Server Note: 100373-010 AR0 To update via the Web GUI interface, Ethernet Connection to VPM-3 is required. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-23 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 WARNING Railroad Configuration Management Procedures must ensure that all ElectroLogIXS/EC5 units are configured with the proper revisions of modules and firmware (application, PTC, and executive) and that updates are completed in a timely manner when made available by GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling. Operating with incorrect firmware may result in death or serious injury. Timely is defined as without undue delay per 49 CFR 236.1023(j). Railroad Configuration Management Procedures must ensure that the proper values are set for each vital timer, PTC applicability setting, PTC debounce time and PTC WIU address in their ElectroLogIXS/EC5 units Incorrect settings may result in death or serious injury. After installation or update of an ElectroLogIXS/EC5 unit, adequate testing must be performed to detect any errors/failures of the application equations, PTC mapping rules, equipment, or installation. The tests should be performed before the unit is placed into service and in accordance with standard railroad, FRA, and/or other regulatory agency rules. This should include visual inspection of vital parameter values. The tests should be performed by qualified personnel that have the knowledge to correctly correctly and safely discharge the tests. Failure to adequately test the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 unit after installation could result in death or serious injury. After updating executive software for the VPM-3 processors, all vital parameter settings must be at the correct values for the specific EC4 installation. Failure to verify the parameter settings after VPM-3 executive software update could cause unsafe operation resulting in death or serious injury. Before returning the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 to service, verify the PTC Applicability Settings, PTC Debounce Times, PTC WIU Address, and Timer Values against the Application Circuit Plan. Failure to verify the PTC Applicability Settings, PTC Debounce Times, PTC WIU Address, and Timer Values could result in a falsely permissive aspect which could result in serious injury or death. Always verify the PTC Applicability Settings, PTC Debounce Times, PTC WIU Address, and Timer Values when replacing the PTC mapping rules, the PTC configuration file or the equations. A ElectroLogIXS/EC5 unit must be configured with a unique Wayside Interface Unit (WIU) address for Positive Train Control (PTC) messaging. Failure to ensure the uniqueness of the WIU address could result in death or serious injury. When configuring a ElectroLogIXS/EC5 unit for PTC operation, use only the WIU address value supplied on the site plans. If the WIU address values is not available from the site plans, do not enable PTC operation . on the unit. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury 2-24 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation Update (Boot) Mode GUI (Recommended Method) The Update (Boot) Mode GUI is the recommended method for updating software on the. VPM-3. Executive Software, Boot Software, PTC Config Files, and PTC Mapping Files can all be updated from the Update (Boot) Mode GUI. For directions in using the Update (Boot) Mode GUI, please see the Update (Boot) Mode Web GUI instructions below. Web GUI Executive Software Update using Update (Boot) Mode GUI 1. Prior to uploading the new VPM-3 Executive Software, ensure the values for all configurable parameters are available from the site documentation or have been recorded from the values shown on the CDU or Web GUI. 2. Place the VPM-3 in Update (Boot) Mode as follows: a. Turn off the power switch on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 b. Press and hold the PROG button on the VPM-3 c. Turn on the power switch on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 d. Release the PROG button 3. Connect the computer Ethernet RJ45 port to one of the VPM-3 Ethernet RJ45 ports, using an ethernet cable. Note: The default VPM-3 IP addresses are 192.168.0.11 for the ENET1 (upper) RJ45 port and 192.168.1.12 for the ENET2 (lower) RJ45 port. These default IP address values are the typical values used in Update (Boot) Mode. Changing the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 IP addresses from the CDU or Web GUI during normal operation does not change the IP addresses used in Update (Boot) Mode. If values other than the default IP address values must be set / used in Update (Boot) mode, they may be changed using the Update (Boot) Mode command line. However, the IP address used in Update (Boot) mode is not visible on the CDU, so use of the default values whenever possible is recommended. 4. Using a Web Browser, navigate to the IP address of the ElectrologIXS/EC5 unit. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-25 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 5. Select Executive/Boot from the ‘Upload New’ menu displayed on Figure 2-13, then browse and select the executive software to be uploaded Note: Certain web browser add-ins for content scanning may prevent information from being properly displayed on the WebGUI. You may need to disable any active browser add-ins to view all the content on this page. Figure 2-13, Update Software Screen 2-26 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation 6. If the Executive software is successfully uploaded, the screen on Figure 2-14 will be displayed. Figure 2-14, Executive Software Upload Successful 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-27 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 7. To apply the Executive Software, click on “Apply Executive/Boot” 8. If the application of the executive file is successful, the screen on Figure 2-15 will be displayed. Figure 2-15, Executive Software Apply Successful 9. 2-28 Note: Certain web browser add-ins for content scanning may prevent information from being properly displayed on the WebGUI. You may need to disable any active browser add-ins to view all the content on this page. Note: Executive software must be activated before it is used. Activating Exec Software can be performed i n Update Mode, or go to the “Apply Software” pages (See Volume Two, figures 6-39, 6-40, and 6-41) on the main Web GUI to activate the newly applied executive software. To Activate the executive software in Update Mode begin by pressing the “Activate Exec" button (see figure 2-16). When there are no files applied from Update Mode, the “Activate Exec” button will be greyed. Activate file by pressing the "Confirm Program Button Pressed", see figure 2-17. The Activation Status will change to "Execution Activation Succeeded" see figure 2-18. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation Figure 2-16, Ready For Activation 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-29 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Figure 2-17, Confirm Program Button Pressed Figure 2-18,, Execution Activation Succeeded 2-30 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation 10. Runtime CRCs of A/B/C Processors must be verified after activating the newly applied executive software. Go to "Executive Information" page on the main Executive Web GUI to verify the runtime CRCs of the newly applied executive software. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration General Information Vital Application Non-Vital Application PTC Application Executive Information Boot Information Diagnostics Status Log Off [Print] Executive Information PN: INTERNAL Ver: FULL Bld0098F Module: VPM-3 Processor: A Copyright: GETS Global Signaling, LLC (C) 2011 CRC: CDC13F88 PN: INTERNAL Ver: FULL Bld0098F Module: VPM-3 Processor: B Copyright: GETS Global Signaling, LLC (C) 2011 CRC: B5C16CC5 PN: INTERNAL Ver: FULL Bld0098F Module: VPM-3 Processor: C Copyright: GETS Global Signaling, LLC. (C) 2011 CRC: BF28C276 PN: 202550-000 Ver: 2.1 Module: VTI Processor: D Ref: U76 Copyright: GETS Global Signaling, LLC. (C) 2011 PN: 202550-000 Ver: 2.1 Module: VTI Processor: E Ref: U86 Copyright: GETS Global Signaling, LLC. (C) 2011 Figure 2-19, Executive Information 11. To reset the ElectrologIXS/EC5, push the reset button on the screen. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-31 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 WARNING After updating and activating executive software for the VPM-3 A and VPM-3 B processors, all vital parameter settings must be at the correct values for the specific ElectroLogIXS/EC5 installation. Failure to verify the parameter settings after VPM-3 A and VPM-3 B executive software update could cause unsafe operation resulting in death or serious injury. CI-2 or UCI-3 Application Program Update WARNING A CI-2 or UCI-3 module may contain an application or PTC mapping / configuration information in the non-volatile CI-2 or UCI-3 memory. After installing or replacing a CI-2 or UCI-3 module, ensure the ElectroLogIXS is configured with the proper revisions of application program and PTC mapping / configuration information. Installing incorrect revisions may result in death or serious injury. The VPM-3 Application program stored in the CI-2 or UCI-3 Flash memory can be updated over a CIO-1/CIO-1A/CIO-CLA Serial Interface, over Ethernet connection using a Terminal Interface or Ethernet connection using Web GUI interface VPM-3 application files can be uploaded to the CI-2 or UCI-3 module and are identified as follows: . xxxx.mb1 - Multi-file application file. Contains one or more Vital and/or Non-Vital applications . xxxxv.b1 - Single application file. Contains a Vital application (denoted by final v before .b1) . xxxxnv.b1 - Single application file. Contains a Non-vital application (denoted by final nv before .b1) To update via Terminal interface, a terminal program (e.g. HyperTerminal) that is capable of Telnet is required (uses the Ethernet connection only) or a Terminal program, CIO-1/CIO-1A/CIO-CLA module, and a computer with a serial interface is required. In both Terminal interface approaches, the computer used for the update must have TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) server software installed. To update via the Web GUI interface, Ethernet Connection to VPM-3 is required. The CI-2 or UCI-3 Flash memory stores one application program file or one multi-application program file of any size up to 8 Mbytes. When this download procedure is performed, the downloaded file overwrites any file previously stored on the CI-2 or UCI-3 module. Note: 2-32 If an EPROM with a valid application file is installed on the CI-2 or UCI-3 module, the VPM-3 will not read the application from the Flash memory but will use the application loaded on the EPROM. To use the CI-2 or UCI-3 Flash memory, remove any EPROM device from the CI-2 or UCI-3. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation Application Program Update using Update Mode GUI 1. Place the VPM-3 in Update mode as follows: a. Turn off the power switch on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 b. Press and hold the PROG button on the VPM-3 c. Turn on the power switch on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 d. Release the PROG button 2. Connect the computer Ethernet RJ45 port to one of the VPM-3 Ethernet RJ45 ports, using an ethernet cable. Note: The default VPM-3 IP addresses are 192.168.0.11 for the ENET1 (upper) RJ45 port and 192.168.1.12 for the ENET2 (lower) RJ45 port. 192.168.1.12 is the IP address of the IP port connected to on the VPM-3. The IP Address can only be changed in the Update Mode using Telnet. If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 has had this setting changed, the updated setting should be used. 3. Using a Web Browser, navigate to the IP address of the ElectrologIXS/EC5 unit by entering http://192.168.0.11 (if connected to the upper RJ45 connector) or http://192.168.1.12 (if connected to the lower RJ45 connector) 4. Select Application from the ‘Upload New’ Dropdown menu on the "Update Mode" screen as shown in Figure 2-20 then select the Browse pushbutton. Use the "file open" dialog box that appears to select the desired Application file. Figure 2-20, Update Software Screen 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-33 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 5. If the Application Program is successfully uploaded, the screen on Figure 2-21 will be displayed. Figure 2-21, Application Program Upload Successful 6. To apply the Application Program, click on “Apply Application” 7. If the application of the Application file is successful, the screen on Figure 2-22 will be displayed. 2-34 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation Figure 2-22, Application Program Apply Successful 8. To reset the ElectroLogIXS/EC5, push the reset button on the screen. 9. Once the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 has reset, it will use the default vital application. Go to the “Application” page on the main Web GUI to select the newly applied application. Note: Refer to the “Application” page in Volume Two, section 6 of this manual for details on the “Application” Web GUI page. Note: To log in to the ElectroLogIXS/EC5, the screen must be refreshed. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-35 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Uploading and Applying PTC files using Update Mode GUI 1. Place the VPM-3 in Update mode as follows: a. Turn off the power switch on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 b. Press and hold the PROG button on the VPM-3 c. Turn on the power switch on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 d. Release the PROG button 2. Connect the computer Ethernet RJ45 port to one of the VPM-3 Ethernet RJ45 ports, using an ethernet cable. Note: The default VPM-3 IP addresses are 192.168.0.11 for the ENET1 (upper) RJ45 port and 192.168.1.12 for the ENET2 (lower) RJ45 port. 192.168.1.12 is the IP address of the IP port connected to on the VPM-3. The IP Address can only be changed in the Update Mode using Telnet. If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 has had this setting changed, the updated setting should be used. 3. Using a Web Browser, navigate to the IP address of the ElectrologIXS/EC5 unit by entering http://192.168.0.11 (if connected to the upper RJ45 connector) or http://192.168.1.12 (if connected to the lower RJ45 connector). 4. Select PTC File from the ‘Upload New’ dropdown menu on the "Update Mode" screen as displayed on Figure 2-23, then select the Browse pushbutton. Use the "file open" dialog box that appears to select the desired PTC configuration or mapping file. Figure 2-23, Update Mode PTC 1 2-36 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation 5. If the PTC file is successfully uploaded, the screen on Figure 2-24 will be displayed. Figure 2-24, Update Mode PTC 2 6. To apply the PTC file, click on “Apply PTC Application File” Note: When pressed the "Delete PTC Flash" will remove all previous PTC Mapping and PTC Config files loaded on the CI-2 or UCI-3 Flash Memory. 7. If the application of the PTC file is successful, the screen on Figure 2-25 will be displayed. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-37 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Figure 2-25, Update Mode PTC 3 8. To reset the ElectrologIXS/EC5, push the reset button on the screen. Note: To log in to the ElectrologIXS/EC5, the screen must be refreshed. Note: Another common way to upload PTC files is to the "Upload Software" option on the Executive Web GUI Configuration page. Refer to the "Upload Software" option in Volume Two, section 6 of this . manual If PTC files have been uploaded via the Executive Web GUI "Upload Software" page and have not been applied, they can be applied as described in the following section. Applying PTC Files from the "Apply Software" Page of the Update Mode GUI 1. Select the "Apply Software" option on the "Update Mode" web page. 2. If a PTC file is present, the file’s Header and CRC information is shown as in Figure 2-26. 2-38 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation Figure 2-26, Apply Software PTC Preload 1 3. Click the “Apply” button next to the PTC file that is being applied. 4. The confirm screen in figure 2-27 will be displayed. If the uploaded Mapping file is the file that is supposed to be applied, click “OK” to confirm the overwrite. Figure 2-27, Overwrite Confirmation Screen 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-39 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 5. Once the file has been applied, the uploaded file will no longer show in the list of uploaded software, the status window will not show any updates occurring, and the “Reset” button will be enabled as shown in figure 2-28. Figure 2-28, Apply Software PTC Postload 1 6. To reset the ElectroLogIXS/EC5, push the reset button on the screen. 7. If a PTC Mapping file was applied, once the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 has reset, the PTC Mapping File must be activated before it is used. Go to the “Apply Software” page on the main Web GUI to activate the newly applied Mapping File. Note: 1) Local Presence is required to activate a new mapping file. 2) PTC Config files don’t need to be “activated” after they are applied. Refer to the "Apply Software" section of this manual for details on the "Apply Software" Web GUI page. 8. Once the Mapping file is activated, the PTC Vital and Non-Vital configuration settings must be set according to the site plans. Note: 2-40 Refer to the “PTC Non-Vital Configuration” and “PTC Vital Configuration” sections in secion 6 of this manual for details on the “PTC Non-Vital Configuration” and “PTC Vital Configuration” Web GUI pages © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation Manage VPM-3 Flash via Update Mode GUI The Flash on the VPM-3 can be deleted using the following buttons 1. 2. 3. 4. Delete PTC Files - Deletes PTC mapping and configuration files from CI Flash Erase CI Flash – Deletes PTC Files and SNMP Settings from CI flash Format Program Flash – Deletes any uploaded but unapplied files from the non-volatile file upload area Format Log Flash – Deletes all logs on the system Deletes PTC Mapping and Configuration files from CI-2 Flash Formats Program Flash Deletes the non-volatile file upload area Formats s Log Flash All log files are deleted Deletes all parameters from backplane Erases CI Flash - PTC, SNMP Configuration and any Application files are deleted. Figure 2-29, Manage Flash 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-41 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Update Mode Z-Modem/Telnet If the user wishes to avoid using the recommended Update Mode GUI to update software, they may update via Terminal interface, a terminal program (e.g. HyperTerminal) that is capable of Telnet is required (uses the Ethernet connection only) or a Terminal program, CIO-1/CIO-1A/CIO-CLA module, and a computer with a serial interface is required. In both Terminal interface approaches, the computer used for the update must have TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) server software installed. Z-Modem Executive Software Update using Zmodem over RS-232 Interface 1. Prior to uploading the new VPM-3 Executive Software, ensure the values for all configurable parameters are available from the site documentation or have been recorded from the values shown on the CDU or Web GUI. 2. Connect the computer serial port to the VPM-3 diagnostic port on the CIO-1/CIO-1A/CIO-CLA module via serial cable. Note: 3. To connect using a Telnet session, connect a network cable from the computer RJ45 port to one of the VPM-3 Ethernet RJ45 port, using an ethernet cable. Configure the Terminal Emulation program as follows: Baud Rate: 57600 bps Parity: None Data Bits: 8 Stop Bits: 1 Flow Control: None Terminal emulation: VT100 or ANSI BBS Data Transfer Protocol: ZModem (if update is done via the serial interface) Note: 4. 57600 bps is the default setting for the VPM-3 diagnostic terminal in update mode. The IP Address can only be changed in the Update Mode using Telnet. If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 has had this setting changed, the updated setting should be used. Place the VPM-3 in Update mode as follows: a. b. c. d. Turn off the power switch on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Press and hold the PROG button on the VPM-3 Turn on the power switch on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Release the PROG button 5. If the VPM-3 is in Update mode and the computer is correctly connected to the VPM-3 diagnostic terminal the boot prompt should be displayed on the terminal emulation program (Boot> _). 6. If the VPM-3 is in Update Mode, it can be connected to via a Telnet session. a. b. Connect the computer Ethernet RJ45 port to one of the VPM-3 Ethernet RJ45 port, using an ethernet cable. On the computer, open a command prompt window, and type telnet to connect to the IP port on the VPM-3. C:\> telnet 192.168.1.12 23 Note: 2-42 192.168.1.12 is the IP address of the IP port connected to on the VPM-3. 23 is the default telnet port setting for the VPM-3 in update mode. The IP Address can only be changed in the Update Mode using Telnet. If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 has had this setting changed, the updated setting should be used. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation c. d. If the computer is correctly connected to the VPM-3 ethernet port, the login prompt should be displayed on the command prompt window. Welcome to InterNiche Telnet Server 1.0 (GE ElectroLogIXS VPM-3) login: Enter admin and then enter telnetat the password prompt. Note: e. 7. password: admin and telnet are the default telnet settings for the VPM-3 in update mode. The IP Address can only be changed in the Update Mode using Telnet. If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 has had this setting changed, the updated setting should be used. If valid username and password are entered, the boot prompt should be displayed on the command prompt window (Boot> _). To see the list of available update mode commands, type “?” or “help” and hit “Enter.” The following text will be displayed on the terminal emulation program. Boot> help Command version set show save cidn Description Version Information Set Config Show Config Save Parameters to Flash Download Ethernet->CI-2 cidz ptcdn ptcdz format dz dn df pwreset ethdefault default help Syntax version set <option value> show <option> save cidn <filename> or <”filename with spaces”> Download Z-Modem->CI-2 cidz Download PTC File ptcdn <filename> or Ethernet->CI-2 <”filename with spaces"> Download PTC File ptcdz Z-Modem->CI-2 Format Flash File System format <PROG | LOG> Download via Z-Modem dz Download via Ethernet dn <filename> Download via Filesystem df Password Reset Request pwreset Ethernet Reset Request ethdefault Restore default settings default Help help <cmd> Note: cidz and dz options are not provided if connected through the telnet interface. 8. To see the current update mode settings, type “show” and hit “Enter.” A list similar to the following will be displayed: Boot> show baud: port: server: filename: 57600 1 192.168.0.12 vpmallepm.bin gateway: 0.0.0.0 *Port 1* ip1: netmask1: mac1: dhcP1: 192.168.0.11 255.255.255.0 00:09:91:42:4A:DF Enabled *Port 2* ip2: netmask2: mac2: dhcP2: 192.168.1.12 255.255.255.0 00:09:91:42:4A:E0 Enabled *Telnet* tnport: 23 username: admin password: telnet 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-43 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 9. Set the baud to the desired value. Options are 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 bits per second. For example, to change the baud to 115200, type “set baud 115200” and hit “Enter.” Note: When the baud is changed, the terminal emulation program will no longer be set to the value being used by the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. Disconnect the terminal emulation session and change the baud setting for the terminal to the new ElectroLogIXS/EC5 value. After a setting has been changed, the boot prompt will indicate that the setting has not been saved in the VPM-3 non-volatile memory at the boot prompt: Boot (Unsaved Data)>__ The setting is operative (i.e. the baud has been changed) but the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 will revert to the previous value when the system is reset. To make the changed setting the new non-volatile setting, type “save” at the prompt and hit “Enter”. The “Unsaved Data” indication will no longer be displayed. If, however, the change is only temporary, simply do not use the save command and the settings will revert to the previous value at reset. 10. When the baud rate has been set to the desired value, type “dz” at the boot prompt. The following will be displayed on the terminal emulation: Start Zmodem download. Timeout in 60 seconds.. 11. Use the terminal emulation program to select and send the file via the Zmodem protocol. In HyperTerminal, the menu selection is Transfer-> Send File. In Procomm, the menu selection is Data-> Send File. 12. Navigate to the location of the vpmallepm.bin file. If the file is not selected within 60 seconds of the “dz” command being entered, the “dz” command will need to be reentered. 13. The file transfer will take several minutes to complete. After the transfer has been completed successfully, text similar to the following will be displayed on the terminal emulation program: Download Complete: 3420184 bytes The following is a list of updates to apply: VPM A Exec Image - Version: 7.03 Bld004C VPM B Exec Image - Version: 7.03 Bld004C VPM C Exec Image - Version: 7.03 Bld004C Size: 895892 CRC: 7F7AA666 Size: 865572 CRC: 259ADC59 Size: 1658600 CRC: BA314712 Would you like to apply all the updates listed (Yes/No)? n 14. Confirm the version, build and CRC values for each of the processors is the expected value. If so, the updates may be applied. 15. Type “Y” and hit “Enter” to apply all of the updates to the VPM-3. If an individual processor is to be updated, enter “N” at the “update all” prompt and “Y” at the desired individual update(s). 16. While the VPM-3 is saving the files to the on-board memory, the following will be displayed: WARNING - DO NOT REMOVE POWER WHILE THESE UPDATES ARE APPLIED !! Processing: VPM A Exec Image VPMA Transfer Posted... Processing: VPM B Exec Image VPMB Transfer Posted... Processing: VPM C Exec Image ........... 2-44 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation 17. The update has completed successfully when the following is displayed: Flash operation on VPM C Exec Image completed successfully. Flash operation on VPM B Exec Image completed successfully. Flash operation on VPM A Exec Image completed successfully. Please wait. Please wait. Please wait. *** All flash operations have completed! *** *** Reset the system for any changes to take effect. *** 18. Once the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 has reset, the newly applied executive software must be activated before it is used. Go to the “Apply Software” page on the main Web GUI to activate the newly applied exec. WARNING After updating and activating executive software for the VPM-3 A and VPM-3 B processors, all vital parameter settings must be at the correct values for the specific ElectroLogIXS/EC5 installation. Failure to verify the parameter settings after VPM-3 A and VPM-3 B executive software update could cause unsafe operation resulting in death or serious injury. CI-2 or UCI-3 Application Program Update WARNING A CI-2 or UCI-3 module may contain an application or PTC mapping / configuration information in the non-volatile CI-2 or UCI-3 memory. After installing or replacing a CI-2 or UCI-3 module, ensure the ElectroLogIXS is configured with the proper revisions of application program and PTC mapping / configuration information. Installing incorrect revisions may result in death or serious injury. The VPM-3 Application program stored in the CI-2 or UCI-3 Flash memory can be updated over a CIO-1/CIO-1A/CIO-CLA Serial Interface, over Ethernet connection using a Terminal Interface or Ethernet connection using Web GUI interface VPM-3 application files can be uploaded to the CI-2 or UCI-3 module and are identified as follows: . xxxx.mb1 - Multi-file application file. Contains one or more Vital and/or Non-Vital applications . xxxxv.b1 - Single application file. Contains a Vital application (denoted by final v before .b1) . xxxxnv.b1 - Single application file. Contains a Non-vital application (denoted by final nv before .b1) To update via Terminal interface, a terminal program (e.g. HyperTerminal) that is capable of Telnet is required (uses the Ethernet connection only) or a Terminal program, CIO-1/CIO-1A/CIO-CLA module, and a computer with a serial interface is required. In both Terminal interface approaches, the computer used for the update must have TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) server software installed. To update via the Web GUI interface, Ethernet Connection to VPM-3 is required. The CI-2 or UCI-3 Flash memory stores one application program file or one multi-application program file of any size up to 8 Mbytes. When this download procedure is performed, the downloaded file overwrites any file previously stored on the CI-2 or UCI-3 module. Note: 100373-010 AR0 If an EPROM with a valid application file is installed on the CI-2 or UCI-3 module, the VPM-3 will not read the application from the Flash memory but will use the application loaded on the EPROM. To use the CI-2 or UCI-3 Flash memory, remove any EPROM device from the CI-2 or UCI-3. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-45 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Application Program Update using Zmodem over RS-232 Interface 1. Connect the computer serial port to the VPM-3 diagnostic port on the CIO-1/CIO-1A/CIO-CLA module via serial cable. 2. Configure the Terminal Emulation program as follows: Baud Rate: Parity: Data Bits: Stop Bits: Flow Control: Terminal emulation: Data Transfer Protocol: Note: 57600 bps 1 8 1 None VT100 or ANSI BBS ZModem (if update is done via the serial interface) 57600 bps is the default setting for the VPM-3 diagnostic terminal in update mode. The IP Address can only be changed in the Update Mode using Telnet. If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 has had this setting changed, the updated setting should be used. 3. Place the VPM-3 in Update mode as follows: a. Turn off the power switch on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 b. Press and hold the PROG button on the VPM-3 c. Turn on the power switch on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 d. Release the PROG button 4. If the VPM-3 is in Update mode and the computer is correctly connected to the VPM-3 diagnostic terminal the boot prompt should be displayed on the terminal emulation program (Boot> _). 5. To see a list of available commands type help at the boot prompt: Boot> help Command version set show save cidn Description Version Information Set Config Show Config Save Parameters to Flash Download Ethernet->CI-2 cidz ptcdn Download Z-Modem->CI-2 Download PTC File Ethernet->CI-2 ptcdz format dz dn df pwreset ethdefault default help Download PTC File Z-Modem->CI-2 Format Flash File System Download via Z-Modem Download via Ethernet Download via Filesystem Password Reset Request Ethernet Reset Request Restore default settings Help Syntax version set <option value> show <option> save cidn <filename> or <"filename with spaces"> cidz ptcdn <filename> or <"filename with spaces"> ptcdz format <PROG | LOG> dz dn <filename> df pwreset ethdefault default help <cmd> Note: This Zmodem feature is not provided if connected through the telnet interface. 2-46 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation 6. Optionally, you can set the baud to the desired value. Options are 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 bits per second. For example, to change the baud to 115200, type “set baud 115200” and hit “Enter.” Note: When the baud is changed, the terminal emulation program will no longer be set to the value being used by the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. Disconnect the terminal emulation session and change the baud setting for the terminal to the new ElectroLogIXS/EC5 value. After a setting has been changed, the boot prompt will indicate that the setting has not been saved in the VPM-3 non-volatile memory at the boot prompt: Boot (Unsaved Data)>__ The setting is operative (i.e. the baud has been changed) but the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 will revert to the previous value when the system is reset. To make the changed setting the new non-volatile setting, type “save” at the prompt and hit “Enter”. The “Unsaved Data” indication will no longer be displayed. If, however, the change is only temporary, simply do not use the save command and the settings will revert to the previous value at reset. 7. When the baud rate has been set to the desired value, type “cidz” at the boot prompt. The following will be displayed on the terminal emulation: Start Zmodem download. Timeout in 60 seconds.. 8. Use the terminal emulation program to select and send the file via the Zmodem protocol. In HyperTerminal, the menu selection is Transfer-> Send File. In Procomm, the menu selection is Data-> Send File. 9. Use the "Browse" button to navigate to the location of the application program file and press "Send". If the file is not selected within 60 seconds of the “cidz” command being entered, a "Download Failed" error message is displayed on the terminal and the “cidz” command will need to be reentered. Figure 2-30, Zmodem Dialog 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-47 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 10. The file transfer may take several minutes to complete. After the transfer has been completed successfully, text similar to the following will be displayed on the terminal emulation program: Download Complete: 131072 bytes Application EPT Header:IWP multi-application EPROM VLC_APP created 03/17/08 by ACE Version 4.3.0.2048 Store Application to the CI Flash (Yes/No)? 11. Confirm the name of the application file (the name follows “EPROM” and is “VLC_APP” above) and the compile date / ACE version are the expected values. If so, the update may be applied. 12. Type “Y” and hit “Enter” to store the application file in the CI-2 or UCI-3 Flash memory. 13. While the VPM-3 is saving the file to the CI-2 or UCI-3 Flash, the following will be displayed: Writing Application to CI Flash... ........ 14. The VPM-3 has successfully saved the application program to the CI-2 or UCI-3 Flash when the following is displayed: Application File written to the CI Flash 15. To reset the ElectroLogIXS/EC5, enter "reset" at the boot prompt or cycle power on the chassis. 16. Once the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 has reset, it will use the default vital application. Go to the “Application” page on the main Web GUI to select the newly applied application. Note: Refer to the “Application” page in Volume Two, section 6 of this manual for details on the “Application” Web GUI page. Note: To log in to the ElectroLogIXS/EC5, the screen must be refreshed. 2-48 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation Uploading PTC Files using Zmodem protocol over RS-232 Interface 1. Prior to downloading the new VPM-3 Mapping File, ensure the values for all configurable parameters are available from the site documentation or have been recorded from the values shown on the CDU or Web GUI. 2. Connect the computer serial port to the VPM-3 diagnostic port on the CIO-1/CIO-1A/CIO-CLA module via serial cable. 3. Configure the Terminal Emulation program as follows: Baud Rate : Parity : Data Bits : Stop Bits : Flow Control : Terminal emulation : Data Transfer Protocol: Note: 57600 bps None 8 1 None VT100 or ANSI BBS ZModem (if update is done via the serial interface) 57600 bps is the default setting for the VPM-3 diagnostic terminal in update mode. The IP Address can only be changed in the Update Mode using Telnet. If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 has had this setting changed, the updated setting should be used. 4. Place the VPM-3 in Update mode as follows: a. Turn off the power switch on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 b. Press and hold the PROG button on the VPM-3 c. Turn on the power switch on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 d. Release the PROG button 5. If the VPM-3 is in Update mode and the computer is correctly connected to the VPM-3 diagnostic terminal the boot prompt should be displayed on the terminal emulation program (Boot> _). 6. To see the list of available commands, type help at the boot prompt: Boot> help Command version set show save cidn Description Version Information Set Config Show Config Save Parameters to Flash Download Ethernet->CI-2 cidz ptcdn ptcdz format dz dn df pwreset ethdefault default help Note: 100373-010 AR0 Syntax version set <option value> show <option> save cidn <filename> or <”filename with spaces”> Download Z-Modem->CI-2 cidz Download PTC File ptcdn <filename> or Ethernet->CI-2 <”filename with spaces"> Download PTC File ptcdz Z-Modem->CI-2 Format Flash File System format <PROG | LOG> Download via Z-Modem dz Download via Ethernet dn <filename> Download via Filesystem df Password Reset Request pwreset Ethernet Reset Request ethdefault Restore default settings default Help help <cmd> This Zmodem feature is not provided if connected through the telnet interface. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-49 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 7. Optionally, you can set the baud to the desired value. Options are 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 bits per second. For example, to change the baud to 115200, type “set baud 115200” and hit “Enter.” Note: When the baud is changed, the terminal emulation program will no longer be set to the value being used by the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. Disconnect the terminal emulation session and change the baud setting for the terminal to the new ElectroLogIXS/EC5 value. After a setting has been changed, the boot prompt will indicate that the setting has not been saved in the VPM-3 non-volatile memory at the boot prompt: Boot (Unsaved Data)>__ The setting is operative (i.e. the baud has been changed) but the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 will revert to the previous value when the system is reset. To make the changed setting the new non-volatile setting, type “save” at the prompt and hit “Enter”. The “Unsaved Data” indication will no longer be displayed. If, however, the change is only temporary, simply do not use the save command and the settings will revert to the previous value at reset. 8. When the baud rate has been set to the desired value, type “ptcdz” at the boot prompt. The following will be displayed on the terminal emulation: Start Zmodem download. Timeout in 60 seconds.. 9. Use the terminal emulation program to select and send the file via the Zmodem protocol. In HyperTerminal, the menu selection is Transfer-> Send File. In Procomm, the menu selection is Data-> Send File. 10. Navigate to the location of the .ptcbmap file. If the file is not selected within 60 seconds of the “ptcdz” command being entered, the “ptcdz” command will need to be reentered. 11. The file transfer will take several minutes to complete. After the transfer has been completed successfully, text similar to the following will be displayed on the terminal emulation program: Download Complete: 3426 bytes PTC Mapping File Header:PTC Editor Version: <1.0.0.3> Source Filename: <D:\PTC\Lab\IXS App\officetest3\officetest3.ptcprj> File Compile Date <Friday, May 28, 2010, 4:11:32 PM> Store PTC File to the CI Flash (Yes/No)? 12. Confirm filename and compile date are the expected values. If so, the updates may be applied. 13. Type “Y” and hit “Enter” to apply the file to the CI flash. 14. While the VPM-3 is saving the files to the on-board memory, the following will be displayed: Writing PTC File to CI Flash... ........ 15. The update has completed successfully when the following is displayed: PTC File written to the CI Flash 2-50 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation 16. To reset the ElectroLogIXS/EC5, push the reset button on the screen. . 17. If a PTC Mapping file was applied, once the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 has reset, the PTC Mapping File must be activated before it is used. Go to the “Apply Software” page on the main Web GUI to activate the newly applied Mapping File. 18. Once the Mapping file is activated, the PTC Vital and Non-Vital configuration settings must be set according to the site plans. Note: Refer to the “PTC Non-Vital Configuration” and “PTC Vital Configuration” sections in Volume Two, section 6 of this manual for details on the “PTC Non-Vital Configuration” and “PTC Vital Configuration” Web GUI pages Telnet/TFTP Server Executive Software Update using TFTP over Ethernet 1. Prior to uploading the new VPM-3 Executive Software, ensure the values for all configurable parameters are available from the site documentation or have been recorded from the values shown on the CDU or Web GUI. 2. Place the VPM-3 in Update mode as follows: a. Turn off the power switch on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 b. Press and hold the PROG button on the VPM-3 c. Turn on the power switch on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 d. Release the PROG button 3. Connect the computer Ethernet RJ45 port to one of the VPM-3 Ethernet RJ45 ports, using an ethernet cable. 4. Login to the VPM-3 using telnet a. On the computer, open a command prompt window, and type telnet to connect to the IP port on the VPM-3. C:\> telnet 192.168.1.12 23 Note: The default VPM-3 IP addresses are 192.168.0.11 for the ENET1 (upper) RJ45 port and 192.168.1.12 for the ENET2 (lower) RJ45 port. 192.168.1.12 is the IP address of the IP port connected to on the VPM-3. 23 is the default telnet port setting for the VPM-3 in update mode. The IP Address can only be changed in the Update Mode using Telnet. If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 has had this setting changed, the updated setting should be used. b. If the computer is correctly connected to the VPM-3 ethernet port, the login prompt should be displayed on the command prompt window. Welcome to InterNiche Telnet Server 1.0 (GE ElectroLogIXS VPM-3) login: c. Enter admin and then enter telnet at the password prompt. password: Note: admin and telnet are the default telnet settings for the VPM-3 in update mode. The IP Address can only be changed in the Update Mode using Telnet. If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 has had this setting changed, the updated setting should be used. d. If valid username and password are entered, the boot prompt should be displayed on the command prompt window(Boot> _). 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-51 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 5. To see the list of available update mode commands, type “?” or “help” and hit “Enter.” The following text will be displayed on the terminal emulation program. Boot> help Command version set show save cidn Description Version Information Set Config Show Config Save Parameters to Flash Download Ethernet->CI-2 ptcdn Download PTC File format dn df pwreset default ethdefault help Format Flash File System Download via Ethernet Download via Filesystem Password Reset Request Restore default settings Ethernet Reset Request Help Syntax version set <option value> show <option> save cidn <filename> or <”filename with spaces”> ptcdn <filename> or <”filename with spaces"> format <PROG | LOG> dn <filename> df pwreset default ethdefault help <cmd> Note: cidz and dz options are not provided if connected through the telnet interface. 6. To see the current update mode settings, type “show” and hit “Enter.” A list similar to the following will be displayed: Boot> show baud: port: server: filename: 57600 1 192.168.0.12 vpmallepm.bin gateway: 0.0.0.0 *Port 1* ip1: netmask1: mac1: dhcP1: 192.168.0.11 255.255.255.0 00:09:91:42:4A:DF Enabled *Port 2* ip2: netmask2: mac2: dhcP2: 192.168.1.12 255.255.255.0 00:09:91:42:4A:E0 Enabled *Telnet* tnport: 23 username: admin password: telnet 2-52 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation 7. Confirm the Ethernet port (1 or 2), server IP address (IP address of the computer), and client IP addresses (IP address's of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 ports) are set to the correct values. If not, update the settings to the desired values using the “Set” command (e.g. “set ip1 192.168.0.10"). If a filename other than “vpmallepm.bin” is to be downloaded, use the set command to change the name of the file. 8. If the file is to be updated across a network (rather than from a directly connected computer), enter the correct gateway and netmask settings obtained from the network administrator. 9. When these settings are correct, ensure that the TFTP server is running on the computer and has visibility to the directory with the VPM-3 Executive Software file. 10. Type “dn” and hit “Enter.” Text similar to the following should be displayed: Ethernet Address is 00:09:91:42:4A:F3 \ Note: If the above is not seen, use the “show” command to confirm that the correct Ethernet port, IP addresses, and filename have been entered. If all are correct it may be necessary to determine if the computer firewall is not allowing TFTP access. Contact the network administrator to confirm. 11 . The file transfer will take several seconds to complete. After the transfer has been completed successfully, text similar to the following will be displayed on the terminal emulation program: Download Complete: 3420184 bytes The following is a list of updates to apply: VPM A Exec Image - Version: 7.03 Bld004C VPM B Exec Image - Version: 7.03 Bld004C VPM C Exec Image - Version: 7.03 Bld004C Size: 895892 CRC: 7F7AA666 Size: 865572 CRC: 259ADC59 Size: 1658600 CRC: BA314712 Would you like to apply all the updates listed (Yes/No)? n 12 . Confirm the version, build and CRC values for each of the processors is the expected value. If so, the updates may be applied. 13 . Type “Y” and hit “Enter” to apply all of the updates to the VPM-3. If an individual processor is to be updated, enter “N” at the “update all” prompt and “Y” at the desired individual update(s). 14 . While the VPM-3 is saving the files to the on-board memory, the following will be displayed: WARNING - DO NOT REMOVE POWER WHILE THESE UPDATES ARE APPLIED !! Processing: VPM A Exec Image VPMA Transfer Posted... Processing: VPM B Exec Image VPMB Transfer Posted... Processing: VPM C Exec Image ........... 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-53 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 15. The update has completed successfully when the following is displayed: Flash operation on VPM C Exec Image completed successfully. Flash operation on VPM B Exec Image completed successfully. Flash operation on VPM A Exec Image completed successfully. Please wait. Please wait. Please wait. *** All flash operations have completed! *** *** Reset the system for any changes to take effect. *** 16. Once the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 has reset, the newly applied executive software must be activated before it is used. Go to the “Apply Software” page on the main Web GUI to activate the newly applied exec. WARNING After updating and activating executive software for the VPM-3 A and VPM-3 B processors, all vital parameter settings must be at the correct values for the specific ElectroLogIXS/EC5 installation. Failure to verify the parameter settings after VPM-3 A and VPM-3 B executive software update could cause unsafe operation resulting in death or serious injury. CI-2 or UCI-3 Application Program Update WARNING A CI-2 or UCI-3 module may contain an application or PTC mapping / configuration information in the non-volatile CI-2 or UCI-3 memory. After installing or replacing a CI-2 or UCI-3 module, ensure the ElectroLogIXS is configured with the proper revisions of application program and PTC mapping / configuration information. Installing incorrect revisions may result in death or serious injury. The VPM-3 Application program stored in the CI-2 or UCI-3 Flash memory can be updated over a CIO-1/CIO-1A/CIO-CLA Serial Interface, over Ethernet connection using a Terminal Interface or Ethernet connection using Web GUI interface VPM-3 application files can be uploaded to the CI-2 or UCI-3 module and are identified as follows: . xxxx.mb1 - Multi-file application file. Contains one or more Vital and/or Non-Vital applications . xxxxv.b1 - Single application file. Contains a Vital application (denoted by final v before .b1) . xxxxnv.b1 - Single application file. Contains a Non-vital application (denoted by final nv before .b1) To update via Terminal interface, a terminal program (e.g. HyperTerminal) that is capable of Telnet is required (uses the Ethernet connection only) or a Terminal program, CIO-1/CIO-1A/CIO-CLA module, and a computer with a serial interface is required. In both Terminal interface approaches, the computer used for the update must have TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) server software installed. To update via the Web GUI interface, Ethernet Connection to VPM-3 is required. The CI-2 or UCI-3 Flash memory stores one application program file or one multi-application program file of any size up to 8 Mbytes. When this download procedure is performed, the downloaded file overwrites any file previously stored on the CI-2 or UCI-3 module. Note: 2-54 If an EPROM with a valid application file is installed on the CI-2 or UCI-3 module, the VPM-3 will not read the application from the Flash memory but will use the application loaded on the EPROM. To use the CI-2 or UCI-3 Flash memory, remove any EPROM device from the CI-2 or UCI-3. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation Application Program Update using TFTP over Ethernet 1. Place the VPM-3 in Update mode as follows: a. Turn off the power switch on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 b. Press and hold the PROG button on the VPM-3 c. Turn on the power switch on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 d. Release the PROG button 2. Connect the computer Ethernet RJ45 port to one of the VPM-3 Ethernet RJ45 ports, using an ethernet cable. 3. Login to the VPM-3 using telnet a. On the computer, open a command prompt window, and type telnet to connect to the IP port on the VPM-3. C:\> telnet 192.168.1.12 23 Note: The default VPM-3 IP addresses are 192.168.0.11 for the ENET1 (upper) RJ45 port and 192.168.1.12 for the ENET2 (lower) RJ45 port. 192.168.1.12 is the IP address of the IP port connected to on the VPM-3. 23 is the default telnet port setting for the VPM-3 in update mode. The IP Address can only be changed in the Update Mode using Telnet. If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 has had this setting changed, the updated setting should be used. b. If the computer is correctly connected to the VPM-3 ethernet port, the login prompt should be displayed on the command prompt window. Welcome to InterNiche Telnet Server 1.0 (GE ElectroLogIXS VPM-3) login: c. Enter admin and then enter telnet at the password prompt. password: Note: admin and telnet are the default telnet settings for the VPM-3 in update mode. The IP Address can only be changed in the Update Mode using Telnet. If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 has had this setting changed, the updated setting should be used. d. If valid username and password are entered, the boot prompt should be displayed on the command prompt window (Boot> _). 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-55 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 4. To see the list of available update mode commands, type “?” or “help” and hit “Enter.” The following text will be displayed on the terminal emulation program. Boot> help Command version set show save cidn Description Version Information Set Config Show Config Save Parameters to Flash Download Ethernet->CI-2 ptcdn Download PTC File format dn df pwreset default ethdefault help Format Flash File System Download via Ethernet Download via Filesystem Password Reset Request Restore default settings Ethernet Reset Request Help Syntax version set <option value> show <option> save cidn <filename> or <”filename with spaces”> ptcdn <filename> or <”filename with spaces"> format <PROG | LOG> dn <filename> df pwreset default ethdefault help <cmd> Note: cidz and dz options are not provided if connected through the telnet interface. 5. To see the current update mode settings, type “show” and hit “Enter.” A list similar to the following will be displayed: Boot> show baud: port: server: filename: 57600 1 192.168.0.12 vpmallepm.bin gateway: 0.0.0.0 *Port 1* ip1: netmask1: mac1: dhcP1: 192.168.0.11 255.255.255.0 00:09:91:42:4A:DF Enabled *Port 2* ip2: netmask2: mac2: dhcP2: 192.168.1.12 255.255.255.0 00:09:91:42:4A:E0 Enabled *Telnet* tnport: 23 username: admin password: telnet 6. The VPM-3 defaults to a dhcp server. Ordinarily, no configuration of the host PC is required. If desired, confirm the Ethernet port (1 or 2), server IP address (IP address of the computer), and client IP addresses (IP address's of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 ports) are set to the correct values. If not, update the settings to the desired values using the “Set” command (e.g. “set ip1 192.168.0.10"). 2-56 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation 7. If the file is to be updated across a network (rather than from a directly connected computer), enter the correct gateway and netmask settings obtained from the network administrator. 8. When these settings are correct, ensure that the TFTP server is running on the computer and has visibility to the directory with the VPM-3 application file. 9. Type “cidn filename” and hit “Enter.” If the name of the application file has spaces in the name, enclose the filename in quotes, e.g. cidn “filename with spaces”. Text similar to the following will be displayed: Ethernet Address is 00:09:91:42:4A:F3 \ Note: If the above is not seen, use the “show” command to confirm that the correct Ethernet port, IP addresses, and filename have been entered. If all are correct it may be necessary to determine if the computer firewall is not allowing TFTP access. Contact the network administrator to confirm. 10. The file transfer may take several seconds to complete. After the transfer has been completed successfully, text similar to the following will be displayed on the terminal emulation program: Download Complete: 131072 bytes Application EPT Header:IWP multi-application EPROM VLC_APP created 03/17/08 by ACE Version 4.3.0.2048 Store Application to the CI Flash (Yes/No)? 11. Confirm the name of the application file (the name follows “EPROM” and is “VLC_APP” above) and the compile date / ACE version are the expected values. If so, the update may be applied. 12. Type “Y” and hit “Enter” to store the application file in the CI-2 or UCI-3 Flash memory. 13. While the VPM-3 is saving the file to the CI-2 or UCI-3 Flash, the following will be displayed: Writing Application to CI Flash... ........ 14. The VPM-3 has successfully saved the application program to the CI-2 or UCI-3 Flash when the following is displayed: Application File written to the CI Flash 15. To reset the ElectroLogIXS/EC5, enter "reset" at the boot prompt or cycle power on the chassis 16. Once the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 has reset, it will use the default vital application. Go to the “Application” page on the main Web GUI to select the newly applied application. Note: Refer to the “Application” page in Volume Two, section 6 of this manual for details on the “Application” Web GUI page. Note: To log in to the ElectroLogIXS/EC5, the screen must be refreshed. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-57 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Uploading PTC Files using TFTP over Ethernet 1. Place the VPM-3 in Update mode as follows: a. Turn off the power switch on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 b. Press and hold the PROG button on the VPM-3 c. Turn on the power switch on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 d. Release the PROG button 2. Connect the computer Ethernet RJ45 port to one of the VPM-3 Ethernet RJ45 ports, using an ethernet cable. 3. Login to the VPM-3 using telnet a. On the computer, open a command prompt window, and type telnet to connect to the IP port on the VPM-3. C:\> telnet 192.168.1.12 23 Note: The default VPM-3 IP addresses are 192.168.0.11 for the ENET1 (upper) RJ45 port and 192.168.1.12 for the ENET2 (lower) RJ45 port. 192.168.1.12 is the IP address of the IP port connected to on the VPM-3. 23 is the default telnet port setting for the VPM-3 in update mode. The IP Address can only be changed in the Update Mode using Telnet . . If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 has had this setting changed, the updated setting should be used. b. If the computer is correctly connected to the VPM-3 ethernet port, the login prompt should be displayed on the command prompt window. Welcome to InterNiche Telnet Server 1.0 (GE ElectroLogIXS VPM-3) login: c. Enter admin and then enter telnet at the password prompt. password: Note: admin and telnet are the default telnet settings for the VPM-3 in update mode. The IP Address can only be changed in the Update Mode using Telnet. If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 has had this setting changed, the updated setting should be used. d. If valid username and password are entered, the boot prompt should be displayed on the command prompt window (Boot> _). 4. To see the list of available update mode commands, type “?” or “help” and hit “Enter.” The following text will be displayed on the terminal emulation program. Boot> help Command version set show save cidn Description Version Information Set Config Show Config Save Parameters to Flash Download Ethernet->CI-2 ptcdn Download PTC File format dn df pwreset default ethdefault help Format Flash File System Download via Ethernet Download via Filesystem Password Reset Request Restore default settings Ethernet Reset Request Help Syntax version set <option value> show <option> save cidn <filename> or <”filename with spaces”> ptcdn <filename> or <”filename with spaces"> format <PROG | LOG> dn <filename> df pwreset default ethdefault help <cmd> Note: cidz and dz options are not provided if connected through the telnet interface. 2-58 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation 5. To see the current update mode settings, type “show” and hit “Enter.” A list similar to the following will be displayed: Boot> show baud: port: server: filename: 57600 1 192.168.0.12 vpmallepm.bin gateway: 0.0.0.0 *Port 1* ip1: netmask1: mac1: dhcP1: 192.168.0.11 255.255.255.0 00:09:91:42:4A:DF Enabled *Port 2* ip2: netmask2: mac2: dhcP2: 192.168.1.12 255.255.255.0 00:09:91:42:4A:E0 Enabled *Telnet* tnport: 23 username: admin password: telnet 6. Confirm the Ethernet port (1 or 2), server IP address (IP address of the computer), and client IP addresses (IP address's of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 ports) are set to the correct values. If not, update the settings to the desired values using the “Set” command (e.g. “set ip1 192.168.0.10"). 7. If the file is to be updated across a network (rather than from a directly connected computer), enter the correct gateway and netmask settings obtained from the network administrator. . When these settings are correct, ensure that the TFTP server is running on the computer and has 8. visibility to the directory with the VPM-3 PTC files. 9. Type “ptcdn <filename>” and hit “Enter.” Text similar to the following should be displayed: Ethernet Address is 00:09:91:42:4A:F3 \ Note: If the above is not seen, use the “show” command to confirm that the correct Ethernet port, IP addresses, and filename have been entered. If all are correct it may be necessary to determine if the computer firewall is not allowing TFTP access. Contact the network administrator to confirm. 10. The file transfer will take several seconds to complete. After the transfer has been completed successfully, text similar to the following will be displayed on the terminal emulation program: Tftp from 192.168.0.10 done Download Complete: 2748 bytes PTC Mapping File Header:PTC Editor Version: <1.0.0.3> Source Filename: <D:\PTC\Lab\IXS App\officetest3\officetest3.ptcprj> File Compile Date <Friday, May 28, 2010, 4:11:32 PM> Store PTC File to the CI Flash (Yes/No)? 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-59 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 11. Confirm filename and compile date are the expected values. If so, the updates may be applied. 12. Type “Y” and hit “Enter” to apply the file to the CI flash. 13. While the VPM-3 is saving the files to the on-board memory, the following will be displayed: Writing PTC File to CI Flash ........... 14. The update has completed successfully when the following is displayed: PTC File written to the CI Flash 15. If a PTC Mapping file was applied, once the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 has reset, the PTC Mapping File must be activated before it is used. Go to the “Apply Software” page on the main Web GUI to activate the newly applied Mapping File. 16. Once the Mapping file is activated, the PTC Vital and Non-Vital configuration settings must be set according to the site plans. Note: Refer to the “PTC Non-Vital Configuration” and “PTC Vital Configuration” sections in Volume Two, section 6 of this manual for details on the “PTC Non-Vital Configuration” and “PTC Vital Configuration” Web GUI pages. 2-60 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation Set VPM-3 Ethernet Defaults To restore Ethernet connectivity with the VPM-3 in Executive mode and enable the default settings on the VPM-3 DHCP server enter the following command at the boot prompt, Boot> ethdefault An ethernet settings reset request was created Boot> When restarting in executive mode, the DHCP server will be restored to its default settings and connectivity is assured to both VPM-3 Ethernet ports. Format Program/Log Flash 1. To format program/log flash file system via Telnet Server using the VPM-3 Ethernet connection ports, perform the following procedures. 2. Connect a network cable from the computer RJ45 port to one of the VPM-3 Ethernet RJ45 ports, using an Ethernet cable. 3. Place the VPM-3 in Update mode as follows: a. b. c. 4. Press and hold the PROG button on the VPM-3 Press and release the PTCP reset button on the VPM-3 Release the PROG button If the VPM-is in Update Mode, it can be connected to via a Telnet session. a. b. Connect the computer Ethernet RJ45 port to one of the VPM-3 Ethernet RJ45 ports, using an Ethernet cable. On the computer, open a command prompt window, and type telnet to connect to the IP port on the VPM-3. C:\> telnet 192.168.0.11 23 Note: The default IP addresses of VPM-3 Ethernet connection ports 1/2 are 192.168.0.11/192.168.1.12, and 23 is the default telnet port setting for the VPM-3 in update mode. The IP Address can only be changed in the Update Mode using Telnet. If the VPM-3 has had this setting changed, the updated setting should be used. c. If the computer is correctly connected to the VPM-3 Ethernet port, the login prompt should be displayed on the command prompt window. Welcome to InterNiche Telnet Server 1.0 (Modified by GE) login: d. Enter admin and then enter telnet at the password prompt. password: Note: admin and telnet are the default telnet settings for the VPM-3 in update mode. The IP Address can only be changed in the Update Mode using Telnet. If the VPM-3 has had this setting changed, the updated setting should be used. e. 100373-010 AR0 If valid username and password are entered, the boot prompt should be displayed on the command prompt window (Boot> _). © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-61 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 5. To see the list of available update mode commands, type “?” or “help” and hit “Enter.” The following text will be displayed on the terminal emulation program. Boot> help Command version set show activateexec save cidn ptcdn format dn df pwreset ethdefault default help 6. Description Version Information Set Config Show Config Activate the Executive Save Parameters to Flash Download Ethernet->CI-2 Syntax version set <option value> show <option> activateexec save cidn <filename> or <"filename with spaces"> Download PTC File Ethernet->CI-2 ptcdn <filename> or <"filename with spaces"> Format Flash File System format <PROG | LOG> Download via Ethernet dn <filename> Download via Filesystem df Password Reset Request pwreset Ethernet Reset Request ethdefault Restore default settings default Help help <cmd> Type "format PROG", and then hit "Enter". The following text will be displayed on the terminal emulation program. Boot> format PROG Format the Program Flash file system (Yes/No)? 7. Type "Y", and then hit "Enter" to format the program flash file system. 8. Type "format LOG", and then hit "Enter". The following text will be displayed on the terminal emulation program. Boot> format LOG *** WARNING - this command will erase ALL of the executive logs *** Format the Log Flash file system (Yes/No)? 9. 2-62 Type "Y", and then hit "Enter" to format the log flash file system. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation TIP-2 Installation Install the TIP-2 as required for your location. Refer to Figure 2-31 for installation dimensions. It is recommended to locate the TIP-2 as close to the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 chassis as possible. This will provide the best surge protection and track circuit performance. Figure 2-31, TIP-2 Dimensions. Dimensions Height Slot Width Slot Height Width A B C D 5¼" (133mm) 18½" (470mm) 2¼" (57mm) 19" (483mm) I/O Module Cable Installation Consult the Application Circuit Plan for the proper I/O slot to attach each cable. Attach each cable to the proper connector receptacle on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 personality modules. If the cable wires are not already inserted into the header connectors, strip 3/8-inch ± 1/8-inch of insulation before inserting wires into the connectors. Write the slot number on each cable's identification tag. The cables must be installed before the I/O modules. If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 was received as part of a rack assembly, the I/O module cables may already be installed and this step may be ignored. However, the Application Circuit Plan should be compared to verify the position of each I/O module cable. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 22-63 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 I/O Module Cable Application Connections See the Application Circuit Plan for the information necessary to wire the non-connector end of each cable. If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 was received as part of a rack assembly, some of the I/O module wires will have been factory wired to terminal strips on the rack. The remaining wires need to be terminated as shown in the Application Circuit Plan. EEPROMs Three Configuration EEPROMs contain FRC (Field Related Configuration) data. The FRC information is entered by the user via the CDU-1. Data is written/read to/from these EEPROMs by the VPM Module. This data stored may be as simple as the date and time, or as specific as the track voltage/current settings. FRC DATA EPROMS 373-PH08 Figure 2-32, ElectroLogIXS Backplane. 2-64 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation Figure 2-33, EC5 Colorlight Backplane (BP-1) Figure 2-34, Endbox Backplane (BP-2) 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-65 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Rail Connections Ensure that all connections within the track circuit have the minimum possible resistance. This is especially true with regard to the bond wires which connect the rail ends together at each bolted track joint. For track circuit lengths over 13,000 feet (3962m), welded rail should be used. For track circuits over 19,000 feet (5791m) welded rail must be used. The routing of track wires within the bungalow should be as short and direct as possible, especially for the longer track circuits. For track circuit lengths over 18,000 feet (5486m) it is essential that 6 gauge wire be used for all track wires, including the track wires within the bungalow. Alternatively, 10 gauge wire may be used if the wires are doubled up. If the operation of the track circuit proves to be unreliable the most likely causes are: • A poor electrical connection somewhere within the circuit. Possible causes are broken rail repairs and missing bond wires. • A leakage path between the two rails at some point within the circuit. Some examples are shorted rail gage plates and conditions of low ballast. In both cases a close inspection by walking the track will help to pinpoint the problem. Lamp Wiring-VLD-C6S Refer to Tables 2-2 through 2-4 to determine the maximum lamp wiring length for VLD-C6S modules. Table 2-2 Maximum Wire Length in feet (meters) from ElectroLogIXS/EC5 to Signal Lamp (1-way) Wire Size #6 AWG Two #6 AWG 10 V Bulb operated at 10 V 18 W bulb 20 W bulb 25 W bulb Two 20 W bulbs 799 (243.5m) 719 (219.2m) 575 (175.3m) 360 (109.7m) 1,438 (438.3m) 1,150 (350.5m) 719 (219.2m) 1,598 (487.1m) #9 AWG 399 (121.6m) 359 (109.4m) 287 (87.5m) 179 (54.6m) Two #9 AWG 797 (242.9m) 717 (218.5m) 574 (175m) 359 (109.4m) 1,196 (364.5m) 1,076 (328m) 861 (262.4m) 538 (164m) Three #9 AWG Table 2-3 Maximum Wire Length in feet (meters) from ElectroLogIXS/EC5 to Signal Lamp (1-way) Wire Size 18 W bulb 20 W bulb 25 W bulb Two 20 W bulbs #6 AWG 1,148 (349.9m) 1,033 (314.9m) 826 (251.8m) 516 (157.3m) Two #6 AWG 2,295 (699.5m) 2,066 (629.7m) 1,652 (503.5m) 1,033 (314.9m) #9 AWG 572 (174.3m) 515 (157m) 412 (125.6m) 258 (78.6m) Two #9 AWG 1,145 (349m) 1,030 (313.9m) 824 (251.2m) 515 (157m) 1,717 (523.3m) 1,545 (470.9m) 1,236 (376.7m) 773 (235.6m) Three #9 AWG 2-66 10 V Bulb operated at 9.5 V © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation Table 2-4 Maximum Wire Length in feet (meters) from ElectroLogIXS/EC5 to Signal Lamp (1-way) Wire Size 10 V Bulb operated at 9 V 18 W bulb 20 W bulb 25 W bulb Two 20 W bulbs #6 AWG 1,516 (462.1m) 1,364 (415.7m) 1,091 (332.5m) 682 (207.9m) Two #6 AWG 3,032 (924.2m) 2,729 (831.8m) 2,183 (665.4m) 1,364 (415.7m) 756 (230.4m) 681 (207.6m) 544 (165.8m) 340 (103.6m) Two #9 AWG 1,512 (460.9m) 1,361 (414.8m) 1,089 (331.9m) 681 (207.6m) Three #9 AWG 2,268 (691.3m) 2,042 (622.4m) 1,633 (497.7m) 1,021 (311.2m) #9 AWG VLD-C6S Battery Cable Supply Lengths Each VLD-C6S module requires its own battery connection, separate from the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system battery connection. Either the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system battery may be wired to each VLD personality module or a separate lamp battery supply may be used. The VLD personality module will accept 12 AWG for the battery connections. A maximum cable resistance of 0.0294 ohms is allowed. This is equivalent to 9 feet of dedicated 12 AWG wire between the VLD personality module and the lamp battery supply. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-67 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Lamp Wiring - VLD-R16S Tables 2-5 through 2-7 indicate the maximum lamp wiring length for the conditions noted. The VLD-R16S personality module accepts 12 AWG wire for the Lamp Output connections. To achieve the distances noted, a maximum of 25 feet of 12 AWG wire (or a maximum of 0.0405 ohms resistance) may be used between the personality module and the connection to the wire size indicated. The distances noted can be achieved with either a dedicated lamp return (one lamp per return) or with a common, single wire return for two lamps. In all cases, the lamp return is assumed to be the same distance and wire size. The distances are governed primarily by a maximum of 2.0 VDC being allowed on a disabled (off) lamp output induced by the other lamp of the pair on a common return. Table 2-5, Maximum Wire Length from IXS to Signal Lamp (1-way) for VLD-R16S 10 V Bulb operated at 10V Wire Size 18 W Bulb 20 W Bulb 25 W Bulb 28 W Bulb Feet Meters Feet Meters Feet Meters Feet Meters #6 AWG 2560 780.3 2140 652.3 1710 521 1560 475.5 #9 AWG 1280 390 1060 323 850 259 780 237.7 Table 2-6, Maximum Wire Length from IXS to Signal Lamp (1-way) for VLD-R16S 10 V Bulb operated at 9.5 V Wire Size 18 W Bulb 20 W Bulb 25 W Bulb 28 W Bulb Feet Meters Feet Meters Feet Meters Feet Meters #6 AWG 2640 804.7 2200 670.6 1760 536.5 1610 490.7 #9 AWG 1320 402.3 1100 335.3 870 265 800 243.8 Table 2-7, Maximum Wire Length from IXS to Signal Lamp (1-way) for VLD-R16S 10 V Bulb operated at 9 V Wire Size 18 W Bulb 20 W Bulb 25 W Bulb 28 W Bulb Feet Meters Feet Meters Feet Meters Feet Meters #6 AWG 2700 822.9 2250 685.8 1800 548.6 1640 499.9 #9 AWG 1340 408.4 1120 341.4 890 271.3 820 249.9 VLD-R16S Battery Cable Supply Lengths Each VLD-R16S module requires its own battery connection for lamp power separate from the ElectroLogIXS battery connection. The VLD-R16S Personality module accepts two, 12 AWG battery connections along with a neutral reference for each lamp bank.The VLD-R16S allows a battery connection length of up to 25 feet of 12 AWG wire (a maximum battery connection resistance of 0.0405 ohms). Attention must be given when using a power bus for distributing lamp power to the individual lamp bank connections in installations that require a large number of lamps. The large current demand caused by turning on multiple lamps simultaneously could result in the lamp power input voltage dropping below the minimum 9.5 VDC ( and the lamp banks shut down) if the power bus is not sized to handle the current demand. 2-68 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation Track Termination and Lightning Protection Chassis GE Transportation Global Signaling recommends grounding the chassis to ensure compliance with FCC requirements. Supply Battery 1. Protect the supply battery by installing an equalizer between positive and negative battery. 2. Refer to Figure 2-35. Install an air-gap arrester from positive and negative battery to earth ground. Figure 2-35, Air-Gap Arrester Location. Electro Code Track Circuits Install an equalizer across the track and an air-gap arrester from each rail to earth ground. Auxiliary Inputs and Outputs (VIO-44S Modules) CAUTION If connections to the VIO-44S Module leave the signal case, they must be protected from lightning and surges by installing lightning arresters and equalizers. All spare conductors in the cable must also be protected in the same fashion. Refer to Figure 2-36. Any wires that go outside the signal cases are susceptible to electrical surges and must be protected with an air-gap arrester to earth ground. Figure 2-36, Lightning Arrester Schematic - Vital Input or Output. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-69 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Lamp Circuits Refer to Figure 2-37. Install an air-gap arrester between each lamp output used (including lamp common) and earth ground. WARNING Do not use an equalizer between a lamp output and lamp common. Install surge arresters only between the lamp output and earth ground and between lamp common and earth ground. The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 may interpret a failed surge arrester as a lamp filament if the surge arrester is installed incorrectly. Figure 2-37, Surge Arrester Schematic. Track Code Select Inputs/Track Code Decoder Outputs CAUTION If connections to the VIO-1010S Module leave the signal case, they must be protected from lightning and surges by installing lightning arresters and equalizers. All spare conductors in the cable must also be protected in the same fashion. Refer to Figure 2-38. Any wires that go outside the instrument housing are susceptible to electrical surges and must be protected with an air-gap arrester to earth ground. Figure 2-38, Lightning Arrester Schematic - Vital Input or Output. 2-70 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation Single Break Contacts In applications where the code select chain does not extend beyond the instrument housing, single break contacts are used to select all code rates. Under this circumstance, connect REF- to common (ICOM) as shown in Figure 2-39. Figure 2-39, Single Break Contacts. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-71 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Double Break Contacts Refer to Figure 2-40. In applications where the code select chain does extend beyond the instrument housing to an adjacent house or other logic, double break contacts are used to select vital code rates. Figure 2-40, Double Break Contacts. 2-72 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation Serial Communication ElectroLogIXS Serial Communication with VPM 2+/VPM 3 ElectroLogIXS provides up to three general-purpose serial ports for vital and non-vital communications plus a dedicated serial port for the diagnostic terminal. As shown in table below, the first slot supports non-vital communications over RS-232 (CIO-1A,CIO-CLA) while the second and third slots support either vital or non-vital communications over RS-232 (CIO-2A, CIO-2AB, CIO-PCA) or RS-485 (CIO-MDA). The table below shows the available options for each serial communications port. Vital Remote Physical Serial Port: Slot 1 RS-232 Office* Non Vital ATCS HAWK Office* Recorder CIO-1A Slot 2 CIO-2A or CIO-MDA CIO-2AB CIO-MDA CIO-PCA CIO-MDA Slot 3 CIO-2A or CIO-MDA CIO-2AB CIO-MDA CIO-PCA CIO-MDA LCP CIO-1A with external CLA or CIO-CLA CIO-2A with external CLA CIO-2A with external CLA * = Each ElectroLogIXS supports only one office port EC5 Serial Communication EC5 provides up to two general-purpose serial ports for vital and non-vital communications plus a dedicated serial port for the diagnostic terminal. As shown in table below, the first slot supports non-vital communications over RS-232 (CIO-1/CIO-CLA) while the second slot supports either vital or non-vital communications over RS-232 (CIO-2, CIO-PCA), RS-422 (CIO-3), or RS-485 (CIO-MDA). The table below shows the available options for each serial communications port. Configured with VPM 2+/VPM 3 Physical Serial Port: Vital Remote Slot 1 RS-232 Office* CIO-1 Slot 2 CIO-2, CIO3, or CIOMD * = Each ElectroLogIXS supports only one office port ATCS Office* Non Vital HAWK Recorder LCP CIO-1 with external CLA or CIO-CLA CIO-3, CIO-MD, or CIO-PCA CIO-MD CIO-2 with external CLA Configured with VPM 2 Physical Serial Port: Slot 1 Slot 2 100373-010 AR0 Vital Remote RS-232 Office* CIO-1 Non Vital ATCS HAWK Office* Recorder LCP CIO-2, CIO3, or CIOMD © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-73 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Vital Communications Serial Point to Point Operation WARNING The CIO-1/CIO-1A, CIO-CLA, CIO-2/CIO-2A, CIO-2AB, CIO-3, CIO-MD/ CIO-MDA, CIO-PCA,and the VPM-3 Ethernet ports provide isolation protection against Ground Faults. If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 is powered from Signal or Equipment battery, Ground Faults in external equipment attached to the CIO-1/CIO-1A, CIO-CLA CIO-2/CIO-2A, CIO-2AB, CIO-3, CIO-MD /CIO-MDA, CIO-PCA, or the VPM-3 Ethernet ports combined with a failure of the isolation protection of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 may be passed through to the powering battery under certain failure conditions. Undetected Ground Faults to Signal or Equipment battery may result in hazardous rail operation. If connections to the CIO-1/CIO-1A, CIO-CLA, CIO-2/CIO-2A, CIO-2AB, CIO-3, CIO-MD/CIO-MDA, CIO-PCA, or the VPM-3 Ethernet ports are left unattended, Ground Fault testing must be performed after the connection is established, and at FRA mandated intervals thereafter. The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 supports Serial Point to Point vital communications using either the CIO-2/CIO-2A, CIO-MD/CIO-MDA, or CIO-PCA modules. The CIO-2/CIO-2A module uses RS-232 signaling and is suitable for communication networks that do not extend beyond the equipment housing. The CIO-MD/CIO-MDA module uses RS-485 signaling and is suitable for networks that extend beyond the equipment housing. When cabling extends outside of the equipment housing, the cable’s ground shield must be tied to ground and appropriate surge protection should be provided. The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 provides two slots that will each accept either a CIO-2/CIO-2A, CIO-MD/CIO-MDA, CIO-PCA, and CIO-3(EC5 only). An example of a wiring diagram for a synchronous RS-485 Point to Point network is shown below (Figure 241). 373-0507 Figure 2-41, Synchronous Full Duplex RS-485 Point to Point Connection 2-74 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation An example of a wiring diagram for an asynchronous RS-485 Point to Point network without hardware flow control is shown below (Figure 2-42). 373-0508 Figure 2-42, Asynchronous Full Duplex RS-485 Point to Point Connection without Hardware Flow Control An example of a wiring diagram for an asynchronous RS-485 Point to Point network with hardware flow control is shown below (Figure 2-43). 373-0509 Figure 2-43, Asynchronous Full Duplex RS-485 Point to Point Connection With Hardware Flow Control 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-75 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 An example of a wiring diagram for an asynchronous RS-232 Point to Point network without hardware flow control is shown below (Figure 2-44). 373-0510 Figure 2-44, Asynchronous RS-232 Point to Point Connection Without Hardware Flow Control An example of a wiring diagram for an asynchronous RS-232 Point to Point network with hardware flow control is shown below (Figure 2-45). 373-0511 Figure 2-45, Asynchronous RS-232 Point to Point Connection With Hardware Flow Control 2-76 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation Serial Multi-Drop Operation WARNING When an ElectroLogIXS/EC5 vital remote link is configured for anything other than point-to-point operation over a hard-wired serial cable, configuration management must ensure that duplicate Local Network IDs do not exist on that communications net. Examples of communications nets include, but are not limited to: · Multi-drop serial communications · Local Area Networks (LANs) · Wide Area Networks (WANs) · Fiber-Optic backbones · Radio communications This includes devices that may belong to other railway agencies (e.g. on radio links). Failure to ensure that there are no duplicate Local Network IDs on a communications net could result in death or serious injury. (See Appendix B for more detailed information) An ElectroLogIXS/EC5 must not be configured with identical Local/Remote Network ID pairs for different vital remote links, even if those vital remote links are on different communications nets. If duplicate Local/Remote Network ID pairs are used for redundancy, the application/installation must ensure that only one of the duplicate pairs is active/operational at a given time. Failure to ensure that there are no duplicate Local/Remote Network ID pairs within an ElectroLogIXS/EC5 or that redundant pairs cannot be active/ operational simultaneously could result in death or serious injury. (See Volume Two, Appendix B for more detailed information) When setting a vital remote link Local or Remote Network ID on an ElectroLogIXS/EC5, use only the value supplied on the application circuit plans. If this information is not available from the application circuit plans, do not put that vital remote link into service until this is corrected. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. (See Appendix B for more detailed information) The CIO-MD/CIO-MDA provides isolation protection against Ground Faults. If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 is powered from Signal or Equipment battery, Ground Faults in external equipment attached to the CIO-MD/CIO-MDA combined with a failure of the isolation protection of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 may be passed through to the powering battery under certain failure conditions. Undetected Ground Faults to Signal or Equipment battery may result in hazardous rail operation. If connections to the CIO-MD/CIO-MDA are left unattended, Ground Fault testing must be performed after the connection is established, and at FRA mandated intervals thereafter. The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 supports Serial Multi-Drop vital communications using the CIO-MD/CIO-MDA module. Up to two CIO-MD/CIO-MDA modules can be installed in an ElectroLogIXS/EC5 and either or both of them can be configured for Multi-Drop operation. In Multi-Drop mode, several devices can share a single serial connection. One device on the bus must be the master device with all the others configured as slaves. The master device controls the network and polls each slave in turn to allow them to transmit their data. Each ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Multi-Drop port can be configured to operate as either the master or slave device on a Multi-Drop network. The Multi-Drop network can be configured for synchronous or asynchronous operation. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-77 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 An example wiring diagram for a synchronous Serial Multi-Drop network consisting of ElectroLogIXS/EC5, EC5s and/or VHLCs is shown below. If the synchronous network installation includes VHLCs, each VHLC must include an RS-422/485 module and be configured for Multi-Drop operation. If the synchronous network installation includes EC5s, each EC5 must include a CIO-MD module and be configured for Multi-Drop synchronous operation. The maximum end-to-end length for a multi-drop network should be less than 4000 feet. If the required length of the network is greater than 4000 feet, an intermediate device (e.g. modem, repeater, radio, etc.) is required. The network should only be terminated at the end-points and only if the baud-rate / network length combination requires it. Terminations are not required if the bit-time used on the network is much greater than three times the down-and-back propagation delay of the network wiring. Use the following calculation to determine if termination is required: 1/ baud rate >> 3 x (2 x Cable Length in feet) x 1.01 x 10-9 seconds / foot For example, to determine if termination is required for a 2000 ft network operating at 9600 baud: Bit time is: 1/9600 = 104 usecs. 3 x Propagation delay is: 3 x (2 x 2000 ft) x (1.01 x 10-9) = 12.16 usecs. 104 usecs is >> 12.16 usecs; therefore, no termination is needed. If termination at the network end-point CIO modules is needed, open the plastic cases of the CIO-MD/CIO-MDA assemblies (using tool P/N 095968-000 to remove the latch if necessary) and place jumpers (P/N 032384-000) across the connectors (W1, W2, W3, W5, W6, and W14) to activate the terminations. Figure 2-46, Synchronous Multi-Drop Network An example wiring diagram for an asynchronous Serial Multi-Drop network without hardware flow control consisting of ElectroLogIXS/EC5 and/or EC5s is shown below. If the asynchronous network installation includes EC5s, each EC5 must include a CIO-MD module and be configured for asynchronous Serial MultiDrop operation. 2-78 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation Figure 2-47, Asynchronous Serial Multi-Drop Network Without Hardware Flow Control Ethernet Operation WARNING The VPM-3 Ethernet ports provide isolation protection against Ground Faults. If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 is powered from Signal or Equipment battery, Ground Faults in external equipment attached to the VPM-3 Ethernet ports combined with a failure of the isolation protection of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 may be passed through to the powering battery under certain failure conditions. Undetected Ground Faults to Signal or Equipment battery may result in hazardous rail operation. If connections to the VPM-3 Ethernet ports are left unattended, Ground Fault testing must be performed after the connection is established, and at FRA mandated intervals thereafter. The ElectroLogIXS or EC5/ VPM-3 supports vital communication over either or both Ethernet connections using IP / UDP (Internet Protocol / User Datagram Protocol). Vital communications over Ethernet can occur simultaneously with vital communications on one or more serial interfaces and also simultaneously with non-vital Ethernet comunications (Office and Web GUI communications). ElectroLogIXS or EC5/ VPM-3 supports 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX communication and auto-negotiates with the connected device for speed selection. The two Ethernet connections are available on the VPM-3 via the two, labeled 8P8C (referred to as an RJ45) connections. Table 2-8 shows the standard, straight-through wiring connections for Ethernet. The VPM-3 auto-detects straight versus crossover connection types so either cable type may be used. Table 2-8, Pin Assignments for Ethernet Connection Pin # (Straight) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Pin # (Crossover) 3 6 1 2 10BASE-T Signal 100 BASE-TX Signal Transmit+ TransmitReceive+ Unused Unused ReceiveUnused Unused Wire Color (TIA 568A) White/Green Green White/Orange Blue White/Blue Orange White/Brown Brown Wire Color (TIA -568B) White / Orange Orange White / Green Blue White / Blue Green White / Brown Brown The maximum distance between10 BaseT / 100 BaseTX Ethernet network connections is 100 meters (328 feet). If greater distances are required, an intermediate device (e.g. switch, modem, etc.) must be used. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-79 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Non Vital Communications Serial Point-to-Point Operation WARNING The CIO-1/CIO-1A, CIO-CLA, CIO-2/CIO-2A, CIO-2AB, CIO-3, CIO-MD/CIO-MDA, CIO-PCA, provides isolation protection against Ground Faults. If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 is powered from Signal or Equipmentbattery, Ground Faults in external equipment attached to the CIO-1/CIO-1A, CIO-CLA, CIO-2/CIO-2A, CIO-2AB, CIO-3, CIO-MD/CIO-MDA, CIO-PCA, combined with a failure of the isolation protection of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 may be passed through to the powering battery under certain failure conditions. Undetected Ground Faults to Signal or Equipment battery may result in hazardous rail operation. If connections to the CIO-1/CIO-1A, CIO-CLA, CIO-2/CIO-2A, CIO-2AB, CIO-3, CIO-MD/CIO-MDA, CIO-PCA, are left unattended, Ground Fault testing must be performed after the connection is established, and at FRA mandated intervals thereafter. The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 supports Serial Point to Point communications using the CIO-1/CIO-1A/CIO-CLA module. The CIO-1/CIO-1A/CIO-CLA sits in a dedicated slot and provides separate dedicated RS-232 ports for office or LCP communications and a local maintenance diagnostic terminal. Both ports utilize RS-232 signaling, which is suitable for communication networks that do not extend beyond the equipment housing. An example of a wiring diagram for an asynchronous RS-232 Point to Point network with flow control is shown in Figure 2-48. 373-0510 Figure 2-48, Asynchronous RS-232 Point to Point Connection With Hardware Flow Control ATCS Office Ports interface to radios through the synchronous signals shown in Figure 2-38. Both the connector and pin assignments are radio vendor specific. Please confirm connector / pin assignment details with the radio equipment supplier. 2-80 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation Serial Multi-Drop Operation WARNING The CIO-MD/CIO-MDA provides isolation protection against Ground Faults. If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 is powered from Signal or Equipment battery, Ground Faults in external equipment attached to the CIO-MD/CIO-MDA combined with a failure of the isolation protection of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 may be passed through to the powering battery under certain failure conditions. Undetected Ground Faults to Signal or Equipment battery may result in hazardous rail operation. If connections to the CIO-MD/CIO-MDA are left unattended, Ground Fault testing must be performed after the connection is established, and at FRA mandated intervals thereafter The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 supports Serial Multi-Drop non vital communications using the CIO-MD/CIO-MDA module. Up to two CIO-MD/CIO-MDA modules can be installed in an ElectroLogIXS/EC5 but only one can configured for non vital Serial Multi-Drop operation. In Serial Multi-Drop mode, several devices can share a single serial connection. One device on the bus must be the master device with all the others configured as slaves. The master device controls the network and polls each slave in turn to allow them to transmit their data. An ElectroLogIXS/EC5 non-vital Serial Multi-Drop port can operate only as an asynchronous slave device on a Serial Multi-Drop network. The CIO-MD/CIO-MDA module uses RS-485 signaling and is suitable for networks that extend beyond the equipment housing. When cabling extends outside of the equipment housing, the cable’s ground shield must be tied to ground and appropriate surge protection should be provided. An example of a wiring diagram for an asynchronous non vital RS-485 Multi-Drop network interfacing to a 3 wire HAWK recorder interface is shown below (see Figure 2-49). The maximum end-to-end length for a multi-drop network should be less than 4000 feet. If the required length of the network is greater than 4000 feet, an intermediate device (e.g. modem, repeater, radio, etc.) is required. The network should only be terminated at the end-points and only if the baud-rate / network length combination requires it. Terminations are not required if the bit-time used on the network is much greater than three times the down-and-back propagation delay of the network wiring. Use the following calculation to determine if termination is required: 1/ baud rate >> 3 x (2 x Cable Length in feet) x 1.01 x 10-9 seconds / foot For example, to determine if termination is required for a 2000 ft network operating at 9600 baud: Bit time is: 1/9600 = 104 usecs. 3 x Propagation delay is: 3 x (2 x 2000 ft) x (1.01 x 10-9) = 12.16 usecs. 104 usecs is >> 12.16 usecs; therefore, no termination is needed. If termination at the network end-point CIO modules is needed, open the plastic cases of the CIO-MD/CIO-MDA assemblies (using tool P/N 095968-000 to remove the latch if necessary) and place jumpers (P/N 032384-000) across the connectors (W1, W2, W3, W5, W6, and W14) to activate the terminations. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-81 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 3 pin Multi-Drop Master 25 pin Multi-Drop Slave + 2 - 14 3 COM 25 pin Multi-Drop Slave TXDA TXDB RXDA 16 RXDB 7 GND Shield Twisted Pair 3 pin Multi-Drop Slave 2 + 14 - 3 16 7 COM 373-0514 Figure 2-49, Non-Vital Asynchronous Serial Multi-Drop Network without Hardware Flow Control Ethernet Operation The ElectroLogIXS or EC5/ VPM-3 supports non-vital communication over either or both Ethernet connections. Non-vital office communications use the IP / UDP (Internet Protocol / User Datagram Protocol) while Web GUI communications use TCP / IP (Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol). Non-vital communications over Ethernet can occur simultaneously with vital Ethernet communications. The two Ethernet connections are available on the VPM-3 via the two, labeled 8P8C (referred to as an RJ45) connections. Table 2-9 shows the standard, straight-through wiring connections for Ethernet. The VPM-3 auto-detects straight versus crossover connection types so either cable type may be used. The maximum distance between10 BaseT / 100 BaseTX Ethernet network connections is 100 meters (328 feet). If greater distances are required, an intermediate device (e.g. switch, modem, etc.) must be used. Table 2-9, Pin Assignments for Ethernet Connection Pin # (Straight) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2-82 Pin # (Crossover) 3 6 1 2 10BASE-T Signal 100 BASE-TX Signal Transmit+ TransmitReceive+ Unused Unused ReceiveUnused Unused Wire Color (TIA 568A) White/Green Green White/Orange Blue White/Blue Orange White/Brown Brown © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. Wire Color (TIA -568B) White / Orange Orange White / Green Blue White / Blue Green White / Brown Brown 100373-010 AR0 Installation Initial Setup WARNING After initial setup of ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Field Related Configuration Settings, adequate testing must be performed to detect any errors related to these configuration settings. The tests should be performed before the unit is placed into service and in accordance with standard railroad, FRA, and/or other regulatory agency rules. This should include visual inspection of vital parameter values.The tests should be performed by qualified personnel that have the knowledge to correctly and safely discharge the tests. Failure to adequately test the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 unit after the initial setup could result in death or serious injury. Powering the System for the First Time 1. Verify all modules are installed and seated properly in the chassis. 2. Verify all electrical connections are made and the battery is properly connected. 3. Place the Power Switch to the ON position. 4. CDU-1 (Control Display Unit) will display: System Initialization The System Initialization message is displayed while the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 reads the CI Module, and performs hardware and software checks. If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 resets, check the VPM Module or refer to Chapter 4 - Troubleshooting. Note: 5. VPM LEDs (CPU A, B, and C) will be constantly illuminated during startup. After startup is complete, VPM LEDs will flash to indicate the CPUs are functioning properly. After the system has been initialized, the CDU-1 will display: Downloading Application The Downloading Application message is displayed while the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 reads the application EPROMs on the Backplane and loads them into system memory. If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 resets, check the CI Module or refer to Chapter 4 - Troubleshooting. Note: 6. If the CDU displays “Incorrect Chassis Id”, the Chassis ID number of the application EPROM does not match the Chassis ID number set into the Chassis ID DIP pack. Refer to Chassis ID Setup in this chapter for more information concerning Chassis ID Setup. After the applications have been downloaded, the CDU-1 will display: Application OK Please Wait During this phase of the startup, the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 is verifying the application equations. If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 resets, check the CI Module or refer to Chapter 4 - Troubleshooting. 7. Check the CDU-1 display. If an alarm is detected, the date and time portion of the Home Menu will alternate with the alarm message(s). 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-83 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 8. Verify the Health LED on each module is illuminated. This process may take up to two minutes, once the power is switched ON. 9. Using the CDU-1, select the Quick Status Menu. The Quick Status Menu are the items directly below the GETSGS Home Menu. See Figure 5.3 for an example. The items shown in the Quick Status Menu are dependent upon the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 application. Track Circuit Setup Recommended Guidelines Track circuit adjustments for EC5 and ElectroLogIXS have been simplified to general recommendations. These recommendations are for typical applications (ElectroLogIXS to ElectroLogIXS, ElectroLogIXS to EC5, or ElectroLogIXS to EC4). In the event that block circumstances are significantly different than a typical application, contact GETS GS Technical Services for further recommendations. Transmitter adjustment recommendations have been modified to include losses that can result from track wire lengths. The following procedure will address the means to make these calculations. In general, the detection of trains in a block operates best when the Receive Reference value is about 1/3 the actual receive current. This general rule for 1/3 the receive current has some flexibility in setting the Receive Reference. Setting the Transmit Voltage too high can cause too much receive current at the other end of the block, which can result in the distortion of vital code. Tables 2-10 and 2-11 specify the transmitter and receiver adjustments to be used for each track circuit length. Table 2-10 is used for ElectroLogIXS to EC5 or ElectroLogIXS applications; Table 2-9 is used for track circuits with an ElectroLogIXS/EC5 at one end and an EC4 at the other. These tables are designed to provide reliable operation with ballast resistance as low as 3 ohms per one thousand feet of track. Train presence will be detected when the rail-to-rail shunt resistance is .06 ohms or less. For operation with ballast resistance less than 3 ohms, for train detection with greater than .06 ohm shunt resistance, or for installations where track wire length must exceed the limits shown in Table 2-9, contact GETSGS. For reliable and safe operation the following recommendations should be observed: 2-84 • Ensure that all connections within the track circuit have the minimum possible resistance. This is especially true with regard to the bond wires which connect the rail ends together at each bolted track joint. For track circuit lengths over 13,000 feet (3962m) it is highly recommended that welded rail be used. For track circuits over 19,000 feet (5791m) it is imperative that welded rail be used. • The routing of track wires within the bungalow should be as short and direct as possible, especially for the longer track circuits. For track circuits over 18,000 feet (5486.4m) it is essential that 6 gauge wire be used for all track wires, including the track wires within the bungalow. Alternatively, 10 gauge wire may be used if the wires are doubled up. • After any track circuit adjustment, standard railroad, FRA, and/or other regulatory agency procedures should be performed to test the shunting sensitivity of the track with a 0.06 ohm shunt (see FRA 236.56). Shunting sensitivity tests should be performed under optimum ballast conditions. If optimum ballast conditions do not exist, a follow-up test should be performed to insure proper shunting sensitivity of the track with a 0.06 ohm shunt during optimum ballast conditions. Adjustments to the track circuit settings are stored in the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 configuration log. GETSGS recommends that a log be kept including the condition of the ballast when adjustments are made to the track circuit. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation If the operation of the track circuit proves to be unreliable the most likely causes are: 1. A poor electrical connection somewhere within the circuit. Possible causes are broken rail repairs and missing bond wires. 2. A leakage path between the two rails at some point within the circuit. Some examples are rail gauge plates and salt in the ballast at grade crossings. In both cases a close inspection by walking the track will help to pinpoint the problem. If the problem cannot be resolved by correcting the track condition then the transmitter and receiver settings may be changed by entering values from the adjustment table for a track circuit which is one thousand or two thousand feet longer than the actual length. Any adjustment outside of this range may compromise the ability to detect train presence and broken rail, therefore the user must assume full responsibility for the safety implications. Setup for ElectroLogIXS to ElectroLogIXS or ElectroLogIXS to EC5 Step 1. Estimating the Track Wire Length The impedance of the track wire from each TIP-2 to the rail can affect the performance of the Track Circuit. The wire length should be converted to an approximate additional block distance and will be needed to determine the initial track transmitter voltage setting. Use the following procedure to estimate total track circuit length. Note: That the track circuit wire run is the total of both ends of the block (based on using No. 6 Copper wire twisted pair – both wires considered as a single length together). Measure the track circuit wire run from the instrument housing to the track feed point in feet, then multiply the resulting total by 10. Example: If the track wire from the TIP-2 to the connection at the rail is 100 feet (30m) at one end of the block and 75 feet (23m) at the other end of the block, add 100 (30m) to 75 (23m) to get a total of 175 (53m). Multiply 175 (53m) by 10 to get 1750 feet (533m) as the track wire length. This 1750 feet (533m)will be added to the actual block length in Step 2 to determine the total circuit length. Step 2. Determine the Total Track Circuit Length Add the additional track length to the actual block length to get the total track circuit length. Example: If additional track wire length is 1750 feet (533m) (as computed in Step 1) and the actual block length is 7550 feet (2301m), then the total track circuit length is 1750 (533m) + 7550 (2301m) = 9300 feet (2835m). Always round this value up to the nearest 1000-foot (305m) increment. (9300 ft rounds up to 10,000 ft) Step 3. Set the Initial Receive Reference Value As an initial setting, set the VTI-2Ss at each end of the block Receive Reference value to 0.5 A. This will assure that codes will be transmitted and received during the setup process. Step 4. Set the Initial Transmit Voltage Set the Initial Transmit Voltage to the value listed in Table 2-10 for the VTI-2Ss at each end of the block. Remember to use the Total Track Circuit Length value computed in Step 2. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-85 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Step 5. Read the Receive Current Read the Receive Current on the CDU. The value should be within the range listed in Expected Receive Current on Table 2-10. If the value that is read on the CDU for the Receive Current is lower than the Low Current Reading, review the installation for any faulty wiring connections or other conditions that can result in the lower reading. If all connections have been checked and are within the scope of good signaling practices, contact GETS Global Signaling Field Support for further assistance. If the value that is read on the CDU for the Receive Current is within the Low and High range, go to Step 6. If the value that is read on the CDU for the Receive Current is above the High range, reduce the Transmit Voltage by 0.5 VDC. If the Receive Current is now within the Low and High range proceed to Step 6. If it is still above the High range value, contact GETS Global Signaling Field Support. Step 6. Refining the Track Transmitter and Receive Reference Values Final adjustments to the track circuit will largely depend on the current state of the ballast leakage conditions. If the ballast conditions are currently wetter than normal ballast conditions, go Step 6a. If the ballast conditions are normal, that is, typical ballast conditions for the area, then go to Step 6b. If the ballast conditions are currently dry, that is, it is drier than normal ballast conditions, then go to Step 6c. Step 6a - Wet Ballast Conditions- Refining Track Transmitter and Receive values during wetter than normal ballast conditions Condition Correction Is the Receive Current less than 0.9A? Verify all track circuit connections before continuing. The Receive Current less than 0.9A and track circuit conditions appear good. Increase the Track Transmitter value at the transmitting end of the block by 0.5 VDC and verify that the Receive Current does not go above 1.5A. Is the Receive Current still less than 0.9A? Increase the Track Transmitter value at the transmitting end of the block by 0.5 VDC and verify that the Receive Current does not go above 1.5A. Is the Receive Current greater than 1.5A? If yes, reduce the Track Transmitter at the transmitting end of the block by 0.5 VDC and repeat step 6a. Is the Receive Current greater than 0.9A and less than or equal to 1.5A? The Track Transmitter and Receive Reference are set up correctly. Setup is Complete. If the Receive Current is above 1.5A then set the Transmit Voltage back to the previous value. Contact GETS Global Signaling Field Support When ballast conditions return to normal, it is recommended that adjustments be verified in accordance with Step 6b. 2-86 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation Step 6b - Normal Ballast Conditions - Refining Track Transmitter and Receive values during normal ballast conditions Condition Correction Is the Receive Current less than or equal to 1.5A? Yes? The Track Transmitter and Receive Reference are set up correctly. Setup is Complete. Is the Receive Current greater than 1.5A and less than or equal to 2.0A? If yes, increase the Receive Reference to 0.62A. Setup is Complete. Is the Receive Current greater than 2.0A and less than or equal to 2.5A? If yes, then increase the Receive Reference to 0.72A. Setup is Complete. Is the Receive Current greater than 2.5A? If yes, then reduce the Track Transmitter at the transmitting end of the block by 0.5 VDC. Is the Receive Current greater than 0.9A? Repeat Step 6b If the Receive Current is below 0.9A then set the Transmit Voltage back to the previous value and contact GETS Global Signaling Field Support. Step 6c - Dry Ballast Conditions - Refining Track Transmitter and Receive values during dryer than normal ballast conditions Condition Correction Is the Receive Current less than 0.9A? Verify all track circuit connections before continuing The Receive Current less than 0.9A and track circuit conditions appear good. Increase the Track Transmitter value at the transmitting end of the block by 0.5 VDC and verify that the Receive Current does not go above 2.0A. Is the Receive Current still less than 0.9A? Repeat the previous step. Is the Receive Current above 2.5A? Set the Transmit Voltage back to the previous value and contact GETS Global Signaling Field Support. Is the Receive Current greater than 0.9A and less than or equal to 1.5A? If yes, then Setup is Complete. Is the Receive Current greater than 1.5A and less than or equal to 2.0A? If yes, then increase the Receive Reference to 0.62A. Setup is Complete. Is the Receive Current greater than 2.0A and less than or equal to 2.5A? If yes, then increase the Receive Reference to 0.72A. Setup is Complete. Is the Receive Current greater than 2.5A? If yes, then reduce the Track Transmitter at the transmitting end of the block by 0.5 VDC. Is the Receive Current is greater than 0.9A? Repeat Step 6c. If the Receive Current is below 0.9A then set the Transmit Voltage back to the previous value and contact GETS Global Signaling Field Support. When ballast conditions return to normal, it is recommended that adjustments be verified in accordance with Step 6b. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-87 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 The Track Circuit Adjustment Table specifies the transmitter and receiver adjustments to be used for each track circuit length. Refer to Chapter 5 - CDU Program for instructions on using the CDU-1 to adjust transmitter voltage and receive reference. WARNING Improper adjustments or maintenance to track circuits could result in death or serious injury. After any track circuit adjustment, standard railroad, FRA, and/or other regulatory agency procedures should be performed to test the shunting sensitivity of the track with a 0.06 ohm shunt (see FRA 236.56). Shunting sensitivity tests should be performed under optimum ballast conditions. If optimum ballast conditions do not exist, a follow-up test should be performed to insure proper shunting sensitivity of the track with a 0.06 ohm shunt during optimum ballast conditions. Adjustments to the track circuit settings are stored in the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 configuration log. GETSGS recommends that a log be kept including the condition of the ballast when adjustments are made to the track circuit. WARNING Proper track circuit adjustment and operation should always be validated through track circuit shunt testing. 1. Using the CDU-1 and Figures 5-4 and 5-5 as a guide, from the Tracks Menu, select the appropriate track Menu. 2. Select the Track Transmitter Menu. 3. Press the Down Button, the CDU-1 will display the transmitter voltage. Xmit= 1.0V* I= 0.39A Track Res: 2.55 Ohm 4. Press the Enter Button. The CDU-1 will display a message similar to: Xmit Volt: Enter Value> 5. Using the appropriate table (Table 2-10 or Table 2-11), enter the transmit voltage for track circuit length. 6. Press the Enter Button. The CDU-1 will display the new transmitter voltage and a confirm message: Xmit Volt: Confirm ***** > 2-88 1.0V 1.0V 7. To confirm the new transmitter voltage, enter the 1 to 5 digit, number listed in the confirm message and press the Enter Button. If the new transmitter voltage is not correct, press the Cancel Button. 8. After confirmation, the Xmit Volt: field will blank momentarily as the system recalculates the transmitter voltage. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation 9. From the Tracks Menu, select the appropriate track number. 10. Select the Track Receiver Menu. 11. Press the Down Button, the CDU-1 will display the Receive Reference value. Receive I Reference = 1.72A = 0.55* 12. Press the Enter Button. The CDU-1 will display a message similar to: Reference: Enter Value> 0.55 13. Using the appropriate table (Table 2-10 or Table 2-11), enter the receive reference for track circuit length. Note: . When interfacing an ElectroLogIXS/EC5 to an Electrified Electro Code, set the Transmitter Voltage to 4.0 volts and the Receive Reference to 0.5 Amps Table 2-10 ElectroLogIXS to EC5 or ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Track Circuit Adjustment Table .06 Ohm Shunt Recommended Track Circuit Length Feet Meters 1000 304.8 2000 609.6 3000 914.4 4000 1219.2 5000 1524 6000 1828.8 7000 2133.6 8000 2438.4 9000 2743.2 10000 3048 11000 3352.8 12000 3657.6 13000 3962.4 14000 4267.2 15000 4572 16000 4876.8 17000 5181.6 18000 5486.4 19000 5791.2 20000 6096 21000 6400.8 22000 6705.6 23000 7010.4 24000 7315.2 Transmitter Voltage Low High 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 1.3 1.2 1.1 1.0 1.0 0.9 1.2 1.1 1.1 1.0 0.9 0.9 1.1 1.0 0.9 0.8 0.8 0.7 0.8 0.8 0.7 0.7 0.6 0.6 1.5 1.5 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.3 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.8 1.8 1.8 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.2 2.1 2.1 2.6 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.4 2.4 100373-010 AR0 Typical Receive Current, Amps Peak © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-89 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Setup for ElectroLogIXS/EC5 to EC4 Steps 1 to 3. Method for Determining total Track Circuit Length Use the same method for determining total track circuit length as previously noted for configuring an ElectroLogIXS/EC5 to ElectroLogIXS or EC5. Step 4. Set the Initial Transmit Voltage at the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Using the transmit voltage setting in Table 2-11 ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Recommended Settings, look up the initial transmit voltage to set for Track Circuit Transmitter at the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. Remember to use the Total Track Circuit Length value computed in Step 2. Step 4A. Determine and Set the 2R and 7K at the EC4 Using Table 2-11 EC4 Recommended settings, look up the Initial values to set for the VTI transmitter in the EC4. Remember to use the Total Track Circuit Length value computed in Step 2. Use the standard procedure to adjust the 7K module as described in the EC4 manual. Step 5. Read the Receive Current at the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Read the Receive Current on the CDU. The value should be within the range listed in Expected Receive Current on Table 2-11. If the value that is read on the CDU for the Receive Current is lower than the Low Current Reading, review the installation for any faulty wiring connections or other conditions that can result in the lower reading. If all connections have been checked and are within the scope of good signaling practices, contact GETS Global Signaling Field Support for further assistance. If the value that is read on the CDU for the Receive Current is within the Low and High range, go to Step 6. If the value that is read on the CDU for the Receive Current is above the High range, reduce the EC4 Transmit Voltage by moving the tap on the VTI transmitter to the next lower setting (i.e. 3=high, 2=medium, 1=low). If the Receive Current is now within the Low and High range proceed to Step 6. If it is still above the High range value, contact GETS Global Signaling Field Support. 2-90 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation Step 6. Refining the Track Transmitter and Receive Reference Values Final adjustments to the track circuit will largely depend on the current state of the ballast leakage conditions. If the ballast conditions are currently wetter than normal ballast conditions, go Step 6a. If the ballast conditions are normal, that is, typical ballast conditions for the area, then go to Step 6b. If the ballast conditions are currently dry, that is, it is drier than normal ballast conditions, then go to Step 6c. Step 6a - Wet Ballast Conditions- Refining Track Transmitter and Receive values during wetter than normal ballast conditions Condition Correction Is the Receive Current less than 0.9A? Verify all track circuit connections before continuing. The Receive Current less than 0.9A and track circuit conditions appear good. Increase the Track Transmitter value at the transmitting end of the block by moving the 2R tap to the next higher setting and verify that the Receive Current does not go above 1.5A. Is the Receive Current still less than 0.9A? Increase the Track Transmitter value at the transmitting end of the block by moving the 2R tap to the next higher setting and verify that the Receive Current does not go above 1.5A. Is the Receive Current greater than 1.5A? If yes, reduce the Track Transmitter at the transmitting end of the block by moving the 2R tap to the next higher setting and repeat step 6a. Is the Receive Current greater than 0.9A and less than or equal to 1.5A? The Track Transmitter and Receive Reference are set up correctly. Setup is Complete. If the Receive Current is above 1.5A then set the Transmit Voltage back to the previous value. Contact GETS Global Signaling Field Support When ballast conditions return to normal, it is recommended that adjustments be verified in accordance with Step 6b. Step 6b - Normal Ballast Conditions - Refining Track Transmitter and Receive values during normal ballast conditions Condition Correction Is the Receive Current less than or equal to 1.5A? Yes? The Track Transmitter and Receive Reference are set up correctly. Setup is Complete. Is the Receive Current greater than 1.5A and less than or equal to 2.0A? If yes, increase the Receive Reference to 0.62A. Setup is Complete. Is the Receive Current greater than 2.0A and less than or equal to 2.5A? If yes, then increase the Receive Reference to 0.72A. Setup is Complete. Is the Receive Current greater than 2.5A? If yes, then reduce the Track Transmitter at the transmitting end of the block by moving the 2R tap to the next higher setting. Is the Receive Current is greater than 0.9A? Repeat Step 6b If the Receive Current is below 0.9A then set the Transmit Voltage back to the previous value and contact GETS Global Signaling Field Support. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-91 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Step 6c - Dry Ballast Conditions - Refining Track Transmitter and Receive values during dryer than normal ballast conditions Condition Correction Is the Receive Current less than 0.9A? Verify all track circuit connections before continuing The Receive Current less than 0.9A and track circuit conditions appear good. Increase the Track Transmitter value at the transmitting end of the block by moving the 2R tap to the next higher setting and verify that the Receive Current does not go above 2.0A. Is the Receive Current still less than 0.9A? Repeat the previous step. Is the Receive Current above 2.5A? Set the Transmit Voltage back to the previous value and contact GETS Global Signaling Field Support. Is the Receive Current greater than 0.9A and less than or equal to 1.5A? If yes, then Setup is Complete. Is the Receive Current greater than 1.5A and less than or equal to 2.0A? If yes, then increase the Receive Reference to 0.62A. Setup is Complete. Is the Receive Current greater than 2.0A and less than or equal to 2.5A? If yes, then increase the Receive Reference to 0.72A. Setup is Complete. Is the Receive Current greater than 2.5A? If yes, then reduce the Track Transmitter at the transmitting end of the block by moving the 2R tap to the next lower setting. Is the Receive Current is greater than 0.9A? Repeat Step 6c. If the Receive Current is below 0.9A then set the Transmit Voltage back to the previous value and contact GETS Global Signaling Field Support. When ballast conditions return to normal, it is recommended that adjustments be verified in accordance with Step 6b. 2-92 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation Table 2-11 ElectroLogIXS/EC5 to EC4 Track Circuit Adjustment Table .06 Ohm Shunt EC4 Recommended Settings ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Recommended Settings Track Circuit Length 2R Tap 7K Resistors Ohms * Typ. Receive Current Amps, Peak Low High .91 .97 Transmit Voltage Receive Reference Amps Typ. Receive Current Amps, Peak Low High 1.7 1.9 Feet 1000 Meters 304.8 Low .22 1.0 .88 2000 609.3 Low .22 .83 .96 1.0 .82 1.5 1.9 3000 4000 914.4 1219.2 Low Low 0 0 .95 .89 1.16 1.14 1.0 1.0 .76 .71 1.4 1.3 1.8 1.8 5000 1524 Low 0 .82 1.12 1.0 .67 1.2 1.8 6000 1828.8 Low .22 .90 1.36 1.5 .63 1.1 1.8 7000 2133.6 Low .22 .83 1.34 1.5 .59 1.0 1.7 8000 2438.4 Low .22 .77 1.32 1.5 .55 .90 1.7 9000 2743.2 Low 0 .90 1.57 1.5 .52 .90 1.7 10000 3048 Medium 0 .83 1.54 1.5 .84 1.4 2.5 11000 3352.8 Medium .22 .82 1.69 2.0 .80 1.3 2.5 12000 3657.6 Medium .22 .76 1.67 2.0 .75 1.2 2.5 13000 3962.4 Medium .22 .70 1.65 2.0 .71 1.1 2.5 14000 4267.2 Medium 0 .82 1.94 2.0 .67 1.0 2.5 15000 4572 Medium 0 .76 1.90 2.0 .64 .90 2.5 * The lower three adjustment screws on the 7K board (S1-S3) should be set to the “in” (shorting) position. The upper adjustment screw (S4) should be set to the “in” (shorting) position for zero ohms and to the “out” (open) position for .22 ohms. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-93 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Table 2-12 - Total Sum of Track Wire Length* Track Circuit Feet Meters Single 6 Gauge Feet Meters 366 Double 6 Gauge Quadruple 6 Gauge Feet 2400 Meters 732 Feet 4800 Meters 1463 2400 732 4800 1463 1000 305 1200 2000 610 1200 3000 914 1200 2400 732 4800 1463 4000 1219 1100 335 2200 671 4400 1341 5000 1524 1100 335 2200 671 4400 1341 6000 1829 1000 305 2000 610 4000 1219 7000 2134 1000 305 2000 610 4000 1219 8000 2438 900 274 1800 549 3600 1097 366 366 9000 2743 800 244 1600 488 3200 975 10000 3048 700 213 1400 427 2800 853 11000 3353 600 183 1200 366 2400 732 12000 3658 500 152 1000 305 2000 610 13000 3962 400 122 800 244 1600 488 14000 4267 300 91 600 183 1200 366 15000 4572 200 61 400 122 800 244 16000 4877 150 46 300 91 600 183 17000 5182 150 46 300 91 600 183 18000 5486 150 46 300 91 600 183 19000 5791 100 30 200 61 400 122 20000 6096 100 30 200 61 400 122 21000 6401 100 30 200 61 400 122 22000 6706 50 15 100 30 200 61 23000 7010 50 15 100 30 200 61 24000 7315 50 15 100 30 200 61 * = Definition of "Total Sum of Track Wire Length" is shown in Figure 2-50 2-94 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation Note: This table is based on a nominal .06-ohm shunt sensitivity with minimum 3-ohm ballast and clean rail. While longer or shorter blocks and/or track circuit wire combinations may be possible depending on worst-case ballast conditions and/or track wire length, safe operation for any block length must be verified by placing a calibrated shunt across the rails at the receiving end of the block during the highest resistance ballast conditions. Adjustments should be verified following any major changes to ballast and periodically in accordance with railroad procedures. Figure 2-50, Total Sum of Track Wire Length 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-95 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Alternating Code 5 Menu The Alternating Code 5 Menu provides the ability to select the Code 5 option. Display< Alternating Code 5 Arrow Key Up Function Go to Appropriate Track. Down Go to the Alternating Code 5 submenu. Left Go to Test Mode. Right Comment Press the ENTER Key to enable this menu. Once the menu is enabled, press the Up or Down Arrow Key to toggle between the ALT and NON-ALT, press the ENTER Key, and verify the setting is correct. Go to Track Transmitter. Alternating Code 5 Submenu The Alternating Code 5 submenu provides the ability to select the Code 5 option. With Alternating Code 5 in the display, press the ENTER Button. The Alternating Code 5 Mode may be selected by pressing the Up and Down Arrow Keys. Display< Alternating Code 5 Code 5 = ALT/NON=ALT* Arrow Key Up 2-96 Function Go to Alternating Code 5. Down N/A Left N/A Right N/A Comment Press the ENTER Key to change the Code 5 option. Press the Up or Down Arrow Key to toggle between ALT and NON-ALT, press the ENTER Key, and verify the setting is correct. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation Lamp Voltage Setup There are two methods for setting the VLD-C6S lamp drive voltage; using the Manual Lamp Set-up Mode or the Automatic Lamp Setup Mode. The Manual Lamp Setup Mode allows the user to adjust the lamp drive voltages and the Automated Lamp Setup Mode allows the system to automatically calculate the actual output voltage based on a desired voltage at the lamp. Each setup mode is selected using the CDU-1. Refer to Chapter 5 - CDU Program for instructions on using the CDU-1 to set-up the lamps. The VLD-R16S lamp output voltage is set only by the voltage value of the lamp power input. No adjustment or set-up is required of the module itself. Manual Lamp Setup (VLD-C6S) The Manual Lamp Setup Mode provides the ability to adjust the lamp voltages on a bank of three lamps residing on a VLD-C6S Module. The Manual Lamp Setup Menu is selected using the CDU-1. When this mode is entered, the CDU-1 will display the lamp output voltage, for the specific bank being setup. It should be noted that the bank's output voltages are measured at the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 output, not at the lamp. When the user inputs the new output voltage the system prompts the user to confirm the new value. After confirmation, the system stores the new output value and sets the output voltage accordingly. Adjust the lamp voltages to railroad specified levels. 1. Using the CDU-1 and Figure 5-4 as a guide, select Lamp Maintenance from the LAMPS Menu. 2. Press the Down Arrow Button. Using the Figure 5-22 as a guide, select Setup/Test Slot 1 VLD-C6S . 3. Press the Down Arrow Button to select Lamp Manual Setup. 4. Press the Down Arrow Button. The CDU-1 displays the lamp drive voltage for the selected bank. 5. Using the Right and Left Arrow Buttons, select the desired lamp. 6. Press the Enter Button. The CDU-1 displays the current lamp voltage (for the selected lamp bank) and prompt for a new voltage. New Voltage > 7. Use the Alphanumeric Buttons to enter the new lamp voltage. 8. Press the Enter Button. The CDU-1 will display a confirm message Confirm ***** > 9. To confirm the new voltage, enter the 1-5 digit, number listed in the confirm message. Press the Enter Button. The new lamp drive voltage is now placed into system memory. 10. Repeat the process until both bank voltages have been set. Note: The voltage selected, applies to all 3 lamps in the bank. 11. If more than one VLD-C6S Module is installed in the system, repeat the procedure for each additional VLD-C6S Module. 12. With the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 turned On, and the lamps lit, check the voltage at the lamp head(s). 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-97 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Automated Lamp Setup (VLD-C6S) The Automated Setup Mode allows the system to automatically calculate the actual output voltage of the VLDC6S based on a desired voltage at the lamp. As soon as the user attempts to enter the Automated Setup Mode, the executable software verifies that it has permission to enter that mode based on Lamp Setup Grant status. If permission to enter the Automated Setup Mode is denied, a message is displayed on the CDU-1 informing the user that this mode can not be entered at the present time. This could be because of train position or the fact that an equation was never written to allow the Lamp Setup Grant status to go True. If permission to enter the Automated Setup Mode is granted, the executive software sets the Lamp Normal Mode status to False and the previously selected lamp voltage, for each of the lamp output driver statuses. The user selects which lamp output to perform the Automated Setup on. The CDU-1 then prompts the user for a new lamp voltage. When the user inputs the new desired lamp voltage at the lamp, the system has the user verify the change to the lamp voltage. Once verified, the system will start the automated setup procedure. The system will turn off all the lamps in the bank of the VLD-C6S that was selected for the setup for approximately 30 seconds. The system will illuminate each lamp in the bank for about 1 second with a 5 second off-time between each lamp. After the illuminating portion of the setup, the system calculates the voltage drop to the lamp and adjusts the lamp output voltage for the desired voltage to be present at the lamp. This takes another 30 seconds. The total setup time is approximately 90 seconds. If during the setup procedure the clear aspect is dropped, the procedure will be cut short. If the procedure is cut short, the system will hold the signals in that bank dark for approximately 30 seconds before returning to normal operation. In addition, an entry is placed in the user configuration log stating that the lamp voltage was changed. The new voltage at the lamp is displayed on the CDU-1 and the executable software sets the Lamp Normal Mode status back to True. The executable software continuously monitors the Lamp Setup Enable status, to determine if the permission has been overridden in the middle of the Automated Setup Mode. This will result in the executable software returning to the previous lamp output voltage and resuming normal lamp operation within 30 seconds. In the case of the Automatic Setup Mode being cut short the system will display a CDU-1 alarm message informing the user that the Automated Setup algorithm was cut short due to the application. Adjust the lamp voltages to railroad specified levels. 1. Using the CDU-1, select Lamp Maintenance from the LAMPS Menu. 2. Press the Down Arrow Button. Using the Figure 5-22 as a guide, select Setup/Test Slot 1VLD-C6S. 3. Press the Down Arrow Button to select Lamp Automated Setup. Note: 2-98 If “Access Denied” is displayed on the CDU-1, the Automated Setup Mode cannot be entered at this time. This could be due to the presence of trains or some other condition defined in the application equations. 4. Press the Down Arrow Button. The CDU-1 displays the lamp drive voltage for selected output. 5. Using the Right and Left Arrow Buttons, select the desired lamp. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation 6. Press the Enter Button. The CDU-1 will display the lamp voltage and prompt for a new voltage. New Voltage > 7. Use the Alphanumeric Buttons to enter the new lamp voltage. 8. Press the Enter Button. The CDU-1 will display a confirm message. Confirm ***** > 9. To confirm the new voltage, enter the 1 to 5 digit, number listed in the confirm message. Press the Enter Button. The new lamp drive voltage is now placed into system memory. Note: The calculated voltage, applies to all 3 lamps in the bank. 10. Repeat the process until all the lamp drive voltages have been set. 11. If more than one VLD-C6S Module is installed in the system, repeat the procedure for each additional VLD-C6S Module. 12. With the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 turned On, and the lamps lit, check the voltage at the lamp head(s). If during the setup procedure the Lamp Setup Grant is set to False, i.e., the clear aspect is dropped, the procedure will be cut short. If the procedure is cut short, the system will hold the signals in that bank dark for approximately 30 seconds before returning to normal operation. Timers Setup Entered Timer Values are stored in an EEPROM on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Backplane. During normal operation, these stored values are used instead of the default timer values contained in the Application EPROM on the CI or UCI-3 Module. If the stored timer values become corrupted, the VPM will use the application default values and will attempt to re-write these default values to the backplane. This behavior occurs for vital timers (VPM-2/VPM-2+) and both the vital and non-vital timers (VPM-3). When a vital application is selected / loaded, the Vital Timer values are set to their application defined defaults values. The Non-Vital Timers (VPM-3) retain the previous values if the values are within the application defined range for an individual timer. Figure 2-51, Timers Menu - VPM-2/VPM-2+ 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-99 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Figure 2-52, VPM-3 Timers menu (Vital and Non-Vital) 1. Using the CDU-1 and Figure 5-4 and 2-52 as a guide, select the TIMERS Menu. 2. Press the Down Button. The CDU-1 will display: View Timer Statuses 3. Press the Right Arrow Button. The CDU-1 will display: Enter Timer Values (VPM-2) Set Vital Timers (VPM-3) 4. Press the Down Button. The first timer value (in seconds) will be displayed. Display will look similar to: TMR1 5. = 542 Press the Enter Button. The CDU-1 will display the timer value and prompt for a new value. TMR1 New Time > = 542 6. Use the Alphanumeric Buttons to enter the new timer value. 7. Press the Enter Button. The CDU-1 will display a confirm message: TMR1 Confirm *****> 8. 2-100 = 520 To confirm the new value, enter the 1 to 5 digit number listed in the confirm message and press the Enter Button. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation Note: 9. If an attempt is made to enter a timer value that is too short, the system will not accept the value and it will not prompt for a valid timer value. The new Timer value is now placed into system memory. 10. Repeat the procedure as necessary to setup the timers for the system. Vital Configuration Setup Entered Vital Configuration Settings are stored in an EEPROM on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Backplane. During normal operation, these values are used instead of the default Vital Configuration Settings stored in Application EPROM on the CI or UCI-3 Module. If the Vital Configuration Settings stored on the Backplane become corrupted, the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 will use the application default values and attempt to re-write the Vital Configuration Settings to EEPROM on the Backplane. If the Application EPROM is replaced, the Vital Configuration Setting must be checked against those in the Application Circuit Plan. The Vital Configuration Settings are set to the application default value when a vital application is selected / loaded. There are a total of 32 vital configuration settings that can be configured for application specific operations. Refer to Chapter 5 - CDU Program for instructions on using the CDU-1 to setup the Vital Configuration and Volume Two, Chapter 6 for the Web GUI. Figure 2-53, Vital Configuration Menu. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-101 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 1. Using the CDU-1 and Figures 5-4 and 2-53 as a guide, select the VITAL CONFIGURATION Menu. 2. Press the Down Button. The CDU-1 will display: View Configuration 3. Press the Right Arrow Button. The CDU-1 will display: Enter Configuration 4. Press the Down Button. The status for the first vital configuration setting will be displayed. Display will look similar to: VCS_1 5. = FALSE* Press the Enter Button. The CDU-1 will display the current vital configuration setting and prompt for a new value. VCS_1 89 to change > = FALSE FALSE 6. Use the Up or Down Arrow Buttons to toggle to the setting. 7. Press the Enter Button. The CDU-1 will display a confirm message: VCS_1 Confirm *****> = TRUE 8. To confirm the new value, enter the 1 to 5 digit number listed in the confirm message and press the Enter Button. 9. Repeat the procedure as necessary to setup the Vital Configuration Setting for the system. Setting Battery Alarm Values The top level Battery Alarm menu is available if one or more VTI-2S modules are installed in the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 chassis. The High and Low Battery Alarm Values set alarm limits for the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 chassis battery. Battery alarm thresholds for the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 chassis battery and up to two auxiliary batteries can be set in the Ground Fault Detector submenu if a GFD-1 module is installed. Figure 2-54, Battery Alarms Menu. 2-102 1. Using the CDU-1 and Figures 5-4 and 2-54 as a guide, select the BATTERY ALARM Menu. 2. Press the Down Arrow Key. The CDU-1 will display the Low Battery Alarm value. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation 3. To change the Low Battery Alarm value, press the ENTER key and enter the new Low Battery Alarm value. 4. Press the Right Arrow Button. The CDU-1 will display the High Battery Alarm value. 5. To change the High Battery Alarm value, press the Enter Button and enter the new High Battery Alarm value. Date/Time Date/Time Date/Time * Time= HH:MM:SS Date/Time * Date= MM-DD-YY Date/Time * Time Zone= 6 Time= HH:MM:SS Set HHMMSS > Date= MM-DD-YY Set MMDDYY > Time Zone= 6 to change Date/Time Config Daylit Saving Date/Time * Request Time Update Request Time Update ENTER/YES CANCEL/NO Date/Time * Sync= Code Line Config DST * DST End= mo:MM wk:W Config DST * DST = Enabled Config DST * DST Strt= mo:MM wk:W Sync= Code Line to change DST End= mo:MM wk:W to change DST= Enabled to change DST Strt= mo:MM wk:W to change 373-0745 Figure 2-55, Date/Time Configuration Menu The Date/Time Menu allows access to menus for display and modification date and time options. Display Arrow Key Up Down Left Right 100373-010 AR0 Date/Time Function Comment Go to System Configuration Go to Date/Time * Time= HH:MM:SS Go to Log Management Go to Diagnostic Port © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-103 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Time The Time Menu provides the ability to display and set the current time. Display Date/Time * Time= HH:MM:SS Arrow Key Up Down Function Comment Go to Date/Time N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the Time. Once the Time has been set, press the ENTER key. Left Go to Date/Time * Sync= Code Line Right Go to Date/Time * Date= HH:MM:SS Date The Date Menu provides the ability to display and set the current date. Display Date/Time * Date= HH:MM:SS Arrow Key Up Down 2-104 Function Comment Go to Date/Time N/A Left Go to Date/Time * Time= HH:MM:SS Right Go to Date/Time * Time Zone= 6 Press the ENTER Key to set the Date. Once the Date has been set, press the ENTER key. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation Time Zone The Time Zone Menu provides the ability to display and set the local time zone reference used for adjusting incoming time references contained in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) based ATCS time messages. Time zone 5 represents Eastern Standard Time (EST) and 8 represents Pacific Standard Time (PST) Display Date/Time * Time Zone= 6 Arrow Key Up Down Left Right Function Comment Go to Date/Time N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the Time Zone. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the Time Zone. Once the Time Zone has been set, press the ENTER key. Go to Date/Time * Date= HH:MM:SS Go to Date/Time * Config Daylit Saving Config Daylit Saving The Config Daylit Saving Menu provides the ability to display and set parameters associated with Daylight Savings Time (DST). DST is used for adjusting incoming time references contained in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) based ATCS time messages. Display Arrow Key Up Function Comment Go to Date/Time Down Go to Config DST * DST = Enabled Left Go to Date/Time * Time Zone= 6 Right 100373-010 AR0 Date/Time * Config Daylit Saving Go to Date/Time * Request Time Update © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-105 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 DST The DST Menu provides the ability to display and set whether Daylight Savings Time is locally enabled. Display Config DST * DST = Enabled Arrow Key Up Down Function Comment Go to Date/Time N/A Press the ENTER Key to set DST. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select DST. Once DST has been set, press the ENTER key. Left Go to Config DST * DST End= mo:MM wk:W Right Go to Config DST * DST Strt= mo:MM wk:W DST Strt The DST Strt Menu provides the ability to display and set the week DST starts. For years prior to 2007, this is the first week of April. For 2007 and later, this is the second week of March. Any week (first (1), second (2), third (3), fourth (4), and last (5)) of any month can be selected for the start of DST. Display Config DST * DST Strt= mo:MM wk:W Arrow Key Up Down Left Right 2-106 Function Comment Go to Date/Time N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the DST start week. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the DST start week. Once the DST start week has been set, press the ENTER key. Go to Config DST * DST = Enabled Go to Config DST * DST End= mo:MM wk:W © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation DST End The DST End Menu provides the ability to display and set the week DST ends. For years prior to 2007, this is the last week of October. For 2007 and later, this is the first week of November. Any week (first (1), second (2), third (3), fourth (4), and last (5)) of any month can be selected for the end of DST. Display Config DST * DST End= mo:MM wk:W Arrow Key Up Down Left Right Function Comment Go to Date/Time N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the DST end week. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the DST end week. Once the DST end week has been set, press the ENTER key. Go to Config DST * DST Strt= mo:MM wk:W Go to Config DST * DST = Enabled Request Time Update The Request Time Update Menu provides the ability to transmit a time update request message over an ATCS office port. Display Date/Time * Request Time Update Arrow Key Up Down Left Right 100373-010 AR0 Function Comment Go to Date/Time N/A Press the ENTER Key to transmit an ATCS request time update message. Press ENTER key a second time to confirm the transmission or the CANCEL key to abort. Go to Date/Time * Config Daylit Saving Go to Date/Time * Sync= Code Line © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-107 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Sync This menu provides the ability to display the current external time reference synchronization option. When this option is not set to none, ElectroLogIXS/EC5 will automatically update its local time whenever the time reference received on the selected sync source differs from ElectroLogIXS/EC5’ local time by 2 or more seconds. Available sync sources include Code Line, Vital Remote, and HAWK. The Code Line option uses time update messages received from the Office Port for the external time reference and requires the selection of an Office Protocol that supports this feature (e.g.GENISYS® or ATCS). The Vital Remote option receives its external reference through time update messages received over its vital communication interface. The HAWK option receives its external reference through message time stamps received from the HAWK recorder. Display< Date/Time Sync = none Arrow Key Up Function Comment Go to Date/Time Down N/A Press the ENTER key to set the external sync source. Left Go to Date Menu Right Go to Time Menu Sync Set This menu provides the ability to set the current external time reference synchronization option. Display< Arrow Key 2-108 Sync = none [\ to change Function Up Select next Sync option Down Select next Sync option Left Go to Date Menu Right Go to Time Menu Comment Press the ENTER key to set the currently displayed sync source as the external sync source and return to Sync Menu. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation Diagnostic Port Figure 2-56, Diagnostic Port Menu. Diagnostic port configuration involves the setup of the following communication configuration parameters: • • • • • • Connector (this changes the diagnostic’s physical port) BAUD rate (19200 default) Parity (even default) Data bits (8 default) Stop bits (1 default) Hardware flow control (none default) While these defaults should be suitable for most applications, other values can be configured through the CDU menu shown in Figure 2-56 (for more information on CDU operation see the CDU menu section of this manual). Available settings for these parameters are: • • • • • • 100373-010 AR0 Connector: VPM, CIO-1/CIO-1A, CIO-CLA. BAUD rate: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200 Parity: odd, even, none Data bits 5, 6, 7, or 8 data bits Stop bits: 1, 1.5, or 2 data bits Hardware flow control: none © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-109 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Ethernet Port Figure 2-57, CDU – Ethernet Confg Ethernet port configuration involves setting the following parameters: • • • • • • • • • • • • 2-110 IP Address for Ethernet 1 and Ethernet 2 Subnet Mask settings for Ethernet 1 and Ethernet 2 Default Gateway address HTTP TCP Port Number for Web GUI access Trusted Sources Enabled / Disabled Trusted Source parameters (Trusted IP Network Address / Netmask) Telnet Enable/Disable Telnet Username and Password Telnet Port Number Telnet Trusted Source Parameters (Enable, Trusted IP Network Address / Netmask) Routing Table Entries Web GUI Inactivity Time-out © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation Set Via Parameter Ethernet 1 IP Address: Ethernet 1 Subnet Mask: Ethernet 1 DHCP Server Ethernet 1 DHCP Server IP Pool Start Ethernet 1 DHCP Server IP Pool End Ethernet 1 DHCP Server Default Gateway Ethernet 2 IP Address: Ethernet 2 Subnet Mask: Ethernet 2 DHCP Server Ethernet 2 DHCP Server IP Pool Start Ethernet 2 DHCP Server IP Pool End Ethernet 2 DHCP Server Default Gateway Default Gateway: Trusted Source / Network 1 Trusted Source / Network 2 Telnet Port 1 Telnet Port 2 Telnet Username Telnet Password Telnet TCP Port Telnet Trusted Source 1 Telnet Trusted Source 2 Routing Table Entries Web GUI Inactivity Time-out 100373-010 AR0 Factory Default 192.168.0.11 255.255.255.0 Enabled 192.168.0.12 192.168.0.44 192.168.0.11 192.168.1.12 255.255.255.0 Enabled 192.168.1.13 192.168.1.45 192.168.1.12 0.0.0.0 (No Default Gateway) Disabled, IP = 0.0.0.0, Netmask = 0.0.0.0 Disabled, IP = 0.0.0.0, Netmask = 0.0.0.0 Disabled Disabled admin telnet 23 Disabled, IP=0.0.0.0, Netmask=0.0.0.0 Disabled, IP=0.0.0.0, Netmask=0.0.0.0 No Route Entries 60 minutes © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. CDU 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 GUI 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2-111 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Serial Office Port Figure 2-58, Serial Office Port Menu. Serial office port configuration involves the selection of the office protocol, the setup of protocol dependent communication parameters (e.g., BAUD rate, parity, stop bits), and the setup of protocol dependent operational parameters. The first step is the selection of the office protocol. The office protocol defaults to GENISYS® but can also be configured to ATCS, UCE, SCS-128, or BCS through the CDU menu shown in Figure 2-58. Additional office port configuration parameters are protocol dependent and covered separately in the following sections. UCE Office Port The UCE / SCS-128 office port provides the following communication configuration parameters: • • • • BAUD rate (9600 default) Parity (even default) Data bits (8 default) Stop bits (1 default) While these defaults should be suitable for most applications, other values can be configured through the CDU menu shown in Figure 2-59 (for more information on CDU operation see the CDU menu section of this manual). Available settings for these parameters are: • • • • BAUD rate: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200 Parity: odd, even, none Data bits: 5, 6, 7, or 8 data bits Stop bits: 1, 1.5, or 2 data bits Figure 2-59, UCE Menu 2-112 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation SCS128 Office Port The UCE / SCS-128 office port provides the following communication configuration parameters: • • • • BAUD rate (19200 default) Parity (even default) Data bits (8 default) Stop bits (1 default) Unit Address (1 default) While these defaults should be suitable for most applications, other values can be configured through the CDU menu shown in Figure 2-60 (for more information on CDU operation see the CDU menu section of this manual). Available settings for these parameters are: • • • • • BAUD rate: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200 Parity: odd, even, none Data bits: 5, 6, 7, or 8 data bits Stop bits: 1, 1.5, or 2 data bits Unit Address: 0-127 Figure 2-60, SCS-128 Menu 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-113 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 GENISYS® Serial Office Port The GENISYS® Serial office port provides the following communication configuration parameters: • • • • • • • • • • • • BAUD rate (9600 default) Parity (none default) Data bits (8 default) Stop bits (1 default) Flow Control (Disabled default) Transmit delay (this is the office port’s RTS setup time before start of data transmission and its default is 50 mS) Transmit cutoff (this is the office port’s RTS hold time after CTS goes inactive and its default is 20 mS) Unit address (this is ElectroLogIXS/EC5’ network address for the GENISYS® protocol and its default is 1) Msg timeout (this is the time of link inactivity for the detection of an office link failure and its default is 10 seconds) Secure poll (this allows or prevents responses to office poll messages sent in non-secure format to be generated and its default is Allow Non-secure Polls) Indication Delay (0 default) CTS Timeout (1 default) While these defaults should be suitable for most applications, other values can be configured through the CDU menu shown in Figure 2-57 (for more information on CDU operation see the CDU menu section of this manual). Available settings for these parameters are: • • • • • • • • • • • • 2-114 BAUD rate: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200, or Disabled Parity: Odd, Even or None Data bits: 5, 6, 7, or 8 Stop bits: 1,1.5, or 2 Flow Control: (Enabled, Disabled) Transmit delay: 0, 50, 100, 150, 200, and 250 milliseconds Transmit cutoff: 0, 20, 50, 100, 150, 200, and 250 milliseconds Unit address: 1-255 Msg timeout: 0-120 seconds Secure polls: No Secure Polls, Allow Secure Polls Indication Delay: 0 to 10 seconds in 0.5 second increments CTS Timeout: 0-5 seconds in 0.1 second increments © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation The GENISYS® office port provides the following operational configuration parameters: • • • Number of indications (this is the number of indication words reported to the office and its default is 4 bytes (32 total indications)) Control latching (this determines the value for controls submitted to the application logic when they are omitted in partial control update messages (the default enabled submits the last received value for the control)) Constant indication (this determines whether indication messages contain all indications or only those that have changed since the last indication report. Its default is disabled (changes only)) The values for these operational parameters can be configured through the CDU menu shown in Figure 2-61 (for more information on CDU operation see the CDU menu section of this manual). Available settings for these parameters are: • • • Number of indications: 1-125 bytes (8-1000 total indications) Control latching: enabled, disabled Constant indication: enabled, disabled Figure 2-61, GENISYS® Serial Office Protocol Configuration Menu (Serial Interface) BCS Serial Office Port The BCS Serial office port provides the following communication configuration parameters: • • • • • • • • 100373-010 AR0 BAUD rate (1200 default) Parity (Even default) Stop bits (2 default) Flow Control (Enabled default) Unit address (this is ElectroLogIXS/EC5’ network address for the BCS protocol and its default is 1) Msg timeout (this is the time of link inactivity for the detection of an office link failure and its default is 10 seconds) Indication Delay (0 default) CTS Timeout (1 default) © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-115 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Custom values for an application can be configured through the CDU menu shown in Figure 2-62 Available settings for these parameters are: • • • • • • • • • • • BAUD rate 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, or Disabled Parity: Odd, Even or None Stop bits: 1,1.5, or 2 Flow Control: Disabled or Enabled (Enabled is wait for CTS) Indications Words 1-16 (8 to 128 indication statuses) Unit address: 1- 127 Msg Timeout: 0-120 seconds Indication Delay: 0 to 10 seconds in 0.5 second increments CTS Timeout: 0-5 seconds in 0.1 second increments RxGap Time 1-35 in .5 ms increments IndGap Time 1- 35 in .5 ms increments Figure 2-62, BCS Office Port Configuration Menu 2-116 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation GENISYS® Ethernet Office The GENISYS® Ethernet office interface provides the following communication configuration parameters whose values and meaning are same as for the GENISYS® Serial Office Port: • • • • Unit Address - The ElectroLogIXS/EC5’ GENISYS® protocol network address. Message Timeout – The amount of inactivity allowed before a Link Failure is declared. (0 to120 seconds, default 10 seconds) Secure Poll (Enabled / Disabled, default Disabled) Indication Delay (0 to 10 seconds in 0.5 second increments, default 0 seconds) In addition to the above GENISYS® parameters, the following IP / UDP parameters are provided specific to the GENISYS® Ethernet Office interface: • • Port # - The UDP Port Number used to identify GENISYS® messages on the Ethernet interface. ElectroLogIXS/EC5 uses this Port Number for both received and transmitted GENISYS® messages. The default value is 7169. Trusted Source 1 and 2 – ElectroLogIXS/EC5 provides up to two Trusted Sources for received GENISYS® messages. To use one or both Trusted Sources, enable the Trusted Source and provide IP address and Netmask settings. When enabled, the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 only responds to GENISYS® messages from IP addresses that pass the Trusted Source filter(s). If both Trusted Sources are disabled, the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 responds to any valid GENISYS® message addressed to the system (IP Address and Port Number) with the correct GENISYS® address (Unit Address). The default setting is both Trusted Sources disabled. The GENISYS® Ethernet office interface provides the following operational configuration parameters whose values and meaning are same as for the GENISYS® Serial Office Port: • • • Number of Indications Control Latching Constant Indication Figure 2-63, GENISYS® Ethernet Office 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-117 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Local Control Panel To simplify Local Control Panel configuration, the Local Control Panel’s communications settings are preconfigured for proper operation with all supported Local Control Panels. The Local Control Panel’s only setup parameter is enabling of the Local Control Panel’s operation. As shown in Figure 2-64, the Local Control Panel can be enabled or disabled through the CDU (for more information on CDU operation see the CDU menu section of this manual). By default, the Local Control Panel is enabled. Figure 2-64, Local Control Configuration Menu 2-118 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation HAWK Interface To simplify HAWK Interface configuration, the HAWK Interface’s communications settings are preconfigured for proper operation with the HAWK recorder. The HAWK Interface’s only setup parameter is the HAWK Serial Number, which must be configured in both the HAWK recorder and ElectroLogIXS/EC5 before event recording across the HAWK serial interface can occur. This serial number may contain any combination of up to twenty alphabetic, numeric, and special characters. Entering a space terminates the serial number. As shown in Figure 2-65, the HAWK Interface can be set through the CDU (for more information on CDU operation see the CDU menu section of this manual). By default, the HAWK Serial Number is ElectroLogIXS/EC5. Figure 2-65, HAWK Interface Configuration Menu 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-119 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Vital Communication Setup Message Authentication Code (MAC) Keys The ElectroLogIXS or EC5/VPM-3 supports an optional MAC protection for each communication link. Each vital remote link has an associated Link Key that is used to generate the MAC for messages going in both directions on that link. The MAC is a function of the remote Link Key and the vital data within the message. It provides a high level of assurance that a message has not been corrupted either accidentally or intentionally and that the message was actually sent by the expected remote system. The application designer chooses the Link Keys when the application is being created. The complete set of 32 Link Keys is stored in a Key Vault file. This encrypted file is separate from the application EPROM. It is uploaded through either the system diagnostic port or the Web GUI (Chapter 2, Vital General Communication Setup), and it is stored in encrypted form in non-volatile memory on the system backplane. The de-encryption key for the Key Vault file is called the Site Specific Key. The Site Specific Key is stored in the application EPROM, and is chosen by the application designer when the application is created. The layering and separation of keys allows for more flexible management of key updates. For instance, if a Link Key needs to be changed, a new Key Vault can be generated that contains the new Link Key and that is encrypted with the same Site Specific Key as the old Key Vault File. The new Key Vault can then be uploaded to the system and put into service without requiring a change to the application. In another example, if a Site Specific Key needs to be changed, a new application containing the new Site Specific Key and a new Key Vault file encrypted with the new Site Specific Key but containing the old Link Keys can be generated and installed on the affected system without requiring changes on any connected remote systems. The ElectroLogIXS or EC5/VPM-3 supports an in-service Link Key switchover procedure based on allowing two sets of Link Keys to be used for a short switching period. This allows for coordination of Link Key changes on each link and the avoidance of taking links down as a result of Link Key changes. 2-120 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation Key Vault Update Procedure • • • • Load a new MAC Vault file/keys through either the system diagnostic port or the Web GUI on each system. Activate the new keys by enabling the MAC Key Switchover on each system. This allows the systems to accept incoming messages containing MACs generated with the Link Keys from either the new or the pre-existing Key Vault. This also starts the MMST timer. In the next phase, each link transitions to sending and accepting received messages that contain MACs generated only with the new Link Key for that link. A link can be switched to sending messages using the new Link Key in one of two ways: • Manually, set the option for MAC ‘Use New Link Key’ to ‘Yes’ via the CDU or Web GUI, for a given remote link. • Automatically, when a message is received on that link that contains a MAC generated with the new Link Key. Once a message is received on a link that contains a MAC generated with the new Link Key, messages containing MACs generated with the pre-existing Link Key will no longer be accepted on that link. When the MMST expires, received messages on all links will only be accepted if they contain a MAC generated with the new Link Keys, and all outgoing messages on all links will be sent with MACs generated with the new Link Keys. Vital General Communication Setup The Vital General Communication setup provides for loading the MAC Key Vault file into the ElectroLogIXS or EC5/VPM-3 system. The MAC Key Vault file is uploaded through either the system diagnostic port (Volume Two, Chapter 7, Remote Config MAC) or the Web GUI (Volume Two, Figure 6-77, Configuration - General Remote). The Vital General Communication setup interface also provides the following configuration parameters, which can be configured through the CDU (Figure 5-60, Vital Remote Port Menu - Serial Port, Figure 5-61, Vital Remote Port Menu - Ethernet Port) or the Web GUI (Volume Two, Figure 6-77, Configuration - General Remote): • • • • • MAC Switchover Time (MMST or Maximum MAC Switchover Time). This is the maximum amount of time that messages will be accepted with MACs generated from either the new or the pre-existing MAC keys once MAC key switchover is enabled. Acceptable values range from 1 second to 2 hours. Switchover Enable. Once a new MAC Key Vault is loaded, switchover can be enabled. This starts the switchover timer that runs for ‘MAC Switchover Time’ period of time. This allows the system to accept incoming vital remote messages containing MACs generated with the Link Keys from either the newly loaded or the pre-existing Key Vault. Switchover Restart. This restarts the switchover timer. This is provided if switchover has been enabled. Switchover Cancel. This stops the switchover in progress. This is provided if switchover has been enabled. Delete loaded Key Vault. This deletes the Key Vault that was last loaded. This is provided if a new MAC Key Vault has been loaded and switchover is not enabled. Vital Serial Communication Setup The Vital Serial Communication Setup involves setting the following parameters for each serial port: • • 100373-010 AR0 Local Address – the vital remote local address. Allowed values range from 0 to 63. Mode – the vital remote link mode. Allowed values are point-to-point, multi-drop slave, or multi-drop master. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-121 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 • • • • Type – the vital remote port type. Allowed values are asynchronous, synchronous internal clock, or synchronous external clock. Baud Rate – the vital remote port baud rate. Allowed values are 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, or 57600. Parity – the vital remote port parity. Allowed values are even parity, odd parity, or none. Stop Bits – the vital remote stop bits. Allowed values are 1, 1.5, or 2. This setup also involves setting the following parameters for each of the attached remote: • • • • • Address – the vital remote device address. Allowed values range from 0 to 63. Date Update enable/disable. If enabled, a date/time update message is sent when the system clock changes or when an update was not sent in the last 24 hours. Poll Timeout – the poll timeout value. Allowed values range from 10 to 500mS. MAC enable/disable. If enabled, MAC is included in all outgoing vital remote messages. MAC Use New Link Key. This setting is provided when switchover is in progress. Allowed values are ‘Yes’ or ‘No’. If user selects ‘Yes’, the MAC that is included in the outgoing vital remote messages are based on the newly loaded Vault Keys. The Vital Serial Communication Setup can be configured through the CDU (Figure 5-60, Vital Remote Port Menu - Serial Port) or the Web GUI (Figure 6-91, Configuration - Remote (Serial Port)). Vital Ethernet Communication Setup The IP addresses of all attached remotes must be designated for proper communication over the Ethernet port. If the addresses are contained in the application program, they may be set via the “Set Defaults” menu option. Otherwise, the IP address of each remote must be entered. This Vital Ethernet Communication Setup involves setting the following parameters for each of the attached remote: • • • • • IP Address – IP address of the attached remote. IP Port – IP port number of the attached remote. Date Update enable/disable. If enabled, a date/time update message is sent when the system clock changes or when an update was not sent in the last 24 hours. MAC enable/disable. If enabled, MAC is included in all outgoing vital remote messages. MAC Use New Link Key – This setting is provided when switchover is in progress. Allowed values are ‘Yes’ or ‘No’. If user selects ‘Yes’, the MAC that is included in the outgoing vital remote messages are based on the newly loaded Vault Keys. The Vital Ethernet Communication Setup can be configured through the CDU (Figure 5-61, Vital Remote Port Menu - Ethernet Port) or the Web GUI (Figure 6-85, Configuration - Remote (Ethernet)). Note: 2-122 Ferrites have been provided and must be applied to Ethernet cables in all installations. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation Ground Fault Detector Setup The Ground Fault Detector function allows the user to specify the requirements for a ground fault alarm on each battery monitored. Specifically, the user can set: • ground fault threshold - the leakage resistance value between either battery pole (+ or -) and earth ground below which is considered a ground fault • ground fault time - the amount of time that the ground fault condition must be present before alarming the presence of a ground fault The ElectroLogIXS system will monitor the ElectroLogIXS chassis battery for ground faults whenever a GFD-1 module is present. The GFD-1 front panel connector provides ElectroLogIXS the ability to monitor two additional batteries for ground faults, as well as the input for the earth ground reference. Important: The earth ground connection to the GFD module must be removed prior to maintenance testing for grounds. If the earth ground connection is not removed, ground testing will likely fail. Battery Connections 1. The ElectroLogIXS chassis battery is monitored for ground faults when a GFD-1 module is installed in ElectroLogIXS slot 10. The earth ground reference should be connected to pin 7 of the GFD-1 front panel connector (refer to Figures 1-29 and 1-30). Wire size should be between 14 AWG and 18 AWG. The length of the earth ground wire should be kept as short as practical with a goal of less than 10 feet. 2. Two additional batteries, labeled B2 and B3 on the GFD-1 fault LEDs and input connector, can also be monitored for ground faults if connected. B2 connections for + and - poles go to GFD-1 connector pins 1 and 2 respectively. B3 + and - connects similarly to pins 4 and 5, respectively. Wire gauge and length for the B2 and B3 connections to the GFD-1 module should follow the recommendations for the earth ground wire given above. Ground Fault Monitoring Setup 1. Refer to the Ground Fault Detector CDU-1 menus in Chapter 5 - CDU Program as a guide through this setup process. Find the GROUND FAULT DETECT menu on the top level CDU-1 menu structure. 2. Press the Down Arrow key. The CDU-1 will display: B1: Battery 3. * The default name for the ElectroLogIXS chassis battery is “Battery 1" but may be changed by selecting the Enter button from this page. If done, this action will produce the display: Battery 1 Name > __ 4. A name consisting of upper and lower case letters, numbers, and spaces may be entered for the battery using the CDU-1 keypad. The keypad keys, with the exception of numbers 1 and 0, have letters assigned to them similar to a telephone keypad. The order in which the characters appear on the display when the key is repeatedly pressed are uppercase letters (in alphabetical order), lowercase letters (in alphabetical order), and then the number of that key. For example, repeated selection of the “2" key would produce the following display of characters: A, B, C, a, b, c, 2, A, B, etc. The scroll right key moves to the next character in the name. The enter the name “Chassis” for battery B1 the following sequence of keystrokes would be made from the B1 name menu. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-123 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Keypad Key Pressed Number of Times Pressed Sequence of Displayed Characters Final Displayed Character 2 3 1 5 1 4 1 8 1 8 1 6 1 8 A-B-C N/A G-H-I-g-h N/A A-B-C-a N/A P-Q-R-S-p-q-r-s N/A P-Q-R-S-p-q-r-s N/A G-H-I-g-h-i N/A P-Q-R-S-p-q-r-s C N/A h N/A a N/A s N/A s N/A i N/A s | 4 | 2 | 7 | 7 | 4 | 7 5. Press the Enter key when the name has been entered as desired. This will return to the B1 menu shown in step 2 above, with “Battery 1" replaced by the new name just entered. Pressing the Enter key following the key sequence in the table above would, for example, return to the B1 battery menu showing: B1: Chassis Naming the battery sources B1, B2, and B3 is purely optional. If no action is taken to name the batteries, the default names will be Battery 1, Battery 2, and Battery 3. 6. Press the Down Arrow key. The CDU-1 will display one of three items depending on the status of ground fault for battery B1. The first possibility is that no ground fault is present for this battery source, for which the display will read: B1: No Fault The presence of a ground fault on battery B1 will display either: B1+: Ground Fault Press ENTER to Clear or B1-:Ground Fault Press ENTER to Clear dependent upon which pole, + or -, the fault was detected. If the fault a alarm is present, press the ENTER key to clear the fault alarm from the display. 7. Press the Right Arrow key. The CDU-1 will display: Battery 1 or Cal. Volts = 12.5 V* 2-124 <User defined name> Cal. Volts = 12.5 V* © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Installation 8. Press the ENTER key if the calibrated voltage shown for Battery is not the nominal voltage for the battery in question. The CDU-1 menu will display: B1 Voltage = 12.5 V New Voltage > . Use the numeric keypad to enter the nominal battery voltage for this source, and then the ENTER key to save the new value. The calibrated voltage is used during the Ground Fault Threshold determination menu to provide the user with an estimate of leakage current corresponding to the selectable values of leakage resistance. 9. Press the Right Arrow key. The CDU-1 will display: Grnd Fault Threshold R = 10 KΩ (1.25 mA)* 10. The ground fault threshold menu allows setting the threshold for fault declaration in terms of leakage resistance between a battery pole and earth ground. The threshold is selectable in the range of 2 KΩ to 20 KΩ in 2 KΩ steps. Select the ENTER key to scroll through the threshold values and select the desired settings. The CDU-1 will display: R = 10 KΩ (1.25 mA) 89 to change The up and down arrow keys will scroll through the available threshold values in 2 KΩ steps. The estimate of equivalent leakage current, in milliamps, for the displayed leakage resistance value is shown in parentheses to the right of the resistance threshold. This estimate of current corresponds to the calibrated battery voltage divided by the leakage resistance. For example, the calibrated voltage value of 12.5 V and leakage resistance threshold of 10 KΩ leads to an equivalent leakage current between battery pole and earth ground of Ground Fault Leakage Current Estimate (mA) = Calibrated Source Voltage (V) Ground Leakage Resistance (KΩ) = 12.5 V 10 KΩ = 1.25 mA The equivalent leakage current is presented to aid those who desire to set a threshold based on an amount of current flow to earth ground. Select the ENTER key with the desired threshold is displayed to select that value. This will return to the Grnd Fault Threshold menu seen in Step 9 above with the threshold displayed. 11. Press the Right Arrow key. The CDU-1 will display: Ground Fault Time Time = 5 sec* 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-125 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 12. The ground fault time is the length of time a ground fault (leakage resistance estimate below the Ground Fault Threshold) must be continuously present before a ground fault alarm is declared. The user can select Ground Fault Time in 1-second increments between 5 seconds and 30 seconds. Selecting the ENTER key from the Ground Fault Time menu will display: Fault Time = 5 sec New Time > Use either the numeric keypad to enter a number between 5 and 30, inclusive, or the up/down arrows to select the desired Ground Fault Time. Press the ENTER key to same the selected value and return to the Ground Fault Time menu. 13. Press the Right Arrow key. The CDU-1 will display: Low Battery Alarm Voltage = 8.0V* 14. Press the ENTER button to proceed to the menu that allows changing the Low Battery Alarm value, if desired. The CDU-1 will display: Low Alarm = 8.0 V New Voltage > Use the numeric keypad to enter a new low battery alarm threshold. The minimum allowed value is 8.0 V. Press the ENTER key to save the new threshold and return to the Low Battery Alarm menu. 15. Press the Right Arrow key. The CDU-1 will display: High Battery Alarm Voltage - 16.5* 16. Press the ENTER key to proceed to the menu that allows changing the High Battery Alarm value, in desired. The CDU-1 will display: High Alarm = 16.5 V New Voltage > Use the numeric keypad to enter a new high battery alarm threshold. The maximum allowed value is 16.5 V. Press the ENTER key to save the new threshold and return to the High Battery Alarm menu. Select the Up Arrow button to return to the B1: Battery 1 menu. Note: The High and Low battery alarms just presented are for Battery 1, the ElectroLogIXS Chassis battery, since they are on submenus of the B1: battery 1 menu. High and Low Battery alarms can be independently set for Battery 2 and Battery 3, the two additional batteries can be monitored by the GFD-1 module, through their submenus. 17. This concludes the setup of the GFD-1 module for monitoring the ElectroLogIXS chassis battery (B1). The two external batteries B2 and B3, if connected , are setup in a like manner through their submenus. 18. The B2 and B3 menus are selectable by pressing the Right Arrow key from the B1: Battery 1 menu. All submenus to B2 and B3 are identical to those of B1 except for the battery name change. The B2 and B3 menus will show “Not Connected” if no voltage is detected on their inputs, i.e., if no external batteries have been applied to the GFD-1 front panel connector. 2-126 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Maintenance Chapter 3 – Maintenance Contents Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Visual Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Maintenance Procedures Using the CDU or Web GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Track Circuit Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp Voltage Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Battery Alarm Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Office Port Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 3-2 3-3 3-3 3-3 3-3 ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Removing Power From ElectroLogIXS/EC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Backplane Fuse Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 ElectroLogIXS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 EC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Personality Module Fuse Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Supply Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Central Power Supply Output Voltage Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 CDU Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 CDU-1 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 System Module Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 System Module Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 I/O Module Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 I/O Module Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Chassis Information Module Installation and Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Chassis Information Module Application EPROM Installation and Removal . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Installation* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Removal* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 VPM-2/VPM-2+/VPM-3 Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Track Inductor Panel Component Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Track Inductor Panel Fuse Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 EC5 Special Maintenance Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Backplane Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Maintenance Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 3-i ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 3-ii © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Maintenance Chapter 3 – Maintenance Introduction This chapter contains maintenance procedures for preforming maintenance activities for the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system. WARNING After performing any maintenance or system enhancements on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 unit, adequate testing must be performed to detect any errors related to any adjustments made to the system. The tests should be performed before the unit is returned to service and in accordance with standard railroad, FRA, and/or other regulatory agency rules. This should include visual inspection of vital parameter values. Failure to adequately test the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 unit after routine or preventive maintenance could result in death or serious injury. Railroad Configuration Management Procedures must ensure that all ElectroLogIXS/EC5 units are configured with the proper revisions of modules and firmware (application, PTC, and executive) and that updates are completed in a timely manner when made available by GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling. Operating with incorrect firmware may result in death or serious injury. Timely is defined as without undue delay per 49 CFR 236.1023(j). Railroad Configuration Management Procedures must ensure that the proper values are set for each vital parameter, vital timer, vital configuration setting (vital soft switches), PTC applicability setting, PTC debounce time, PTC WIU address, and vital remote parameter in their ElectroLogIXS/EC5 units. Incorrect settings may result in death or serious injury. Visual Inspection 1. Inspect TIP-2 (Track Inductor Panel) for burnt or damaged components. Replace damaged components as necessary. 2. Inspect TIP-2 wiring for cut, nicked, or bare wires. Repair as necessary. 3. Inspect ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Chassis and modules for burnt or damaged components. 4. Inspect ElectroLogIXS/EC5 wiring for cut nicked, or bare wires. Repair as necessary. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 3-1 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Maintenance Procedures Using the CDU or Web GUI When entering vital information (track setup parameters, vital configuration settings, etc.) on the CDU-1, the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 prompts the user for a confirmation number. The confirmation number is a 1 to 5 digit number that is entered to confirm that the new value matches the intended value. If the new value does not match the intended value, press the CANCEL Button and re-enter the value. If the new value is correct, press the ENTER Button. WARNING When entering information on the CDU-1 or the Web GUI that requires confirmation verify that the new value redisplayed by the system matches the intended value. Confirmation of a incorrect value could result in a less restrictive condition which could cause death or serious injury. After submitting vital information via the Web GUI, the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 prompts the user to confirm the values entered to ensure that the new value matches the intended value. If the new value does not match the intended value, select "Cancel" and re-enter the value(s). If the new value is correct, press "Confirm". Track Circuit Adjustment Important: To provide reliable operation, GETSGS recommends routine inspection of track circuit conditions. Refer to Chapter 2 - Installation for complete details on Track Circuit adjustment. WARNING Improper adjustments or maintenance to track circuits could result in death or serious injury. After any track circuit adjustment, standard railroad, FRA, and/or other regulatory agency procedures should be performed to test the shunting sensitivity of the track with a 0.06 ohm shunt (see FRA 236.56). Shunting sensitivity tests should be performed under optimum ballast conditions. If optimum ballast conditions do not exist, a follow-up test should be performed to insure proper shunting sensitivity of the track with a 0.06 ohm shunt during optimum ballast conditions. Adjustments to the track circuit settings are stored in the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 configuration log. GETSGS recommends that a log be kept including the condition of the ballast when adjustments are made to the track circuit. WARNING Proper track circuit adjustment and operation should always be validated through track circuit shunt testing. 3-2 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Maintenance Lamp Voltage Setup Refer to Chapter 2 - Installation for complete details on Manual and Automatic Lamp Voltage Setup for the VLD-C6S. Lamp Test Mode The Lamp Test Mode is a diagnostic mode that allows the user to apply an output to a selected lamp for troubleshooting purposes. Refer to Chapter 5 - CDU Program for details of the Lamp Test Mode. The user is able to select the Lamp Test Mode using the CDU-1. As soon as the user attempts to enter the Lamp Test Mode, the executable software verifies that it has permission to enter that mode based on Lamp Setup Grant status. If permission to enter the Lamp Test Mode is denied, a message is displayed on the CDU-1 informing the user that access is denied. This could be because of train position or the fact that an equation was never written to allow the Lamp Setup Grant (VLD-C6S) or Lamp Grant Bank 1 (2) (VLD-R16S) status to go True. If permission to enter the Lamp Test Mode is granted and the user confirms entry, the system sets the input status Lamp Normal Mode to False to indicate that the Lamp Test Mode is entered. The system displays the lamp outputs by their status names with the current on/off state of each output. The user may select which lamp output to perform the Lamp Test on. When the system exits the Lamp Test Mode, it takes about 30 seconds to display valid aspects. Setting Battery Alarm Values The Battery Alarm Values are set using the CDU-1 and scrolling through the available menu options. Refer to Chapter 2 - Installation for setup. Selecting Office Port Protocol The Office Port Protocol is set using the CDU-1 and scrolling through the available menu options. Refer to Chapter 2 - Installation for procedures to set Office Port Protocol. ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Maintenance Procedures ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Power ON 1. Verify all modules are securely installed in the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 chassis 2. Place the Power Switch to the ON position. 3. Verify system powers up and starts self test. Removing Power From ElectroLogIXS/EC5 1. Place the Power Switch to the OFF position. 2. Disconnect the supply battery from the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 unit. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 3-3 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Backplane Fuse Replacement 1. Place Power Switch to the OFF position. 2. Remove blown fuse. 3. Replace fuse with suitable replacement. 4. Place Power Switch to the ON position. 5. Verify proper operation of ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system based on the current application. ElectroLogIXS The backplane fuses are standard automotive style fuses that can be purchased at any automotive supply store. Refer to Table 3-6 for fuse value and GETSGS part number. Table 3-6. Backplane Fuse Chart Fuse Circuit Protected GETSGS Part Number Value B Battery Power to Chassis 010164-003 25 Amp CPS 5V Output 010164-001 15 Amp 5V for NSM/GFD/RMM Modules 010164-000 3 Amp CPS NSM/GFD/RMM EC5 Each fuse location corresponds to an I/O module slot in the chassis. For example, fuse PS is for the CPS-1, fuse #1 is for I/O slot #1, fuse #2 is for I/O slot #2, etc. The backplane fuses are standard automotive style fuses that can be purchased at any automotive supply store. Refer to Tables 3-7 or 3-8 for fuse location, GETSGS Part Number, and fuse value. Table 3-7. BP-1 Fuse Chart Fuse GETSGS Part Number Value Central Power Supply 010101-003 7.5 Amp 1 I/O Slot 1 010101-005 15 Amp 2 I/O Slot 2 010101-006 20 Amp 3 I/O Slot 3 010101-006 20 Amp 4 I/O Slot 4 010101-000 3 Amp PS Location Table 3-8. BP-2 Fuse Chart Fuse GETSGS Part Number Value Central Power Supply 010101-003 7.5 Amp 1 I/O Slot 1 010101-005 15 Amp 2 I/O Slot 2 010101-000 3 Amp 3 I/O Slot 3 010101-000 3 Amp 4 I/O Slot 4 010101-000 3 Amp PS 3-4 Location © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Maintenance Personality Module Fuse Replacement The green LED on each personality module indicates the status of the personality module fuse. If the LED is lit, the fuse is good. The personality module fuses are standard automotive style fuses that can be purchased at any automotive supply store. Refer to Table 3-9 for the fuse value and GETSGS part number. Table 3-9. Personality Module Fuse Chart Personality Module Type Part Number Value VLD-C6S 010164-002 20 Amp VTI-2S 010164-001 15 Amp VIO-44S 010164-000 3 Amp VIO-1010S 010164-000 3 Amp CAB-16S 010164-000 3 Amp VIO-86S 010164-004 4 Amp VLD-R16S 010164-000 3 Amp VLD-R16S 010164-005 30 Amp VIO-44R 010164-000 3 Amp 1. Place Power Switch in the OFF position. 2. Remove blown fuse. 3. Replace fuse with a good fuse of the same value. 4. Return the Power Switch to the ON position. 5. Verify proper operation of the ElectroLogIXS system based on the current application. Supply Battery Replacement 1. Place Power Switch to the OFF position. 2. Disconnect the Positive (+) Battery lead from the B terminal. 3. Disconnect the Negative (-) Battery lead from the N terminal. 4. Replace supply battery with known good battery. 5. Connect the Positive (+) Battery lead to the B terminal. 6. Connect the Negative (-) Battery lead to the N terminal. 7. Place Power Switch to the ON position. 8. Verify proper operation of ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system based on the current application. Central Power Supply Output Voltage Check 1. Using a voltmeter, check the voltage between the 5V and COM test points on the backplane. 2. Verify the voltage is between +4.94 and +5.46 VDC. If voltage is not within tolerance, replace the CPS Module. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 3-5 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 CDU Installation The CDU may be installed with power applied to the system. Follow the installation illustrations to install the CDU-1. Note: ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Chassis shown. The 1-Slot and 4-Slot Chassis use the same principal except the CDU-1 may be mounted on a bracket. 1. Connect data interface cable to the VPM Module. 2. Hook top of CDU-1 to clip on ElectroLogIXS/EC5 chassis. 6. Store the excess cable between the VPM and the CPS Modules. 4. Rotate bottom of CDU-1 toward ElectroLogIXS/EC5 chassis. 5. Insure bottom of CDU-1 is secured to the CPS and VPM latches. 6. Verify proper operation of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system as detailed in Chapter 8 - ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Retest Guide. CDU-1 Removal The CDU-1 module may be removed with power applied to the system. Follow the removal illustrations to install the CDU-1. 3-6 1. To unfasten the CDU-1, lift the module and pull the bottom out until free from the CPS and VPM latches; then, lower and remove the CDU. 2. Slide CDU-1 away from ElectroLogIXS/EC5 chassis. 3. Disconnect the data interface cable. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Maintenance System Module Installation This procedure is used to replace any of the system modules (CPS, VPM, GFD-1, CIO-1/CIO-1A, CIO-CLA, CIO-2/CIO-2A, CIO-2AB, CIO-3, CIO-MD/CIO-MDA or CIO-PCA) located in the lower portion of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 that has been found to be defective, or is being replaced due to module or software upgrades. CAUTION Verify the Power Switch is in the OFF position on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 when installing a VPM, GFD-1, or CIO module. Failure to remove power from the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 may damage the module. 1. Verify the Power Switch is in the OFF position. 2. Carefully slide the module into the correct module slot and verify connectors have securely mated. Note: System logs (data log, configuration log, error log) are stored in non-volatile memory inside the VPM Module. Prior to removing a VPM, print or download the system log files. EC5 ElectroLogIXS 373-PH20 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 3-7 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 3. Close the module latch by pushing it toward the module. ElectroLogIXS 4. Tighten the quarter-turn fastener by turning the screw in a clockwise direction. 5. Perform CDU Installation procedure as detailed in this section. 6. Verify proper operation of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system as detailed in Volume Two, Chapter 8 ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Retest Guide. ElectroLogIXS 3-8 EC5 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. EC5 100373-010 AR0 Maintenance System Module Removal This procedure is used to replace any of the system modules (CPS, VPM, GFD-1, CIO-1/CIO-1A, CIO-CLA, CIO-2/CIO-2A, CIO-2AB, CIO-3, CIO-MD/CIO-MDA, or CIO-PCA) located in the lower portion of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 that has been found to be defective, or is being replaced due to module or software upgrades. CAUTION Verify the Power Switch is in the OFF position on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 when removing a VPM, GFD-1, or CIO module. Failure to remove power from the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 may damage the module. 1. When replacing a VPM, use the terminal program or the Web GUI to print the Data Logs or save them to a file. For more information, refer to Print Data Logs in CDU Program chapter. 2. Place Power Switch to the OFF position. 3. Perform CDU-1 Removal procedure as detailed in this chapter. ElectroLogIXS EC5 4. Loosen the quarter-turn fastener by turning the screw in a counter clockwise direction. 5. Pull the module latch away from the module. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 3-9 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 ElectroLogIXS 6. EC5 Remove the System module from the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 chassis. EC5 ElectroLogIXS S -44 6S VIO D-C S -C6 D I-2S VT VL 1 MP 1 LAMP 2 NK BANK 1 LAMP 3 BA 1 LA NK BA 1 MP 2 LAMP 2 NK BANK 2 LAMP 3 BA 2 LA NK BA VL 1 MP 1 LAMP 2 NK BANK 1 LAMP 3 BA 1 LA NK BA 1 MP 2 LAMP 2 NK BANK 2 LAMP 3 BA 2 LA NK BA 373-PH21 3-10 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Maintenance I/O Module Installation This procedure is used to replace an I/O module. Unless specifically stated in the module description, I/O modules should be replaced without power applied to the system. Refer to the description of each module to determine if it can be replaced with power applied. Place the Power Switch in the OFF position before removing or installing ElectroLogIXS/EC5 modules that are not hot swappable. 1. Carefully side the module into the proper slot and verify connectors have securely mated. ElectroLogIXS EC5 I-2 VT S 6S D-C VL K 1 LAMMPP 12 A N BA NK 1 L M P 3 BA K 1 L A N BA P1 AM 2L P2 NK AM BANK 2 L MP 3 BA K 2 LA N BA 6S D-C VL K 1 LAAMMPP 12 N BANK 1 L MP 3 BA K 1 LA N BA P1 AM 2L P2 NK AM BANK 2 L MP 3 BA K 2 LA N BA VIO S -44 373-PH23 2. Close the module latch pushing it toward the module. ElectroLogIXS 3. EC5 Tighten the quarter-turn fastener of the module being installed by turning the screw clockwise. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 3-11 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 4. Verify proper operation of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system as detailed in Chapter 8 ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Retest Guide. ElectroLogIXS EC5 I/O Module Removal This procedure is used to replace a defective I/O module, or to replace an I/O module due to module or software upgrades. Unless specifically stated in the module description, I/O modules should be replaced without power applied to the system. Refer to the description of each module to determine if it can be replaced with power applied. Place the Power Switch in the OFF position before removing or installing ElectroLogIXS/EC5 modules that are not hot swappable. 1. Place the Power Switch in the OFF position before removing or installing ElectroLogIXS/EC5 modules that are not hot swappable. 2. Loosen the quarter-turn fastener of the module to be removed by turning the screw counter clockwise. ElectroLogIXS 3-12 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. EC5 100373-010 AR0 Maintenance 3. Pull the module latch away from the module. EC5 ElectroLogIXS 4. Remove the module from the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 chassis. EC5 ElectroLogIXS 6S D-C 6S D-C S TI-2 V VL P1 LAMP 2 K1 BANK 1 LAMP 3 BANK 1 LAM BAN P1 LAMP 2 K2 BANK 2 LAMP 3 BANK 2 LAM BAN VL P1 LAMP 2 K1 BANK 1 LAMP 3 BANK 1 LAM BAN P1 LAMP 2 K2 BANK 2 LAMP 3 BANK 2 LAM BAN S -44 VIO 373-PH22 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 3-13 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Chassis Information Module Installation and Removal WARNING Before returning the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 to service, verify the Vital Configuration Settings, Vital Remote Parameters, PTC Applicability Settings, PTC Debounce Times, PTC WIU Address, and Timer Values against the Application Circuit Plan. Failure to verify the Vital Configuration Settings, Vital Remote Parameters, PTC Applicability Settings, PTC Debounce Times, PTC WIU Address, and Timer Values could result in a falsely permissive aspect which could result in serious injury or death. Always verify the Vital Configuration Settings, Vital Remote Parameters, PTC Applicability Settings, PTC Debounce Times, PTC WIU Address, and Timer Values when replacing the Chassis Information Module, the PTC mapping rules, the PTC configuration file or the equations. CAUTION Verify the power switch is in the OFF position when installing or removing the Chassis Information Module. Failure to remove power from the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 may damage the Chassis Information Module. Installation* 1. Verify the Power Switch is in the OFF position. 2. Install the CI or UCI-3 Module by matching the module guides with the slots in the backplane assembly. 3. When the connector on the backplane assembly is seated against the connector on the CI or UCI-3, the CI or UCI-3 is correctly installed. 4. Verify proper operation of the ElectroLogIXS system as detailed in Chapter 8 - ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Retest Guide CI or UCI-3 (Chassis Information) Module section Removal* 1. Before powering off and removing the CI or UCI-3 Module confirm all Vital and Non-Vital PTC settings conform to the site plans. Obtain the System Configuration settings as detailed in Volume Two, Chapter 6 Web Graphical User Interface Configuration Main Menu - System Settings. 2. Place Power Switch to the OFF position. 3. Locate the CI or UCI-3 Module. 4. Gently squeeze the side tabs on the CI Module. 5. Carefully remove the CI or UCI-3 Module by pulling it away from the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Chassis. Note: 3-14 *EC5 shown, ElectroLogIXS procedures are the same but the location is slightly different. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Maintenance Chassis Information Module Application EPROM Installation and Removal WARNING Anytime the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Application EPROM is replaced with an Application EPROM containing different equation or configuration information (i.e., the CRC differs from the previous EPROM), adequate testing must be performed to detect any errors or failures before returning the unit to service. Failure to adequately test the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 unit after the Application EPROM has been replaced could result in death or serious injury. WARNING When replacing the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Application EPROM with an Application EPROM containing the same equation information (i.e., the CRC is the same as the previous EPROM), always check the Application EPROM CRC using the Terminal Program to insure the correct EPROM is being installed. Failure to verify that the correct Application EPROM is being installed could result in death or serious injury. Component ESD Notice To protect against ESD damage to electronic equipment containing components, follow the field procedures in AREMA C&S Manual Part 11.4.5. Failure to use recommended protective measures could result in permanent equipment damage, either immediate or latent, when handling components. Installation 1. Install EPROM inside CI or UCI-3 Module as shown. Note: To open the CI or UCI-3 Module, press the GE logo on the main body of the module while swinging the clear plastic cover upwards. 2. Make sure the notch in the EPROM faces the same direction as the notch in the socket. 3. Make sure each pin lines up with the correct hole before inserting the EPROM. Note: 4. Misalignment may cause one or more of the pins to bend and prevent correct operation of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. If the EPROM has fewer pins than the socket allows, make sure that EPROM is aligned as shown. Note: 100373-010 AR0 When the system is powered-up, the Data Logs will be erased by the VPM software as the information stored in the new EPROM will not be compatible with the information contained in the Data Logs. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 3-15 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 5. With EPROM installed in the Chassis Information Module, close Chassis Information Module Window and perform Chassis Information Module Installation procedure as detailed in this chapter. 6. Verify proper operation of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system as detailed in Volume Two, Chapter 8 - ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Retest Guide. Perform Chassis Information Module Removal procedure as detailed in this chapter. Component ESD Notice To protect against ESD damage to electronic equipment containing components, follow the field procedures in AREMA C&S Manual , Part 11.4.5. Failure to use recommended protective measures could result in permanent equipment damage, either immediate or latent, when handling components. Removal 1. Using the terminal program, print the Data Logs or save them to a file. For more information, refer to Print Data Logs in the CDU Program or Terminal Program chapter. 2. Perform Chassis Information Module Removal procedure as detailed in this chapter. 3. Locate EPROM inside the CI or UCI-3 Module. Note: 4. To open the CI or UCI-3 Module, press the GE logo on the main body of the module while swinging the clear plastic cover upwards. Remove the Chassis Information Module EPROM by lifting it away from the connector. VPM-2/VPM-2+/VPM-3 Battery Replacement The VPM-2/VPM-2+/VPM-3 contains an internal lithium battery for retaining log information in the event of a power failure. If the CDU-1 displays a Recorder Battery Low Message. Replace the VPM-2/VPM-2+/VPM-3 Module with a new VPM-2/VPM-2+/VPM-3 Module and return the old VPM-2/VPM-2+/VPM-3 Module to GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling for battery replacement. For details on replacing the VPM-2/VPM-2+/VPM-3, refer to the System Module Removal and System Module Installation procedures, detailed in this chapter. 3-16 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Maintenance Track Inductor Panel Component Replacement Refer to Figure 3-13 for location of components on the TIP-2. Replace damaged components as necessary. AAR TERMINALS INDUCTOR AAR TERMINALS TSS-1 INDUCTOR TSS-1 Figure 3-13, Track Inductor Panel Component Location. Track Inductor Panel Fuse Replacement Refer to Figure 3-14 for fuse locations. Refer to Table 3-10 when replacing fuses. Table 3-10. TIP Fuse Chart Fuse Designation Manufacturer Value Quantity GETSGS Part Number Cartridge (FLNR9) Littelfuse 9 Amp (thermal slo-blow) 2 141-005103-032 Automobile Style (257010) Littelfuse 10 Amp 2 010101-004 Figure 3-14, Track Inductor Panel Component Location Diagram. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 3-17 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 EC5 Special Maintenance Activities Backplane Replacement Procedure This procedure is used to replace a Backplane that has been found to be defective, or is being replaced due to system upgrades. Place the Power Switch to the OFF position. 2. Remove the Positive (+) Battery lead to the B terminal. 3. Remove the Negative (-) Battery lead to the N terminal. 4. Remove the CDU-1. Refer to CDU-1 Removal Procedure in this section, if necessary. AAR1 AAR2 B 5V COM 1 2 3 20 7.5 PS 5. CIO-2 N 4 20 1. Disconnect all I/O Module connectors. VLD-C6S AUXILIARY I/O (SLOT 4) (SLOT 3) AUX I/O 1+ I/O 5+ B1L1 B1L2 NV102 B1L3 NV103 I/O 1- I/O 5- I/O 2+ I/O 6+ I/O 2- I/O 6- I/O 3+ I/O 7+ B2L1 I/O 3- I/O 7- B2L2 I/O 4+ I/O 8+ I/O 4- I/O 8- NV101 NV104 COM1 B2L3 COM2 4B 4A 3A VLD-C6S VTI-2S (SLOT 1) (SLOT 2) CAB1+ B1L1 CAB1- B1L2 NV102 B1L3 NV103 NV101 NV104 CAB2+ COM1 CAB2IN 1+ B2L1 IN 1- B2L2 1B IN 2+ B2L3 2B COM2 IN 21A 2A EC5 ELECTRO CODE 5 GE T ransportation Systems Global Signaling 3-18 PS 7.5 1 15 2 20 3 20 4 3 - 15 - - 20 - - 20 - -3- SPARE FUSES - 7.5 - COLORLIGHT © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Maintenance 6. Remove all the modules from the EC5 Chassis. Refer to appropriate module removal procedure in this section, if necessary. I-2S VT 7. 6S D-C VL 1 LAMPP 21 N K AM BANK 1 L MP 3 BA K 1 LA N BA P1 AM 2L P2 NK AM BANK 2 L MP 3 B A K 2 LA N BA 6S D-C VL 1 LAMPP 21 VIO 44S NK AM BANK 1 L MP 3 BA K 1 LA N BA P1 AM 2L P2 NK AM BANK 2 L MP 3 B A K 2 LA N BA Remove the cross member from the EC5 chassis by removing seven screws are as shown. Note: Record the position of the module connector key plates. They will need to be replaced when the new Backplane is installed. 8. Remove the 23 screws securing the Backplane to the EC5 Chassis. 9. Remove the Backplane from the EC5 Chassis. 10. Remove the fuses and Chassis ID Pack from the old Backplane. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 3-19 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 11. Install module connector keys and new Backplane in the EC5 chassis and secure with the 23 screws previously removed. 12. Install the fuses and Chassis ID Pack on the new Backplane. 13. Replace cross member. 14. Re-install all the modules into the EC5 Chassis. Refer to appropriate module installation procedure in this section, if necessary. 15. Reconnect all I/O Module connectors. 16. Install the CDU-1. Refer to CDU-1 Installation Procedure in this section, if necessary. 3-20 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. I-2S VT 6S D- C VL MP 1 A 1L P2 NK AM BANK 1 L MP 3 B A K 1 LA N BA P1 AM 2L P2 NK AM BANK 2 L MP 3 BA K 2 LA N BA 6S D-C VL LAMPP 12 VIO S -44 1 NK AM BANK 1 L MP 3 B A K 1 LA N BA P1 AM 2L P2 NK AM BANK 2 L MP 3 BA K 2 LA N BA 100373-010 AR0 Maintenance 17. Connect the Positive (+) Battery lead to the B terminal. 18. Connect the Negative (-) Battery lead to the N terminal. AAR1 AAR2 B CIO-2 N 5V 2 3 20 1 7.5 PS 20 COM 4 19. Place the Power Switch to the ON position. 20. Verify that all the Health Indicators illuminate and the system operates normally. 21. Verify there are no CDU-1 alarm messages. WARNING After installing a new EC5 Backplane, verify the Vital Configuration Settings,Vital Remote Parameters, PTC Applicability Settings, PTC Debounce Times, PTC WIU Address, and Timer Values against the Application Circuit Plan. Failure to verify the Vital Configuration Settings Vital Remote Parameters, PTC Applicability Settings, PTC Debounce Times, PTC WIU Address, and Timer Values could result in a falsely permissive aspect which could result in serious injury or death. Always verify the Vital Configuration Settings Vital Remote Parameters, PTC Applicability Settings, PTC Debounce Times, PTC WIU Address, and Timer Values when replacing the EC5 Backplane. 22. Verify all Timer Values are correct as described in the Timers Setup procedure. 23. Verify the Vital Configuration Settings are correct as described in the Vital Configuration Setup procedure. 24. Set the Track Transmit Voltage and Receive Reference as described in the Track Circuit Adjustment procedure. 25. Set the Lamp Voltage as described in the Lamp Voltage Setup procedures. 26. Verify proper operation of the EC5 system as detailed in Volume Two, Chapter 8 - ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Retest Guide. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 3-21 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 3-22 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Maintenance ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Maintenance Record Signal Location No. Reason For Call Track Condition Battery Check Voltage Routine Maintenance 100373-010 AR0 Trouble Call Dry Damp Wet Track Circuit Measurements Charge Current Was Is Converter Out Voltage Peak Current Peak Receiver In Voltage Peak Current Peak Converter Setting Was Is Receiver Setting Was © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. Meter Type Modules Replaced Probable Cause Date Initials Is 3-23 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 3-24 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Troubleshooting Chapter 4 – Troubleshooting Contents Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Recommended Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Additional Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 General Troubleshooting Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Connector Probing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Module Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Supply Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Track Circuit Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Track Circuit Testing Using Transmit Mode Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Track Circuit Troubleshooting Using Transmit and Receive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 4-6 4-6 4-6 4-7 4-7 4-8 Lamp Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 4-i ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 4-ii © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Troubleshooting Chapter 4 – Troubleshooting Introduction This chapter contains information to troubleshoot and repair problems in an ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system that has been operational. WARNING ElectroLogIXS/EC5 troubleshooting and repair must be accomplished in a timely manner. Proper and timely maintenance is required for the equipment to provide failsafe operation. Failure to report failures and repair the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 in a timely manner could allow multiple failures over time to combine, resulting in an unsafe condition that could result in death or serious injury. Timely is defined as without undue delay per 49 CFR 236.1023(j). The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 is designed to minimize the effort required for troubleshooting. Most problems will be immediately detected by the software and displayed in a flashing message on the CDU display. If you suspect that the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 has a problem, follow the basic troubleshooting steps listed in Figure 4-1. 1. POWER 2. VISUAL INDICATORS 1. Check power to the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. 2. Check the visual indicators on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. The visual indicators represent high-level troubleshooting. 3. Steps 1 and 2 will cover most problems. 4. Failure History Analysis is useful for troubleshooting intermittent or persistent problems. Review the accumulated errors in the error log. 1. HEALTH LEDS 2. CDU ALARM MESSAGES 3. STATUS LEDS/QUICK STATUS MENU/CDU MENU TREE 3. DETAILED TROUBLESHOOTING CAB SIGNAL TRACK SIGNAL LAMP AUX IN/OUT MECHANISM COMMUNICATIONS 4. FAILURE HISTORY ANALYSIS 1. ERROR LOG TOPLEVEL Note: This step requires a data terminal or PC to access data. Figure 4-1, Troubleshooting Chart In general, when troubleshooting the ElectroLogIXS/EC5: 1. Start with the CPS (Central Power Supply) Module. 2. Check the VPM (Vital Peripheral Master) Module, signals, switches, and track circuit. 3. Verify track circuit by isolating the external connections from the ElectroLogIXS/EC5, check for feedback, shorts, and low battery levels. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 4-1 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 WARNING After performing corrective maintenance on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 unit, adequate testing must be performed to detect any errors/failures related to the new equipment and /or maintenance. The tests should be performed before the unit is returned to service and in accordance with standard railroad, FRA, and/or other regulatory agency rules. This should include visual inspection of vital parameter values. The tests should be performed by qualified personnel that have the knowledge to correctly and safely discharge the tests. Failure to adequately test the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 unit after performing corrective maintenance could result in death or serious injury. Documentation Keep the following reference documents at all ElectroLogIXS/EC5 installations: 1. Complete wiring diagrams showing all input and output terminals including battery supply, and all other associated wiring. 2. If available, the Program Application Worksheet and Maintenance record may be helpful. Recommended Equipment Several ElectroLogIXS/EC5 accessories are referred to in this chapter. These products are recommended for best operation and simplified troubleshooting. They are available from GETSGS (GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling). TS-1019A Peak Reading Track Current Meter (GETSGS part number 800-098005-001) TIS-4 Track Input Simulator for Electro Code track and line circuits. (GETSGS part number 800-087041-001) Additional Test Equipment Digital Voltmeter Multimeter General Troubleshooting Techniques TheElectroLogIXS/EC5 has built-in diagnostics which may be used to stream line troubleshooting ElectroLogIXS/EC5 problems. 4-2 1. The green module Health LEDs located on every module. 2. Yellow I/O LEDs for all inputs and outputs to the tracks, lamps, and communication lines. 3. CDU-1 and Web GUI Quick Status Menus for quick access to track, lamp, and I/O status. The Quick Status Menu are the items directly below the GETSGS Home Menu. See Figure 5.3 for an example. The items shown in the Quick Status Menu are dependent upon the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 application. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Troubleshooting 4. CDU-1 and Web GUI function menus for detailed diagnostics like track resistance, lamp output voltage, and track transmit current. Connector Probing Measure voltages at connectors by inserting test probes into connector test probe points as indicated in figure 4.2. Do not insert test probes into connector receptacles. T e st p ro b e p o in t Figure 4-2, Indication of Test Probe Point Module Troubleshooting The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 uses 12 VDC from the supply battery. Certain modules operate on 12 VDC and 5 VDC which is supplied by the CPS Module. Always check the 12 VDC from the supply battery as well as 5 VDC from the CPS Module. CAUTION Unless specifically stated in the module description, I/O modules should be replaced without power applied to the system. Refer to the description of each module to determine if it can be replaced with power applied. Place the Power Switch in the OFF position before removing or installing any module that is not hot swappable. Supply Battery Low supply battery levels will cause symptoms of many other failures in the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. Before troubleshooting any failures, check the 12.0 VDC battery supply voltage. 1. Using Figure 4-3/4-4 as a guide, check the input voltage across the B and N terminals. Verify input voltages are between 9.5 and 16.5 VDC. If input voltage is not within tolerance, change system battery. 2. Set the meter to read AC voltage. 3. Measure the AC voltage across the voltage across the B and N terminals. Verify the voltage is less than 1 VAC. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 4-3 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 4. If the voltage is too high correct it before continuing. B and N Terminals 373-PH24 Figure 4-3, Location of B and N Terminals on 9-Slot ElectroLogIXS Unit B and N Terminals Figure 4-4, Location of B and N Terminals on 4-Slot ElectroLogIXS Unit 4-4 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Troubleshooting B and N Terminals CI-2 Figure 4-5, Location of B and N Terminals on 1-Slot ElectroLogIXS Unit AAR1 AAR2 N 2 20 1 20 15 7.5 B 3 4 Figure 4-6, Location of B and N Terminals of EC5 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 4-5 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Track Circuit Troubleshooting The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 contains a Test Mode to aid in troubleshooting track circuits. The Transmit Test Mode interferes with normal track circuit operation by providing a steady one volt DC output rather than the normal pulse coded output. The Receive Test Mode disables all outputs forcing the unit to remain in constant receive mode. There are two methods for using the Test Mode. Both methods should be considered as supplemental troubleshooting aids, the primary method being a close visual inspection by walking the track circuit. Track Circuit Testing Using Transmit Mode Only Overview In this method the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 at one end of the track circuit is placed in Transmit Mode, while the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 at the other end of the track circuit continues to transmit the normal pulse coded signal. The equivalent circuit is shown in Figure 4-5. Figure 4-5, Track Circuit Setup. A DC ammeter is connected between the two rails at various points along the track circuit and the current is measured. As the measurement point passes over the fault condition, the current changes from a steady reading to a pulsed reading. For example, in Figure 4-5 the current measured at point A would be steady while the reading at point B would be pulsed. Although the fault condition is depicted as an open circuit in the figure, this is the same behavior would be observed for a rail-to-rail short. This method is best suited for locating drastic faults, such as a complete open circuit or a dead short. The primary advantage of this method is that only one end of the track circuit needs to be placed in Test Mode, eliminating the need to drive to the other end of the track circuit. Procedure 4-6 1. Check the cartridge fuse on the TIP-2. 2. Check the automotive style fuse on the TIP-2 3. Check the TIP-2 to rail connections. 4. One way to trace an open circuit on an ElectroLogIXS/EC5 track circuit is to walk the track with an analog voltmeter. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Troubleshooting 5. Use the meter on the track as if the track was a simple track circuit. Observe the correct rail polarity. Note: The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 track circuit has a transmitter at both ends. This means that there will be voltage at each side of the open circuit. One transmitter should be isolated from the rails. 6. Isolate the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 at one end of the track circuit by opening the outgoing track terminals on the TIP-2. 7. Set the meter to a low voltage setting (approximately 3 V full scale deflection). 8. When the voltage is present, the meter will follow the DC pulses. The actual voltage level received is not important. 9. The pulses will be present from the end that has the transmitter connected. The pulses will disappear once the break has been passed. 10. Once the open circuit has been located, make the repair. 11. Reconnect the transmitter on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. 12. Recheck the receive current. Track Circuit Troubleshooting Using Transmit and Receive Mode Overview In this method the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 at one end of the track circuit is placed in Transmit Test Mode, while the other end of the track circuit is placed in Receive Test Mode. The equivalent circuit is shown in Figure 46. Figure 4-6, Track Circuit Setup. A DC ammeter is connected between the two rails at various points along the track circuit. As the measurement point passes over the fault condition, the current reading drops suddenly. Figure 4-7 illustrates how the measured current varies with location along the track circuit. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 4-7 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Figure 4-7, Measured Current Graph. Although the fault condition has been depicted as a high rail resistance, this same behavior would be observed for a rail-to-rail leakage path. Procedure 1. Turn off the track circuit at one end. 2. Set a Simpson 260 (or equivalent meter) to the 500 mA scale. Set a Simpson TS-111 to the 300 mA scale. 3. Connect track circuit as shown in Figure 4-6. 4. Place a short across the leads to verify that you have full meter deflection. 5. Walk a short distance on the track. Place one meter lead on each rail. 6. Meter should show full scale deflection. 7. Walk further down the track. Place one meter lead on each rail. 8. Meter should read full scale deflection. 9. Continue walking and checking until you do not get a full meter deflection. The broken rail lies between the last point that you got full scale deflection and the place where you had partial meter deflection. 10. When you have located the broken rail, make the repair. 11. Turn off the meter. Note: 4-8 Reset the meter to the voltage scale. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Troubleshooting Lamp Test Mode The Lamp Test Mode is a diagnostic mode that allows the user to apply an output to a selected lamp for troubleshooting purposes. The application grants permission to enter this mode by setting the Lamp Setup Grant status to True (VLD-C6S) or the Lamp Grant Bank 1, Lamp Grant Bank 2 to True (VLD-R16S). The application may be written to allow the system to enter the Lamp Test Mode only when no trains are present. Refer to Chapter 5 - CDU Program for details of the Lamp Test Mode. The user is able to select the Lamp Test Mode using the CDU-1. As soon as the user attempts to enter the Lamp Test Mode, the executable software verifies that it has permission to enter that mode based on Lamp Setup Grant/Lamp Grant Bank status. If permission to enter the Lamp Test Mode is denied, a message is displayed on the CDU-1 informing the user that access is denied. This could be because of train position or the fact that an equation was never written to allow the Lamp Setup Grant/Lamp Grant Bank status to go True. If permission to enter the Lamp Test Mode is granted and the user confirms entry, the system sets the input status Lamp Normal Mode to False to indicate that the Lamp Test Mode is entered. The system displays the lamp outputs by their status names with the current on/off state of each output. The user may select which lamp output to perform the Lamp Test on. When the system exits the Lamp Test Mode, it may take about 30 seconds to display valid aspects. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 4-9 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 4-10 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Chapter 5 – CDU Program Contents Control/Display Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keypad Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Numeric Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arrow Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 5-1 5-1 5-2 Using CDU Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Data Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Directional Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Edit Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Short Cut Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Home Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 CDU Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Application Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Application Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Software Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Track Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit Level Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Track Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receive Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receive Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alternating Code 5 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alternating Code 5 Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stick Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 5-12 5-13 5-13 5-13 5-14 5-14 5-15 5-16 5-17 5-17 Cab Signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp Quick Status Home Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Light Out Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp Driver Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flash Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alternate Flash Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vital Stop Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp Test Mode (VLD-R16S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp Test Mode (VLD-C6S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp Setup (VLD-C6S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Lamp Setup (VLD-C6S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp Manual Setup (VLD-C6S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automated Setup (VLD-C6S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp Automated Setup (VLD-C6S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 5-19 5-20 5-21 5-22 5-23 5-24 5-25 5-26 5-28 5-28 5-29 5-30 5-31 5-31 5-32 5-33 Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 View Timer Statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-i ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Enter Timer Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-Vital Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Non-Vital Timer Statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enter Non-Vital Timer Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36 5-37 5-38 5-38 Vital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vital Input Statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enter Slow Pick Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enter Slow Release Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39 5-40 5-40 5-41 Code Select Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42 Slot Code Selects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42 Code Select Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43 Vital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43 Vital Inputs and Vital Outputs Quick Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45 Track Decoder Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46 Slot Decoder Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46 Decoder Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47 Vital Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47 View Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48 Edit Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48 Vital Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vital Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vital Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vital Communication, Vital Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Receive (RX) Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Transmit (TX) Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selected Heartbeat Message Interval (HMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vital Communication, Edit Remote Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote Enable / Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Local Network ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote Network ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Max Send Time Difference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Max Recv Time Difference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMI Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ack Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49 5-50 5-50 5-50 5-51 5-52 5-52 5-52 5-53 5-53 5-53 5-54 5-55 5-55 5-56 5-56 5-57 5-57 5-58 5-58 5-59 Office Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Codeline Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60 5-61 5-61 5-61 Local Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View LCP Health . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62 5-62 5-63 5-63 Non-Vital I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64 Battery Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65 High Battery Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66 Low Battery Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66 5-ii © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Ground Fault Detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67 Local User Confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72 System Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72 Log Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73 Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73 View Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74 Erase Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74 Print Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75 Data Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75 Print Data Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75 Date/Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76 Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77 Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77 Time Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78 Config Daylit Saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78 DST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79 DST Strt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79 DST End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80 Request Time Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80 Sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81 Diagnostic Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82 Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82 Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83 Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83 Stop Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84 Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84 Ethernet Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85 Ethernet Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86 Port IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86 Port Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87 Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88 HTTP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88 HTTP TCP Port Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89 Trusted Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89 Trusted Source Network 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90 Trusted Source 1 Enable / Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90 Telnet Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91 Telnet Port 1 Enable / Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91 Telnet Username . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92 Telnet Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92 Telnet TCP Port Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93 Telnet Trusted Source Network 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93 Telnet Trusted Source 1 Enable / Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94 Office Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95 Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95 UCE Office Protocol Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96 Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96 Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97 Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97 Stop Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98 Set Office Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98 SCS-128 Office Protocol Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-99 Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-99 Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100 Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100 Stop Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101 Unit Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-iii ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Set Office Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GENISYS® Office Protocol Configuration (Serial Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number Ind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unit Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ctrl Latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ind Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Const Ind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Msg Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tx Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tx Cutoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CTS Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Secure Poll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Message Counts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Office Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BCS Office Protocol Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BAUD Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number Ind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unit Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ctrl Latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ind Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Msg Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CTS Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RxGap Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IndGap Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Message Counts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set office Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GENISYS® Office Protocol Configuration (Ethernet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number Ind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unit Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ctrl Latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ind Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Const Ind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Msg Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Secure Poll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trusted Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Message Counts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Office Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATCS Office Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATCS Office Protocol Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BAUD Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number Ind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ctrl Latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ind Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATCS Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Message Counts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Office Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPC Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Address Id . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Addr Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Railroad Id . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Station Addr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Station Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCP Addr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCP Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Office Addr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-iv © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-102 5-103 5-103 5-104 5-104 5-105 5-105 5-106 5-106 5-107 5-107 5-108 5-108 5-109 5-109 5-110 5-110 5-111 5-112 5-112 5-113 5-113 5-114 5-114 5-115 5-115 5-116 5-116 5-117 5-117 5-118 5-118 5-119 5-120 5-120 5-121 5-121 5-122 5-122 5-123 5-123 5-124 5-125 5-126 5-127 5-128 5-130 5-130 5-130 5-131 5-131 5-132 5-132 5-133 5-133 5-134 5-134 5-135 5-135 5-136 5-136 5-137 5-137 5-138 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Office Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-138 CDC Addr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-139 CDC Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-139 Ind Refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-140 Ind Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-140 Log Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-141 Page Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-141 Local Control Panel Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-142 LCP Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-142 HAWK Interface Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-143 HAWK Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-143 Vital Remote Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-144 Vital Remote Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-144 Vital Remote Set NV Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-144 MAC Switchover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-145 MMST (Maximum MAC Switchover Time) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-145 Switchover Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-145 Switchover Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-146 Switchover Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-146 Delete Old Key Vault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-146 Vital Remote Ports (Serial Ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-147 Vital Remote Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-147 Remote Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-148 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-148 Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-148 Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-149 Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-149 Stop Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-149 Local Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-150 Attached Remote(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-150 Remote 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-151 Date Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-151 Poll Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-151 Msg MAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-152 Use New Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-152 MAC Enable / Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-152 Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-153 Port Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-153 Vital Remote Ports (Ethernet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-154 Remote Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-154 Attached Remote(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-155 Remote 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-155 Date Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-155 Msg MAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-156 Use New Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-156 MAC Enable / Disable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-157 IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-157 Port Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-158 EPROM Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-159 Application EPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-159 Executive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-160 VPM A-Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-160 VPM B-Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-161 VPM C-Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-161 CDU Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-161 Default Maintenance Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-162 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-v ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 5-vi © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Chapter 5 – CDU Program Control/Display Unit The CDU-1 (Control Display Unit) provides an interface between the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system and the user. The CDU-1 contains a 40 character display, a 16 button keypad, and two system indicators (HEALTH and 5V PWR). The 40 character display provides a visual indication of system status and the keypad allows for easy access to system setup, maintenance, and diagnostic utilities. Figure 5-1, The Control Display/Unit. The CDU-1 status indicators provide a visual indication of system status. The HEALTH LED is illuminated when the system’s CPUs are communicating and operating normally. The HEALTH LED will be extinguished during system resets or when a CPU is locked up. The 5V PWR LED illuminates when the CPS (Central Power Supply Module) output is within tolerance. Keypad Functions The Keypad is divided into three groups; 10 alphanumeric keys marked ‘0’ through ‘9' and ‘A’ through ‘Z’, two keys marked ‘CANCEL’ and ‘ENTER’, and four directional arrow keys marked with ‘Y’, ‘Z’, ‘[’, and ‘\’. Numeric Keys Numeric keys are used for Boolean inputs (e.g., True/False or On/Off), numeric inputs (e.g., to change track voltage, track current), and character inputs (e.g., alphanumeric serial numbers). For menus expecting Boolean inputs, the ‘0’ key selects the negative condition (False or Off) and the ‘1’ key selects the positive condition (True or On). For menus expecting numeric inputs, a key’s numeric value is entered and the cursor automatically moves left one position after each key press. For menus expecting character inputs, characters are selected by pressing a multiple times until the desired character is displayed and then pressing the right arrow key to advance to the next character. The character selection sequence for each key is shown below. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-1 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Key Selected Characters 1 "1”, “=”, “(“, “)”, “?”, “|”, “/”, “<”, “>”, “:”, “,”, “.", space 2 3 4 "A”, “B”, “C”, “a”, “b”, “c”, “2", space “D”, “E”, “F”, “d”, “e”, “f”, “3”, space “G”, “H”, “I”, “g”, “h”, “i”, “4”, space 5 “J”, “K”, “L”, “j”, “k”, “l”, “5”, space 6 “M”, “N”, “O”, “m”, “n”, “o”, “6”, space 7 “P”, “Q”, “R”, “S”, “p”, “q”, “r”, “s”, “7”, space 8 “T”, “U”, “V”, “t”, “u”, “v”, “8”, space 9 0 “W”, “X”, “Y”, “Z”, “w”, “x”, “y”, “z”, “9”, space “0”, “”, “#”, “!”, “@”, “$”, “%”, “&”, “*”, “-”, “+”, space Arrow Keys As long as the system is in the Directional Mode the arrow keys can be used to navigate through the menu tree. Pressing the Right Arrow key displays the next menu item to the right (the menu will loop around to the first menu of the same level if the last menu is in the display). Pressing the Left Arrow key displays the next menu to the left. Pressing the Down Arrow key displays the menu of the next lower level menu item unless the lowest level is currently displayed in which case, the menu will loop to the top of the menu. Pressing the Up Arrow key displays the menu of the next higher level item. If the highest level menu item is currently displayed, the Up Arrow key is disabled. Pressing the Right and Left Arrow keys simultaneously activates the “Local Home” that allows the user to jump to the Functional Heading for the menu being displayed. Pressing the Up and Down Arrow keys simultaneously activates the “Global Home” that allows the user to jump to the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Home Menu. 5-2 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Using CDU Menus The CDU menu system is a “tree” of menu items. Functional Headings are located at the top of the tree and are arranged in a left to right fashion. Subheadings, data display/select items appear under the Functional Headings. Data prompts are located under data display/select items. PUSH BUTTON “A” (Moves Up in Menu) Edit Mode Values and Set-Up Parameters Values and Set-Up Parameters System Conﬁgura�on (Menu Tree) System Conﬁgura�on (Menu Tree) PUSH BUTTON “B” (Moves Le� in Menu) Direc�onal Mode PUSH BUTTON “C” (Moves Right in Menu) Direc�onal Mode Values and Set-Up Parameters Values and Set-Up Parameters PUSH BUTTON “D” (Moves Down in Menu) Edit Mode Figure 5-2, Push Button Relationship With Figures showing Menu Diagrams. The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 menus are diagramed on menu maps. A description of how to use menu maps is given below. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-3 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Data Prompt The data prompt displayed on the CDU-1 depends on the type of data to be entered. Enter Value> Enter Text > Expects a numeric entry and shifts the cursor to the right with every numeric key pressed. Expects an alphanumeric entry. After selections the cursor is moved to the right manually. Press \ or [ > These keys are used to increase or decrease a value setting. SET> Set Date or Time Erase : Press ‘0’> To erase an error or data logs press 0. Y/N press 1/0 > For Yes press 1. For No press 0. Operating Modes The CDU-1 has two modes of operation; the Directional Mode and the Edit Mode. The Directional Mode is used to navigate through the menu tree. While in the Directional Mode, the user cannot change any values. The Edit Mode is used to modify values and setup parameters. While in the Edit Mode, the user cannot navigate through the menu tree. Directional Mode The Directional Mode is used for navigating from one menu item to the next. While in the Directional Mode, pressing the CANCEL Button once displays the next higher level. It is possible to go back to the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Home Menu by holding the CANCEL key down for more than one second or by pressing the up and down arrow keys simultaneously. Pressing the ENTER key in the Directional Mode is treated like pressing the Down Arrow key. Edit Mode The Edit Mode allows the operator to modify system parameters and setup the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. The ENTER key is used edit/enter functions for items indicated with an “*”. To change a displayed value, press the ENTER key once. After changing the value and verifying that the value is correct, the new value is saved when the ENTER key is pressed again. While in the Edit Mode, the CANCEL key is used for canceling the current entry. If the CANCEL key is pressed, the current entry is canceled and the user is returned back one menu. Short Cut Keys The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 CDU-1 has the following short cut keys: 5-4 Local Home: By simultaneously pressing the Right and Left Arrow keys the CDU-1 display jumps to the Functional Heading of the menu being displayed. Global Home: By simultaneously pressing the Up and Down Arrow keys the CDU-1 display jumps to the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Home Menu. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Home Menu Figure 5-3, Typical ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Home Menu. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-5 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 HOME Menu is displayed when the system is first powered-up. The first line of the menu displays the menu title. The second line of the Home Menu displays information indicating the general health of the system. If a system malfunction is registered, it will be flashing in the second row of the CDU-1. If there is more than one malfunction, the other messages will displayed with every flashing sequence. The system's Home Menu may be different than the example shown in Figure 5-3. The actual Home Menu depends on a particular system configuration. Display< GETSGS HOME MENU XX-XX-XX XX:XX:XX Arrow Key Up Down Left or Right 5-6 Function Comment N/A Go to Quick Status Menu. The Quick Status Menu is dependant upon the configuration of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. Displays another Functional Heading. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program CDU Menu Figure 5-4, Typical CDU Menu Map (VPM-2) SYSTEM CONFIGURATION GETSGS HOME MENU XX:XX:XX XX-XX-XX APPLICATION INFO APPLICATION SELECTION TRACKS CAB SIGNALING LAMPS VITAL TIMERS NON-VITAL TIMERS VITAL INPUTS CODE SELECT INPUTS VITAL OUTPUTS SOFTWARE ACTIVATION TRACK DECODER OUTPUTS VITAL CONFIGURATION VITAL COMM OFFICE COMM LOCAL CONTROL PANEL NON-VITAL I/O BATTERY ALARM GROUND FAULT DETECT LOCAL USER CONFIRM CROSSING MAINTENANCE CROSSING SETUP CROSSING CONTROLLER SETUP Figure 5-5, Typical CDU Menu Map (VPM-3) Figures 5-4 and 5-5 depict typical CDU Menu Maps. The Functional Headings (Application Information, Application Selection, Tracks, Cab Signaling, etc.) provide access to lower-level menus that are used to set various parameters, check settings, and perform system diagnostics. The following paragraphs detail use the Functional Headings. Note: 100373-010 AR0 The actual functional headings displayed depend upon which modules are installed in a specific system. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-7 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Application Information Menu The Application Information menu lists CRC and Checksum for the application installed in the unit. Figure 5-6, Application Information Menu (VPM-2) Figure 5-7, Application Information Menu (VPM-3) 5-8 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Application Selection More than one application may be stored in the memory of the CI/UCI-3 module to suit different track configurations. This menu provides the user with the option to chose the application that meets the requirements of a particular location. Note: The Application Selection process causes the Vital Configuration Settings, Vital Timers and VIO Slow Pick/Slow Release times to be set to the default values defined in the newly selected application. Figure 5-8, Application Selection Menu (VPM-2) 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-9 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Figure 5-9, Application Selection Menu (VPM-3) Software Activation The software activation function is used to activate a new Executive or a PTC Mapping file that has been previously uploaded to the system. If the files do not exist on the system, the menu will not be displayed. SOFTWARE ACTIVATION EXECUTIVE * ACTIVATE EXECUTIVE ENTER/YES CANCEL/NO PTC MAPPING FILE * ACTIVATE PTC MAP FILE ENTER/YES CANCEL/NO Figure 5-10, Activate Software (VPM-3) 5-10 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Tracks WARNING Proper track circuit adjustment and operation should always be validated through track circuit shunt testing. Figure 5-11, Tracks Menu. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-11 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Track Transmitter and Track Receiver parameters entered through the CDU-1 are stored in an EEPROM on the Backplane. During normal ElectroLogIXS/EC5 operation, these values are used. If the Track Transmitter and Track Receiver parameters stored on the Backplane become corrupted, the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 will set the track parameters to extreme safe values. This will generate a configuration log entry. When the track parameters are set to the extreme safe values, the tracks may not function and will need to be set again. Refer to Chapter 3 - Maintenance for information on how to set track parameters. ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Extreme Safe Values Transmitter Voltage .5 Volts Receive Reference 6.00 Amps The Tracks Menu is for checking and setting the track circuit parameters. Display< TRACKS Arrow Key Up Function Comment N/A Down Go to first VTI-2S slot. Left Display another Functional Heading. Right Displays another Functional Heading. Track This menu provides access to the operating parameters for a track circuit. Display< Arrow Key Up 5-12 Slot n: Function Comment Go to TRACKS. Down Go to Track Transmitter. Left Go to another VTI-2S slot. Right Go to another VTI-2S slot. n = next slot © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Track Transmitter The Track Transmit Menu provides the ability to view or edit the Transmit Level for Track n. Display< Track Transmitter Arrow Key Up Function Comment Go to Track n. n = previous track Down Go to Transmit Level Menu. This displays the track circuit transmit parameters. The Transmit Level Menu displays the XmitV (Transmit Voltage), I (Transmit Current), and Track Res (Track Resistance) setting. Left Go to Alternating Code 5. Right Go to Track Receiver. Transmit Level Menu This menu provides the ability to change the track circuit transmit parameters. To edit the transmit level press the ENTER Key and follow the messages on the CDU-1. Display< XmitV=n.nnV I=n.nnA Track Res= n.nn Ohm Arrow Key Up Function Comment Track Transmitter. Down N/A Left or Right N/A Press the ENTER key to edit the Transmit Voltage. The CDU-1 will prompt for a new Transmit Voltage. Enter the new Transmit Voltage, press the ENTER Key and verify the new Transmit Voltage is correct. Track Receiver The Track Receiver Menu provides the ability to view or edit the receive parameters for Track n. Display< Track Receiver Arrow Key Up Comment Go to Track n. Tracks top menu Down Go to Receive Level Menu. This displays the track circuit receive parameters. The Receive Level Menu displays the RCV I (Receive Current), THR (Transmit Current), and Ratio: (Receive Ratio) setting. Left Go to Track transmitter. Right 100373-010 AR0 Function Go to Test Mode. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-13 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Receive Reference This menu provides the ability to change the track circuit receive reference parameters. To edit the receive reference, press the ENTER Button and follow the messages on the CDU-1. Display< Receive I=n.nnA THR=n.nn Reference: n.nn:n* Arrow Key Up Function Comment Go to Track Receiver. Down N/A Left or Right N/A Press the ENTER key to edit the Receive Reference. The CDU-1 will prompt for a new Receive Reference. Enter the new Receive Reference, press the ENTER Key, and verify the new Receive Reference is correct. Transmit Test Mode This menu provides the ability to turn the Transmit Test Mode On or Off. With Transmit Test Mode in the display, press the ENTER key. The Transmit Test Mode may be turned On or Off by pressing the Up and Down Arrow Keys. When the Transmit Test Mode is entered, the system will prompt the user to confirm the Transmit Test Mode entry. The Transmit Test Mode provides a steady one volt DC output rather than the normal pulse coded output. To exit transmit test mode the user selects the CDU-1 menu similar to the way the test mode was entered. When the mode is exited the system should set the input status to True and resume normal operation. Display< Transmit Test Mode Arrow Key Up 5-14 Function Go to Test Mode. Down N/A Left Go to Receive Test Mode. Right Go to Receive Test Mode. Comment Press the ENTER Key to enable this menu. Once the menu is enabled, press the Up or Down Arrow Key to toggle the Transmit Test Mode On or Off, press the ENTER Key and verify the Transmit Test Mode setting is correct. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Receive Test Mode The Receive Test Mode provides the ability to turn the Receive Test Mode On or Off. With Receive Test Mode in the display, press the ENTER Button. The Receive Test Mode may be turned On or Off by pressing the Up and Down Arrow Keys. To enter the Receive Test Mode, the system must verify that there is a user present to select entry into the receive mode. The Receive Test Mode disables all outputs forcing the unit to remain in constant receive mode. To exit the Receive Test Mode, the user selects the CDU-1 menu similar to the way the test mode was entered. When the mode is exited the system should set the input status to True and resume normal operation. Display< Receive Test Mode Arrow Key Up 100373-010 AR0 Function Go to Test Mode. Down N/A Left Go to Transmit Test Mode. Right Go to Transmit Test Mode. Comment Press the ENTER Key to enable this menu. Once the menu is enabled, press the Up or Down Arrow Key to toggle the Receive Test Mode On or Off, press the ENTER Key and verify the Receive Test Mode setting is correct. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-15 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Figure 5-12, CDU map directing the user to Test Mode Alternating Code 5 Menu The Alternating Code 5 Menu provides the ability to select the Code 5 option. Display< Alternating Code 5 Arrow Key Up Comment Go to Track 1. Down Go to the Alternating Code 5 submenu. Left Go to Test Mode. Right 5-16 Function Press the ENTER Key to enable this menu. Once the menu is enabled, press the Up or Down Arrow Key to toggle between the ALT and NON-ALT, press the ENTER Key, and verify the setting is correct. Go to Track Transmitter. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Alternating Code 5 Submenu The Alternating Code 5 submenu provides the ability to select the Code 5 option. With Alternating Code 5 in the display, press the ENTER Button. The Alternating Code 5 Mode may be selected by pressing the Up and Down Arrow Keys. Display< Alternating Code 5 Code 5 = ALT/NON=ALT* Arrow Key Up Function Go to Alternating Code 5. Down N/A Left N/A Right N/A Comment Press the ENTER Key to change the Code 5 option. Press the Up or Down Arrow Key to toggle between ALT and NON-ALT, press the ENTER Key, and verify the setting is correct. Stick Set The Stick Set Menu provides the ability to view Stick Set status. A stick is set to determine the direction of train travel. The first line of the display indicates the Stick Set number and the second line of the display indicates if the stick is set T (True) or F (False). Display< 1 T Arrow Key Up Down Left Right 100373-010 AR0 Stick set 2 F Function Comment Go to TRACKS. N/A Go to Transmit/Receive Codes. Go to Track 1. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-17 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Cab Signaling Figure 5-13, Cab Signaling Menu. The Cab Signaling Menu displays the status of the cab outputs. If no cab output is being transmitted, the output status will be Off. If a cab output is being transmitted the CDU will display the cab enable status name of the rate being transmitted. Figure 5-14 is an example of how to decode the display. Figure 5-14, Cab Signaling Menu Definition. 5-18 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Lamps Lamp Quick Status Home Menu If VLD modules are installed, the Lamp Detection Slot# and Aspect Slot# quick status menus are available. The Lamp Detection Slot# menu depicts a specific VLD module and shows the status of the lamps that are defined in the application. A “T” indicates the lamp is functional. An “F” indicates that the lamp is not functional. A “-“ indicates that the lamp output is not used (no control statuses defined) in the application. The T/F status of lamps is shown in order, (Light 1 through Light 16) from left to right in groups of four (VLD-R16S) or Light 1 through Light 6 from left to right in two groups of three (VLD-C6S). The Aspect Slot # Quick Status menu depicts the current aspects associated with the outputs of a specific VLD module. A “T” indicates that the lamp aspect is “steady on.” An “F” indicates that the lamp output is “off.” Flashing and Alternate Flashing aspects are depicted using alternately filled/cleared “0” symbols. While the duty cycle and flash rate are not accurate on the CLD with respect to the actual lamp output, the relative states of flashing and Alternate Flashing are indicated. A “-“ indicates that the lamp output is not used (no control statuses defined) in the application. VLD-R16S aspects are shown in four groups of four; VLD-C6S aspects in two groups of three. Figure 5-15, Lamp Quick Status Menu 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-19 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Lamp Functions The Lamps Function Menu allows the user to select lamp-specific menus to examine the state of the outputs (steady on, flashing, or alternate flashing), the state of the lamp filaments, and perform user-controlled maintenance activities. Figure 5-16, Lamps Menu. Display< LAMPS Arrow Key Up 5-20 Function Comment N/A Down Go to Light Out Status. Left Displays another Functional Heading. Right Displays another Functional Heading. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Light Out Status The Light Out Status menu and submenus allow the user to select an installed VLD module of interest (either a R16S or a C6S) by slot number, and then examine the operational condition of the signal lamps. The Light Out Status menu indicates Slot (S) number and Lamp Output number along with the associated status name. A value of TRUE indicates that the light is functional. A status of FALSE indicates that the light is not functional. The status names on the bottom row of the display vary depending on the status names assigned by the application engineer. Figure 5-17, Light Out Status Menu. Display< Light Out Status Arrow Key Up Go to Light Out for first VLD slot. Left Go to Alt Flash Status Menu. Display< Arrow Key Up Comment Go to LAMPS. Down Right 100373-010 AR0 Function The ‘first’ VLD slot is the lowest numbered slot containing a VLD module. Go to Lamp Driver Status Menu. Light Out Slot # Function Comment Go to Light Out Status. Down Displays the Light Out Status of Lamp Output 1. Left Displays Light Out Slot # for previous slot. Right Displays Light Out Slot # for next slot. After pressing the Down Arrow Key, use the left and right arrow keys to select the desired lamp output. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-21 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Lamp Driver Status The Lamp Driver Status menu and submenus allow the user to select an installed VLD module of interest (either a R16S or a C6S) by slot number then examine the lamp driver status for each lamp output on the module. In the VLD-R16S, a value of TRUE indicates that the lamp output is in the “steady on” condition and a value of FALSE indicates that the lamp output is not “steady on” (could be off, flashing or alternate flashing). In the VLD-C6S, a value of TRUE indicates that the lamp output is “enabled” and will either be “steady on” or “flashing” while a value of FALSE indicates the lamp output is not enabled. Figure 5-18, Lamp Driver Status Menu. Display< Lamp Driver Status Arrow Key Up Go to Lamp Driver Status for the first VLD Slot. Left Go to Light Out Status Menu. Display< Arrow Key Up Comment Go to LAMPS. Down Right 5-22 Function The ‘first’ VLD slot is the lowest numbered slot containing a VLD module. Go to Flash Status Menu. Lamp Driver Slot # Function Comment Go to Lamp Driver Status. Down Displays the Lamp Driver Status of Lamp Output 1. Left Displays Light Out Slot # for previous slot. Right Displays Light Out Slot # for next slot. After pressing the Down Arrow Key, use the left and right arrow keys to select the desired lamp output. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Flash Status The Flash Status menu and submenus allow the user to select an installed VLD module of interest (either a R16S or a C6S) by slot number then examine the flash status for each lamp output on the module. In the VLD-R16S, a value of TRUE indicates that the lamp output is in the “normal flash” condition and a value of FALSE indicates that the lamp output is not “normal flash” (could be off, steady on or alternate flashing). In the VLD-C6S, a value of TRUE indicates that the lamp output is flashing and a value of FALSE indicates the lamp is not flashing. Figure 5-19, Flash Status Menu. Display< Flash Status Arrow Key Up Go to Flash Status for the first VLD slot. Left Go to Lamp Driver Status Menu. Display< Arrow Key Up The ‘first’ VLD slot is the lowest numbered slot containing a VLD module. Go to Alt Flash Status Menu. Flash Status Slot # Function Comment Go to Flash Status. Down Go to Flash Status of Lamp Output 1. Left Displays Flash Status Slot # for previous slot. Right Comment Go to LAMPS. Down Right 100373-010 AR0 Function After pressing the Down Arrow Key, use the left and right arrow keys to select the desired lamp output. Displays Flash Status Slot # for next slot. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-23 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Alternate Flash Status The Alt Flash Status menu and submenus allow the user to select an installed VLD-R16S module of interest by slot number then examine the alternate flash status for each lamp output on the module. A value of TRUE indicates that the lamp output is in the “alternate flash” condition and a value of FALSE indicates that the lamp output is not “alternate flash” (could be off, steady on or normal flashing). Figure 5-20, Alt Flash Status Menu Display< Alt Flash Status Arrow Key Up Go to Flash Status for the first VLDR16S slot. Left Go to Flash Status Menu. Display< Arrow Key Up Comment Go to LAMPS. Down Right 5-24 Function The ‘first’ VLD slot is the lowest numbered slot containing a VLD-R16S module. Go to Stop Vital Status Menu. Alt Flash Status Slot # Function Comment Go to Alt Flash Status. Down Displays the Alt Flash Status of Lamp Output 1. Left Displays Alt Flash Status Slot # for previous slot. Right Displays Alt Flash Status Slot # for next slot. After pressing the Down Arrow Key, use the left and right arrow keys to select the desired lamp output. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Vital Stop Status The Vital Stop Status menu allows the user to select an installed VLD-R16S module of interest by slot number and examine the states (one for each bank) of the Vital Stop statuses. Figure 5-21, Vital Stop Status Menu Display< Vital Stop Status Arrow Key Up Down Go to Flash Status for the first VLDR16S slot Left Go to Alt Flash Status Menu. Right 100373-010 AR0 Function Comment Go to LAMPS. The ‘first’ VLD slot is the lowest numbered slot containing a VLD-R16S module. Go to Lamp Setup / Test Menu. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-25 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Lamp Maintenance The Lamp Maintenance menu and submenus allow the user to select an installed VLD module (either VLDR16S or VLD-C6S) by slot number then perform maintenance functions for that particular module type. Both VLD module types provide a Lamp Test Mode that enables the user, with application logic enabling, to control the state of individual lamp outputs. The VLD-C6S has the additional functions of manual and automated setup to adjust the lamp output voltage. The VLD-R16S Lamp Maintenance menu tree is shown in Figure 5-22. The VLD-C6S Lamp Maintenance menu tree is shown in Figure 5-23. Figure 5-22, Lamp Maintenance Menu (VLD-R16S) 5-26 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Figure 5-23, Lamp Maintenance Menu (VLD-C6S) 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-27 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Lamp Test Mode The Lamp Test Mode is a diagnostic mode that allows the user to control a selected lamp output for troubleshooting purposes. In order to enter the Lamp Test Mode, the user must request access and the application must have granted access. Otherwise, Lamp Test Mode is not entered. For the VLD-C6S, Lamp Test Mode is requested / entered on a module-by-module basis. For the VLD-R16S, Lamp Test Mode is requested on a bank-by-bank basis for a selected module. The menu navigation tree is shown in Figure 5-19 for the VLD-R16S and Figure 5-20 for the VLD-C6S. The request to enter Lamp Test Mode is made via the CDU. If the Lamp Setup Grant status (VLD-C6S) or the Lamp Grant Bank status (VLD-R16S) is enabled, the request is granted and the Lamp Test Mode is entered and the user is able to control individual lamps via CDU input. If Lamp Test Mode is denied (grant status is false or no equation for grant status exists), the CDU displays the denial message to the user. When Lamp Test Mode is entered, the system sets the status of Lamp Normal Mode (VLD-C6S) or Lamp Bank (1,2) Normal (VLD-R16S) to false. The user may navigate to a specific lamp output via the CDU which displays the selected lamp output by status name with the current on / off state of the output. Lamp Test Mode is exited either by the user requesting test mode to be off or by the application setting the grant status to false. When Test Mode is exited, control of the lamp outputs returns to the application program. Lamp Test Mode (VLD-R16S) Display< Lamp Maintenance Arrow Key Up Down Go to Lamp Setup/Test (C6S) or Lamp Test (R16S) for the first VLD slot. Left Go to Vital Stop Status Menu. Right Go to Light Out Status Menu. Display< Arrow Key Up 5-28 Function Comment Go to LAMPS. The ‘first’ VLD slot is the lowest numbered slot containing a VLD module. Test VLD-R16S Slot # Function Comment Go to Lamp Maintenance. Down Go to Lamp Test Mode S# B1. Left Displays Test or Setup for previous slot. Right Displays Test or Setup for next slot. The ‘first’ VLD slot is the lowest numbered slot containing a VLD module. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Display< Lamp Test Mode S# B# Arrow Key Function Up Go to Test VLD-R16S Slot #. Down Error. Test Mode must be ON. Left Displays Lamp Test Mode S# B# for other bank. Right Displays Lamp Test Mode S# B# for other bank. Display< Display “Access Denied” Lamp Test Mode S# B# Mode = ON Arrow Key Up Comment Function Comment Go to Test VLD-R16S Slot #. Down Turn Lamps ON/OFF for selected module and bank. Left Displays Lamp Test Mode S# B# for other bank. Right Displays Lamp Test Mode S# B# for other bank. After pressing the Down Arrow Key, use the Left and Right Arrow Keys to select the desired lamp output. Lamp Test Mode (VLD-C6S) Display< Lamp Maintenance Arrow Key Up Go to Lamp Setup/Test (C6S) or Lamp Test (R16S) for the first VLD slot. Left Go to Vital Stop Status. Right Go to Light Out Status. Arrow Key The ‘first’ VLD slot is the lowest numbered slot containing a VLD module. Setup/Test Slot n Function Up Go to Lamp Maintenance. Down Go to Lamp Manual Setup. Left Go to previous VLD. Right Comment Go to LAMPS. Down Display< 100373-010 AR0 Function Comment Go to next VLD. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-29 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Display< Lamp Manual Setup Arrow Key Up Function Go to Setup/Test Slot n. Down Displays Lamp Drive Voltages. Left Go to Lamp Test Mode. Right Display< Go to Lamp Automated Setup. Lamp Test Mode S# B# Mode = ON Arrow Key Up Comment Function Comment Go to Test VLD-C6S Slot #. Down Turn Lamps ON/OFF for selected module. Left Go to Lamp Automated Setup. Right Go to Lamp Automated Setup. After pressing the Down Arrow Key, use the Left and Right Arrow Keys to select the desired lamp output. Lamp Setup (VLD-C6S) This menu provides the ability to setup the lamp drive voltage for the VLD-C6S Module installed in the lowest slot number. The status names on the bottom row of the display will vary depending on the status names assigned by the application engineer. Display< Arrow Key 5-30 Setup/Test Slot # VLD-C6S Function Up Go to Lamp Maintenance. Down Go to Lamp Manual Setup. Left Go to Lamp Setup or Lamp Test for the next VLD. Right Go to Lamp Setup or Lamp Test for the next VLD. Comment Press the ENTER Key to enable this menu. Once the menu is enabled, press the Up or Down Arrow Key to toggle the Lamp Manual Setup On or Off. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Manual Lamp Setup (VLD-C6S) Figure 5-24, Lamp Manual Setup Menu. The Manual Lamp Setup Mode allows the user to adjust the lamp voltages on a bank of three lamps residing on a VLD-C6S Module. While in this mode, the system will continue to operate with the current voltage output until the user selects a new one. When a new voltage is selected and stored the lamp output voltage is updated with the new value. The user accesses this mode by selecting Manual Lamp Setup Menu. Once the user has entered this mode, the CDU-1 will display the current output voltage, for the specific bank being setup. It should be noted that the bank's output voltages are measured at the ElectroLogIXS/EC5’s output, not at the lamp. When the user inputs the new output voltage the system uses a Vital Data Entry Algorithm to verify that there is a user present. After the system has confirmed the presence of the user, the software will store the new output value in the systems memory and then change the output voltage accordingly. Lamp Manual Setup (VLD-C6S) Enabling this menu provides the ability to manually setup the lamp drive voltage. With Lamp Manual Setup in the display, press the ENTER or Down Key Display< Arrow Key Up Function Comment Go to Setup/Test Slot n VLD-C6S Down Displays Lamp Drive Voltages. Left Go to Lamp Test Mode. Right 100373-010 AR0 Lamp Manual Setup Press the ENTER Key to change the Lamp Drive Voltage. Go to Lamp Automated Setup. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-31 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Automated Setup (VLD-C6S) Figure 5-25, Lamp Automated Setup Menu. The Automated Setup Mode allows the to system automatically calculate the actual output voltage based on a desired voltage at the lamp. The application grants permission to enter this mode by setting the Lamp Setup Grant status to True. The application may be written to allow the system to enter the Automated Setup Mode only when no trains are present. The user is able to select the Automated Setup Mode using the CDU-1. As soon as the user attempts to enter the Automated Setup Mode, the executable software verifies that it has permission to enter that mode based on Lamp Setup Grant status. If permission to enter the Automated Setup Mode is denied, a message is displayed on the CDU-1 informing the user that this mode can not be entered at the present time. This could be because of train position or the fact that an equation was never written to allow the Lamp Setup Grant status to go True. If permission to enter the Automated Setup Mode is granted, the executive software sets the Lamp Normal Mode status to False and the previously selected lamp voltage, for each of the lamp output driver statuses. The user selects which lamp output to perform the Automated Setup on. The CDU-1 then prompts the user for a new lamp voltage. When the user inputs the new desired lamp voltage at the lamp, the system has the user verify the change to the lamp voltage. Once verified, the system will commence with the automated setup procedure. The system will turn off all the lamps in the bank of the VLD-C6S that was selected for the setup for approximately 30 seconds. The system will illuminate each lamp in the bank for about 1 second with a 5 second off-time between each lamp. After the illuminating portion of the setup, the system calculates the voltage drop to the lamp and adjusts the lamp output voltage for the desired voltage to be present at the lamp. This takes another 30 seconds. The total setup time is approximately 90 seconds. If during the setup procedure the Lamp Setup Grant is set to False, i.e the clear aspect is dropped, the procedure will be cut short. If the procedure is cut short, the system will hold the signals in that bank dark for approximately 30 seconds before returning to normal operation. In addition, an entry is placed in the user configuration log stating that the lamp voltage was changed. The new voltage at the lamp is displayed on the CDU-1 and the executable software sets the Lamp Normal Mode status back to True. 5-32 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program The executable software continuously monitors the Lamp Setup Enable status, to determine if the permission has been overridden in the middle of the Automated Setup Mode. This will result in the executable software returning to the previous lamp output voltage and resuming normal lamp operation within 30 seconds. In the case of the Automatic Setup Mode being cut short the system will display a CDU-1 alarm message informing the user that the Automated Setup algorithm was cut short due to the application. Lamp Automated Setup (VLD-C6S) The Automated Setup menu allows the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 to automatically setup the lamp drive voltage for the VLD-C6S Modules. With Lamp Automated Setup in the display, press the ENTER or Down Key. The Lamp Automated Setup mode must be enabled by the Lamp Setup Grant Status. Display< Arrow Key Up Function Comment Go to Setup/Test Slot n VLD-C6S Down Displays Lamp Drive Voltages. Left Go to Lamp Manual Setup Right 100373-010 AR0 Lamp Automated Setup Press the ENTER Key to change the Lamp Drive Voltage. Go to Lamp Test Mode © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-33 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Timers WARNING For Vital Timers of 4 seconds or more, accuracy will be within +10%/0%. For Vital Timers of less than 4 seconds, accuracy will be within +0.5 second under worst case timing conditions. Timer Values entered through the CDU-1 or Web GUI are stored in a EEPROM on the Backplane. During normal ElectroLogIXS/EC5 operation, these values are used instead of the default timer values stored in Application EPROM on the CI Module. The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 will use the Application EPROM default timer values when an Application Selection occurs via the CDU-1 or Web GUI, or if timer values stored on the Backplane become corrupted. If the timer values stored on the Backplane become corrupted, the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 will attempt to re-write the Application EPROM default timer values to EEPROM on the Backplane. Figure 5-26, Timers Menu (VPM-2). Figure 5-27, Vital Timers Menu (VPM-3). 5-34 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program The Timers Menu (VPM-2) or the Vital Timers Menu (VPM-3) provides the ability to view vital timer statuses or enter vital timer values. There are a maximum of 127 vital timers that may be programmed by use of the CDU-1 or Web GUI. When entering vital timer values, the user will be prompted to confirm the value before it is saved to memory. The status names on the bottom row of the display will vary depending on the status names assigned by the application engineer. Note: If an attempt is made to enter a Timer Value that is outside the range defined in the Application EPROM, the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 will not allow the timer value to be changed. Display< TIMERS (VPM-2) or VITAL TIMERS (VPM-3) Arrow Key Up Function Comment N/A Down Go to View Timer Statuses. Left Displays another Functional Heading. Right Displays another Functional Heading. View Timer Statuses The View Timer Statuses Menu provides the ability to view Timer Statuses and Timer Values. The status names on the bottom row of the display will vary depending on the status names assigned by the application engineer. Display< Arrow Key Up 100373-010 AR0 View Timer Statuses Function Comment Go to TIMERS. Down Displays Timer Statuses. Left Go to Enter Timer Values. Right Go to Enter Timer Values. Pressing the Down Arrow Key provides the ability to view the Timer Statuses. Use the Left and Right Arrow Keys to select the Timer Statuses. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-35 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Enter Timer Values The Enter Timer Values Menu provides the ability to enter Timer Values. The status names on the bottom row of the display will vary depending on the status names assigned by the application engineer. Display< Arrow Key Up Down Enter Timer Values Function Comment Go to TIMERS. Displays Timer Values. Pressing the Down Arrow Key provides the ability to view Timer Values. Use the Left and Right Arrow Keys to select the Timer. Press the ENTER Key to edit the Timer Value. To edit a Timer Value, enter the new Timer Value, press the ENTER Key to accept the new setting, and verify the new setting is correct by entering the confirmation number displayed on the CDU. 5-36 Left Go to View Timer Statuses. Right Go to View Timer Statuses. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Non-Vital Timers Non-Vital Timer Values entered through the CDU-1 are stored in a EEPROM on the Backplane. During normal ElectroLogIXS/EC5 operation, these values are used instead of the default timer values stored in Application EPROM on the CI or UCI-3 Module. The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 will use the Backplane timer value unless the timer value is outside the range allowed by the selected application or if the backplane value becomes corrupted. If the timer values stored on the Backplane become corrupted or if the value is out of the range allowed by a newly loaded application, the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 will attempt to re-write the Application EPROM default timer values to EEPROM on the Backplane. Figure 5-28, Non-Vital Timers Menu. The Non-Vital Timers Menu provides the ability to view non-vital timer statuses or enter non-vital timer values. There are a maximum of 1023 non-vital timers that may be programmed by use of the CDU-1 or Web GUI. When entering non-vital timer values, the user will be prompted to confirm the value before it is saved to memory. The status names on the bottom row of the display will vary depending on the status names assigned by the application engineer. Note: If an attempt is made to enter a Timer Value that is outside the range defined in the Application EPROM, the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 will not allow the timer value to be changed. Display< NON-VITAL TIMERS Arrow Key Up 100373-010 AR0 Function Comment N/A Down Go to View Timer Statuses. Left Displays another Functional Heading. Right Displays another Functional Heading. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-37 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 View Non-Vital Timer Statuses The View Non-Vital Timer Statuses Menu provides the ability to view Timer Statuses and Timer Values. The status names on the bottom row of the display will vary depending on the status names assigned by the application engineer. Display< View Non-Vital Timer Statuses Arrow Key Up Function Comment Go to NON-VITAL TIMERS. Down Displays Timer Statuses. Left Go to Enter Timer Values. Right Go to Enter Timer Values. Pressing the Down Arrow Key provides the ability to view the Timer Statuses. Use the Left and Right Arrow Keys to select the Timer Statuses. Enter Non-Vital Timer Values The Enter Non-Vital Timer Values Menu provides the ability to enter Timer Values. The status names on the bottom row of the display will vary depending on the status names assigned by the application engineer. Display< Arrow Key Up Down Enter Non-Vital Timer Values Function Comment Go to NON-VITAL TIMERS. Displays Timer Values. Pressing the Down Arrow Key provides the ability to view Timer Values. Use the Left and Right Arrow Keys to select the Timer. Press the ENTER Key to edit the Timer Value. To edit a Timer Value, enter the new Timer Value, press the ENTER Key to accept the new setting, and verify the new setting is correct by entering the confirmation number displayed on the CDU. 5-38 Left Go to View Timer Statuses. Right Go to View Timer Statuses. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Vital Inputs For Slow Pick or Release Timers of 9 seconds or more, accuracy will be within +10%/-0%. WARNING For Slow Pick or Release Timers of less than 9 seconds, accuracy will be within +1 second under worst case timing conditions. Figure 5-29, Vital Inputs Menu. The Vital Inputs Menu allows the user to check the status of the Vital Inputs on the VTI-2S, VIO-44S, VIO-44R, VIO-86S, and IXC-20S Modules. A status of True indicates the input voltage is High. A status of False indicates the input voltage is Low. The status names on the bottom row of the display varies depending on the status names assigned by the application engineer. For the VIO-44R, VIO-86S, and IXC20S the user can set Slow Pick Time and Slow Release Times. The Slow Pick Time and Slow Release time can be set at a value from 0-30 seconds. For the time entered through the CDU to be valid it must also be between or equal to the Minimum and/or Maximum Slow Pick/Slow Release Time set in the Application Logic. If the Slow Pick/Slow Release minimum and maximum are set at the same value in the application, the time is not selectable through the CDU. Note that the Slow Pick/Slow release times are set to the application defined default values when an application is selected. Display< VITAL INPUTS Arrow Key Up Down Displays the Vital Input module and slot. Left Displays previous Functional Heading. Right 100373-010 AR0 Function Comment N/A Pressing the Down Arrow Key provides the ability to view the Vital Input modules and slots they are installed in. Use the Left and Right Arrow Keys to select the other Vital Input modules. Displays next Functional Heading. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-39 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Display< VITAL INPUT module and slot Arrow Key Up Function Comment Go to Vital Input. Down Displays the Vital Inputs Status. Pressing the Down Arrow Key provides the ability to view the status of the Vital Inputs of that module. Left Displays previous Vital Input module and slot. Use the Left and Right Arrow Keys to select the other Vital Input modules. Right Displays next Vital Input module and slot. Vital Input Statuses Display< VITAL INPUT Statuses Arrow Key Up Function Displays Vital Input module and slot. Down Displays the Vital Inputs Status for the module. Left Displays the Enter Slow Release menu. Right Comment Pressing the Down Arrow Key provides the ability to view the status of the Vital Inputs of that module. Displays the Enter Slow Pick menu. Enter Slow Pick Time Display< Enter Slow Pick Time Arrow Key Up Function Displays Vital Input Module and Slot. Down Displays Slow Pick Time. Left Displays Vital Input Statuses. Right Display< Displays Enter Slow Release Menu. Slow Pick Time Arrow Key Up 5-40 Comment Function Comment Displays Enter Slow Pick Time. Down N/A Left Displays the previous Vital Input Slow Pick Time. Right Displays the next Vital Input Slow Pick Time. Enter Edit the slow pick time. Select the new time from the keypad and then press ENTER to accept the new value. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Enter Slow Release Time Display< Enter Slow Release Time Arrow Key Up Function Displays Vital Input Module and Slot. Down Displays the Slow Release Time. Left Displays the Enter Slow Pick menu. Right Display< Displays Vital Input Statuses. Slow Release Time Arrow Key Up 100373-010 AR0 Comment Function Comment Displays Enter Slow Release Time. Down N/A Left Displays the previous Vital Input Slow Release Time. Right Displays the next Vital Input Slow Release Time. Enter Edit the Slow Release Time. Select the new time from the keypad and then press ENTER to accept the new value. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-41 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Code Select Inputs Figure 5-30, Track Code Select Inputs Menu. The Code Select Inputs Menu provides the ability to check the status of the code select input statuses for each configured VIO-1010S. A status of True indicates the input is active. A status of False indicates is not active. There are a total of 10 Code Select Input statuses for each configured slot. Display< CODE SELECT INPUTS Arrow Key Up Function Comment N/A Down Go to Slot n Code Selects. Left Displays another Functional Heading. Right Displays another Functional Heading. Go to Slot n Code Selects display. Slot Code Selects The Slot n Code Selects Menu is used to select a configured slot for code select input status viewing. Display< Arrow Key Up 5-42 Slot n Code Selects Function Comment Go to Code Selects Inputs. Down Displays the status of code select inputs for currently selected slot. Left Go to prior slot. Right Go to next slot. Pressing the Down Arrow Key provides the ability to view the Code Select statuses for the current slot. Use the Left and Right Arrow Keys to select the desired slot. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Code Select Inputs This menu displays the statuses of Code Select Inputs for the currently selected slot. Display< Slot n Code Selects XXXXXX = TRUE Arrow Key Up Function Comment Go to Slot n Code Selects. Down N/A Left View the status of the prior Code Select Input for the currently selected slot. Right View the status of the next Code Select Input for the currently selected slot. Use the Right and Left Arrow Keys to view the statuses of Code Select Inputs 1-10. Vital Outputs Figure 5-31, Vital Outputs Menu. The Vital Outputs Menu allows the user to check the status of the Vital Outputs on the VIO-44S, VIO-44R, and VIO-86S Modules. A status of True indicates the Vital Output voltage is High and a status of False indicates the Vital Output voltage is Low. For the VIO-44R Module the user can chose to switch the active Vital Output Bank to the redundant Vital Output Bank. When the user chooses to change the active bank, the Vital Outputs are switched from the current active bank to the redundant bank. Bank selection for the VIO-44R is not available if one or both of the Vital Output Banks are unhealthy. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-43 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Display< VITAL OUTPUTS Arrow Key Up Function Down Displays the Vital Outputs Status. Left Displays another Functional Heading. Right Displays another Functional Heading. Display< Function Displays the Vital Outputs Status. Left Displays previous Vital Output Module. and slot. Display< Comment Go to Vital Outputs. Down Right Pressing the Down Arrow Key provides the ability to view the status of the Vital Outputs. Use the Left and Right Arrow Keys to select the Vital Output. VITAL OUTPUT Module and Slot Arrow Key Up Comment N/A Displays next Vital Output Module. and slot. VITAL OUTPUT Statuses* Arrow Key Function Up Go to Vital Output Module and Slot. Down Go to Displays Vital Output Statuses for the selected module. Left Go to Switch Active Bank. Right Go to Switch Active Bank. Display< SWITCH ACTIVE BANK* Arrow Key Function Up Displays Vital Output Module and Slot. Down N/A Left Go to Vital Output Statuses. Right Go to Vital Output Statuses. Enter Confirmation page is displayed to verify the user wants to switch the active bank. Comment Comment If the user confirms (by pressing Enter) or declines (by pressing Cancel), the Active Bank Switchover menu is displayed. The only indication the user will get that the Active Bank Switchover has occurred is that the Vital Outputs on the Module will be turned off for 30 seconds. *These menus are only available for the VIO-44R. These selections are not shown if the module is not a VIO-44R or if for a health reason the VIO-44R cannot switch banks. In the other cases the display goes directly from the Vital Output Module, Slot, and Status Menu to the Vital Output Status Menu. 5-44 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Display VITAL OUTPUT STATUS Arrow Key Up Down Function Comment Displays the Vital Output Statuses. N/A Left Displays the next Vital Output Status. Right Displays the next Vital Output Status. Vital Inputs and Vital Outputs Quick Status Menu The Vital Inputs and Vital Outputs menus can be accessed through the Home Menu and pressing the Down arrow for the Quick Status menus. These menus give the statuses for each Vital Input and Vital Output in the system by slot. Display< VITAL OUTPUT STATUS Arrow Key Function Up Displays the previous function heading. Down Displays the next function heading. Left Displays the previous module status information. Right 100373-010 AR0 Comment Displays the next module status information. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-45 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Track Decoder Outputs Figure 5-33, Track Decoder Outputs Menu. The Track Decoder Outputs Menu provides the ability to check the status of the track decoder output statuses for each configured VIO-1010. A status of True indicates the output is active. A status of False indicates the output is not active. Display< TRACK DCODER OUTPUTS Arrow Key Up Function Comment N/A Down Go to Slot n Decoder Output. Left Displays another Functional Heading. Right Displays another Functional Heading. Go to Slot Selection Display. Slot Decoder Outputs The Slot n Decoder Out Menu is used to select a configured slot for viewing decoder output statuses. Display< Arrow Key Up 5-46 Slot n Decoder Out Function Comment Go to TRACK DCODER OUTPUTS. Down Displays the status of the track decoder outputs for currently selected slot. Left Go to prior slot. Right Go to next slot. Pressing the Down Arrow Key provides the ability to view the currently selected slot. Use the Left and Right Arrow Keys to select the desired slot. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Decoder Outputs This menu displays the statuses of the Decoder Outputs for the currently selected slot. Display< Slot n Decoder Out XXXXXX = TRUE Arrow Key Up Function Comment Go to Slot n Decoder Out. Down N/A Left View the status the prior Decoder Output for the currently selected slot. Right View the status the next Decoder Output for the currently selected slot. Use the Left and Right Arrow Keys to view the status of Decoder Outputs 1-10. Vital Configuration Vital Configuration Settings entered through the CDU-1 are stored in a EEPROM on the Backplane. During normal EC5 operation, these values are used instead of the default Vital Configuration Settings stored in Application EPROM on the CI Module. The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 will use the Application EPROM Vital Configuration Default Settings when an Application Selection occurs via the CDU-1 or if the settings stored on the Backplane become corrupted. If the Vital Configuration Settings stored on the Backplane become corrupted, the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 will attempt to re-write the Vital Configuration Settings to EEPROM on the Backplane. If the Application EPROM is replaced, the Vital Configuration Setting must be checked against those in the Application Circuit Plan. Figure 5-34, Vital Configuration Menu. The Vital Configuration Menu is used to view and edit vital configuration switch settings. The Vital Configuration Settings are used as vital switches in the application software for the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. They allow the user to vitally select an application path once the equipment is installed, without having to change the Application EPROM. For safety reasons, the system will check its non-volatile memory, on the system’s backplane, to ensure that the values stored there are usable. For example, if the system was new or never used, the system has no prior settings stored in it, the system would determine that its memory is empty and store the default settings from the Application EPROM. The default setting for the Vital Configuration Settings are defined by the application engineer. The application engineer can decide if the default state is True or False for each Vital Configuration Setting. There are a total of 32 vital configuration switches that can be configured for application specific operations. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-47 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 The status names on the bottom row of the display will vary depending on the status names assigned by the application engineer. Display< VITAL CONFIGURATION Arrow Key Up Function Comment N/A Down Go to View Vital Configuration. Left Displays another Functional Heading. Right Displays another Functional Heading. View Configuration The View Configuration Menu provides the ability to view the system's Vital Configuration Settings. Display< Arrow Key Up View Configuration Function Comment Go to VITAL CONFIGURATION. Down Displays the Vital Configuration Settings. Left Go to Edit Configuration. Right Go to Edit Configuration. Press the Right and Left Arrow Keys to view additional Vital Configuration Settings. Edit Configuration The Edit Configuration Menu provides the ability to edit the system's Vital Configuration Settings. Display< Arrow Key Up 5-48 Edit Configuration Function Comment Go to VITAL CONFIGURATION. Down Displays the Vital Configuration Setting. Left Go to View Vital Configuration. Right Go to View Vital Configuration. Press the ENTER Key to edit the Vital Configuration Setting. Press the Up or Down Arrow Keys to toggle the status, press the ENTER Key to accept the new setting, and verify the new setting is correct. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Vital Communication WARNING Railroad Configuration Management Procedures must ensure that the proper values are set for each vital remote parameter in the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 units. Incorrect settings may result in death or serious injury. WARNING When setting a vital remote link Local or Remote Network ID on an ElectroLogIXS/EC5, use only the value supplied on the application circuit plans. If this information is not available from the application circuit plans, do not put that vital remote link into service until this is corrected. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. (See Appendix B for more detailed information) Figure 5-35, Vital Communication Menu This menu provides the ability to read current vital settings and status values and, set the vital parameters to the application default values, and selectively modify vital parameters associated with vital remote communication. The specific parameters shown are dependent upon the protocol selection (RP2000 vs. RP2009). 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-49 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Display< VITAL COMM Arrow Key Up Function Comment N/A Down Go to Ports. Left Displays another Functional Heading. Right Displays another Functional Heading. Ports Ports is the menu beneath which are the menus for reading and setting the parameters. The menu adjacent to Ports allows the defaulting of the vital parameters, with the exception of Network IDs associated with vital communications. Display< Ports Arrow Key Up Function Comment Go To VITAL COMM. Down Go to Vital Port. Left Go to Default Vital Remote Parameters. Right Go to Default Vital Remote Parameters. Defaults Vital Parameters only Vital Ports The Vital Ports allows the selection of the port of interest from the ports defined for vital communication in the loaded application. Display< Vital Ports Arrow Key Up Function Comment Go to ports. Down Go to Vital Remote. Left Go to Previous Port. Only if more than one port is defined. Go to Next Port. Only if more than one port is defined. Right Vital Remote Vital Remote allows the selection of a specific remote that is associated with the selected vital communication port. The Vital Remote menu displays the remote number as well as the Network ID value for that remote. 5-50 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Display< Vital Remote Arrow Key Up Function Comment Go to Vital Port. Down Go to View Statuses. Left Go to Previous Remote. Only if more than one remote is defined. Go to Next Remote. Only if more than one remote is defined. Right The items under the Vital Remote menu are detailed in Figure 5-36. Vital Communication, Vital Remote The menu provides the ability to view protocol statuses, input values, output values, receive and transmission statistics and the ability to edit the configuration for each vital remote. Figure 5-36, Vital Remote N Display< Arrow Key Up Vital Remote Function Comment Go to Vital Port. Down Go to View Statuses. Left Go to Previous Remote. Only if more than one remote is defined. Go to Next Remote. Only if more than one remote is defined. Right 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-51 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 View Statuses The menu allows the values of the protocol statuses (statuses that are not remote inputs or outputs) to be viewed. Only statuses defined in the application or by the protocol version selected are displayed. Display< View Statuses Arrow Key Up Function Go to Vital Remote. Down Go to Link Status. Left Go to Edit Remote Config. Right Comment Moving left or right from Link Status shows the other protocol statuses per the diagram. Go to View inputs. View Inputs The menu allows the values of the remote input statuses to be viewed. Display< View Inputs Arrow Key Up Function Comment Go to Vital Remote. Down Go to Remote input 1. Left Go to View Statuses. Right Go to View Outputs. Moving left or right from the first remote input status shows the other input statuses. View Outputs The menu allows the values of the remote output statuses to be viewed. Display< Arrow Key Up Function Comment Go to Vital Remote. Down Go to Remote output 1. Left Go to View Inputs. Right 5-52 View Outputs Moving left or right from the first remote output status shows the other output statuses. Go to View Rx Statistics. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program View Receive (RX) Statistics The menu displays statistics associated with received messages. The number of received Good Messages, Bad Messages, Unused Messages, the number of times the link has gone down and the number of Acknowledge timeouts (RP2009) are shown. The counts depicted are the number of items since the last system reset or parameter value roll over. Display< View Rx Statistics Arrow Key Up Function Go to Vital Remote. Down Go to Good Msgs. Left Go to View Outputs. Right Comment Moving left or right from Good Msgs shows the other statistics Go to View Tx statistics. View Transmit (TX) Statistics The menu displays statistics associated with transmitted messages. The number of Sent messages, Unused Messages, and Update Period timeouts (RP2009) are shown. The counts depicted are the number of items since the last system reset or parameter value roll over. Display< View Tx Statistics Arrow Key Up Function Go to Vital Remote. Down Go to Sent Msgs. Left Go to View Rx statistics. Right Comment Moving left or right from Sent Msgs shows the other statistics Go to Selected HMI. Selected Heartbeat Message Interval (HMI) This menu displays the currently selected HMI (HMI 0 through HMI 3) and the value of the selected HMI in milliseconds. Display< Selected HMI Arrow Key Up Comment Go to Vital Remote. Down N/A Left Go to Edit Remote Config. Right 100373-010 AR0 Function Go to View Tx statistics. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-53 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Vital Communication, Edit Remote Configuration The menu and submenus provide the ability to view and update the various vital parameters associated with the selected remote. Only those parameters associated with the selected protocol will be shown in the menu. WARNING Railroad Configuration Management Procedures must ensure that the proper values are set for each vital remote parameter in the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 units. Incorrect settings may result in death or serious injury. WARNING When setting a vital remote link Local or Remote Network ID on an ElectroLogIXS/EC5, use only the value supplied on the application circuit plans. If this information is not available from the application circuit plans, do not put that vital remote link into service until this is corrected. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. (See Appendix B for more detailed information) Figure 5-37, Edit Remote Config 5-54 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Display< Edit Remote Config Arrow Key Up Function Comment Go to Vital Remote. Down Go to Remote Enabled / Disabled. Left Go to Selected HMI. Right Go to View Statuses. The current value (enabled or disabled) is shown. Remote Enable / Disable The menu allows the remote to be enabled or disabled without changing any of the other parameters. A disabled remote will not transmit nor respond to any communication traffic. Display< Remote * Enable / Disable Arrow Key Up Function Go to Edit Remote Config. Down N/A Left Go to Ack Timeout. Right Comment Press the ENTER key to change the state of the remote. Use the up and down arrows to make the selection. Press the ENTER key to confirm the selected value. Press CANCEL to retain the current value. Go to Remote Protocol. Remote Protocol The remote protocol menu allows selection of the protocol version to use. If the protocol version is fixed by the application program, the value cannot be changed via the CDU-1. Display< Remote Protocol * Arrow Key Up Comment Go to Edit Remote Config. Down N/A Left Go to Remote Enabled / Disabled. Right 100373-010 AR0 Function Press the ENTER key to change the protocol value. Use the up and down arrows to make the selection. Press the ENTER key to confirm the selected value. Press CANCEL to retain the current value. Go to Local Network ID. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-55 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Local Network ID The Local Network ID parameter is the vital identification of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 to the associated remote device. This value must be confirmed on the circuit plan for the specific ElectroLogIXS/EC5 unit. Display< Local Network ID * Arrow Key Up Function Go to Edit Remote Config. Down N/A Left Go to Remote Protocol. Right Comment Press the ENTER key to change the Local Network ID value. Use the number keys to enter the correct value. Press the ENTER key to confirm the selected value. Press CANCEL to retain the current value. Go to Remote Network ID. Remote Network ID The Remote Network ID parameter is the vital identification of the remote unit to the associated ElectroLogIXS/EC5. This value must be confirmed on the circuit plan for the specific remote device attached to the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 unit. Display< Remote Network ID * Arrow Key Up Comment Go to Edit Remote Config. Down N/A Left Go to Local Network ID. Right 5-56 Function Press the ENTER key to change the Remote Network ID value. Use the number keys to enter the correct value. Press the ENTER key to confirm the selected value. Press CANCEL to retain the current value. Go to Max Send Time Diff. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Max Send Time Difference The Max Send Time Diff parameter sets the allowed difference between two successive valid messages from a remote unit. Display< Max Send Time Diff * Arrow Key Up Function Comment Go to Edit Remote Config. Down N/A Press the ENTER key to change the Max Send Time Diff value. Use the number keys to enter the correct value. Press the ENTER key to confirm the selected value. Press CANCEL to retain the current value. Left Go to Remote Network ID. Right Go to Max Recv Time Diff. Max Recv Time Difference The Max Recv Time Diff parameter sets the allowed difference between a message sent from the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 and a response from the remote unit. Display< Max Recv Time Diff * Arrow Key Up Comment Go to Edit Remote Config. Down N/A Left Go to Max Send Time Diff. Right 100373-010 AR0 Function Press the ENTER key to change the Max Recv Time Diff value. Use the number keys to enter the correct value. Press the ENTER key to confirm the selected value. Press CANCEL to retain the current value. Go to HMI Timers. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-57 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 HMI Timers When RP2009 is the selected protocol, up to four Heartbeat Message Interval Timers may be used by the application. These timers are used to balance network loading and the timeliness of determining link health. Display< HMI Timers Arrow Key Up Function Go to Edit Remote Config. Down HMI 0 Left Go to Recv Send Time Diff. Right Comment Moving left or right from HMI0 displays the value of the other defined HMI timers. For each HMI timer, Press the ENTER key to change the timer value using the number keys. Press Enter to confirm the value or CANCEL to retain the current value. Go to Update Period. Update Period The Update Period parameter sets the rate at which messages are transmitted (RP2000) or the rate messages are transmitted while waiting for an acknowledgement (RP2009). Display< Update Period * Arrow Key Up 5-58 Function Comment Go to Edit Remote Config. Down N/A Left Go to HMI Timers. Right Go to Ack Timeout. Press the ENTER key to change the Update Period value using the number keys. Press Enter to confirm the value or CANCEL to retain the current value. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Ack Timeout The Ack Timeout parameter sets the amount of time the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 waits for a remote acknowledgement after a message has been sent using RP2009. Display< Update Period * Arrow Key Up Comment Go to Edit Remote Config. Down N/A Left Go to Update Period. Right 100373-010 AR0 Function Press the ENTER key to change the Ack Timeout value using the number keys. Press Enter to confirm the value or CANCEL to retain the current value. Remote Enabled / Disabled. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-59 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Office Communication Figure 5-38, Office Communication Menu. The Office Comm Menu allows access to menus for viewing Office Controls, indications, and Codeline Statuses. Display< Office COMM Arrow Key Up 5-60 Function Comment N/A Down Go to View Controls. Left Displays another Functional Heading. Right Displays another Functional Heading. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program View Controls The View Controls Menu provides the ability to view Office Control Statuses. The status names on the bottom row of the display will vary depending on the status names assigned by the application engineer. Display< View Controls Arrow Key Up Function Go to Office Comm. Down Displays the Office Control Status. Left Go to View Codeline Status. Right Comment Pressing the Down Arrow Key provides the ability to view the Office Control Status. Use the Left and Right Arrow Keys to select the desired Office Control Status. Go to View Indications. View Indications The View Indications Menu provides the ability to view Office Indication Statuses. The status names on the bottom row of the display will vary depending on the status names assigned by the application engineer. Display< View Indications Arrow Key Up Function Go to Office Comm. Down Displays the Office Indication Status. Left Go to View Controls. Right Comment Pressing the Down Arrow Key provides the ability to view the Office Indication Status. Use the Left and Right Arrow Keys to select the desired Office Indication Status. Go to View Codeline Status. View Codeline Status The View Codeline Status Menu provides the ability to view Codefail and Linkfail Statuses. The status name on the bottom row of the display will vary depending on the status name assigned by the application engineer. Display< Arrow Key Up Function Comment Go to Office Comm. Down Displays the LCP Health Status. Left Go to View Indications. Right 100373-010 AR0 View LCP Health Pressing the Down Arrow Key provides the ability to view the Codeline Statuses. Go to View Controls. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-61 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Local Control Panel Local Control Panel View LCP Health View LCP Health LCPHealth = TRUE View Controls View Indicators View Indicators LCPO-1 = TRUE View Controls LCP-1 = TRUE 373-0518 Figure 5-39, Local Control Panel Menu The LCP Menu allows access to menus for LCP controls, indications and LCP Health Status. . Display LOCAL CONTROL PANEL Arrow Key Up Function Comment N/A Down Go to View Controls. Left Right Displays another Functional Heading. Displays another Functional Heading. View Controls The View Controls Menu provides the ability to view Local Control Panel Control Statuses. The status names on the bottom row of the display will vary depending on the status names assigned by the application engineer. Display Arrow Key Up 5-62 View Controls Function Comment Go to Local Control Panel. Down Displays the LCP Control Status. Left Right Displays another Functional Heading. Displays another Functional Heading. Pressing the Down Arrow Key allows © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program View Indications The View Indications Menu provides the ability to view Local Control Panel Indication Statuses. The status names on the bottom row of the display will vary depending on the status names assigned by the application engineer. Display View Indications Arrow Key Up Function Comment Go to Local Control Panel. Down Displays the LCP Indication Status. Left Right Displays another Functional Heading. Displays another Functional Heading. Pressing the Down Arrow Key allows View LCP Health The View LCP Health Menu provides the ability to view the Local Control Panel Health Status. The status name on the bottom row of the display will vary depending on the status name assigned by the application engineer. Display View LCP Health Arrow Key Up 100373-010 AR0 Function Comment Go to Local Control Panel. Down Displays the LCP Health Status. Left Right N/A N/A Pressing the Down Arrow Key allows © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-63 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Non-Vital I/O Figure 5-40, Non-Vital I/O Menu. The Non-Vital I/O Menu provides the ability to check the status of the non-vital inputs and outputs. Each non-vital I/O has the capability to being used as an input and an output. With EC5, the first non-vital I/O is generally sed for POR (Power Off Relay) indication, if present. Remaining non-vital I/Os are used for approach lighting detection. A status of True indicates the I/O is active. A status of False indicates the I/O is inactive. Note: There are four non-Vital I/O statuses for each VLD-C6S Module installed in the system. Display< NON-VITAL I/O Arrow Key Up 5-64 Function Comment N/A Down Displays the Non-Vital Inputs Status. Left Displays another Functional Heading. Right Displays another Functional Heading. Pressing the Down Arrow Key provides the ability to view the status of the Non-Vital I/O. Use the Left and Right Arrow Keys to select the Non-Vital I/O. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Battery Alarm Figure 5-41, Battery Alarms Menu. The Battery Alarm Menu provides the ability to view or set the High and Low Battery Alarm Limits. The High and Low Battery Alarm Limits define the acceptable voltage range of the system battery. If the battery voltage exceeds the High Battery Alarm Limit, the system will issue a High Battery Alarm. If the battery voltage drops below the Low Battery Alarm Limit, the system will issue a Low Battery Alarm. High and Low Battery Alarms are displayed on the CDU-1. Display< BATTERY ALARMS Arrow Key Up Function Comment N/A Down Go to High Battery Alarm. Left Displays another Functional Heading. Right Displays another Functional Heading. Note: If a Ground Fault Detector module is installed in the system, a High Battery Alarm limit will be issued when the system battery voltage exceeds the lower of the High Battery Alarm Limits set via the Battery Alarm or Ground Fault Detector menus. Similarly, a Low Battery Alarm limit will be issued when the system battery voltage falls below the higher of the Low Battery Alarm limits set via the Battery Alarm or Ground Fault Detector menus. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-65 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 High Battery Alarms The High Battery Alarms Menu provides the ability to view or set the High Battery Alarm Limit. The default value for the High Battery Alarm is 16.5 VDC and may be set in 0.1 VDC increments. Display< High Battery Alarm Arrow Key Up Function Comment Go to BATTERY ALARMS. Down N/A Press the Enter Button to change the High Battery Alarm value. After the new value has been entered, press the ENTER Key and verify the new High Battery Alarm Limit is correct. Left Go to Low Battery Alarm. Right Go to Low Battery Alarm. Low Battery Alarms The Low Battery Alarms Menu provides the ability to view or set the Low Battery Alarm Limit. The default value for the Low Battery Alarm is 8.0 VDC and may be set in 0.1 VDC increments. Display< Low Battery Alarm Arrow Key Up 5-66 Function Comment Go to BATTERY ALARMS. Down N/A Left Go to High Battery Alarm. Right Go to High Battery Alarm. Press the Enter Button to change the Low Battery Alarm Limit. After the new value has been entered, press the ENTER Key and verify the new Low Battery Alarm Limit is correct. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Ground Fault Detect GROUND FAULT DETECT B1: Battery 1 Note: B2 and B3 will show "Not Connected" if external batteries are not supplied to the GFD-1 front panel connector. B2: Battery 2 * Not Connected ENTER B3: Battery 3 * Not Connected * Battery 1 Name > Grnd Fault Threshold Battery 1 B1: No Fault OR ENTER B1+: Ground Fault Press ENTER to Clear OR B1+: Ground Fault Press ENTER to Clear Time = 5 sec* ENTER B1 Voltage = 13.4 V New Voltage > Ground Fault Time R = 10 K W (1.34mA) Cal. Volts = 13.4V* ENTER R = 10 K W (1.34mA) to change . Low Battery Alarm Voltage = 8.0V* ENTER Low Alarm = 8.0 V New Voltage > . Fault Time = 5 sec New Time > High Battery Alarm Voltage = 16.5V* ENTER High Alarm = 16.5 V New Voltage > . 373-0175 Ground fault detect menu allows access to menus for viewing/clearing batteries B1, B2, and B3 ground fault statuses as well as setup information of battery name, Ground Fault Threshold, Ground Fault Time, Battery Calibration, and High/Low Battery alarm settings. Display< Ground Fault Detect Arrow Key Up Function N/A Down Go to B1: Battery 1. Left Go to BATTERY ALARM. Right Comment Battery 1 is the default name for B1. B1 is always assigned to the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 chassis battery. The user can assign the battery name. Go to SYSTEM CONFIGURATION. Note: If a Ground Fault Detector module is installed in the system, a High Battery Alarm limit will be issued when the system battery voltage exceeds the lower of the High Battery Alarm Limits set via the Battery Alarm or Ground Fault Detector menus. Similarly, a Low Battery Alarm limit will be issued when the system battery voltage falls below the higher of the Low Battery Alarm limits set via the Battery Alarm or Ground Fault Detector menus. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-67 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 The B1: Battery 1 menu allows access to menus for viewing/clearing battery B1's ground fault status as well as setup information of battery name, Ground Fault Threshold, Ground Fault Time, Battery Calibration, and High/Low Battery alarm settings specific to battery B1. Display< B1: Battery 1 * Arrow Key Up Function Down Go to B1 Fault Status. Left Go to B3: Battery 3. Right Go to B2: Battery 2. ENTER Comment Go to GROUND FAULT DETECT. Go to battery name input screen for B1. The fault status screen will show either “B1: No Fault” or “B1x: Ground Fault Press ENTER to Clear where x is + or - (the battery pole on which the fault was detected) The user can enter a unique name for battery 1 if desired via the CDU keys. Once the name has been selected, press the ENTER key to save the name and return to the B1: (Name) menu. The B1 Fault status menu allows viewing and/or clearing of battery B1's ground fault status. Display< B1: No Fault or B1x: Ground Fault (x = + or -) Arrow Key Up Function Go to B1: Battery 1. Down N/A Left Go to B1 High Battery Alarm. Right Comment Press the ENTER key from the “B1x: Ground Fault” menu to clear the Ground Fault indication. Go to Battery 1 (or user defined name for B1) Voltage Calibration menu. The Battery 1 Voltage Calibration menu is used to set the nominal voltage of battery 1 (the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 chassis battery). The nominal, or calibrated, battery voltage is used to estimate an equivalent leakage current value when setting the Ground Fault Detection threshold. Display< Grnd Fault Threshold Arrow Key Up Comment Go to B1: Battery 1. Down N/A Left Go to B1 Fault Status. Right 5-68 Function Press the ENTER key to set the calibrated (nominal) voltage for battery B1 (ElectroLogIXS/EC5 chassis battery). Go to Grnd Fault Threshold. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program The Grnd Fault Threshold menu is used to set the threshold for declaring a ground fault. The user can scroll through threshold values of 2 KΩ to 20 KΩ of leakage resistance in 2 KΩ steps. An equivalent leakage current in milliamps associated with each of leakage resistance values is presented to aid in the proper threshold selection. The leakage current estimate is the calibrated battery voltage divided by the leakage resistance value. Display< Grnd Fault Threshold Arrow Key Up Function Go to B1: Battery 1. Down N/A Left Go to B1: Battery 1 Voltage Calibration menu. Right Comment Press the ENTER key from the “ Grnd Fault Threshold” menu to scroll through available thresholds. Press the ENTER key while the desired threshold is displayed to set that threshold, or CANCEL to return. Go to Ground Fault Time menu. The Ground Fault Time menu is used to set the time duration in which a ground fault must be present prior to declaring the ground fault. The user can scroll through Ground Fault Time values of 5 seconds to 30 seconds in 1-second increments. Display< Ground Fault Time Arrow Key Up Function Down N/A Left Go to Grnd Fault Threshold. Right Comment Go to B1: Battery 1. Press the ENTER key from the “ Ground Fault Time” menu to scroll through available time selections. Press the ENTER key while the desired time is displayed to set that time, or CANCEL to return. Go to Low Battery Alarm. The Low Battery Alarm submenu of B1: Battery 1 allows the user to set a low battery threshold for battery 1 (the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 chassis battery). Note that if a VTI module(s) is in the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 chassis along with a GFD module, two battery alarm menus will be available: the top level battery alarm menus for batteries B1, B2, and B3 under the Ground Fault Detect top level menu. The VTI module, if installed, monitors the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 chassis battery, which is equivalent to GFD battery B1. Note: If a Ground Fault Detector module is installed in the system, a High Battery Alarm limit will be issued when the system battery voltage exceeds the lower of the High Battery Alarm Limits set via the Battery Alarm or Ground Fault Detector menus. Similarly, a Low Battery Alarm limit will be issued when the system battery voltage falls below the higher of the Low Battery Alarm limits set via the Battery Alarm or Ground Fault Detector menus. Display< Low Battery Alarm Arrow Key Up 100373-010 AR0 Function Comment Go to B1: Battery 1. Down N/A Left Go to Ground Fault Time. Right Go to High Battery Alarm. Press the ENTER key from the “Low Battery Alarm” menu to modify the alarm threshold. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-69 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 The High Battery Alarm submenu of B1: Battery 1 allows the user to set a high battery threshold for battery 1 (the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 chassis battery). The same note as on Low Battery Alarm applies here, i.e., if both a VTI-2S and GFD-1 are installed , both will be monitoring the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 chassis battery. Display< High Battery Alarm Arrow Key Up Function Go to B1: Battery 1. Down N/A Left Go to Low Battery Alarm. Right Comment Press the ENTER key from the “High Battery Alarm” menu to modify the alarm threshold. Go to B1 Fault Status. Local User Confirmation Changes from the default setup parameters, within the limits allowed by the application program, for the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 unit must be made using the CDU or Web GUI. Local User Confirmation is used by the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 to ensure that changes to the unit’s parameters are made locally with the CDU. Figure 5-43, Local User Confirmation Menu 5-70 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program System Configuration Figure 5-44, System Configuration Menu. The System Configuration Menu is used to set the time and date, to view and print recorder information, and to setup office and diagnostic port communications. The first line of the display indicates the menu title and the second line of the display indicates the system status. Display< SYSTEM CONFIGURATION System Status Arrow Key Up 100373-010 AR0 Function Comment N/A Down Go to Alarms. Left Displays another Functional Heading. Right Displays another Functional Heading. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-71 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Alarms After hitting Enter the alarm is erased and the display returns to the alarm-scroll window This menu provides access to the System Alarms Menu. Display< Alarms Arrow Key Up Function Comment Go to SYSTEM CONFIGURATION. Down Press the Down Button to view System Alarms. Left Go to Recorder Battery. Right Go to Log Management. System Alarms The System Alarms Menu provides the ability to view and clear system alarms. Display< Alarm n (of n) alarm message Arrow Key Up 5-72 Function Comment Go to Alarms. Down N/A Left Display additional System Alarms. Right Display additional System Alarms. Press the ENTER Key to erase the system alarm displayed on the CDU-1. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Log Management This menu allows access to the Error Log, and Data Log Menus. Display< Log Management Arrow Key Up Function Go to SYSTEM CONFIGURATION. Down Go to Error Log. Left Go to Alarms. Right Comment Go to Date/Time. Error Log This menu provides the ability to display, erase or print the Error Logs recorded by the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-73 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Display< Error Log Arrow Key Up Function Go to Log Management. Down Go to View Error Logs. Left Go to Data Log. Right Comment Go to Train Record Log. View Error Log The menu provides the ability to display the Error Logs recorded by the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. Display< View Error Logs Logs = nn Arrow Key Function Up Go to Error Log. Down View Error Logs. Left Go to Print Error Log. Right Go to Erase Error Log. Comment While viewing Error Logs, press RIGHT to view the next oldest entry, LEFT to view the next newest entry, or down to view all of the text of the current entry. When viewing the full text of the entry, the text will automatically scroll. To stop the automatic scroll and manually scroll, press either LEFT or RIGHT. Erase Error Log The menu provides the ability to erase the Error Logs recorded by the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. Display< Erase Error Logs Logs = nn Arrow Key Up 5-74 Function Comment Go to Error Log. Down N/A Left Go to View Error Logs. Right Go to Print Error Log. Press the ENTER key to erase the Error Logs. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Print Error Log The menu provides the ability to print the Error Logs recorded by the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. Display< Print Error Log Arrow Key Up Function Comment Go to Error Log. Down N/A Press the ENTER key to print the Error Logs. Left Go to Erase Error Logs. Right Go to View Error Logs. Data Logs This menu provides the ability to display or erase the Data Logs recorded by the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. Display< Data Log= nnn Arrow Key Up Function Comment Go to LOG MANAGEMENT. Down N/A Press the ENTER Key to erase the Data Logs. Left Go to Print Error Logs. Right Go to Print Data Logs. Print Data Logs This menu provides the ability to print the Data Logs recorded by the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. Display< Print Data Logs Arrow Key Up 100373-010 AR0 Function Comment Go to LOG MANAGEMENT. Down N/A Left Go to Data Logs. Right Go to Error Logs. Press the ENTER Key to print the Data Logs recorded by the EC5. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-75 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Date/Time Figure 5-48, Date/Time Configuration Menu The Date/Time Menu allows access to menus for display and modification date and time options. Display Arrow Key Up Down Left Right 5-76 Date/Time Function Comment Go to System Configuration. Go to Date/Time * Time= HH:MM:SS Go to Log Management. Go to Diagnostic Port. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Time The Time Menu provides the ability to display and set the current time. Display Date/Time * Time= HH:MM:SS Arrow Key Up Down Function Comment Go to Date/Time. N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the Time. Once the Time has been set, press the ENTER key. Left Go to Date/Time * Sync= Code Line. Right Go to Date/Time * Date= HH:MM:SS Date The Date Menu provides the ability to display and set the current date. Display Date/Time * Date= HH:MM:SS Arrow Key Up Down 100373-010 AR0 Function Comment Go to Date/Time. N/A Left Go to Date/Time * Time= HH:MM:SS Right Go to Date/Time * Time Zone= 6 Press the ENTER Key to set the Date. Once the Date has been set, press the ENTER key. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-77 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Time Zone The Time Zone Menu provides the ability to display and set the local time zone reference used for adjusting incoming time references contained in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) based ATCS time messages. Time zone 5 represents Eastern Standard Time (EST) and 8 represents Pacific Standard Time (PST) Display Date/Time * Time Zone= 6 Arrow Key Up Down Left Right Function Comment Go to Date/Time. N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the Time Zone. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the Time Zone. Once the Time Zone has been set, press the ENTER key. Go to Date/Time * Date= HH:MM:SS Go to Date/Time * Config Daylit Saving. Config Daylit Saving The Config Daylit Saving Menu provides the ability to display and set parameters associated with Daylight Savings Time (DST). DST is used for adjusting incoming time references contained in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) based ATCS time messages. Display Arrow Key Up Function Comment Go to Date/Time. Down Go to Config DST * DST = Enabled Left Go to Date/Time * Time Zone= 6 Right 5-78 Date/Time * Config Daylit Saving Go to Date/Time * Request Time Update. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program DST The DST Menu provides the ability to display and set whether Daylight Savings Time is locally enabled. Display Config DST * DST = Enabled Arrow Key Up Down Function Comment Go to Date/Time. N/A Press the ENTER Key to set DST. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select DST. Once DST has been set, press the ENTER key. Left Go to Config DST * DST End= mo:MM wk:W Right Go to Config DST * DST Strt= mo:MM wk:W DST Strt The DST Strt Menu provides the ability to display and set the week DST starts. For years prior to 2007, this is the first week of April. For 2007 and later, this is the second week of March. Any week (first (1), second (2), third (3), fourth (4), and last (5)) of any month can be selected for the start of DST. Display Config DST * DST Strt= mo:MM wk:W Arrow Key Up Down Left Right 100373-010 AR0 Function Comment Go to Date/Time. N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the DST start week. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the DST start week. Once the DST start week has been set, press the ENTER key. Go to Config DST * DST = Enabled Go to Config DST * DST End= mo:MM wk:W © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-79 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 DST End The DST End Menu provides the ability to display and set the week DST ends. For years prior to 2007, this is the last week of October. For 2007 and later, this is the first week of November. Any week (first (1), second (2), third (3), fourth (4), and last (5)) of any month can be selected for the end of DST. Display Config DST * DST End= mo:MM wk:W Arrow Key Up Down Left Right Function Comment Go to Date/Time. N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the DST end week. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the DST end week. Once the DST end week has been set, press the ENTER key. Go to Config DST * DST Strt= mo:MM wk:W Go to Config DST * DST = Enabled Request Time Update The Request Time Update Menu provides the ability to transmit a time update request message over an ATCS office port. Display Date/Time * Request Time Update Arrow Key Up Down Left Right 5-80 Function Comment Go to Date/Time. N/A Press the ENTER Key to transmit an ATCS request time update message. Press ENTER key a second time to confirm the transmission or the CANCEL key to abort. Go to Date/Time * Config Daylit Saving. Go to Date/Time * Sync= Code Line. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Sync This menu provides the ability to display the current external time reference synchronization option. When this option is not set to none, ElectroLogIXS/EC5 will automatically update its local time whenever the time reference received on the selected sync source differs from ElectroLogIXS/EC5 local time by 2 or more seconds. Available sync sources include EMP, SNTP, Code Line, Vital Remote, and HAWK. The EMP option uses time update messages received from the EMP time source, SNTP receives messages from a SNTP time server. The Code Line option uses time update messages received from the Office Port for the external time reference and requires the selection of an Office Protocol that supports this feature (e.g., GENISYS® or ATCS). The Vital Remote option receives its external reference through time update messages received over its vital communication interface. The HAWK option receives its external reference through message time stamps received from the HAWK recorder. Display Date/Time * Sync= Code Line Arrow Key Up Down Left Right 100373-010 AR0 Function Comment Go to Date/Time. N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the Sync Source. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the Sync Source. Once the Sync Source has been set, press the ENTER key. Go to Date/Time * Request Time Update. Go to Date/Time * Time= HH:MM:SS © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-81 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Diagnostic Port Figure 5-49, Diagnostic Port Menu. Connector The Connector Menu provides the ability to display and set the diagnostic terminal’s physical port: VPM or CIO-1/CIO-1A/CIO-CLA. The Diagnostic Port Menu allows access to menus for setting the Baud Rate, Parity, Data Bits, and Stop Bits for the Diagnostic Port and for displaying the Flow Control of the Diagnostic Port. Display< Connector Arrow Key Up Function Down Go to Connector. Left Go to Flow. Right Comment Go to DIAGNOSTIC PORT. Press the ENTER Key to set the Connector. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the Connector. Once the Connector has been set, press the ENTER key. Go to Baud Rate. Baud Rate This menu provides the ability to set the Baud Rate of the Diagnostic Port. Display< Diagnostic Port * Baud Rate: nnnn Arrow Key Up Comment Go to Diagnostic Port. Down N/A Left Go to Connector. Right 5-82 Function Press the ENTER Key to set the Diagnostic Port Baud Rate setting. Once the Baud Rate has been set, press the ENTER Key. Go to Parity. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Parity This menu provides the ability to display and set the Parity of the Diagnostic Port. Parity may be set to Even (even parity), Odd (odd parity), or None (no parity). Display< Diagnostic Port * Parity = None Arrow Key Up Function Go to Diagnostic Port. Down N/A Left Go to Baud Rate. Right Comment Press the ENTER Key to set the Parity of the Diagnostic Port. The Parity may be set to None, Even, or Odd. Once the Parity has been set press the ENTER Key. Go to Data Bits. Data Bits This menu provides the ability to display and set the Data Bits of the Diagnostic Port. The number of Data Bits may set to 5, 6, 7, or 8. Display< Diagnostic Port * Data Bits = n Arrow Key Up Comment Go to Diagnostic Port. Down N/A Left Go to Parity. Right 100373-010 AR0 Function Press the ENTER Key to set the Data Bits of the EC5. The Data Bits may be set to the following values 8, 7, 6, 5. Once the Data Bits have been set press the ENTER Key. Go to Stop Bits. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-83 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Stop Bits This menu provides the ability to display and set the number of Stop Bits of the Diagnostic Port. The number of Stop Bits may set to 1, 1.5, or 2. Display< Diagnostic Port * Stop Bits: n Arrow Key Up Function Go to Diagnostic Port. Down N/A Left Go to Data Bits. Right Comment Press the ENTER Key to set the number of Stop Bits. The Stop Bits may be set to the following values 1, 1.5, or 2. Once the number of Stop Bits has been set press the ENTER Key. Go to Flow. Flow This menu provides the ability to display the Flow Control (handshaking protocol) used by the Diagnostic Port. Display< Diagnostic Port Flow Control = None Arrow Key Up Comment Go to Diagnostic Port. Down N/A Left Go to Stop Bits. Right 5-84 Function Go to Baud Rate. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Ethernet Config The Ethernet Configuration menu provides the ability to set the IP parameters for each of the two Ethernet ports along with the Web GUI (HTTP) TCP Port number, Trusted Source, and Telnet settings. 373-0656 Figure 5-50, Ethernet Config Menu. Display Ethernet Config Arrow Key Up Comment N/A Down Go to Ethernet Port 1. Left Previous Functional Heading. Right 100373-010 AR0 Function Next Functional Heading. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-85 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Ethernet Port The Ethernet Port menu displays the current IP address of the selected Ethernet Port. Display< Ethernet Port 1 xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Arrow Key Up Function Ethernet Config. Down Port 1 IP Address * Left Set Enet Defaults. Right Comment Ethernet Port 2. Port IP Address The Port IP Address menu provides the means to set or change the IP address of the selected Port (Ethernet Port 1 or Ethernet Port 2). The format of the address is four address values separated by periods (e.g. 192.168.1.12). An entered value must be in the range of 0 to 255 and all four values must be entered or the address will not be accepted. If a particular value is less than three digits, use the right arrow key to advance to the next number position. Display< Port 1 IP Address * Arrow Key Up 5-86 Function Comment Ethernet Port 1. Down N/A Left Port 1 Subnet Mask * Right Port 1 Subnet Mask * Press the ENTER key to change the IP address for the Ethernet Port. Use the numeric keypad to enter the values of the address. Use the RIGHT arrow key to advance to the next address value. Use the LEFT arrow key to clear erroneous digit entries or move to the previous value. Press the ENTER key to confirm the IP Address update. Press CANCEL to retain the current setting. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Port Subnet Mask The Port Subnet Mask menu provides the means to set or change the Subnet Mask value of the selected Port (Ethernet Port 1 or Ethernet Port 2). The format of the mask is four values separated by periods (e.g. 255.255.192.0). An entered value must be 0, 128, 192, 224, 240, 248, 252, 254, or 255 and all four values must be entered or the Subnet Mask will not be accepted. If a particular value is less than three digits, use the right arrow key to advance to the next number position. The binary value of the Subnet Mask must be a series of consecutive “1s” followed by a series of consecutive “0s.” Therefore, only the values of 0, 128, 192, 224, 240, 248, 252, 254, or 255 are allowed and any non-255 value must be preceded by values of 255. For example, 255.192.0.0 is a legitimate value but 255.192.240.0 is not. Replacing the 192 with 255 would be legitimate (255.255.240.0) as the 240 value is now preceded by values of 255 in the first two positions. Display< Port 1 Subnet Mask * Arrow Key Up 100373-010 AR0 Function Comment Ethernet Port 1. Down N/A Left Port 1 IP Address * Right Port 1 IP Address * Press the ENTER key to change the Subnet Mask for the Ethernet Port. Use the numeric keypad to enter the values of the Subnet mask. Use the RIGHT arrow key to advance to the next address value. Use the LEFT arrow key to clear erroneous digit entries or move to the previous value. Press the ENTER key to confirm the Subnet Mask update. Press CANCEL to retain the current setting © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-87 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Default Gateway The Default Gateway menu provides a means to set the IP address of the Default Gateway. The Default Gateway is the IP Address of the router to be used when IP messages are to be sent outside of the local network when no other routing information has been set in the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Routing Table. Display< Default Gateway Arrow Key Up Function Comment Ethernet Config. Down N/A Press the ENTER key to change the Default Gateway IP address. Use the numeric keypad to enter the values of the address. Use the RIGHT arrow key to advance to the next address value. Use the LEFT arrow key to clear erroneous digit entries or move to the previous value. Press the ENTER key to confirm the Default Gateway IP address update. Press CANCEL to retain the current setting. Left Ethernet Port 2. Right HTTP Settings. HTTP Settings The HTTP Settings menus provide the means to set parameters associated with the Web GUI (web browser) access to ElectroLogIXS/EC5. Display< Arrow Key Up Function Comment Ethernet Config. Down HTTP TCP Port # * Left Default Gateway. Right 5-88 HTTP Settings Telnet Settings. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program HTTP TCP Port Number The HTTP TCP Port Number menu provides the means to change the TCP Port Number that is used for HTTP (web browser) access to the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. The default value is TCP Port Number 80 (the industry standard). Display< HTTP TCP Port # * Arrow Key Up Function Comment HTTP Settings. Down N/A Left Trusted Source Network 2. Right Trusted Source Network 1. Press the ENTER key to change the HTTP TCP Port Number. Use the numeric keypad to enter the new value. Press the ENTER key again to confirm the new Port Number value. Press CANCEL to retain the current setting. Trusted Source The Trusted Source menu provides the ability to enable or disable two Trusted Source values (Trusted Source 1 and / or Trusted Source 2) for HTTP (web browser) access to the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. The Trusted Source parameter has two portions: The Trusted Network IP address and the Netmask that indicates the portion of the Network IP address that is to be used as the acceptance criteria. The numbers entered are decimal equivalents of the eight bits for each of the four octet entries. For example, if the Network IP is set to 192.168.1.12 and the associated Netmask value is set to 255.255.255.255 (indicating all bits of the Network IP are significant), ElectroLogIXS/EC5 only responds to HTTP messages sourced from the one IP address (192.168.1.12). If, however, the Netmask is set to 255.0.0.0, ElectroLogIXS/EC5 will respond to a HTTP message sourced from any IP address with 192 as the first value. Trusted Source Netmask values follow the same rules as IP subnet masks. Specifically, the binary value of the Netmask must be a series of consecutive “1s” followed by a series of consecutive “0s.” Therefore, only the values of 0, 128, 192, 224, 240, 248, 252, 254, or 255 are allowed and any non-255 value must be preceded by values of 255. For example, 255.192.0.0 is a legitimate value but 255.192.240.0 is not. Replacing the 192 with 255 would be legitimate (255.255.240.0) as the non-255 value (240) is now preceded by 255s in the first and second position. If both Trusted Sources are disabled, ElectroLogIXS/EC5 responds to an HTTP message from any IP address. If one or both Trusted Sources are enabled, ElectroLogIXS/EC5 uses the enabled values for both Ethernet ports as acceptance criteria. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-89 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Trusted Source Network 1 Display< Trusted Source Network 1 Arrow Key Up Function Comment HTTP Settings. Down Trusted Source 1 Enabled = Left Go to HTTP TCP Port #. Right Go to Trusted Source 2. Trusted Source 1 Enable / Disable Display< Trusted Source 1 Enabled = Arrow Key Up Comment Trusted Source Network 1. Down N/A Press the ENTER key to change the Enable / Disable state for Trusted Source 1. Use the UP / DOWN arrow keys to toggle between options and press ENTER once to accept the value. Enter CANCEL to retain the current setting. Left Trusted Source 1 Netmask. Press the ENTER key to change the value of the Trusted Source Netmask for Trusted Source 1. Values must be 0, 128, 192, 224, 240, 248, 252, 254, or 255. Trusted Source 1 IP Address. Press the ENTER key to change the value of the Trusted Source Network. IP identifier for Trusted Source 1. Values must be between 0 and 255. Right 5-90 Function © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Telnet Settings The Telnet Settings menus provide the means to set parameters associated with Telnet access to the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. Display< Telnet Settings Arrow Key Up Function Ethernet Config. Down Telnet Port 1 Enabled. Left HTTP Settings. Right Comment Set Ethernet Defaults. Note: Setting Ethernet defaults will cause the DHCP Server settings to default. The Default settings are: For Ethernet Port 1, The DHCP Client Gateway Default is 192.168.0.11; The DHCP IP Pool Start Address is 192.168.0.12 The DHCP IP Pool End Address is 192.168.0.44 For Ethernet Port 2, The DHCP Client Gateway Default is 192.168.1.12; The DHCP IP Pool Start Address is 192.168.1.13 The DHCP IP Pool End Address is 192.168.1.45 Telnet Port 1 Enable / Disable Telnet access may be enabled or disabled for each Ethernet port. The default state, unless otherwise set in the application, is disabled. Display< Telnet Port 1 * Enabled = Arrow Key Up Comment Telnet Settings. Down N/A Left Trusted Source Network 2. Right 100373-010 AR0 Function Press the ENTER key to enable or disable Telnet for the first Ethernet Port. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select Enabled or Disabled. Once the desired state has been set, press the ENTER key. Telnet Port 2 Enabled. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-91 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Telnet Username The Telnet Username can not be modified via the CDU-1. The Web Interface must be used to change the Telnet Username. Display< Telnet Username admin Arrow Key Up Function Telnet Settings. Down N/A Left Telnet Port 2 Enabled. Right Comment Telnet Password. Telnet Password The Telnet Password can not be modified via the CDU-1. The Web Interface must be used to change the Telnet Password. Display< Telnet Password telnet Arrow Key Up Comment Telnet Settings. Down N/A Left Telnet Username. Right 5-92 Function Telnet TCP Port Number. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Telnet TCP Port Number The Telnet TCP Port Number menu provides the means to change the TCP Port Number that is used for Telnet access to the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. The default value is TCP Port Number 23 (the industry standard). Display< TNET TCP PORT# * Arrow Key Up Function Telnet Settings. Down N/A Left Telnet Password. Right Comment Press the ENTER key to change the Telnet TCP port Number. Use the numeric keypad to enter the new value. Press the ENTER key again to confirm the new Port Number value. Press CANCEL to retain the current setting. Trusted Source Network 1. Telnet Trusted Source Network 1 Display< Arrow Key Up 100373-010 AR0 Trusted Source Network 1 Function Comment Telnet Settings. Down Trusted Source 1Enabled= Left Telnet TCP Port Number. Right Trusted Source Network 2. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-93 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Telnet Trusted Source 1 Enable / Disable Display< Trusted Source 1 Enabled = Arrow Key Up Comment Trusted Source Network 1. Down N/A Press the ENTER key to change the Enable / Disable state for Telnet Trusted Source 1. Use the UP / DOWN arrow keys to toggle between options and pres ENTER once to accept the value. Enter CANCEL to retain the current setting. Left Trusted Source 1 Netmask. Press the ENTER key to change the value of the Telnet Trusted Source Netmask for Trusted Source 1. Values must be 0, 123, 192, 224, 240, 248, 252, 254, or 255. Trusted Source 1 IP Address. Press the ENTER key to change the value of the Telnet Trusted Source Network IP identifier for Trusted Source 1. Values must be between 0 and 255. Right 5-94 Function © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Office Configuration 373-0515 Figure 5-51, Office Protocol Configuration Menu The Office Configuration Menu allows access to menus for configuring the Office protocol and port. Display Office Configuration Arrow Key Up Down Left Right Function Comment Go to System Configuration. Go to Protocol. Go to Diagnostic Port. Go to Local Control Panel. Protocol The Protocol Menu provides the ability to display and set the Office Protocol: GENISYS(R), UCE, SCS-128, or BCS. The Office Protocol selection modifies the other available Office Configuration settings. Display Protocol Arrow Key Up Down Left Right 100373-010 AR0 Function Comment Go to Office Configuration. N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the Office Protocol. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the Office Protocol. Once the Office Protocol has been set, press the ENTER key. Go to Set Office Defaults. Go to Protocol dependent Office Configuration Parameter. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-95 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 UCE Office Protocol Configuration 373-0261 Figure 5-52, UCE Office Protocol Configuration Menu The UCE Office Protocol Configuration menus are available whenever UCE is the selected Office protocol. Baud Rate The Baud Rate Menu provides the ability to display and set the Baud Rate of the Office Port to 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200, or Disabled. Display< Arrow Key Up Down Left Right 5-96 Office Config Baud Rate: nnnn Function Go to Office Configuration. N/A Comment Press the ENTER Key to set the OFFICE CONFIG Baud Rate. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the OFFICE CONFIG Baud Rate. Once the Office Config Baud Rate has been set, press the ENTER key. Go to Protocol. Go to Office Config * Parity. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Parity The Parity Menu provides the ability to display and set the Parity of the Office Port: Odd, Even, or None. Display< Arrow Key Up Down Office Config* Parity Function Go to Office Configuration. N/A Left Go to Office Config * Baud Rate. Right Go to Office Config * Data Bits. Comment Press the ENTER Key to set the OFFICE CONFIG Parity. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the OFFICE CONFIG Parity. Once the Office Config Parity has been set, press the ENTER key. Data Bits The Data Bits Menu provides the ability to display and set the number of Data Bits of the Office Port: 5, 6, 7, or 8. Display< Arrow Key Up Down 100373-010 AR0 Office Config* Data Bits Function Go to Office Configuration. N/A Left Go to Office Config * Parity. Right Go to Office Config * Stop Bits. Comment Press the ENTER Key to set the OFFICE CONFIG Data Bits. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the OFFICE CONFIG Data Bits. Once the Office Config Data Bits has been set, press the ENTER key. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-97 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Stop Bits The Stop Bits Menu provides the ability to display and set the number of Stop Bits of the Office Port: 1, 1.5, or 2. Display< Arrow Key Up Down Left Right Office Config* Stop Bits Function Go to Office Configuration. N/A Comment Press the ENTER Key to set the OFFICE CONFIG Stop Bits. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the OFFICE CONFIG Stop Bits. Once the Office Config Stop Bits has been set, press the ENTER key. Go to Office Config * Data Bits. Go to Set Office Defaults. Set Office Defaults The Set Office Defaults provides the ability to restore factory office protocol default settings. Display< Arrow Key Up Down Set Office Defaults Function Go to Office Configuration. N/A Comment Press the ENTER Key to restore factory office protocol default settings. Press the ENTER key a second tine to confirm the changes or the CANCEL key to retain the current settings. Left Right 5-98 Go to Office Config Stop Bits. Go to Office Configuration Protocol. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program SCS-128 Office Protocol Configuration 373-0264 Figure 5-53, SCS-128 Office Protocol Configuration Menu The SCS-128 Office Protocol Configuration menus are available whenever SCS-128 is the selected Office protocol. Baud Rate The Baud Rate Menu provides the ability to display and set the Baud Rate of the Office Port to 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200, or Disabled. Display< Arrow Key Up Down Left Right 100373-010 AR0 Office Configuration* Baud Rate: nnnn Function Go to Office Configuration. N/A Comment Press the ENTER Key to set the OFFICE CONFIG Baud Rate. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the OFFICE CONFIG Baud Rate. Once the Office Config Baud Rate has been set, press the ENTER key. Go to Protocol. Go to Office Config * Parity. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-99 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Parity The Parity Menu provides the ability to display and set the Parity of the Office Port: Odd, Even, or None. Display< Arrow Key Up Down Office Config* Parity Function Go to Office Configuration. N/A Left Go to Office Config * Baud Rate. Right Go to Office Config * Data Bits. Comment Press the ENTER Key to set the OFFICE CONFIG Parity. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the OFFICE CONFIG Parity. Once the Office Config Parity has been set, press the ENTER key. Data Bits The Data Bits Menu provides the ability to display and set the number of Data Bits of the Office Port: 5, 6, 7, or 8. Display< Arrow Key Up Down 5-100 Office Config* Data Bits Function Go to Office Configuration. N/A Left Go to Office Config * Parity. Right Go to Office Config * Data Bits. Comment Press the ENTER Key to set the OFFICE CONFIG Data Bits. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the OFFICE CONFIG Data Bits. Once the Office Config Data Bits has been set, press the ENTER key. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Stop Bits The Stop Bits Menu provides the ability to display and set the number of Stop Bits of the Office Port: 1, 1.5, or 2. Display< Arrow Key Up Down Left Right Office Config* Stop Bits Function Go to Office Configuration. N/A Comment Press the ENTER Key to set the OFFICE CONFIG Stop Bits. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the OFFICE CONFIG Stop Bits. Once the Office Config Stop Bits has been set, press the ENTER key. Go to Office Config * Data Bits. Go to Set Office Config * Unit Address. Unit Address The Unit Address Menu provides the ability to display and set the SCS-128 station address (0-127). Display< Arrow Key Up Down 100373-010 AR0 Office Config* Unit Address Function Go to Office Configuration. N/A Left Go to Office Config * Stop Bits. Right Go to Office Config * Set Office Defaults. Comment Press the ENTER Key to set the OFFICE CONFIG Unit Address. The Office Config Unit Address may be set from 0 to 127. Once the Office Config Unit Address has been set, press the ENTER key. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-101 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Set Office Defaults The Set Office Defaults provides the ability to restore factory office protocol default settings. Display< Arrow Key Up Down Set Office Defaults Function Go to Office Configuration. N/A Comment Press the ENTER Key to restore factory office protocol default settings. Press the ENTER key a second tine to confirm the changes or the CANCEL key to retain the current settings. Left Right 5-102 Go to Office Config* Unit Address. Go to Office Configuration Protocol. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program GENISYS® Office Protocol Configuration (Serial Interface) The GENISYS® Office Protocol Configuration menus are available whenever GENISYS® is the selected Office protocol. Figure 5-54, GENISYS® Office Port Configuration Menu Baud Rate The Baud Rate Menu provides the ability to display and set the Baud Rate of the Office Port: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200, or Disabled. Display Arrow Key Up Down Left Right 100373-010 AR0 Office Config* Baud Rate Function Go to Office Config* N/A. Go to Protocol. Comment Press the ENTER Key to set the Office Config* Baud Rate. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the Office Config* Baud Rate. Once the Office Config* Baud Rate has been set, press the ENTER key. Go to Office Config* Parity. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-103 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Parity The Parity Menu provides the ability to display and set the Parity of the Office Port: Odd, Even or None. Display Office Config* Parity Arrow Key Up Down Function Comment Go to Office Config* N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the Office Config* Parity. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the Office Config* Parity. Once the Office Config* Parity has been set, press the ENTER key. Left Go to Office Config* Baud Rate. Right Go to Office Config* Data Bits. Stop Bits The Stop Bits Menu provides the ability to display and set the number of Stop Bits of the Office Port: 1, 1.5, or 2. Display Office Config* Stop Bits Arrow Key Up Down 5-104 Function Comment Go to Office Config* N/A. Left Go to Office Config* Data Bits. Right Go to Office Config Flow. Press the ENTER Key to set the Office Config* Stop Bits. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the Office Config* Stop Bits. Once the Office Config* Stop Bits has been set, press the ENTER key. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Flow The Flow Menu provides the ability to display and set the Flow Control (handshaking protocol) used by the Office Port: Enabled is RTS Enabled/Wait on CTS, Disabled is None. Display Office Config* Flow Arrow Key Up Down Function Comment Go to Office Config* N/A. Press the ENTER Key to set the Office Config* Flow. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the Office Config* Flow. Once the Office Config* Flow has been set, press the ENTER key. Left Go to Office Config* Stop Bits. Right Go to Office Config* Number Ind. Number Ind The Number Ind Menu provides the ability to display and set the number of indication words reported to the GENISYS® office. Each indication word contains eight indications. Display Office Config* Number Ind Arrow Key Up Down 100373-010 AR0 Function Comment Go to Office Config* N/A. Left Go to Office Config* Flow. Right Go to Office Config* Unit Address. Press the ENTER Key to set the Office Config* Number Ind. The Office Config* Number Ind may be set from 1 to 125. Once the Office Config* Number Ind has been set, press the ENTER key. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-105 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Unit Address The Unit Address Menu provides the ability to display and set the GENISYS® station address (1-255). Display Office Config* Unit Address Arrow Key Up Down Function Comment Go to Office Config* N/A. Press the ENTER Key to set the Office Config* Unit Address. The Office Config* Unit Address may be set from 1 to 255. Once the Office Config* Unit Address has been set, press the ENTER key. Left Go to Office Config* Number Ind. Right Go to Office Config* Ctrl Latch. Ctrl Latch The Ctrl Latch Menu provides the ability to display and set the persistence of Office controls input to the vital equations application logic. When Ctrl Latch is set to latching, the value of a control not contained in the latest office control update is latched at the last value received from the office. When Ctrl Latch is set to non-latching, the value of a control not contained in the latest office control update is set to FALSE (0). Display Office Config* Ctrl Latch Arrow Key Up Down 5-106 Function Comment Go to Office Config* N/A. Left Go to Office Config* Unit Address. Right Go to Office Config* Ind Delay. Press the ENTER Key to set the Office Config* Ctrl Latching. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the Office Config* Ctrl Latching. Once the Office Config* Ctrl Latching has been set, press the ENTER key. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Ind Delay The Ind Delay Menu provides the ability to display and set the time indications are accumulated for an office indication report after one or more indication changes are detected. Delays of 0 to 10 seconds in half second increments are supported. Display Office Config* Ind Delay Arrow Key Up Down Function Comment Go to Office Config* N/A. Press the ENTER Key to set the Office Config* Ind Delay. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the Office Config* Ind Delay. Once the Office Config* Ind Delay has been set, press the ENTER key. Left Go to Office Config* Ctrl Latch. Right Go to Office Config* Const Ind. Const Ind The Const Ind Menu provides the ability to display and set whether indication reports sent to the office contains the current value of all office indications (constant indication) or a partial report containing just the current value of words containing indications that have changed since the last transmitted indication report (no constant indication). With Const Ind set, the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 responds to each poll with a full indication message. Display Office Config* Const Ind Arrow Key Up Down 100373-010 AR0 Function Comment Go to Office Config* N/A. Left Go to Office Config* Ind Delay. Right Go to Office Config* Msg Timeout. Press the ENTER Key to set the Office Config* Const Indication. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the Office Config* Const Indication. Once the Office Config* Const Indication has been set, press the ENTER key. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-107 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Msg Timeout The Msg Timeout Menu provides the ability to display and set the office port’s Msg Timeout. The Msg Timeout is the time of link inactivity for the detection of an office link failure. Display Office Config* Msg Timeout Arrow Key Up Down Function Comment Go to Office Config* N/A. Press the ENTER Key to set the Office Config* Timeout. The Office Config* Msg Timeout may be set from 0 to 120 seconds. Once the Office Config* Msg Timeout has been set, press the ENTER key. Left Go to Office Config* Constant Ind. Right Go to Office Config* Tx Delay. Tx Delay The Tx Delay Menu provides the ability to display and set the office port’s RTS setup time before start of data transmission. Delays of 0, 20, 50, 100, 150, 200, and 250 milliseconds are supported. Display Office Config* Tx Delay Arrow Key Up Down 5-108 Function Comment Go to Office Config* N/A. Left Go to Office Config* Msg Timeout. Right Go to Office Config* Tx Cutoff. Press the ENTER Key to set the Office Config* Tx Delay. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the Office Config* Tx Delay. Once the Office Config* Tx Delay has been set, press the ENTER key. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Tx Cutoff The Tx Cutoff Menu provides the ability to display and set the office port’s RTS hold time after CTS goes inactive. Hold times of 0, 50, 100, 150, 200, and 250 milliseconds are supported. Display Office Config* Tx Delay Arrow Key Up Down Function Comment Go to Office Config* N/A. Press the ENTER Key to set the Office Config* Tx Delay. Use the UP/DOWN keys to select the Config Tx Delay. Once the Office Config* Tx Delay has been set, press the ENTER key. Left Go to Office Config* Tx Delay. Right Go to Office Config* CTS Timeout. CTS Timeout The CTS Timeout Menu provides the ability to set the time the system will wait for CTS to go active after an RTS has been sent before a code fail is declared. Display Office Config* CTS Timeout Arrow Key Up Down Left Right 100373-010 AR0 Function Comment Go to Office Config* N/A. Press the ENTER Key to change the CTS Timeout. Values of 0 (disable) to 5 seconds in 0.1s increments are provided. Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to cycle through the allowed values and press the ENTER key once the desired value has been selected to confirm the changes or the CANCEL key to retain the current settings. Go to Office Config* Tx Cutoff. Go to Office Config* Secure Poll. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-109 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Secure Poll The Secure Poll Menu provides the ability to display and set whether the system will respond only to secure poll messages from the office (enabled). When disabled, the system will respond to both secure and nonsecure poll messages received from the office. Display Office Config* Secure Poll Arrow Key Up Down Left Right Function Comment Go to Office Config* N/A. Press the ENTER Key to set the Office Config* Secure Polls. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the Office Config* Secure Polls. Once the Office Config* Secure Polls has been set, press the ENTER key. Go to Office Config* CTS Timeout. Go to Message Counts Port = Office Message Counts The Message Counts Menu allows you to reset and display performance monitoring counts for the following items: • • • • • Rx Valid (number valid incoming messages received since local or the last counter reset) Rx Invalid (number of invalid incoming messages received since local or the last counter reset) Resend (number of resent messages since local or the last counter reset) Link Fail (number of times Link Fail has been set since local or the last counter reset) Code Fail (number of times Code Fail has been set since local or the last counter reset) Display Arrow Key Up Down Left Right 5-110 Message Counts * Port = Office Function Comment Go to Office Config* Go to Message Counts RX Valid. Display the number of valid messages received. Go to Office Config* Secure Poll. Go to Office Config* Set Office Defaults. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Display Message Counts Rx Valid Arrow Key Up Down Left Right Function Comment Go to Message Counts * Port = Office NA At the Clear Counts menu, press the ENTER Key to reset all counter values to zero. Press ENTER key a second time to confirm the changes or the CANCEL key to retain the current values. Cycle through message counters and Clear Counts Menus. Cycle through message counters and Clear Counts Menus. Set Office Defaults The Set Office Defaults Menu provides the ability to restore application office protocol default settings. Display Set Office Defaults Arrow Key Up 100373-010 AR0 Function Comment Go to Office Config* Down NA Left Right Go to Message Counts. Go to Office Config * Protocol = Press the ENTER Key to restore application office protocol defaults. Press ENTER key a second time to confirm the changes or the CANCEL key to retain the current settings. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-111 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 BCS Office Protocol Configuration Figure 5-55, BCS Office Port Configuration Menu BAUD Rate The Baud Rate Menu provides the ability to display and set the Baud Rate of the Office Port to 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, or Disabled. Display Office Config* BAUD Rate: nnnn Arrow Key Up Down 5-112 Function Comment Go to Office Config* N/A. Left Go to Office Config* Protocol. Right Go to Office Config* Parity. Press the ENTER Key to set the Office Port’s Baud Rate. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the Baud Rate. Once the Baud Rate has been set, Press the ENTER key. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Parity The Parity Menu provides the ability to display and set the Parity of the Office Port: Odd, Even or None. Display Office Config* Parity Arrow Key Up Down Function Comment Go to Office Config* N/A. Press the ENTER Key to set the Office Config* Parity. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the Office Config* Parity. Once the Office Config* Parity has been set, press the ENTER key. Left Go to Office Config* Baud Rate. Right Go to Office Config* Stop Bits. Stop Bits The Stop Bits Menu provides the ability to display and set the number of Stop Bits of the Office Port: 1, 1.5, or 2. Display Office Config* Stop Bits Arrow Key Up Down 100373-010 AR0 Function Comment Go to Office Config* N/A. Left Go to Office Config* Parity. Right Go to Office Config* Flow. Press the ENTER Key to set the Office Config* Stop Bits. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the Office Config* Stop Bits. Once the Office Config* Stop Bits has been set, press the ENTER key. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-113 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Flow The Flow Menu provides the ability to display and set the Flow Control (handshaking protocol) used by the Office Port: Enabled is RTS Enabled/Wait on CTS, Disabled is none. Display Office Config* Flow Arrow Key Up Down Function Comment Go to Office Config* N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the Office Config* Flow. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the Office Config* Flow. Once the Office Config* Flow has been set, press the ENTER key. Left Go to Office Config* Stop Bits. Right Go to Office Config* Number Ind. Number Ind The Number Ind Menu provides the ability to display and set the number of indication words reported to the office. Each indication word contains eight indications. Display Office Config* Number Ind Arrow Key Up Down 5-114 Function Comment Go to Office Config* N/A Left Go to Office Config* Flow. Right Go to Office Config* Unit Address. Press the ENTER Key to set the Number of Indications, which may be set from 1 to 16. Once the Number off indications has been set, press the ENTER key. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Unit Address The Unit Address Menu provides the ability to display and set the BCS station address (1- 127). Display Office Config* Unit Address Arrow Key Up Down Function Comment Go to Office Config* N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the Office Config* Unit Address. The Office Config* Unit Address may be set from 1 to 127. Once the Office Config* Unit Address has been set, press the ENTER key. Left Go to Office Config* Number Ind. Right Go to Office Config* Ctrl Latch. Ctrl Latch The Ctrl Latch Menu provides the ability to display and set the persistence of Office controls input to the equations application logic. When Ctrl Latch is set to latching, the value of a control not contained in the latest office control update is latched at the last value received from the office. When Ctrl Latch is set to non-latching, the value of a control not contained in the latest office control update is set to FALSE (0). Display Office Config* Ctrl Latch Arrow Key Up Down 100373-010 AR0 Function Comment Go to Office Config* N/A Left Go to Office Config* Unit Address. Right Go to Office Config* Ind Delay. Press the ENTER Key to set the Office Config* Ctrl Latching. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the Office Config* Ctrl Latching. Once the Office Config* Ctrl atching has been set, press the ENTER key. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-115 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Ind Delay The Ind Delay Menu provides the ability to display and set the time indications are accumulated for an office indication report after one or more indication changes are detected. Delays of 0 to 10 seconds in half second increments are supported. Display Office Config* Ind Delay Arrow Key Up Down Function Comment Go to Office Config* N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the Office Config* Ind Delay. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the Office Config* Ind Delay. Once the Office Config* Ind Delay has been set, press the ENTER key. Left Go to Office Config* Ctrl Latch. Right Go to Office Config* Msg Timeout. Msg Timeout The Msg Timeout Menu provides the ability to display and set the office port’s Msg Timeout. The Msg Timeout is the time of link inactivity for the detection of an office link failure. Display Office Config* Msg Timeout Arrow Key Up Down 5-116 Function Comment Go to Office Config* N/A Left Go to Office Config* Ind Delay. Right Go to Office Config* CTS Timeout. Press the ENTER Key to set the Office Config* Msg Timeout. The Office Config* Msg Timeout may be set from 0 to 120 seconds. Once the Office Config* Msg Timeout has been set, press the ENTER key. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program CTS Timeout The CTS Timeout Menu provides the ability to set the time the system will wait for CTS to go active after an RTS has been sent before a code fail is declared. Display Office Config* CTS Timeout Arrow Key Up Down Function Comment Go to Office Config* N/A Press the ENTER Key to change the CTS Timeout. Values of 0 (disable) to 5 seconds in 0.1s increments are provided. Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to cycle through the allowed values and press the ENTER key once the desired value has been selected to confirm the changes or the CANCEL key to retain the current settings. Left Go to Office Config* Msg Timeout. Right Go to Office Config* RxGap Time. RxGap Time The RxGap Time Menu provides the ability to set the expected time between received messages. If the time between characters is greater than the gap time then the character is the start of a message. The receive gap time is based on the baud rate. Example: Baud Rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 Display Receive Gap Time in msec 15.0 8.0 4.0 2.0 Office Config* RxGap Timeout Arrow Key Up Down 100373-010 AR0 Function Comment Go to Office Config* N/A Left Go to Office Config* CTS Timeout. Right Go to Office Config* IndGap Time. Press the ENTER Key to change the RxGap Time. Values of 1 to 35 mS in 0.5 mS increments are provided. Once the Office RxGap Time has been set, press the ENTER key and Confirm the change or the CANCEL to retain the current settings. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-117 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 IndGap Time The IndGap Time Menu provides the ability to set the time between transmitted messages. If the time between characters is greater than the gap time then the character is the start of a new indication message. The indication gap time is based on the baud rate. Display Office Config* IndGap Timeout Arrow Key Up Down Function Comment Go to Office Config* N/A Press the ENTER Key to change the IndxGap Time. Values of 1 to 35 mS in 0.5 mS increments are provided. Once the Office IndGap Time has been set, press the ENTER key and Confirm the change or the CANCEL to retain the current settings. Left Go to Office Config* IndGap Time. Right Go to Office Config* Port= BCS Message Counts The Message Counts Menu allows you to reset and display performance-monitoring counts for the following items: • Rx Valid (number valid incoming messages received since local or the last counter reset) • Rx Invalid (number of invalid incoming messages received since local or the last counter reset) • Link Fail (number of times Link Fail has been set since local or the last counter reset) • Code Fail (number of times Code Fail has been set since local or the last counter reset) Display Arrow Key Up Down 5-118 Message Counts* Port= BCS Function Comment Go to Office Config* Go to Message Counts Rx Valid= nn Left Go to Office Config* RxGap Time Right Go to Office Config* Set Office Defaults. Display the number of valid messages received. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Display Message Counts* Rx Valid= nn Arrow Key Function Up Comment Go to Message Counts Port= BCS Down N/A At the Clear Counts menu, press the ENTER Key to reset all counter values to zero. Press ENTER key a second time to confirm the changes or the CANCEL key to retain the current values. Left Cycle through message counters and Clear Counts Menus. Right Cycle through message counters and Clear Counts Menus. Set office Defaults The Set Office Defaults Menu provides the ability to restore application office protocol default settings. Display Office Config* Set Office Defaults Arrow Key Up Down Left Right 100373-010 AR0 Function Comment Go to Office Config* N/A. Press the ENTER Key to restore application office protocol defaults. Press ENTER key a second time to confirm the changes or the CANCEL key to retain the current settings. Go to Message Counts Port= BCS Go to Office Config* Protocol= BCS © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-119 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 GENISYS® Office Protocol Configuration (Ethernet) The GENISYS® Office Protocol Configuration menus are available whenever GENISYS® is the selected Office protocol. Figure 5-56, GENISYS® Office Port Configuration Menu Number Ind The Number Ind Menu provides the ability to display and set the number of indication words reported to the GENISYS® office. Each indication word contains eight indications. Display Office Config* Number Ind Arrow Key Up Down 5-120 Function Comment Go to Office Config* N/A Left Go to Office Config* Flow. Right Go to Office Config* Unit Address. Press the ENTER Key to set the Office Config* Number Ind. The Office Config* Number Ind may be set from 1 to 125. Once the Office Config* Number Ind has been set, press the ENTER key. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Unit Address The Unit Address Menu provides the ability to display and set the GENISYS® station address (1-255). Display Office Config* Unit Address Arrow Key Up Down Function Comment Go to Office Config* N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the Office Config* Unit Address. The Office Config* Unit Address may be set from 1 to 255. Once the Office Config* Unit Address has been set, press the ENTER key. Left Go to Office Config* Number Ind. Right Go to Office Config* Ctrl Latch. Ctrl Latch The Ctrl Latch Menu provides the ability to display and set the persistence of Office controls input to the vital equations application logic. When Ctrl Latch is set to latching, the value of a control not contained in the latest office control update is latched at the last value received from the office. When Ctrl Latch is set to non-latching, the value of a control not contained in the latest office control update is set to FALSE (0). Display Office Config* Ctrl Latch Arrow Key Up Down 100373-010 AR0 Function Comment Go to Office Config* N/A Left Go to Office Config* Unit Address. Right Go to Office Config* Ind Delay. Press the ENTER Key to set the Office Config* Ctrl Latching. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the Office Config* Ctrl Latching. Once the Office Config* Ctrl Latching has been set, press the ENTER key. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-121 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Ind Delay The Ind Delay Menu provides the ability to display and set the time indications are accumulated for an office indication report after one or more indication changes are detected. Delays of 0 to 10 seconds in half second increments are supported. Display Office Config* Ind Delay Arrow Key Up Down Function Comment Go to Office Config* N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the Office Config* Ind Delay. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the Office Config* Ind Delay. Once the Office Config* Ind Delay has been set, press the ENTER key. Left Go to Office Config* Ctrl Latch. Right Go to Office Config* Const Ind. Const Ind The Const Ind Menu provides the ability to display and set whether indication reports sent to the office contains the current value of all office indications (constant indication) or a partial report containing just the current value of words containing indications that have changed since the last transmitted indication report (no constant indication). With Const Ind set, the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 responds to each poll with a full indication message. Display Office Config* Const Ind Arrow Key Up Down 5-122 Function Comment Go to Office Config* N/A Left Go to Office Config* Ind Delay. Right Go to Office Config* Msg Timeout. Press the ENTER Key to set the Office Config* Const Indication. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the Office Config* Const Indication. Once the Office Config* Const Indication has been set, press the ENTER key. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Msg Timeout The Msg Timeout Menu provides the ability to display and set the office port’s Msg Timeout. The Msg Timeout is the time of link inactivity for the detection of an office link failure. Display Office Config* Msg Timeout Arrow Key Up Down Function Comment Go to Office Config* N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the Office Config* Timeout. The Office Config* Msg Timeout may be set from 0 to 120 seconds. Once the Office Config* Msg Timeout has been set, press the ENTER key. Left Go to Office Config* Constant Ind. Right Go to Office Config* Tx Delay. Secure Poll The Secure Poll Menu provides the ability to display and set whether the system will respond only to secure poll messages from the office (enabled). When disabled, the system will respond to both secure and nonsecure poll messages received from the office. Display Office Config* Secure Poll Arrow Key Up Down Left Right 100373-010 AR0 Function Comment Go to Office Config* N/A. Press the ENTER Key to set the Office Config* Secure Polls. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the Office Config* Secure Polls. Once the Office Config* Secure Polls has been set, press the ENTER key. Go to Office Config* CTS Delay. Go to Office Config* Message Counts. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-123 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Trusted Source The Trusted Source menu provides the ability to enable or disable two Trusted Source values (Trusted Source 1 and / or Trusted Source 2) for the GENISYS® Office on Ethernet. The Trusted Source parameter has two portions: The Trusted Network IP address and the Netmask that indicates the portion of the Network IP address that is to be used as the acceptance criteria. The numbers entered are decimal equivalents of the eight bits for each of the four octet entries. For example, if the Network IP is set to 192.168.1.12 and the associated Netmask value is set to 255.255.255.255 (indicating all bits of the Network IP are significant), ElectroLogIXS/EC5 only responds to GENISYS® messages sourced from one IP address (192.168.1.12). If, however, the Netmask is set to 255.0.0.0, ElectroLogIXS/EC5 will respond to a GENISYS® message sourced from any IP address with 192 as the first value. Trusted Source Netmask values follow the same rules as IP subnet masks. Specifically, the binary value of the Netmask must be a series of consecutive “1s” followed by a series of consecutive “0s.” Therefore, only the values of 0, 128, 192, 224, 240, 248, 252, 254, or 255 are allowed and any non-255 value must be preceded by values of 255. For example, 255.192.0.0 is a legitimate value but 255.192.240.0 is not. Replacing the 192 with 255 would be legitimate (255.255.240.0) as the non-255 value (240) is now preceded by 255s in the first and second position. If both Trusted Sources are disabled, ElectroLogIXS/EC5 responds to a GENISYS® message from any IP address. If one or both Trusted Sources are enabled, GENISYS® uses the enabled values for both Ethernet ports as acceptance criteria. Display Arrow Key Up Down Left Right Display Arrow Key Up 5-124 Office Config* Trusted Source Function Comment Go to Office Config. Go to Trusted Source 1. Go to Office Config Secure Poll. Go to Office Config Port #D. Trusted Source 1 Function Comment Office Config Trusted Source. Down Go to Trusted Source * Trust Src1 = Enabled / Disabled Left Right Go to Trusted Source 2. Go to Trusted Source 2. Press the ENTER key to change the Enable / Disable state for Trusted Source 1. Use the UP / DOWN arrow keys to toggle between options and press ENTER once to accept the value. Enter CANCEL to retain the current setting. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Display Trusted Source * Arrow Key Up Down Function Comment Trusted Source 1. N/A Left Go to Trusted Source * NM1 = Right Go to Trusted Source * IP1 = Press the ENTER key to change the Enable / Disable state for Trusted Source 1. Use the UP / DOWN arrow keys to toggle between options and press ENTER once to accept the value. Enter CANCEL to retain the current setting. Press the ENTER key to change the value of the Trusted Source Netmask for Trusted Source 1. Values must be 0, 128, 192, 224, 240, 248, 252, 254, or 255. Press the ENTER key to change the value of the Trusted Source Network. IP identifier for Trusted Source 1. Values must be between 0 and 255. Port Number The Port Number menu allows selection of the UDP Port Number to be used for GENISYS® over Ethernet communications for the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. Press the ENTER key to change the value of the GENISYS® Port Number. Use the numeric keypad to enter the new number and press ENTER once to accept the value. Enter CANCEL to retain the current setting. Display Arrow Key Up Down Left Right 100373-010 AR0 Office Config* Port # = Function Comment Go to Office Config. N/A Go to Office Config Trusted Source. Go to Message Counts Port = Office © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-125 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Message Counts The Message Counts Menu allows you to reset and display performance monitoring counts for the following items: • • • • • Rx Valid (number valid incoming messages received since local or the last counter reset) Rx Invalid (number of invalid incoming messages received since local or the last counter reset) Resend (number of resent messages since local or the last counter reset) Link Fail (number of times Link Fail has been set since local or the last counter reset) Code Fail (number of times Code Fail has been set since local or the last counter reset) Display Message Counts * Port = Office Arrow Key Up Down Left Right Display Function Go to Office Config* Go to Message Counts * RX Valid. Down Left Right 5-126 Press the ENTER Key to restore application office protocol defaults. Press ENTER key a second time to confirm the changes or the CANCEL key to retain the current settings. Go to Office Config* Secure Poll. Go to Office Config* Set Office Defaults. Message Counts * Rx Valid Arrow Key Up Comment Function Comment Go to Message Counts * Port = Office NA At the Clear Counts menu, press the ENTER Key to reset all counter values to zero. Press ENTER key a second time to confirm the changes or the CANCEL key to retain the current values. Cycle through message counters and Clear Counts Menus. Cycle through message counters and Clear Counts Menus. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Set Office Defaults The Set Office Defaults Menu provides the ability to restore application office protocol default settings. Display Set Office Defaults Arrow Key Up 100373-010 AR0 Function Comment Go to Office Config* Down NA Left Right Go to Message Counts. Go to Office Configuration Protocol. Press the ENTER Key to restore application office protocol defaults. Press ENTER key a second time to confirm the changes or the CANCEL key to retain the current settings. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-127 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 ATCS Office Port The ATCS office port provides the following communication configuration parameters: • • • • • • • • • • BAUD rate (9600 default) Railroad number (620 default) Address ID (7 default) Address length (for Station and MCP addressing (14 default)) Station addressing (local) [Address ID, Railroad number, Station network address, Station network node, Station routing (internally generated)]: • Station network address (101001 default) • Station network node (02 default) MCP addressing [Address ID, Railroad number, MCP network address, MCP network node, MCP routing (internally generated)]: • MCP network address (101001 default) • MCP network node (01 default) Office addressing [office address ID (2), Railroad number, Office network node, Office network address]: • Office network node (10 default) • Office network address (5010 default) CDC addressing (time server) [CDC address ID (2), Railroad number, CDC network node, CDC network address]: • CDC network node (10 default) • CDC network address (5026 default) Indication priority (priority for indication message transmission (4 default)) Log priority (priority for remote log report message transmission (7 default)) The following parameters can be configured through the CDU menu shown in Figure 5-57. Available settings for these parameters are: • • • • • • • • • • BAUD rate: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200, or Disabled Railroad number: 001-998 Address ID: 3, 5, or 7 Address length: 10, 12, or 14 Station addressing (local) [Address ID, Railroad number, Station network address, Station network node, Station routing (internally generated)]: • Station network address: 000001 to 999999 • Station network node: 01 to 99 MCP addressing [Address ID, Railroad number, MCP network address, MCP network node, MCP routing (internally generated)]: • MCP network address: 000001 to 999999 • MCP network node: 01 to 99 Office addressing [office address ID (2), Railroad number, Office network node, Office network address]: • Office network node: 01 to 99 • Office network address: 5000 to 6999 CDC addressing (time server) [CDC address ID (2), Railroad number, CDC network node, CDC network address]: • CDC network node: 01 to 99 • CDC network address: 5020 to 6999 Indication priority: 0 (highest) to 7 (lowest) Log priority: 0 (highest) to 7 (lowest) The ATCS office port provides the following operational configuration parameters: • 5-128 Number of indications (the number of indication words reported to the office) © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program • • • • • • Control latching (the value for controls submitted to application logic when they are omitted in Codeline Control messages (enabled submits the last received value for the control while disabled resets the control to 0)) Indication delay (the time Indication changes are collected prior to the transmission of Indication message) CPC protocol (the set of ATCS messages to be utilized for office communications. Protocol 1 is provided for backward compatibility but protocol 2 (default) is recommended for most installations) Indication refresh rate (the time between autonomously generated indication messages) Page size for remote log reports (the number of lines of log entries included in paged remote log reports (19 default) The values for these operational parameters can be configured through the CDU menu shown in Figure 5-57. Available settings for these parameters are: • Number of indications: 1-98 bytes (8-784 total indications) • Control latching: enabled, disabled • Indication delay: 0 to 10 seconds in 0.5 second increments (0 is disabled) • CPC protocol: 1 (non-standard pre-S250 message set), 2 (standard S250 message set) • Indication refresh rate: 0 to 10 minutes in 1 minute increments (0 is disabled) • Page size: 19 to 255 Figure 5-57, ATCS Office Protocol Configuration Menu 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-129 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 ATCS Office Protocol Configuration The ATCS Office Protocol Configuration menus are available whenever ATCS is the selected Office protocol. Protocol The Protocol Menu provides the ability to display and set the Office Protocol. When serial ports 2 or 3 are used as the office ports, the only protocol selections available are: ATCS or none. Display Office Config * Baud Rate: nnnn Arrow Key Up Down Function Comment Go to Office Config. N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the Office Protocol. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the Office Protocol. Once the Office Protocol has been set, press the ENTER key. Left Go to Office Config * Set Office Defaults. Right Go to Office Config * BAUD Rate. BAUD Rate The Baud Rate Menu provides the ability to display and set the Baud Rate of the Office Port to 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or Disabled. Display Office Config * Baud Rate: nnnn Arrow Key Up Down 5-130 Function Comment Go to Office Config. N/A Left Go to Office Config * Protocol. Right Go to Office Config * Number Ind. Press the ENTER Key to set the Office Port’s Baud Rate. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the Baud Rate. Once the Baud Rate has been set, press the ENTER key. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Number Ind The Number Ind Menu provides the ability to display and set the number of indication words reported to the office. Each indication word contains eight indications. Display Office Config * Number Ind Arrow Key Up Down Function Comment Go to Office Config. N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the Number of Indications, which may be set from 1 to 98. Once the Number of Indications has been set, press the ENTER key. Left Go to Office Config * Number Ind. Right Go to Office Config * Ctrl Latch. Ctrl Latch The Ctrl Latch Menu provides the ability to display and set the persistence of Office controls input to the vital equations application logic. When Ctrl Latch is enabled, the value of a control not contained in the latest office control update is latched at the last value received from the office. When Ctrl Latch is disabled, the value of a control not contained in the latest office control update is set to FALSE (0). Display Office Config * Ctrl Latch Arrow Key Up Down 100373-010 AR0 Function Comment Go to Office Config. N/A Left Go to Office Config * Number Ind. Right Go to Office Config * Ind Delay. Press the ENTER Key to set Control Latching. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the Control Latching. Once the Office Control Latching has been set, press the ENTER key. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-131 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Ind Delay The Ind Delay Menu provides the ability to display and set the time indications are accumulated for an office indication report after one or more indication changes are detected. Delays of 0 to 10 seconds in half second increments are supported. Display Office Config * Ind Delay Arrow Key Up Down Function Comment Go to Office Config. N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the Indication Delay. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the Indication Delay. Once the Office Indication Delay has been set, press the ENTER key. Left Go to Office Config * Ctrl Latch. Right Go to Office Config * ATCS Config. ATCS Config The ATCS Config Menu provides access to ATCS specific configuration parameters. Display Arrow Key Function Up Go to Office Config. Down Go to ATCS Config * CPC Protocol. Left Go to Office Config * Ind Delay. Right 5-132 Office Config * ATCS Config Comment Go to Message Counts. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Message Counts The Message Counts Menu allows you to reset and display performance monitoring counts for the following items: • • • • • Rx Valid (number valid incoming messages received since local or the last counter reset) Rx Invalid (number of invalid incoming messages received since local or the last counter reset) Resend (number of resent messages since local or the last counter reset) Link Fail (number of times Link Fail has been set since local or the last counter reset) Code Fail (number of times Code Fail has been set since local or the last counter reset) Display Message Counts Port= Office Arrow Key Up Down Function Comment Go to Office Config. Go to Message Counts * RX Valid. Left Go to Office Config * ATCS Config. Right Go to Office Config * Set Office Defaults. Continue pressing the Down arrow key to cycle through all message counts Set Office Defaults The Set Office Defaults Menu provides the ability to restore application office protocol default settings. Display Set Office Defaults Arrow Key Up Down Left Right 100373-010 AR0 Function Comment Go to Office Config. N/A Press the ENTER Key to restore application office protocol defaults. Press ENTER key a second time to confirm the changes or the CANCEL key to retain the current settings. Go to Message Counts. Go to Office Config * Protocol. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-133 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 CPC Protocol The CPC Protocol Menu provides the ability to display and set the ATCS messages to be utilized for office communications. Two options are available: protocol 1 is a pre-standards message set provided for backward compatibility and protocol 2 (recommended) utilizes the standard ATCS S250 message set. Display ATCS Config * CPC Protocol Arrow Key Up Down Function Comment Go to Office Config * ATCS Config. N/A Left Go to ATCS Config * Page Size. Right Go to ATCS Config * Address Id. Press the ENTER Key to set the CPC Protocol. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the CPC Protocol. Once the CPC Protocol has been set, press the ENTER key. Address Id The Address Id Menu provides the ability to display and set source ID address field for MCP and station ATCS network addresses. Display Arrow Key Up Down 5-134 ATCS Config * Address Id Function Comment Go to Office Config * ATCS Config. N/A Left Go to ATCS Config * CPC Protocol. Right Go to ATCS Config * Addr Length. Press the ENTER Key to set the Address Id. Once the Address Id has been set, press the ENTER key. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Addr Length The Addr Length Menu provides the ability to display and set the address length for MCP and station network addresses. Display Arrow Key Up Down ATCS Config * Railroad Id Function Comment Go to Office Config * ATCS Config. N/A Left Go to ATCS Config * Address Id. Right Go to ATCS Config * Railroad Id. Press the ENTER Key to set the Address Length. Once the Address Length has been set, press the ENTER key. Railroad Id The Railroad Id Menu provides the ability to display and set the railroad identifier used in ATCS addresses to the unique value assigned to the railroad company. Display Arrow Key Up Down 100373-010 AR0 ATCS Config * Address Length Function Comment Go to Office Config * ATCS Config. N/A Left Go to ATCS Config * Addr Length. Right Go to ATCS Config * Station Addr. Press the ENTER Key to set the Railroad Id. Once the Railroad Id has been set, press the ENTER key. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-135 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Station Addr The Station Addr Menu provides the ability to display and set the station address field of the station network address. Display Arrow Key Up Down ATCS Config * Station Addr Function Comment Go to Office Config * ATCS Config. N/A Left Go to ATCS Config * Railroad Id. Right Go to ATCS Config * Station Node. Press the ENTER Key to set the Station Address. Once the Station Address has been set, press the ENTER key. Station Node The Station Node Menu provides the ability to display and set the station node field of the station network address. Display ATCS Config * Station Node Comment Arrow Key Function Up Down 5-136 Go to Office Config * ATCS Config. N/A Left Go to ATCS Config * Station Addr. Right Go to ATCS Config * MCP Addr. Press the ENTER Key to set the Station Node. Once the Station Node has been set, press the ENTER key. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program MCP Addr The MCP Addr Menu provides the ability to display and set the MCP address field of the MCP network address. Display Arrow Key Up Down ATCS Config * MCP Addr Function Comment Go to Office Config * ATCS Config. N/A Left Go to ATCS Config * Station Node. Right Go to ATCS Config * MCP Node. Press the ENTER Key to set the MCP Address. Once the MCP Address has been set, press the ENTER key. MCP Node The MCP Node Menu provides the ability to display and set the MCP node field of the MCP network. address Display Arrow Key Up Down 100373-010 AR0 ATCS Config * MCP Node Function Comment Go to Office Config * ATCS Config. N/A Left Go to ATCS Config * MCP Addr. Right Go to ATCS Config * Office Addr. Press the ENTER Key to set the MCP Node. Once the MCP Node has been set, press the ENTER key. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-137 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Office Addr The Office Addr Menu provides the ability to display and set the Office address field of the Office network address. Display Arrow Key Up Down ATCS Config * Office Addr Function Comment Go to Office Config * ATCS Config. N/A Left Go to ATCS Config * MCP Node. Right Go to ATCS Config * Office Node. Press the ENTER Key to set the Office Address. Once the Office Address has been set, press the ENTER key. Office Node The Office Node Menu provides the ability to display and set the Office node field of the Office network. address. Display Arrow Key Up Down 5-138 ATCS Config * Office Node Function Comment Go to Office Config * ATCS Config. N/A Left Go to ATCS Config * Office Addr. Right Go to ATCS Config * CDC Addr. Press the ENTER Key to set the Office Node. Once the Office Node has been set, press the ENTER key. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program CDC Addr The CDC Addr Menu provides the ability to display and set the CDC address field of the CDC network address. Display Arrow Key Up Down ATCS Config * CDC Addr Function Comment Go to CDC Config * ATCS Config. N/A Left Go to ATCS Config * Office Node. Right Go to ATCS Config * CDC Node. Press the ENTER Key to set the CDC Address. Once the CDC Address has been set, press the ENTER key. CDC Node The CDC Node Menu provides the ability to display and set the CDC node field of the CDC network. address. Display Arrow Key Up Down 100373-010 AR0 ATCS Config * CDC Node Function Comment Go to CDC Config * ATCS Config. N/A Left Go to ATCS Config * CDC Addr. Right Go to ATCS Config * Ind Refresh. Press the ENTER Key to set the CDC Node. Once the CDC Node has been set, press the ENTER key. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-139 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Ind Refresh The Ind Refresh Menu provides the ability to display and set the rate (in minutes) at which autonomous indication messages are transmitted to the office. Display Arrow Key Up Down ATCS Config * Ind Refresh Function Comment Go to CDC Config * ATCS Config. N/A Left Go to ATCS Config * CDC Node. Right Go to ATCS Config * Ind Priority. Press the ENTER Key to set the Indication Refresh rate. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the Indication Refresh rate. Once the Indication Refresh rate has been set, press the ENTER key. Ind Priority The Ind Priority Menu provides the ability to display and set the priority level for indication messages transmitted to the office. Display ATCS Config * Ind Pririty Comment Arrow Key Function Up Down 5-140 Go to CDC Config * ATCS Config. N/A Left Go to ATCS Config * Ind Refresh. Right Go to ATCS Config * Log Priority. Press the ENTER Key to set the Indication Priority. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the Indication Priority. Once the Indication Priority has been set, press the ENTER key. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Log Priority The Log Priority Menu provides the ability to display and set the priority level for remote log reports messages transmitted to the office. Display Arrow Key Up Down ATCS Config * Log Pririty Function Comment Go to CDC Config * ATCS Config. N/A Left Go to ATCS Config * Ind Priority. Right Go to ATCS Config * Page Size. Press the ENTER Key to set the Log Priority. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the Log Priority. Once the Log Priority has been set, press the ENTER key. Page Size The Page Size Menu provides the ability to display and set the number of lines of log entries included in pages of remote log reports transmitted to the office. Display ATCS Config * Page Size Comment Arrow Key Function Up Down 100373-010 AR0 Go to CDC Config * ATCS Config. N/A Left Go to ATCS Config * Log Priority. Right Go to ATCS Config * CPC Protocol. Press the ENTER Key to set the Page Size. Once the Page Size has been set, press the ENTER key. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-141 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Local Control Panel Configuration Figure 5-58, Local Control Panel Configuration Menu The Local Control Configuration Panel Menu allows access to menus for enabling the LCP port. Display LCP Configuration Arrow Key Up Function Comment Go to System Configuration. Down Go to LCP Enabled. Left Go to Office Config. Right Go to HAWK Config. LCP Enabled The LCP Enabled Menu provides the ability to display and enable or disable the LCP port. Display LCP Configuration* Enabled = Arrow Key Up 5-142 Function Comment Go to LCP Configuration. Down N/A Left N/A Right N/A Press the ENTER Key to enable LCP Enable setting changes. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select LCP Enabled or Disabled. Once the LCP Enable has been set, press the ENTER key. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program HAWK Interface Configuration HAWK Configuration HAWK Serial Number * 373-0517 Figure 5-59, HAWK Interface Configuration Menu The HAWK Interface Configuration Menu allows access to menus for setting the HAWK Serial Number. Display HAWK Configuration Arrow Key Up Function Comment Go to System Configuration. Down Go to HAWK Serial Number * Left Right Go to Local Control Panel. Go to Vital Remote Ports. HAWK Serial Number The HAWK Configuration Menu provides the ability to display and set the HAWK Serial Number. The HAWK recorder requires this Serial Number to be configured in both the HAWK recorder and ElectroLogIXS/EC5 before event recording across the HAWK serial interface can occur. The serial number may contain any combination of up to twenty alphabetic, numeric, and special characters. Entering a space terminates the serial number. Display HAWK Serial Number * Arrow Key Up 100373-010 AR0 Function Comment Go to HAWK Configuration. Down N/A Left Right N/A N/A Press the ENTER Key to enter the HAWK Serial Number. Use the numeric keypad to enter characters and the RIGHT key to move to the next character. Once the HAWK Serial Number has been set, press the ENTER key. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-143 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Vital Remote Configuration The Vital Remote Configuration Menu allows access to the menus for display and modification of non-vital configuration for each remote port and device defined in the application. See Figure 5-60 and Figure 5-61. Display Vital Remote Config Arrow Key Up Down Function Comment N/A Go to Vital Remote Port Settings. Left Displays another Functional Heading. Right Displays another Functional Heading. Vital Remote Port Settings This menu provides the ability to display and set the non-vital port parameters for the Serial/Ethernet remotes. Display Vital Remote Port Settings Arrow Key Up Down Left Right Function Comment Go to Vital Remote Config. Go to Vital Remote Serial Port #. If no Serial Port remotes are in the application, this key will go to the Ethernet Port menu. Go to Vital Remote Set NV Defaults. Go to MAC Switchover. Vital Remote Set NV Defaults This menu provides the ability to display and set the non-vital parameters to the application default values for the remotes. Display Vital Remote * Set NV Defaults Arrow Key Up Down Left Right 5-144 Function Comment Go to Vital Remote Config. N/A Press the ENTER key to go to the Set Remote Defaults confirmation menu. Press ENTER again to set the values to the application default settings. Press CANCEL to retain the current settings. Go to MAC Switchover. Go to Vital Remote Port Settings. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program MAC Switchover This menu provides the ability to display and set the non-vital parameters associated with MAC Switchover for the remotes. Display MAC Switchover Arrow Key Up Down Left Right Function Comment Go to Vital Remote Config. Go to MAC Switchover MMST. Go to Vital Remote Port Settings. Go to Vital Remote Set NV Defaults. MMST (Maximum MAC Switchover Time) This menu provides the ability to display and set the MMST value. The MMST may be set from 1 second to 2 hours. The MMST is the maximum amount of time that messages will be accepted with MACs generated from either the new or the pre-existing MAC keys once MAC key switchover is enabled. Display MAC Switchover * MMST=nnnn Arrow Key Up Down Left Right Function Comment Go to MAC Switchover. N/A Press the ENTER key to set the MMST value. Enter the value in seconds, and then press the ENTER key to select the MMST value. Go to Delete Old Key Vault. Go to Switchover Enable. Switchover Enable This menu provides the ability to enable/start MAC Switchover. Enabling the MAC Switchover starts the timer to run for MMST period of time, during which messages will be accepted with MACs generated from either the new or the pre-existing MAC keys. Display Switchover Enable Arrow Key Up Down Left Right 100373-010 AR0 Function Comment Go to MAC Switchover. N/A Press the ENTER key to enable switchover. Go to MAC Switchover MMST. Go to Switchover Restart. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-145 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Switchover Restart This menu provides the ability to re-start MAC Switchover. Restarting MAC Switchover restarts the timer to run for MMST period of time, during which messages will be accepted with MACs generated from either the new or the pre-existing MAC keys. Display Switchover Restart Arrow Key Up Down Function Comment Go to MAC Switchover. N/A Press the ENTER key to restart switchover. Left Go to Switchover Enable. Right Go to Switchover Cancel. Switchover Cancel This menu provides the ability to cancel MAC Switchover. Canceling MAC Switchover will stop the MAC Switchover timer. Display Switchover Cancel Arrow Key Up Down Left Right Function Comment Go to MAC Switchover. N/A Press the ENTER key to stop switchover. Go to Switchover Restart. Go to Delete Old Key Vault. Delete Old Key Vault This menu provides the ability to delete the old MAC vault keys. Display Delete Old Key Vault Arrow Key Up Down Left Right 5-146 Function Comment Go to MAC Switchover. N/A Press the ENTER key to delete the old MAC vault keys. Go to Switchover Cancel. Go to MAC Switchover MMST. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Vital Remote Ports (Serial Ports) This menu provides the ability to set the non-vital parameters for each remote port and device in the application. Vital Remote Config Vital Remote * Set NV Defaults Vital Remote Port Settings MAC Switchover Set Remote Defaults ENTER/YES CANCEL/NO Vital Remote Ethernet Port MAC Switchover * MMST= Vital Remote Serial Port 2 Port Statistics * Vital Remote Serial Port 3 Remote Port Confg Switchover Enable ENTER/YES Switchover Restart ENTER/YES Delete Old Key Vault ENTER/YES Switchover Cancel ENTER/YES Attached Remote(s) Remote Port Confg * Local Addr = Remote Port Confg * Mode = Remote Port Confg * Type = Remote Port Confg * Baud Rate = Remote Port Confg * Parity = Remote Port Confg * Stop Bits = Attached Remote * Remote n Attached Remote * Remote 1 Attached Remote * Remote 2 Attached Remote * Address = Attached Remote * Date Update= Attached Remote * Poll Timeout= Attached Remote * MAC= Attached Remote * Use New Key= Attached Remote Msg MAC= Figure 5-60, Vital Remote Port Menu - Serial Port Vital Remote Serial Port The Vital Remote menu provides the ability to configure each serial port in your application. Display Arrow Key Up Down Left Right 100373-010 AR0 Vital Remote Serial Port # Function Comment Go to Vital Remote Port Settings. Go to Remote Port Config. Go to previous vital remote port. Only available if more than one port is installed in your system. Go to next vital remote port. Only available if more than one port is installed in your system. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-147 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Remote Port Configuration The Remote Port Configuration menu provides the ability to configure the port. Each port requires setup. Display Remote Port Config Arrow Key Up Down Left Right Function Comment Go to Vital Remote Port n. Go to Remote Port Config Mode. Go to Port Statistics. Go to Attached Remote(s). Mode This menu provides the ability to select the link mode. The mode may be set to Point to Point, Multi-drop Slave, or Multi-drop Master. Display Remote Port Config * Mode = xxxxx Arrow Key Up Down Left Right Function Comment Go to Remote Port Config. N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the Mode. Use the UP or DOWN arrow keys to select Point to Point, Multi- drop Slave, or Multi-drop Master. Once the Mode has been set press the ENTER Key. Go to Remote Port Config Local Addr. Go to Remote Port Config Type. Type This menu provides the ability to display and set the Vital Port Type. The type may be asynchronous, synchronous internal clock, or synchronous external clock. Display Remote Port Config * Type = xxxxx Arrow Key Up Down Left Right 5-148 Function Comment Go to Remote Port Config. N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the Type. Use the UP or DOWN arrow keys to select asynchronous, synchronous internal clock, or synchronous external clock. Once the Type has been set press the ENTER Key. Go to Remote Port Config Mode. Go to Remote Port Config Baud Rate. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Baud Rate This menu provides the ability to set the Baud Rate of the Vital Remote Port. Note that if the Baud Rate is set too low for the amount of data to be exchanged, unreliable communication can result. Asynchronous, point-to-point connections sending more than 60 statuses (one way) should use 2400 baud or greater. Point-to-multi-point connections should use 9600 baud or greater. Display Remote Port Config * Baud Rate = nnnnn Arrow Key Up Down Function Comment Go to Remote Port Config. N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the Remote Port Baud Rate setting. Use the UP and DOWN keys to select a baud rate. Once the Baud Rate has been set, press the ENTER Key. Left Go to Remote Port Config Type. Right Go to Remote Port Config Parity. Parity This menu provides the ability to display and set the Parity of the Vital Remote Port. Parity may be set to Even (even parity), Odd (odd parity), or None (no parity). Display Remote Port Config * Parity = xxxx Arrow Key Up Down Left Right Function Comment Go to Remote Port Config. N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the Remote Port Parity setting. Use the UP or DOWN arrow keys to set the parity to None, Even, or Odd. Once the Parity has been set press the ENTER Key. Go to Remote Port Config Baud Rate. Go to Remote Port Config Stop Bits. Stop Bits This menu provides the ability to display and set the number of Stop Bits of the Vital Remote Port. The number of Stop Bits may be set to 1, 1.5, or 2. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-149 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Display Remote Port Config * Stop Bits = n Arrow Key Up Down Function Comment Go to Remote Port Config. N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the Remote Port number of Stop Bits. Use the UP or DOWN arrow keys to set the Stop Bits to 1, 1.5, or 2. Once the number of Stop Bits has been set press the ENTER Key. Left Go to Remote Port Config Parity. Right Go to Remote Port Config Local Addr. Local Address This menu provides the ability to display and set the local address. The address can be set from 0 to 63. Display Remote Port Config * Local Addr = nn Arrow Key Up Down Left Right Function Comment Go to Remote Port Config. N/A Press the ENTER Key to select Local Address. Enter the address and press the ENTER key. Go to Remote Port Config Stop Bits. Go to Remote Port Config Mode. Attached Remote(s) This menu provides the ability to configure each attached remote device. Setup is required for each attached remote. Display Arrow Key Up Down Left Right 5-150 Attached Remote(s) Function Comment Go to Vital Remote Port n. Attached Remote Remote 1 Go to Remote Port Config. Go to Port Statistics. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Remote 1 This menu provides the ability to select the Remote device to configure. Display Attached Remote * Remote 1 Arrow Key Up Down Left Right Function Comment Go to Attached Remote(s). Go to Attached Remote Date Update. Go to previous attached remote. Only available if more than one attached remote. Go to next attached remote. Only available if more one attached remote. Date Update This menu selects whether the remote date update is enabled or disabled. If Enabled, a date/time update message is sent when the system clock changes or when an update was not sent in the last 24 hours. Display Attached Remote * Date Update = xxxxxxxx Arrow Key Up Down Left Right Function Comment Go to Attached Remote n. N/A Press the ENTER key to select the Date Update mode. Use the UP or DOWN arrow keys to select Enabled or Disabled. Press the ENTER key to select the mode. Go to attached remote Address. Go to attached remote Poll Timeout. Poll Timeout This menu provides the ability to display and set the Poll Timeout. The Poll Timeout may be set from 10 to 500 mS. The minimum value for Poll Timeout is the time to send a message plus 10 mS. Display Attached Remote * Poll Timeout = nnn Arrow Key Up Down Left Right 100373-010 AR0 Function Comment Go to Attached Remote n. N/A Press the ENTER key to set the Poll Timeout. Enter the value and then press the ENTER key to select the Poll Timeout. Go to attached remote Date Update. Go to attached remote Msg MAC. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-151 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Msg MAC This menu provides a display of the state of MAC that is included in the incoming vital remote messages. If MAC switchover is in progress, it displays NEW or OLD, based on whether MAC is based on the newly loaded MAC Vault or based on the pre-existing MAC Vault, or displays No if the incoming vital remote messages do not include the MAC. If MAC switchover is not in progress, it displays Yes or No, based on whether or not MAC is included in the vital remote messages. Display Attached Remote Msg MAC = NEW / OLD / Yes / No Arrow Key Up Down Left Right Function Comment Go to Attached Remote n. N/A Go to attached remote Poll Timeout. Go to attached remote Use New Key. Use New Key This menu provides the ability to display and set the Use New Key. If MAC switchover is in progress, selecting the ‘Yes’ option will enable the sending of vital remote messages with MAC based on the newly loaded MAC Vault, and selecting the ‘No’ option will enable the sending of vital remote messages with MAC based on the pre-existing MAC Vault. Display Attached Remote * Use New Key = xxx Arrow Key Up Down Left Right Function Comment Go to Attached Remote n. N/A Press the ENTER key to set the Use New Key to Yes/No. Enter the value and then press the ENTER key to select the Use New Key. Go to attached remote Msg MAC. Go to attached remote MAC Enable/ Disable. MAC Enable / Disable This menu provides the ability to display and set MAC enable/disable. This option is used to enable or disable sending of MAC in vital remote messages. 5-152 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Display Attached Remote * MAC = xxxxxxxx Arrow Key Up Down Function Comment Go to Attached Remote n. N/A Press the ENTER key to set the MAC to Enabled/Disabled. Enter the value and then press the ENTER key to select MAC enable/disable. Left Go to attached remote Use New Key. Right Go to attached remote Address. Address This menu provides the ability to display and set the remote device address. The address can be set from 0 to 63. This is a message network address for RP2000/RP2009 multi-drop messages. Display Attached Remote * Address = nn Arrow Key Up Down Left Right Function Comment Go to Attached Remote n. N/A Press the ENTER key to set the address. Enter the address and press the ENTER key. Go to attached remote MAC Enable/ Disable. Go to attached remote Date Update. Port Statistics This menu provides the ability to display Port Statistics. Display Arrow Key Up Down Port Statistics * Function Go to Vital Remote Port n. Go to a list of Port Statistics. Left Go to Attached Remote(s). Right Go to Remote Port Config. 100373-010 AR0 Comment At Port Statistics, press the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to view a variety of port statistic values. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-153 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Vital Remote Ports (Ethernet) This menu provides the ability to setup the Ethernet communication to the remote devices in the application. Vital Remote Config Vital Remote * Set Defaults Vital Remote Port Settings Set Remote Defaults ENTER/YES CANCEL/NO MAC Switchover MAC Switchover * MMST= Switchover Enable ENTER/YES Switchover Restart ENTER/YES Delete Old Key Vault ENTER/YES Switchover Cancel ENTER/YES Vital Remote Ethernet Port Vital Remote Serial Port 2 Vital Remote Serial Port 3 Remote Port Config Attached Remote(s) Port Statistics * Attached Remote * Remote 1 Attached Remote * Remote 2 Attached Remote * Date Update= Attached Remote Msg MAC= Attached Remote * Use New Key= Attached Remote * Port=8280 Attached Remote * IP=xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Attached Remote * MAC= Remote Port Config * Mode=Ethernet PTP Attached Remote * Remote n Figure 5-61, Vital Remote Port Menu - Ethernet Port Remote Port Configuration For Ethernet remotes, the Remote Port Configuration menu only displays the communication mode. Since the only mode available is Ethernet Point to Point, no change is available from this menu. 5-154 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Attached Remote(s) This menu provides the ability to configure each attached remote device. Setup is required for each attached remote. Display Arrow Key Up Down Left Right Attached Remote(s) Function Comment Go to Vital Remote Port n. Attached Remote Remote 1 Go to Remote Port Config. Go to Port Statistics. Remote 1 This menu provides the ability to select the Remote device to configure. Display Arrow Key Up Down Left Right Attached Remote * Remote 1 Function Comment Go to Attached Remote(s). Go to Attached Remote Date Update. Go to previous attached remote. Only available if more than one attached remote. Go to next attached remote. Only available if more one attached remote. Date Update This menu selects whether the remote date update is enabled or disabled. If Enabled, a date/time update message is sent when the system clock changes or when an update was not sent in the last 24 hours. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-155 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Display Attached Remote * Date Update = xxxxxxxx Arrow Key Up Down Left Right Function Comment Go to Attached Remote n. N/A Press the ENTER key to select the Date Update mode. Use the UP or DOWN arrow keys to select Enabled or Disabled. Press the ENTER key to select the mode. Go to attached remote Port Number. Go to attached remote Msg MAC. Msg MAC This menu provides a display of the state of MAC that is included in the incoming vital remote messages. If MAC switchover is in progress, it displays NEW or OLD, based on whether MAC is based on the newly loaded MAC Vault or based on the pre-existing MAC Vault, or displays No if the incoming vital remote messages do not include the MAC. If MAC switchover is not in progress, it displays Yes or No, based on whether or not MAC is included in the vital remote messages. Display Attached Remote Msg MAC = NEW / OLD / Yes / No Arrow Key Up Down Left Right Function Comment Go to Attached Remote n. N/A Go to attached remote Date Update. Go to attached remote Use New Key. Use New Key This menu provides the ability to display and set the Use New Key. If MAC switchover is in progress, selecting the ‘Yes’ option will enable the sending of vital remote messages with MAC based on the newly loaded MAC Vault, and selecting the ‘No’ option will enable the sending of vital remote messages with MAC based on the pre-existing MAC Vault. 5-156 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program Display Attached Remote * Use New Key = xxx Arrow Key Up Down Left Right Function Comment Go to Attached Remote n. N/A Press the ENTER key to set the Use New Key to Yes/No, and then press the ENTER key to select the Use New Key. Go to attached remote Msg MAC. Go to attached remote MAC Enable/ Disable. MAC Enable / Disable This menu provides the ability to display and set MAC enable/disable. This option is used to enable or disable sending of MAC in vital remote messages. Display Attached Remote * MAC = xxxxxxxx Arrow Key Up Down Left Right Function Comment Go to Attached Remote n. N/A Press the ENTER key to set the MAC to Enabled/Disabled. Enter the value and then press the ENTER key to select the MAC. Go to attached remote Use New Key. Go to attached remote IP Address. IP Address This menu provides the means to set the IP address of the attached remote. The format of the address is four address values separated by periods (e.g. 192.168.1.12). An entered value must be in the range of 0 to 255 and all four values must be entered or the address will not be accepted. If a particular value is less than three digits, use the right arrow key to advance to the next number position. The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 address is the DHCP Server IP Address on the interface connected to the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. To view the DHCP Server IP Address, open command prompt window and enter “ipconfig /all” command. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-157 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Display Attached Remote * IP = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn Arrow Key Up Down Function Comment Go to Attached Remote n. N/A Press the ENTER key to change the Attached Remote’s IP address. Use the numeric keypad to enter the values of the address. Use the RIGHT arrow key to advance to the next address value. Use the LEFT arrow key to clear erroneous digit entries or move to the previous value. Press the ENTER key to confirm the IP Address update. Press CANCEL to retain the current setting. Left Go to attached remote MAC Enable/ Disable. Right Go to attached remote Port Number. Port Number This menu provides the ability to display and set the Port Number used for vital communication (both sending and receiving) with the attached remote. Note that communication problems will result if an Attached Remote has the same IP address AND the same Port # as another Attached Remote. Display Attached Remote * Port = nnnn Arrow Key Up Down Left Right 5-158 Function Comment Go to Attached Remote n. N/A Press the ENTER key to change the Port number for the Attached Remote. Use the numeric keypad to enter the Port number value. Press ENTER again to confirm entry. Press CANCEL to retain the current setting. Go to attached remote IP Address. Go to attached remote Date Update. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program EPROM Information Figure 5-62, EPROM Information Menu This menu provides the ability to display the information associated with the application program. Pressing the Right or Left Arrow keys advances the display a full page. Pressing the 1 or 3 Alphanumeric key advance the display 1 character at a time. Display< EPROM Information Arrow Key Function Up Go to SYSTEM CONFIGURATION. Down Go to EPROM CRC and Checksum. Left Go to Vital Remote Ports. Right Comment Go to Executive Information. Application EPROM This menu provides the ability to view EPROM Header Information from the Application EPROM located in the CI Module. Display< Arrow Key Up Down 100373-010 AR0 EPROM EPT CRC = XXXX Checksum=YYYY Function Comment Go to EPROM Information. Displays the Application Header. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-159 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Executive Information Figure 5-63, Executive Information Menu (VPM-3) This menu provides the ability to display the status of the application Executive Firmware. Note: With the VPM-2, Executive Information is located under the EPROM Information Menu. Display< Executive Information Arrow Key Up Function Go to SYSTEM CONFIGURATION. Down Go to VPM A- Processor. Left Go to EPROM Information. Right Comment Go to Recorder Battery. VPM A-Processor This menu provides the ability to view Executive Header Information from Processor A on the VPM Module. Display< Arrow Key Up Function Comment Go to EPROM Information. Down Displays the VPM's A-Processor's Executive Header Information. Left Go to CDU Processor. Right 5-160 VPM A-Processor Go to VPM B-Processor. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 CDU Program VPM B-Processor This menu provides the ability to view Executive Header Information from Processor B on the VPM Module. Display< VPM B-Processor Arrow Key Up Function Comment Go to Executive Information. Down Displays the VPM's B-Processor's Executive Header Information. Left Go to VPM A-Processor. Right Go to VPM C-Processor. VPM C-Processor This menu provides the ability to view Executive Header Information from Processor C on the VPM Module. Display< Arrow Key Up VPM C-Processor Function Go to Executive Information. Down Displays the VPM's C-Processor Executive Header Information. Left Go to VPM B-Processor. Right Comment Go to VTI DSP D-Processor. CDU Processor This menu provides the ability to view Executive Header Information from the CDU-1. Display< Arrow Key Up Function Comment Go to Executive Information. Down Displays the CDU-1 Executive Header. Left Go to VTI DSP E-Processor. Right 100373-010 AR0 CDU Processor Go to VPM A-Processor © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-161 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Default Maintenance Values Default settings for the CDU-1 are listed below. Default Setup Table Setting or Description 5-162 Default Value Possible Values Lamp Output Voltage 10.0 Volts 9.0 to 13.5 Volts in .5 Volt increments Track Transmit Voltage .5 Volts .5 to 4.0 Volts in .5 Volt increments Track Receive Reference 6.14 Amps .5 to 9.99 Amps Diagnostic Port Parity None None, Even, Odd Diagnostic Port Baud Rate 19200 bps 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 34800 Diagnostic Port Stop Bits 1 1, 1.5, 2 Diagnostic Port Data Bits 8 8, 7, 6, 5 Office Port Parity None None, Even, Odd Office Port Baud Rate various bps 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 34800 Office Port Stop Bits 1 1, 1.5, 2 Office Port Data Bits 8 8, 7, 6, 5 Office Port Protocol Determined by application None, UCE, SCS-1287, Genisys © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 System Operation and Maintenance 100373-010 AR0 VOLUME TWO © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. The information contained in this publication is the property of GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC ("GETS") and is disclosed in confidence. This publication is intended for use by GETS customers solely for purposes of operating, training and performing routine maintenance of purchased or licensed GETS products, and it shall not be reproduced, redistributed, retransmitted, translated, abridged, adapted, condensed, revised or otherwise modified, in any form, in whole or in part, or used for any other purpose or disclosed to others, without the express written consent of GETS. However, if a GETS customer (“Customer”) requires additional copies of this document or portions thereof for internal use, GETS hereby grants to Customer a limited right to reproduce this publication, in whole or in part, and Customer agrees to use such authorized copies (“Copies”) solely for its intended purposes. Any Copies made under this limited reproduction right shall contain this notice and any other legal notices appearing in this publication. The Customer shall be responsible for complying with U.S. export control laws with respect of distribution of all Copies. GETS and Customer agree that the information contained herein does not purport to cover all details or variations in GETS products or to provide for every possible contingency with installation, operation or maintenance. Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise that are not covered sufficiently for the user’s purposes, the matter should be referred to GETS. Any applicable Federal, State or local regulations or company safety or operating rules must take precedence over any information or instructions given in the Technical Documentation. GETS has no obligation to keep the material up to date after the original publication. GE TRANSPORTATION SYSTEMS GLOBAL SIGNALING, LLC EXPLICITLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ACCURACY, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE IN CONNECTION WITH THIS PUBLICATION AND USE THEREOF. Reproduction and Use Restrictions Agreement The information contained in this Technical Manual (the “Document”) is the property of GE Transportation Global Signaling (“GETSGS”) and is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws. Any unauthorized use or reproduction of this Document without the prior written consent of GETSGS, whether in hard copy or in an electronic form, is strictly prohibited [except as otherwise set forth below]. Notwithstanding the foregoing, GETSGS hereby grants to the purchaser of the GETSGS equipment, or licensee of the GETSGS software (such purchaser of licensee referred to herein as “You”), to which the Document pertains, the following limited reproduction rights. By reproducing any portion of the Document, You expressly agree to the following terms and conditions. You may make additional copies of the Document solely for use in connection with the GETSGS equipment or GETSGS software to which it pertains, provided that each copy is a complete copy and does not alter the content or meaning of the Document in any way, and provided further that each such copy preserves unaltered all trademark, copyright, patent designations and proprietary or confidentiality notices contained therein, including this Reproduction and Use Restrictions Agreement. Any other use or reproduction of any portion of the Document without the prior written authorization of GETSGS is expressly prohibited. Without limiting any other rights or remedies of GETSGS, in the event that You or any of Your employees, agents or contractors copies any portion of the Document in violation of this Reproduction and Use Restrictions Agreement, You agree to indemnify, defend and hold harmless GETSGS from and against any and all claims, damages, losses, liabilities and expenses (including reasonable attorney’s fees) that may be incurred or awarded by reason thereof. Revision History This document supersedes all previously issued versions, providing new or revised information. The most recent publication can be determined by comparing the last three characters at the end of the part number and the date issued. ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 System Operation and Maintenance Part Number: 100373-010 AR0 Revision Level Date Issued AA0 02/28/03 Initial Release AB0 02/01/05 Re-brand manual revise track circuit transmit and receive procedure. AC0 02/01/06 Added new modules (VLD-R16S, VIO-44R, and VIO-86S) AD0 01/16/07 Minor typographical errors fixed AE0 07/02/07 Updated ElectrologIXS CIO key Pins to remove when CIO-2A and CIO-MDA are installed in the system and also updated as per the markup’s. AF0 12/03/07 Incorporated VPM-3 module, CI-2 module and Web GUI information. AG0 04/16/08 Added CI-2 Flash Memory application download. AH0 06/16/08 Incorporated 4-Slot Chassis. AI0 09/08/08 Added BCS Protocol and description of CIO-2AB module. AJ0 12/03/08 Incorporated Connector Probing and 1-Slot Chassis. AK0 12/15/08 Incorporated Connector Probing and 4-Slot Chassis. AL0 06/01/09 Update for EDVP release of ElectroLogIXS. AM0 08/26/09 Update for EDVP 2 release of ElectroLogIXS. AN0 03/08/10 Added DHCP Server Details. AO0 05/19/10 Added EC5 Details. AP0 09/07/10 Add PTC Functionality. AQ0 07/01/11 Added PTC2, 100373-U001, 100373-U002, and 100373-U003 Updates. AR0 10/25/12 Added PTC3 Updates. General Description of Changes © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. Important Information Important Information Conventions Safety Alert Symbols The symbol indicates that important personal safety information follows. Carefully read this text for the warnings information it contains. The signal word next to each safety alert symbol is defined as: WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. This signal word may also be used to identify unsafe practices. Static Sensitive Symbols for Equipment Handling Instructions The and symbols indicate important handling guidelines established by the AREMA (American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association) for proper handling of electronic equipment modules and sensitive components for the prevention of potential damage that could be caused by ESD (electrostatic discharge) during routine maintenance, handling and transportation. Module ESD Notice To protect against ESD damage to electronic equipment containing modules, follow the field procedures in AREMA C&S Manual, Part 11.4.5. Failure to use protective measures could result in permanent equipment damage, either immediate or latent, when handling modules. Component ESD Notice To protect against ESD damage to electronic equipment containing components, follow the field procedures in AREMA C&S Manual, Part 11.4.5. Failure to use recommended protective measures could result in permanent equipment damage, either immediate or latent, when handling components. Important/Notable Information Important: Indicates an operating procedure, practice, or condition which, if not strictly followed, may cause equipment damage. Note: Indicates additional information or emphasizes a topic related to the subject being discussed. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. iii ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 General Safety Instructions WARNING No information in this manual supersedes or replaces your railroad’s operating rules. If there is a difference in instructions between this manual and the railroad’s operating rules, follow the most restrictive instruction. Only qualified personnel should work on or around this equipment. To ensure the highest degree of safety, all personnel are required to become thoroughly familiar with all personal safety instructions contained in this manual. Successful and safe operation of this equipment is dependent upon correct handling, operation, maintenance, repair, and application of associated railroad equipment. Deliberate misuse or abuse of electronic equipment and components may result in death or serious injury Do not use this equipment until you are sure the application logic is properly programmed and functionally tested. Test it according to United States DOT (Department of Transportation) FRA (Federal Railroad Administration) Code of Federal Regulation, Title 49 procedures, or other equivalent tests, as deemed necessary by other appropriate regulatory agencies. Railroad Configuration Management Procedures must ensure that all ElectroLogIXS/EC5 units are configured with the proper revisions of modules and firmware (application, PTC, and executive) and that updates are completed in a timely manner when made available by GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling. Operating with incorrect firmware may result in death or serious injury. Timely is defined as without undue delay per 49 CFR 236.1023(j). Railroad Configuration Management Procedures must ensure that the proper values are set for each vital timer, vital configuration setting (vital soft switches), PTC applicability setting, PTC debounce time, PTC WIU address, and vital remote parameter in their ElectroLogIXS/EC5 units. Incorrect settings may result in death or serious injury. Updating or modifying modules, firmware, and values (both application and executive) must be performed by qualified personnel that are physically present at the site being updated. Track circuit troubleshooting interferes with signal system operation. Always obtain proper authorization prior to performing track circuit troubleshooting. If any failure of the equipment is detected, it is the railroads responsibility to ensure the failure is reported in a timely manner. Once the failure is reported the appropriate steps must be taken to ensure the equipment is repaired or replaced promptly. Failure to report and repair unit/module in a timely fashion may result in death or serious injury. Timely is defined as without undue delay per 49 CFR 236.1023(j). Follow your railroad's operating rules while moving a locomotive with inoperative equipment or during irregular operating situations. Failure to follow your railroad’s operating rules may result in death or serious injury. iv © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Important Information FCC Compliance This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequence energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. CAUTION Modifications or changes not expressly approved by GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling could affect the compliance of the equipment with the FCC Rules and void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Foreword There are no electronic components or modules in the ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 system that can be repaired by the customer. Defective or damaged modules should be sent to GE Transportation Global Signaling, Customer Service Department, 2712 S. Dillingham Road, Grain Valley, MO 64029-0600. Technical Support GE Transportation Global Signaling will accept telephone calls between 7:30 AM and 5:30 PM CST. Call TOLL FREE (800) 825-7090 regarding installation, maintenance, calibration, adjustment, or repair of any components. Scope GE Transportation Global Signaling, Technical Information Department under the direction of the designated equipment Product Manager, issues this document. The manual introduces you to the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 by providing specific information related to Installation, Maintenance, Troubleshooting, CDU Program, Web Graphical User Interface, Terminal Program, Retest Guide, Specifications and Appendix A – Ethernet / IP Application Guidelines. Please read carefully and thoroughly understand the instructions and processes before making any adjustments or modifications to the equipment. Carelessness may result in loss of life or property damage. How to Order an Additional Copy or a Revised Printing Additional copies of this document may be ordered by directing all correspondence to GE Transportation Global Signaling, Customer Service Department, 2712 S. Dillingham Road, Grain Valley, MO 64029-0600 or calling (800) 825-7090 or by FAX (816) 650-9501. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. v ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 vi © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Important Information Contents Volume One Chapter 1 – Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Chapter 2 – Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Chapter 3 – Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Chapter 4 – Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Chapter 5 – CDU Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Volume Two Chapter 6 – Web Graphical User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Chapter 7 – Terminal Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Chapter 8 – Secure Shell Program (SSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Chapter 9 – ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Retest Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 Chapter 10 – Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Appendix A – Ethernet / IP Application Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix A-1 Appendix B – Network ID Usage Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-1 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. vii ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 viii © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Chapter 6 – Web Graphical User Interface Contents Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting to the Web GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Web GUI Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Web GUI Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 6-1 6-2 6-3 Main Menu Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Parameter Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Local Presence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Web GUI Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 General Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vital Application and Non-Vital Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PTC Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Boot Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 6-10 6-11 6-12 6-13 6-14 Configuration Main Menu – System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Local Presence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vital Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-Vital Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vital Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Battery Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 6-15 6-22 6-24 6-27 6-28 6-29 6-30 6-31 6-32 6-33 Upload Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34 Apply Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35 Selective Function Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38 PTC Non-Vital Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40 PTC Vital Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-i ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 PTC Applicability Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45 PTC Key Mgmt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46 Configuration - SNMP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Active SNMP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SNMP General Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SNMP Trap Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SNMP Temporary Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47 6-47 6-56 6-58 6-62 I/O Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electro Code Track Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cab Signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Code Select Inputs / Track Decoder Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vital Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ground Fault Detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64 6-64 6-67 6-68 6-69 6-74 6-80 Communication Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82 General Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82 General Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83 Routing Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85 Web Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86 Telnet Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87 SSH Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88 Ethernet Vital Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 89 Ethernet Vital Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90 Ethernet Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91 Ethernet GENISYS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92 Serial Diagnostic Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93 Serial LCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94 Serial Vital Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-95 Serial Vital Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96 Serial Office Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97 Serial UCE Office Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97 Serial SCS-128 Office Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-98 Serial GENISYS Office Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99 Serial BCS Office Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-100 HAWK Interface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-101 Diagnostics Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Live Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure Live Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure PTC Comm Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure Office Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Log Archive Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GDA Data Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-102 6-102 6-102 6-103 6-104 6-105 6-106 6-107 6-108 6-109 6-110 6-111 PTC Comm Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-112 PTC Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-113 6-ii © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface PTC Device State Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Office Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ethernet Vital Comm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ethernet Office Comm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Office Manual Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All Statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Watch Statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-114 6-115 6-116 6-116 6-117 6-118 6-119 6-120 PTC Statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-121 PTC Device State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote Statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Office Statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Local Control Statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vital and Non-Vital Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-122 6-123 6-124 6-125 6-126 6-iii ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 6-iv © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Chapter 6 – Web Graphical User Interface WARNING Unauthorized modification of ElectroLogIXS/EC5 parameters or configuration may result in unsafe conditions that could result in death or serious injury. Responsibility for security of passwords for equipment access lies with the railway authority. Passwords should be of a non-obvious nature and of sufficient length to preclude an unauthorized user from easily guessing the password. Introduction A VPM-3 based ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system provides user access to status, diagnostic, and set-up information via the Web Graphical User Interface (Web GUI). Access to the Web GUI is achieved by connecting to one of the two VPM-3 Ethernet ports, accessing the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 via an Internet web browser, and providing the correct username / password combination. Diagnostic, status, and control of system settings are then available via the various web pages provided by the Web GUI. The loaded application program controls the access to the Web GUI for each of the two Ethernet ports. The application may set a port to “disabled’ (no Web GUI access permitted), Read Only (no parameter changes permitted) or Read & Write access. If the port is disabled, an attempt to access that port with a web browser results in a “You are not authorized to access this device” message being displayed. If the port is set to Read Only, all parameter entries are “grayed-out” allowing the values to be viewed but not changed. Similarly, if a parameter is otherwise not able to be modified (e.g. Local Presence is required but not established) the parameter appears "grayed-out" allowing the value to be viewed but not modified. The emphasis of this section is the operation and usage of the Web GUI interface. While this interface allows the various parameters and settings to be viewed or modified, the discussion of the parameters themselves contained in the CDU section is not repeated. Note also that interface images are for a 9-slot chassis; the additional I/O modules are not applicable on a 4-slot or 1-slot chassis. Connecting to the Web GUI Access to the Web GUI is achieved via entering the IP address of the port in the web browser address bar after either connecting directly to one of the two VPM-3 Ethernet ports or to the network being used by the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system. As noted on the login page, the browser must have JavaScript and cookies enabled for Web GUI access and operation. Note: Some web page status updates may not be visible in Internet Explorer if a Web Content Scanner or a Java SSV Add-on is ENABLED on the web browser. To disable Web Content Scanner in Internet Explorer, go to Tools>Manage Add-ons, and disable the Web Content Scanner and Java SSV Add-on. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-1 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 PTC-ElectrologIXS Login Railroad: undefined Subdivision: undefined Address: Site ID: Chassis ID: When shipped from GETS-GS, the initial settings are: undefined Login ID: admin Password: admin GETS-GS 0 Login ID: Password: Login Note: JavaScript and cookies must be enabled to access this interface. 373-0666 Figure 6-1, Web GUI Login Web GUI Login The Login page displays identifying information for the specific ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system along with entry boxes for Login ID and Password. A checkbox is provided to select PDA page format if desired. Leaving the box unchecked selects the computer page format. ElectroLogIXS/EC5 allows a single user to be logged in at a time. If there is an active session when another user enters login information, the user logging in is informed that another user is already logged on and is asked to either continue or cancel the login process. Selecting “continue” logs the other user out and logs the second user in. Selecting cancel returns the user to the log in page. See Figure 6-2. ElectroLogIXS Login There is an Administrator currently logged on. Do you want to continue to log on? If you continue, the other Administrator will be logged off. Continue Cancel 373-0667 Figure 6-2, Web GUI Login, Other User Session Active 6-2 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Web GUI Navigation The Web GUI pages are divided among four Main Menu categories: General, Configuration, Diagnostics, and Status with the names of these Main Menu categories appearing across the top of each page. Selecting one of the Main Menu categories displays the Side Menu for that category. Selecting an item on the Side Menu displays the web page for that item in the main portion of the screen. See Figure 6-3 for an example web page that depicts these various areas in the computer format of the page. The Main Menu categories are shown at the top with the current selection highlighted. General Configuration System Settings System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Diagnostics Site ID and Chassis ID are shown here on every page Application Local Presence required to modify the parameters on this page. Click Here to request Local Presence Vital Application 001 : vlcmanual-edvpv : CRC#E75D Non-Vital Application 001 : vlcmanual-edvpnv : CRC#3962 Update Settings PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt Modifiable settings are shown as drop-down items, entry fields, or check-boxes as appropriate for the parameter type. Changes are applied by selecting "Update Settings" and confirming the changed values on the next page. Upload Software Apply Software Selective Function Enable Log Off Status Software Update Selective Functionality Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 Selection of a Main Menu category (top) displays the selections for tha Main category on the side menu. t The selected Side Menu item is highlighted and the page title matches the Side Menu term. SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Note: The existence of some Side Menu items is dependent upon the application program. For example, the Non-Vital timers item is not displayed if the application has no Non-Vital Timers defined. Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office Serial Ports Diagnostic 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Figure 6-3, Web GUI Main Menu As a convenience, some pages (e.g. the I/O module pages) have a pair of links on the page that allows navigation to the Configuration, Diagnostics, or Status pages for that item. This feature allows all aspects of an I/O module to be “one-click away” from the current page. See Figure 6-4. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-3 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Diagnostics Slot 5 - VLD-C6S Settings [Diagnostics][Status] Flash Rate 30 FPM Manual Voltage Setup: Links to the Diagnostics and Status page for this VLC-C6S are provided here. Bank 1 Bank Voltage 10.0 Volts 10.0 Volts Bank 2 Bank Voltage Software Update Upload Software Apply Software Log Off Status Update Settings Automated Voltage Setup: Selective Functionality Selective Function Enable Lamp Setup Grant For Module Is Denied. Bank 1 Target Bulb Voltage PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable Volts Start Auto Setup Bank 2 Target Bulb Voltage SNMP Settings 9.5 Last Status None 9.5 Volts Last Status None Start Auto Setup I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office Serial Ports Diagnostic 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Figure 6-4, Web GUI Configuration Menu Main Menu Categories The following paragraphs describe the overall purpose and type of information available under each of the four Main Menu categories. A more detailed description of the pages themselves follows in a later section. General Items under the General menu depict the top-level condition of the system along with the information associated with the software and application program versions. No entries can be made on the pages under the General category. 6-4 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Configuration The Configuration pages allow viewing and modification of the various programmable settings for the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system as well as the individual modules that have settable parameters. The one page that is the exception to this is the System Configuration page, which lists the current values of all the settable parameters. This one page can be printed or saved electronically from the web browser to capture the current values of the system settings. Diagnostics The Diagnostic pages provide for viewing and download of the various ElectroLogIXS/EC5 logs as well as provide access to the diagnostic modes of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 I/O modules such as the test modes for the VLD-R16S or the bank switchover for the VIO-44R. Status The Status pages allow viewing of the current value of the various application statuses in the loaded application program. This page automatically refreshes the display of the status values every two seconds. The “All Statuses” Side Menu selection lists every status in the application in alphanumeric order of the status names. Selecting an I/O Module or Communication Port shows only those statuses associated with that module or that communications channel. Selecting the “Watch” box next to a status name places it under the Watch Statuses Side Menu so that any group of statuses may be selected for more convenient monitoring. Figure 6-5 depicts these items on the All Statuses page. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration All Statuses Watch Statuses Diagnostics All Statuses Page: Page 3 (5-B2L1F-7-CODEOUT2) First Page Prev Page Navigation to the status pages can be done via the page "buttons" or the Page drop-down list. The drop-down list shows the status name of the first and last status on that particular page. PTC PTC Statuses PTC Device State I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm I/O Ethernet Remote Office Serial Ports 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Internal Next Page Last Page Status Name Value Watch 5-B2LIOUT FALSE FALSE Module Health 5-HEALTH TRUE Lamp Normal Mode 5-NORMAL 5-NVIN1 TRUE FALSE Bank 2 Flash Lamp 1 Bank 2 Lamp 1 Out Non-Vital Input 2 5-B2L1F 5-NVOUT1 FALSE 5-NVOUT11 FALSE 5-NVOUT11EN 5-SETUPEN FALSE FALSE Vital Timer Complete 5-SETUPGRANT FALSE Lamp Setup Grant Non-Vital Output 1 Non-Vital Timer Complete Non-Vital Timer Enable Vital Timer Enable 5-SETUPGRANT FALSE Custom Rate 1 50RATE-T1 3rd Pulse Timer Running 50RATE-T2 FALSE FALSE Module Health 6-HEALTH TRUE 6-VIN1 FALSE FALSE Vital Input 1 Vital Output 1 6-VOUT1 Custom Rate 3 7-CAB120 TRUE Custom Rate 1 7-CAB50 7-CAB75 FALSE FALSE 7-CODEOUT2 FALSE Custom Rate 2 Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Statuses are sorted by status name in alpha-numeric order. Pa e 3/6 Description Log Off Status Track Code Decoder Output 2 Selecting "Watch" for a set of statuses allows them to be viewed together on the "Watch Statuses" page. 373-0670 Figure 6-5, Web GUI Status Menu 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-5 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Parameter Update Modification of ElectroLogIXS/EC5 parameters via the Web GUI is a two-step process for any type of parameter. After changing one or more parameters on a given web page, select “Update Settings” below the list of parameters (See Figure 6-6). This selection causes the parameter confirmation page to be displayed for the parameters listed on that specific page. All modifiable parameters on the entry page are shown on the confirmation page with those parameters that have modified values highlighted (See Figure 67). Selecting “Confirm” causes the new parameter values to be accepted. Selecting “Cancel” causes the new values to be rejected. In both cases, the user is returned to the web page being viewed previously. If a parameter change is not confirmed within 60 seconds of selecting “Update Settings”, the modifications are canceled by the system and the previous page is displayed. If an out-of-range entry is submitted or an error occurs during the update process, the Web GUI indicates the type of error. When an error occurs, the requested update is canceled and must be reentered. Some parameter updates may alter the operation of the system or the ability to access the system via the Web GUI in a non-obvious way. When such is the case, an Alert is provided on the confirmation screen to indicate the resulting behavior. Figure 6-8 shows an example of an alert message. In this example case, the current user will be logged out if the change is accepted. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Software Update Upload Software Apply Software Selective Functionality Selective Function Enable Diagnostics Ethernet Settings - General Ethernet Port 1 MAC Address 00:09:91:44:7E:48 IP Address Subnet Mask DHCP Server PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt 192.168.0.11 255.255.255.0 Enabled DHCP Server IP Pool Start 192.168.0.12 DHCP Server IP Pool End 192.168.0.43 DHCP Server Default Gateway 192.168.0.11 Port 2 MAC Address 00:09:91:44:7E:49 IP Address Subnet Mask DHCP Server PTC Log Off Status 192.168.1.12 255.255.255.0 Enabled DHCP Server IP Pool Start 192.168.1.13 DHCP Server IP Pool End 192.168.1.44 DHCP Server Default Gateway 0.0.0.0 Default Gateway 0.0.0.0 SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Update Settings Set Ethernet Settings to the Application Defaults NOTE: Click this button to set all the Ethernet settings to the application defaults. Set Ethernet Defaults Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office Figure 6-6, Configuration - General Ethernet Example 6-6 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration Diagnostics Log Off Status Description Active Value New Value IP Address 1 192.168.0.11 192.168.0.11 255.255.255.0 Subnet Mask 1 255.255.255.0 DHCP Server Port 1 Enabled Enabled DHCP 1 Pool Start 192.168.0.12 192.168.0.12 192.168.0.43 DHCP 1 Pool End 192.168.0.43 DHCP 1 Default Gateway 192.168.0.11 192.168.0.11 IP Address 2 192.168.1.12 192.168.1.10 255.255.255.0 Subnet Mask 2 255.255.255.0 DHCP Server Port 2 Enabled Enabled DHCP 2 Pool Start 192.168.1.13 192.168.1.13 DHCP 2 Pool End 192.168.1.44 192.168.1.44 DHCP 2 Default Gateway 192.168.1.12 192.168.1.12 Default Gateway 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Confirm Active values and New values are shown side by side for easy comparison. Changed values are highlighted. Cancel Select "Confirm" to accept the new values as shown in the Table. Select "Cancel" to reject the values entered and return to the previous page. 373-0739 Figure 6-7, Submit Form Example Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration Diagnostics Log Off Status Description Active Value New Value IP Address 1 192.168.0.11 192.168.0.10 255.255.255.0 Subnet Mask 1 255.255.255.0 DHCP Server Port 1 Enabled Enabled DHCP 1 Pool Start 192.168.0.12 192.168.0.12 DHCP 1 Pool End 192.168.0.43 192.168.0.43 DHCP 1 Default Gateway 192.168.0.11 192.168.0.11 IP Address 2 192.168.1.12 192.168.1.12 Subnet Mask 2 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 DHCP Server Port 2 Enabled Enabled DHCP 2 Pool Start 192.168.1.13 192.168.1.13 DHCP 2 Pool End 192.168.1.44 192.168.1.44 DHCP 2 Default Gateway 192.168.1.12 192.168.1.12 Default Gateway 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 ALERT: Clicking "Confirm" will change the following parameters of the current web session: IP Address You will be logged off and will need to logon again using the new URL: http://192.168.0.10 Confirm Cancel Figure 6-8, Web GUI Alert message The application program has an access control setting that allows one or both of the Ethernet ports to be set to "Read Only." When that is the case, all parameters will be shown "Grayed-Out" and are not modifiable via that Ethernet Port. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-7 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Local Presence Modification of vital parameters via the Web GUI requires Local Presence to be established for the active Web GUI session. Each web page that requires Local Presence for parameter entry has a link to the Local Presence page. When this web page link is used to navigate to the Local Presence page, the user returns to the original page after Local Presence is established. A link to Local Presence is also provided on the Configuration page Side Menu under System Settings. To establish Local Presence, navigate to the Local Presence page. Select “Request Local Presence“ (See Figure 6-9) and follow the instructions on the Local Presence Confirmation screen (See Figure 6-10). When the Local Presence Key is typed in correctly, the PROG button on the VPM-3 is pressed, and the “Confirm Request for Local Presence” is selected within 60 seconds of the initial request, Local Presence is established for the current login session. Note that if the PROG button on the VPM-3 is pressed out of sequence, pressed more than once, or pressed longer than five seconds Local Presence will not be established. Local Presence remains in effect until one of the following occur: 6-8 1. Local Presence is disabled via the Web GUI (Local Presence page). 2. The active session ends (user logs out or is logged out) 3. Local Presence is established via the CDU 4. Thirty minutes elapses since the last parameter change (any parameter) 5. The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 is reset. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings Diagnostics Log Off Status Local Presence Configuration System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Local Presence Not Established Request Local Presence Software Update Upload Software Apply Software Selective Functionality Selective Function Enable PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office Figure 6-9, Local Presence Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration Diagnostics Log Off Status To confirm local user presence request, perform the following steps in order within 60 seconds: • Type in the Local Presence Key shown on the screen • Press and release the program button on the VPM-3 module (1 to 5 second duration) • Confirm Request for Local Presence Local Presence Key : i 9 a 5 t Confirm Request for Local Presence Cancel Note that the format of the Local Presence Key is always letter-number-letter-number-letter. Figure 6-10, Confirm Local Presence 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 373-0741 6-9 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Web GUI Pages General Main Menu The pages in this section are on the Side Menu under the General main menu category. General Information The General Information page displays identifying information from the selected application, and ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system along with the list of active alarms and the status of each module defined in the application. Links to the Alarms page and the Configuration, Diagnostic, and Status pages of each of the I/O modules and communication interfaces are provided. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration General Information Vital Application Non-Vital Application PTC Application Executive Information Boot Information Diagnostics Log Off Status General Information Railroad: GE Transportation Subdivision: Global Signaling Address: Grain Valley, MO Application and Unit Specific Information Site ID: undefined Chassis ID: 0 0000 0000 Application ID: 65535 1111 1111 1111 1111 EPROM EPT CRC 2FD3 EPROM Checksum 5B5A PTC Enabled Disabled PTC Time Not Established Local Time: 05-05-11 10:27:38 Time of web page load/refresh Last Reset: AB Processor: 05-05-11 09:43:31 -- Power/External (RSR: 00000001) C Processor: 05-05-11 09:43:23 -- Power/External (RSR: 00000001) Link to Alarms page Active Alarms: 1. 05-05-11 09:44:23 -- LCP Link Down Slot 1: Healthy VIO-1010 [Configuration][Diagnostics][Status] Slot 2: Healthy VIO-86S [Configuration][Diagnostics][Status] Slot 3: Healthy VLD-R16S [Configuration][Diagnostics][Status] Slot 4: Healthy VLD-R16S [Configuration][Diagnostics][Status] Slot 5: Healthy VLD-C6S [Configuration][Diagnostics][Status] Slot 6: Healthy VIO-44R [Configuration][Diagnostics][Status] Slot 7: Healthy CAB-16 [Configuration][Diagnostics][Status] Slot 8: Healthy VIO-44S [Configuration][Diagnostics][Status] Slot 9: Healthy VTI-2S [Configuration][Diagnostics][Status] Ethernet: Disabled Office Quick Status of System Components with links to Configuration, Diagnostics, and Status pages [Configuration][Diagnostics][Status] Ethernet: 3 Link(s) Down [Configuration][Diagnostics][Status] Remote Serial 1: Link Down LCP [Configuration][Diagnostics][Status] NOTE: Refresh this page to show updates. Page must be refreshed to see latest status 373-0675 Figure 6-11, General - General Information 6-10 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Vital Application and Non-Vital Application Two pages are provided to display the information for each of the selected applications. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration General Information Vital Application Non-Vital Application PTC Application Executive Information Boot Information Diagnostics Log Off Status [Print] Vital Application Name vlcmanual-edvpv Index 001 EPT CRC E75D EPT Checksum 2B4A ACE Editor: 4.8.33110 IXS Compiler 1.4.11199 Railroad: GE Transportation Subdivision: Global Signaling Address: Grain Valley, MO Chassis ID: 0 Location Number: 12 Flash Rate (flash/per sec): 30 Date 07/21/2010 Figure 6-12, General - Vital Application Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration General Information Vital Application Non-Vital Application PTC Application Executive Information Boot Information Diagnostics Status Log Off [Print] Non-Vital Application Name vlcmanual-edvpnv Index 001 EPT CRC 3962 EPT Checksum FC01 ACE Editor: 4.8.33110 IXS Compiler 1.4.11199 Railroad: GE Transportation Subdivision: Global Signaling Address: Grain Valley, MO Chassis ID: 0 Location Number: 12 Flash Rate (flash/per sec): 30 Date 07/21/2010 Figure 6-13, General - Non-Vital Application 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-11 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 PTC Application This page is provided to display information on the PTC Mapping file and PTC Configuration file if it is loaded. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration General Information Vital Application Non-Vital Application PTC Application Executive Information Boot Information Diagnostics Status Log Off [Print] PTC Application Header: PTC Editor Version: "1.0.0.3" Source Filename: "D:\PTC\Lab\IXS PTC Mapping App\vlcmanual-edvpv\vlcmanual-edvp.ptcprj" File Compile Date File: "Saturday, June 05, 2010, 3:50:16 PM" CRC: 0x1451F216 Header: PTC Editor Version: "1.0.0.3" Source Filename: "D:\PTC\Lab\IXS PTC App\vlcmanual-edvpv\vlcmanual-edvp.ptcprj" File Compile Date Configuration "Saturday, June 05, 2010, 3:50:11 PM" File: CRC: 0x71448269 Figure 6-14, General – PTC Application 6-12 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Executive Information The Executive Information page displays the available information for all processors in the unit. The amount and type of information available is dependent upon the module type. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration General Information Vital Application Non-Vital Application PTC Application Executive Information Boot Information Diagnostics Status Log Off [Print] Executive Information PN: INTERNAL Ver: FULL Bld0098F Module: VPM-3 Processor: A Copyright: GETS Global Signaling, LLC (C) 2011 CRC: CDC13F88 PN: INTERNAL Ver: FULL Bld0098F Module: VPM-3 Processor: B Copyright: GETS Global Signaling, LLC (C) 2011 CRC: B5C16CC5 PN: INTERNAL Ver: FULL Bld0098F Module: VPM-3 Processor: C Copyright: GETS Global Signaling, LLC. (C) 2011 CRC: BF28C276 PN: 202550-000 Ver: 2.1 Module: VTI Processor: D Ref: U76 Copyright: GETS Global Signaling, LLC. (C) 2011 PN: 202550-000 Ver: 2.1 Module: VTI Processor: Ref: Copyright: E U86 GETS Global Signaling, LLC. (C) 2011 Figure 6-15, General - Executive Information 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-13 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Boot Information The Boot Information page displays the available information for all processors in the unit. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration Diagnostics Status Log Off [Print] PTC System General Information PTC Application Executive Information Boot Information Boot Information PN: 083023-511 Ver: 5.11 Bld 004 Signal System Vital Application Executive Information Module: VPM-3 Processor: A Copyright: GETS Global Signaling, LLC. (C) 2011 CRC: 0A0A4944 PN: 083023-511 Ver: 5.11 Bld 004 Module: VPM-3 Processor: B Copyright: GETS Global Signaling, LLC. (C) 2011 CRC: AE0100F4 PN: 083023-511 Ver: 5.11 Bld 004 Module: VPM-3 Processor: C Copyright: GETS Global Signaling, LLC. (C) 2011 CRC: EDA9B689 Figure 6-16 , General - Boot Information 6-14 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Configuration Main Menu – System Settings System Configuration The System Configuration page displays the current value for the various configuration settings in the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system. This page may be printed or saved electronically from the web browser to capture the current value of all system settings. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Software Update Upload Software Apply Software Selective Functionality Diagnostics Log Off Status [Print] Active System Configuration Site ID Chassis ID Application ID GETS-GS 0 0 Local Time 06-29-12 13:46:18 PN: Ver: Module: Processor: Copyright: INTERNAL FULL Bld0120F VPM-3 A GETS Global Signaling, LLC (C) 2012 0FC5496D Executive Information CRC: Selective Function Enable PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt PN: Ver: Module: Processor: Copyright: SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 CRC: PN: Ver: Module: Processor: Copyright: CRC: Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office Serial Ports Diagnostic 1 - LCP INTERNAL FULL Bld0120F VPM-3 B GETS Global Signaling, LLC (C) 2012 7EACD379 INTERNAL FULL Bld0120F VPM-3 C GETS Global Signaling, LLC. (C) 2012 5B0632EC PN: Ver: Module: Processor: Ref: Copyright: 202550-000 2.1 VTI D U76 Harmon Industries Inc. (C) 1998 PN: Ver: Module: Processor: Ref: Copyright: 202550-000 2.1 VTI E U86 Harmon Industries Inc. (C) 1998 PN: Ver: Module: Processor: Ref: Copyright: 202551-000 1.0 CDU MC68HC711D3CFN2 U2 (c) 1998 Harmon Industries Inc. 980707 Datecode: Figure 6-17, Configuration - System Configuration (1) (Cont. on next page) 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-15 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Boot Information PN: Ver: Module: Processor: Copyright: CRC: PN: Ver: Module: Processor: Copyright: CRC: PN: Ver: Module: Processor: Copyright: CRC: 083023-512 5.12 Bld 001 VPM-3 A GETS Global Signaling, LLC. (C) 2012 20705102 083023-512 5.12 Bld 001 VPM-3 B GETS Global Signaling, LLC. (C) 2012 3E131DD0 083023-512 5.12 Bld 001 VPM-3 C GETS Global Signaling, LLC. (C) 2012 A9CDFCBB PTC Application PTC Mapping File: Header: PTC Editor Version: "3.5.1.1" Source Filename: "vlcmanualedvp_PTC3.ptcprj" File Compile Date: "Tuesday, December 13, 2011, 5:55:51 PM UTC" Chassis: "EIXS" Library CRC: "0B1155D2" Library Date: "Friday, July 22, 2011 8:51:10 PM UTC" CRC: 0x63E25AEE PTC Configuration File: Header: PTC Editor Version: "3.5.1.1" Source Filename: "vlcmanualedvp_PTC3.ptcprj" File Compile Date: "Friday, May 11, 2012, 7:16:15 PM UTC" Chassis: "EIXS" CRC: 0x5849686A System Time Settings Time sync source None Application EPROM Information EPT CRC EPT Checksum 2FD3 5B5A Vital Application Information Name Index EPT CRC EPT Checksum vlcmanual-edvpv 001 E75D 2B4A Non-Vital Application Information Name Index EPT CRC EPT Checksum vlcmanual-edvpnv 001 3962 FC01 Figure 6-18, Configuration - System Configuration (2) (Cont. on next page) 6-16 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Ethernet Settings IP Address 1 Subnet Mask 1 MAC Address 1 IP Address 2 Subnet Mask 2 MAC Address 2 Default Gateway DHCP Server Port 1 DHCP 1 Pool Start DHCP 1 Pool End DHCP 1 Default Gateway DHCP Server Port 2 DHCP 2 Pool Start DHCP 2 Pool End DHCP 2 Default Gateway 192.168.0.11 255.255.255.0 00:09:91:44:7E:48 192.168.1.12 255.255.255.0 00:09:91:44:7E:49 0.0.0.0 Enabled 192.168.0.12 192.168.0.43 192.168.0.11 Enabled 192.168.1.13 192.168.1.44 0.0.0.0 Routing Table Settings No Entries HTTP Settings Inactivity timeout HTTP TCP Port# Trusted Source 1 Status Trusted Source 1 IP Addr Trusted Source 1 Net Mask Trusted Source 2 Status Trusted Source 2 IP Addr Trusted Source 2 Net Mask 60 80 Disabled 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Disabled 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Telnet Port 1 Telnet Port 2 Telnet TCP Port# Inactivity timeout Trusted Source 1 Status Trusted Source 1 Network Trusted Source 1 Net Mask Trusted Source 2 Status Trusted Source 2 Network Trusted Source 2 Net Mask Disabled Disabled 23 Disabled Disabled 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Disabled 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 SSH Port 1 SSH Port 2 SSH Server Port# SSH Inactivity timeout Authorized Keys File CRC Enabled Disabled 22 Disabled 0xD49B0BF4 Telnet Settings SSH Settings Diagnostic Port Settings Baud Rate Parity Data Bits Stop Bits Flow Control 57600 None 8 1 Disabled LCP Enable Enabled Non-Vital Timer 5-NVOUT11 Non-Vital Timer A_NV_EQN Non-Vital Timer GRANT Non-Vital Timer IND-3 Non-Vital Timer R_NVEQM Non-Vital Timer R_NVEQN Non-Vital Timer _NVEQN 00:20.0 00:00.0 00:20.0 00:00.0 00:00.2 00:00.2 00:00.2 LCP Settings Non-Vital Timers Vital Comm Serial Port 2 Settings Baud Rate Parity 9600 None Figure 6-19, Configuration - System Configuration (3) (Cont. on next page) 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-17 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Stop Bits Type Mode Maximum MAC Switchover Time Remote 1 Date Time Update Remote 1 MAC Enable Remote 1 MAC Use New Key Remote 1 Remote Remote 1 Protocol Remote 1 Local Network Id Remote 1 Remote Network Id Remote 1 Maximum Send Time Difference Remote 1 Maximum Receive Time Difference Remote 2 Date Time Update Remote 2 MAC Enable Remote 2 MAC Use New Key Remote 2 Remote Remote 2 Protocol Remote 2 Local Network Id Remote 2 Remote Network Id Remote 2 Maximum Send Time Difference Remote 2 Maximum Receive Time Difference 1 Asynchronous Point to Point 1 Disabled Disabled No Enabled RP2000 0 200 2100 2100 Disabled Disabled No Enabled RP2000 0 201 2100 2100 Vital Comm Ethernet Settings Maximum MAC Switchover Time Remote 1 Date Time Update Remote 1 IP Address Remote 1 Port Remote 1 MAC Enable Remote 1 MAC Use New Key Remote 1 Remote Remote 1 Protocol Remote 1 Local Network Id Remote 1 Remote Network Id Remote 1 Maximum Send Time Difference Remote 1 Maximum Receive Time Difference Remote 1 Heartbeat Message Interval 0 Remote 1 Heartbeat Message Interval 1 Remote 1 Heartbeat Message Interval 2 Remote 1 Heartbeat Message Interval 3 Remote 1 Update Period Remote 1 Acknowledge Timeout Remote 2 Date Time Update Remote 2 IP Address Remote 2 Port Remote 2 MAC Enable Remote 2 MAC Use New Key Remote 2 Remote Remote 2 Protocol Remote 2 Local Network Id Remote 2 Remote Network Id Remote 2 Maximum Send Time Difference Remote 2 Maximum Receive Time Difference Remote 3 Date Time Update Remote 3 IP Address Remote 3 Port Remote 3 MAC Enable Remote 3 MAC Use New Key Remote 3 Remote Remote 3 Protocol Remote 3 Local Network Id Remote 3 Remote Network Id Remote 3 Maximum Send Time Difference Remote 3 Maximum Receive Time Difference Remote 3 Heartbeat Message Interval 0 Remote 3 Heartbeat Message Interval 1 Remote 3 Heartbeat Message Interval 2 Remote 3 Heartbeat Message Interval 3 Remote 3 Update Period Remote 3 Acknowledge Timeout 1 Disabled 0.0.0.0 8280 Disabled No Enabled RP2009 1 10 2100 2100 248 4000 12000 20000 248 992 Disabled 0.0.0.0 8280 Disabled No Enabled RP2000 *** *** 2100 2100 Disabled 0.0.0.0 8280 Disabled No Enabled RP2009 *** *** 7200 7200 4960 4960 4960 4960 248 992 Vital Timers Vital Timer 5-B1L1 Vital Timer 5-B1L2 00:06 00:10 Figure 6-20, Configuration - System Configuration (4) (Cont. on next page) 6-18 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Vital Timer 5-B1L3F Vital Timer 5-SETUPGRANT Vital Timer CAB1EB Vital Timer LCPOUT1 Vital Timer TXCODE2-T2 00:04 00:00 00:05 00:00 00:03 Vital Configuration Vital Setting 1 - LAMP1-1ON Vital Setting 2 - LAMP1-2ON Vital Setting 3 - LAMP1-3ON Vital Setting 4 - LAMP2-1ON Vital Setting 5 - LAMP1-1F Vital Setting 6 - LAMP1-2F Vital Setting 7 - LAMP1-3F Vital Setting 8 - LAMP2-1F Vital Setting 9 - 5-GRANT Vital Setting 10 - VC10 Vital Setting 11 - VC11 Vital Setting 12 - VC12 Vital Setting 13 - ALLOW_LINKS Vital Setting 14 - HMI1 Vital Setting 15 - HMI2 Vital Setting 16 - HMI3 Vital Setting 17 - EVENT Vital Configuration ID FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE 0000 0000 Battery Alarm Settings High Battery Alarm Voltage Low Battery Alarm Voltage 17.5 8.0 Slot 1 VIO-1010S Settings No field settable values Slot 2 VIO-86S Settings Vital Input 1 Slow Pick Vital Input 1 Slow Release Vital Input 2 Slow Pick 2 2 2 Slot 3 VLD-R16S Settings Flash Rate 30 Flash Rate 30 Flash Rate Bank 1 Manual Voltage Bank 2 Manual Voltage 30 10.0 10.0 Slot 4 VLD-R16S Settings Slot 5 VLD-C6S Settings Slot 6 VIO-44R Settings No Slow Pick / Slow Release settings Slot 7 CAB-16S Settings No field settable values Slot 8 VIO-44S Settings No field settable values Slot 9 VTI-2S Settings Track 1 Transmit Output Voltage Track 1 Receive Reference Ratio Track 1 Code 5 Setting Track 1 Transmit Test Mode Track 1 Receive Test Mode Track 1 Transmit Current Track 1 Track Resistance Track 1 Receive Current Track 2 Transmit Output Voltage Track 2 Receive Reference Ratio Track 2 Code 5 Setting Track 2 Transmit Test Mode 0.5 6.00 NON-ALT OFF OFF 0.07 7.11 0.05 0.5 6.00 NON-ALT OFF Figure 6-21, Configuration - System Configuration (5) (Cont. on next page) 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-19 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Track 2 Receive Test Mode Track 2 Transmit Current Track 2 Track Resistance Track 2 Receive Current OFF 0.07 7.11 0.05 Battery 1 Name Battery 1 Fault Status Battery 1 Calibrated Voltage Battery 1 Ground Fault Threshold Battery 1 Ground Fault Time Battery 1 Low Battery Alarm Voltage Battery 1 High Battery Alarm Voltage Battery 2 Name Battery 1 Bad Voltage Cal. 13.5 10 5 8.0 16.5 Battery 2 Battery Not Connected 13.5 10 5 8.0 16.5 Battery 3 Battery Not Connected 13.5 10 5 8.0 16.5 GFD-1 Settings Battery 2 Fault Status Battery 2 Calibrated Voltage Battery 2 Ground Fault Threshold Battery 2 Ground Fault Time Battery 2 Low Battery Alarm Voltage Battery 2 High Battery Alarm Voltage Battery 3 Name Battery 3 Fault Status Battery 3 Calibrated Voltage Battery 3 Ground Fault Threshold Battery 3 Ground Fault Time Battery 3 Low Battery Alarm Voltage Battery 3 High Battery Alarm Voltage PTC CRC Information WIU Configuration PTC Mapping File PTC Configuration File Applicability Settings CRC CRC CRC CRC 0x27FCAEEB 0x63E25AEE 0x5849686A 0x58BEABED External Time Update Timeout (s) Beacon Continuous Broadcast Rate (ms) Beacon Bit Time (s) Beacon End Time (s) Max Beacon Interval (s) Broadcast On Change Source Address Destination Address Flags - Time Format Flags - Encryption Flags - Compression Flags - Data Integrity TTL Timed Beacon (s) QoS Timed Beacon TTL Get WIU Status (s) QoS Get WIU Status LRM Max Secs Time Difference No Time Sync Message PTC Time Re-Sync Enable Destination IP Address 1 Destination IP Port 1 Destination IP Address 2 Destination IP Port 2 Destination IP Address 3 Destination IP Port 3 Destination IP Address 4 Destination IP Port 4 Destination IP Address 5 Destination IP Port 5 Destination IP Address 6 Destination IP Port 6 Destination IP Address 7 Destination IP Port 7 Destination IP Address 8 Destination IP Port 8 7200 Enabled 1000 300 120 900 No XX.w.456789:10.wiu XX.L.X.000000:tmc Absolute Disabled Disabled App Specific 12 1 12 1 3 2 No 192.168.0.12 3001 192.168.0.13 3001 192.168.0.14 3001 0.0.0.0 3001 0.0.0.0 3001 0.0.0.0 3001 0.0.0.0 3001 0.0.0.0 3001 PTC Non-Vital Configuration Figure 6-22, Configuration - System Configuration (6) (Cont. on next page) 6-20 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface High Availability Enabled Mode Keep Alive Interval (ms) Keep Alive Ack Timeout (ms) Data Ack Enabled Data Ack Timeout (ms) Data NAK Retry Limit Retransmit Delay (ms) Connection Attempt Timeout (ms) Connection Delay (ms) Connection Retry Limit Reconnection Limit Yes Bidirectional 9000 1000 Yes 1000 2 0 1000 1000 -1 -1 PTC Vital Configuration WIU Address Time Messages Before Sending WSM Time Message Deviation Ignored Time Difference Max Secs Time Change Max Time Change Within Mins WIU Enabled PTC Enabled PTC Time 712345678910 5 1 3 3 2 Disabled Disabled Not Established Device VIN1 Debounce Time Applicability Properties 0 msec FFFFFF PTC Key Management Configuration Encrypted HMAC Key 542008BD5CE6 0CC94D5B4C7B 9E33B721F7DA C70EDDF4C9CD Encrytped HMAC CRC RC2 Key File CRC C264639B F17B0738 Figure 6-23, Configuration - System Configuration (7) 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-21 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Local Presence The Local Presence page indicates the current state of Local Presence (Established or Not Established) along with a button to change the state. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Diagnostics Log Off Status Local Presence Configuration Local Presence Current state of Local Presence Not Established Request Local Presence Button to change the Local Presence state Software Update Upload Software Apply Software Selective Functionality Selective Function Enable PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office Serial Ports Diagnostic 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Figure 6-24, Configuration - Local Presence 6-22 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface After requesting Local Presence, the Local Presence key value displayed on the next web page must be entered. The key is always letter-number-letter-number-letter. Press the PROG button on the VPM3 prior to selecting “Confirm.” If all steps are followed in sequence, Local Presence is established for the current login session. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration Diagnostics Log Off Status To confirm local user presence request, perform the following steps in order within 60 seconds: • Type in the Local Presence Key shown on the screen • Press and release the program button on the VPM-3 module (1 to 5 second duration) • Confirm Request for Local Presence Enter the value of the key shown The key is always in the format of letter-number-letter-number-letter Local Presence Key : i 9 a 5 t Confirm Request for Local Presence Cancel Select Confirm after the PROG button on the VPM3 has been pressed. Confirm must be selected within 60 seconds of requesting Local Presence Figure 6-25, Local Presence Confirm 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-23 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 System Time The System Time page is used to change the current time and the Time Sync Source options. For PTC to be enabled, the Time Sync Source must be either EMP or SNTP, and a time sync message must be received by the system within the last two hours, or anytime after a system restart. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Diagnostics Status System Time Date 29 Time 9 June : 53 2012 : 40 Update Time Time Synchronization Time sync source None Update Time Settings Software Update Upload Software Apply Software Log Off Set all Time parameters to Defaults Selective Functionality Selective Function Enable NOTE: Click this button to default all time parameters. Set Defaults PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office Figure 6-26, Configuration - System Time 6-24 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings 29 9 June : 53 2012 : 40 Time sync source EMP Time Zone Settings Time Zone Daylight Savings Time Selective Functionality Selective Function Enable Daylight Savings Start Month Daylight Savings Start Week Daylight Savings End Month Daylight Savings End Week PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable -5 hours from GMT Enabled March 2 November 1 EMP Server Settings EMP Time Multicast IP Address EMP Time Multicast Port Number SNMP Settings VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 For PTC messaging to be enabled, time sync source must be EMP or SNTP Time Synchronization Upload Software Apply Software - Date Time Update Time Software Update I/O Slots Log Off Status System Time System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Diagnostics Multicast address that EIXS connects to to receive time updates 239.255.0.5 32768 Update Time Settings UDP port number used for EMP time messages Set all Time parameters to Defaults NOTE: Click this button to default all time parameters. Set Defaults Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office Figure 6-27, Configuration – System Time EMP Settings 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-25 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings 29 9 June : 53 2012 : 40 Time Synchronization Time sync source Time Zone Daylight Savings Time Selective Functionality Selective Function Enable Daylight Savings Start Month Daylight Savings Start Week Daylight Savings End Month Daylight Savings End Week PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 SNTP Time Zone Settings Upload Software Apply Software - Date Time Update Time Software Update I/O Slots Log Off Status System Time System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Diagnostics -5 hours from GMT Enabled March 2 November 1 Interval between active time queries SNTP Server Settings SNTP Active Query Interval 60 SNTP Unicast Server 1 IP Address 0.0.0.0 SNTP Unicast Server 2 IP Address 0.0.0.0 minutes IP Addresses that IXS connects to for SNTP time updates Update Time Settings Set all Time parameters to Defaults NOTE: Click this button to default all time parameters. Set Defaults Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office Serial Ports Diagnostic 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Figure 6-28, Configuration – System Time SNTP Passive Settings 6-26 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Application The Application page displays the currently operating application pair. If Local Presence is established, the new applications may be selected from the drop-down list. Note that after the new application selections are confirmed, the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 resets causing a user log out. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Diagnostics Status Log Off Application Local Presence required to modify the parameters on this page. Click Here to request Local Presence Vital Application 001 : vlcmanual-edvpv : CRC#E75D Non-Vital Application 001 : vlcmanual-edvpnv : CRC#3962 Update Settings Software Update Upload Software Apply Software Selective Functionality Selective Function Enable PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office Serial Ports Diagnostic 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Figure 6-29, Configuration - Application 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-27 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Change Password The Change Password page allows the password to be set to a new value. The new password value may be any length of up to 32 characters. WARNING Unauthorized modification of ElectroLogIXS/EC5 parameters or configuration may result in unsafe conditions that could result in death or serious injury. Responsibility for security of passwords for equipment access lies with the railway authority. Passwords should be of a non-obvious nature and of sufficient length to preclude an unauthorized user from easily guessing the password. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Diagnostics Status Log Off Change Password Login ID admin Old Password New Password Confirm new password Update Password Software Update Upload Software Apply Software Selective Functionality Selective Function Enable PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office Serial Ports Diagnostic 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Figure 6-30, Configuration - Change Password 6-28 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface General Configuration The General Configuration displays and allows modification of the Site ID parameter for the unit. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings Diagnostics Status Log Off General Settings System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Site ID GETS-GS Update Settings Software Update Upload Software Apply Software Selective Functionality Selective Function Enable PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office Figure 6-31, Configuration - General Configuration 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-29 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Vital Timers The Vital Timers page displays the current settings and ranges allowed for the individual timers. If Local Presence is established, the timer values may be modified to any value within the application defined range. Navigation aids (the page drop-down list and the Prev / Next page and First / Last page buttons) are provided for situations where the number of timers in the application is large and must be displayed on more than one web page. WARNING For Vital Timers of 4 seconds or more, accuracy will be within +10%/0%. For Vital Timers of less than 4 seconds, accuracy will be within +0.5 second under worst case timing conditions. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Software Update Upload Software Apply Software Selective Functionality Selective Function Enable PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt Diagnostics Log Off Status Vital Timer Settings Local Presence required to modify the parameters on this page. Click Here to request Local Presence Page: Page 1 (5-B1L1-TXCODE2-T2) First Page Prev Page Next Page Last Page Status Minimum Max (Default) Value (min:sec) 5-B1L1 00:00 00:06 00 : 06 5-B1L2 00:00 00:10 00 : 10 5-B1L3F 00:00 00:04 00 : 04 5-SETUPGRANT 00:00 00:00 00 : 00 CAB1EB 00:00 00:05 00 : 05 LCPOUT1 00:00 00:00 00 : 00 TXCODE2-T2 00:00 00:03 00 : 03 Update Settings SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office Serial Ports Diagnostic 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Figure 6-32, Configuration - Vital Timers 6-30 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Non-Vital Timers The Non-Vital Timers page operates identically to the Vital Timers page with the exception that Local Presence is not required to change the timer values. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Software Update Upload Software Apply Software Selective Functionality Selective Function Enable Diagnostics Log Off Status Non-Vital Timer Settings Page: Page 1 (5-NVOUT11-_NVEQN) First Page Prev Page Next Page Last Page Minimum Max (Default) 5-NVOUT11 00:00.0 00:20.0 00 : 20 .0 A_NV_EQN 00:00.0 00:00.0 00 : 00 .0 GRANT 00:00.0 00:20.0 00 : 20 .0 IND-3 00:00.0 00:00.0 00 : 00 .0 R_NVEQM 00:00.0 00:00.2 00 : 00 .2 R_NVEQN 00:00.0 00:00.2 00 : 00 .2 _NVEQN 00:00.0 00:00.2 00 : 00 .2 Status Value (min:sec.tenths) Update Settings PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office Serial Ports Diagnostic 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Figure 6-33, Configuration - Non-Vital Timers 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-31 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Vital Configuration The Vital Configuration page displays the current values for the Vital Configuration Settings. If Local Presence is established, the values of the settings may be modified. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Software Update Upload Software Apply Software Selective Functionality Selective Function Enable PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable Diagnostics Log Off Status Vital Configuration Local Presence required to modify the parameters on this page. Click Here to request Local Presence Description Status Name Value Vital Setting 1 LAMP1-1ON FALSE Vital Setting 2 LAMP1-2ON FALSE Vital Setting 3 LAMP1-3ON FALSE Vital Setting 4 LAMP2-1ON FALSE Vital Setting 5 LAMP1-1F FALSE Vital Setting 6 LAMP1-2F FALSE Vital Setting 7 LAMP1-3F FALSE Vital Setting 8 LAMP2-1F FALSE Vital Setting 9 5-GRANT FALSE Vital Setting 10 VC10 FALSE Vital Setting 11 VC11 FALSE Vital Setting 12 VC12 FALSE Vital Setting 13 ALLOW_LINKS FALSE Vital Setting 14 HMI1 FALSE Vital Setting 15 HMI2 FALSE Vital Setting 16 HMI3 FALSE Vital Setting 17 EVENT FALSE Vital Configuration ID 0000 0000 I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Update Settings Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office Serial Ports Diagnostic 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Figure 6-34, Configuration - Vital Configuration 6-32 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface System Battery Alarm The System Battery Alarm option is available when a VTI-2S module is defined in the application. The battery voltages for the High Battery and Low Batter alarms are set on this page. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Diagnostics Log Off Status System Battery Alarm Settings Local Presence required to modify the parameters on this page. Click Here to request Local Presence High Battery Alarm Voltage 17.5 Volts Low Battery Alarm Voltage 8.0 Volts Update Settings Software Update Upload Software Apply Software Selective Functionality Selective Function Enable PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office Serial Ports Diagnostic 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Figure 6-35, Configuration – Battery Alarms 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-33 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Upload Software The Upload Software page allows users to remotely upload software to the VPM-3. Executive, Boot, Application, PTC Mapping and PTC Configuration files may all be uploaded. It should be noted that files uploaded from this page are only uploaded to VPM-3 system memory and are not used for any data processing. In order for the VPM-3 to be able to use the software, a user with local presence must apply the files from the Update Mode GUI or from the Apply Software page. Figure 6-36 displays the Upload Software page and its functionality. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Software Update Upload Software Apply Software Diagnostics Upload Software Upload New Application SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Browse... Upload Uploaded Boot File : No file present. Uploaded Exec Delete File : No file present. Uploaded Delete Application File Header: IWP multi-application EPROM PTC LONG 3HEAD created 12/07/10 by ACE Version 4.8 Build: : 33110 MultiApp EPROM EPT CRC: 31B2 Delete Delete Uploaded PTC Map File Header: PTC Editor Version: "2.0.0.0" Source Filename: "D:\Documents and Settings\psegroup\My Documents\PTC Lab Tests\PTC Long 3head ELX\PTC : Long 3head ELX.ptcprj" File Compile Date "Monday, August 16, 2010, 2:49:43 PM" CRC: 0x4BED30AC Delete Uploaded PTC Config File : No file present. PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt -Select the desired file type -Click “Browse” to point to the specific file being uploaded -Click “Upload” to begin the Upload Software process Upload Status: Upload completed successfully. Selective Functionality Selective Function Enable Log Off Status Uploaded Vital Delete Config Text File : No file present. Uploaded NonDelete Vital Config Text File : No file present. Uploaded Delete SNMP Config Text File : No file present. Uploaded Selective Function Key File : No file present. Delete Files that have been uploaded displays their Header and CRC information. The user may also use the “Delete” button to remove the uploaded file. Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office Figure 6-36, Configuration – Software Upload 6-34 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Apply Software The Apply Software page allows users with Local Presence to apply and activate software. Executive, Boot, Application, PTC Mapping and Config files, which were previously uploaded from the Upload Software page, may be applied for use from this page. Text configuration files copied and validated using the SSH interface can be applied from this page. Also, PTC Mapping files and Executives that were applied from the Update Mode GUI may be activated from this page. The Set All PTC Defaults selection sets the Time sync parameters, Ethernet defaults, Non-Vital and Vital configuration parameter defaults. Figure 6-37 displays the Apply Software page and its functionality. Note: Local Presence is required to apply and activate files to prevent unauthorized users from changing safety critical software. Instructions on requesting Local Presence are given in the Local Presence section of the manual. Local Presence is required when applying files. Files uploaded and validated using the SSH interface can be applied here. Sets all PTC Defaults from this button. Figure 6-37, Configuration – Software Apply 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-35 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 - Click “ActivateExec” button to begin activating the file. - Once the activate PTC Exec file has been selected, and confirmed, the system will require resetting in order to return to the Web GUI. Once returned to the Web GUI the PTC Exec file will no longer be displayed. - Click “ActivatePtcMap” button to begin activating the file. - Once the activate PTC Mapping file has been selected, and confirmed, the page will be refreshed and the PTC Mapping file will no longer be displayed. Figure 6-38, Configuration – Software Apply (Cont. on next page) 6-36 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface - Executive files and PTC Mapping files applied from Boot mode must be activated from the “Apply Software” page for the VPM-3 to begin using them. - When there are no files applied from boot mode, the “Activate Files” section will be blank. - Header and CRC information appear for PTC mapping and Config files that have been uploaded. - Files that have not been uploaded display “No file present”. - Once the file has been applied and confirmed, the page will be refreshed and the file that was applied will display“No file present”. Figure 6-39, Configuration – Software Apply (2) 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-37 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Selective Function Enable The Selective Functionality page provides for entering keys to authorize the operation of additional functionality in the system. When the key is entered, it is stored on the backplane and remains enabled until either the backplane is erased, or the function is disabled. On non-VPM-3 systems, the key is stored on the PTC processor. Site ID: undefined Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings Diagnostics Log Off Status Selective Functions System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Selective Function Authorization Key New Selective Function Authorization Key HA929002 Enable Selective Function Upload Status: Enter Selective Function authorization key Software Update Upload Software Apply Software Selective Functionality Selective Function Enable PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office Figure 6-40, Configuration – Selective Function Enable 6-38 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Site ID: undefined Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Diagnostics Status Log Off Selective Functions Selective Function Authorization Key New Selective Function Authorization Key Enable Selective Function Upload Status: Valid Key Disable High Availability : 11 : Enabled Software Update Upload Software Apply Software Disables the selected function Selective Functionality Selective Function Enable PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office Figure 6-41, Configuration - Selective Function Disable 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-39 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 PTC Non-Vital Configuration The PTC Non-Vital Configuration Page is displayed when a PTC mapping file is loaded. The PTC Non-Vital Configuration page lets users set PTC message interface parameters. When “Set PTC Defaults” is selected, all parameters are defaulted to the parameters uploaded in the PTC Configuration file or to the controller default values if no PTC Configuration file is loaded. Class D Settings Destination IP Address 1 IP Address where all Class D messages are sent (defaults to 10.255.255.210 ) Destination IP Port 1 TCP port number where all Class D messages are sent (defaults to 3001) Destination IP Address 2-8 IP Address where all Class D messages are sent (defaults to 0.0.0.0 ) Enabled when High Availability Enable is set to Yes Destination IP Port 2-8 TCP port number where all Class D messages are sent (defaults to 3001) Enabled when High Availability Enable is set to Yes High Availability Enable Enables High Availability mode (defaults to No) Keep Alive Interval Time between sending Keep Alive Messages. Must be greater than Keep Alive Ack Timeout. (Defaults to 30 Sec) Keep Alive Ack Timeout Amount of time allowed to receive an ACK message in response to a Keep Alive message. Must be less than Keep Alive Interval. (defaults to15 sec) Data Ack Enabled Indicates whether acknowledgements to Class D messages are sent or expected in response to data messages. Both ends of the link must be configured the same (defaults to No) Data Ack Timeout Time allowed to elapse between sending a data message and receipt of Ack message (defaults to 15 sec) Data NAK Retry Limit The maximum number of retry attempts in response to a negative acknowledgement that allows retries. (defaults to 3) Retransmit Delay On receipt of a negative ack, how long to wait before attempting to retransmit a message. Not modifiable. (defaults to 0) Connection Attempt Timeout Time allowed to spend on a single attempt to open a Class D TCP connection to a server. (defaults to 30 sec) Connection Delay Time to wait before retrying to establish a connection. (defaults to 60 sec) Connection Retry Limit Number of times a connection attempt is retried in the event that connection attempts are failing. (defaults to –1 meaning retry forever) Reconnection Limit Number of times allowed to reconnect before giving up. Number of reconnection attempts is counted from time the link was initiated at system startup. It is not reset between successful reconnections (defaults to -1) Note: 6-40 All defaults shown above are controller defaults. If a PTC Configuration file is loaded, the values in the file are used for defaults. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Time that beacons are sent with the BeaconTTL = 1 General Configuration System Settings System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Diagnostics Log Off Status PTC Non-Vital Configuration Upload Software Apply Software External Time Update Timeout (s) Beacon Continuous Selective Function Enable PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt 1000 Beacon Bit Time (s) 300 Beacon End Time (s) 120 Max Beacon Interval (s) 900 Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable I/O Slots Maximum Idle Time between beaconing intervals. Only active if Beacon Continuous is set to Times Out. XX.w.456789:10.wiu XX.L.X.000000:tmc Flags - Time Format Absolute Flags - Encryption Disabled Flags - Compression Disabled Flags - Data Integrity App Specific TTL Timed Beacon (s) 12 TTL Get WIU Status (s) ATCS Address of this WIU Message Time-to-live (one for each WIU Status Message Type) 1 12 QoS Get WIU Status 1 LRM Max Secs Time Difference 3 No Time Sync Message 2 PTC Time Re-Sync Enable VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Quality of Service No Class D Settings Destination IP Address 1 Destination IP Port 1 Destination IP Address 2 Destination IP Port 2 Destination IP Address 3 Destination IP Port 3 Destination IP Address 4 Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office Serial Ports Diagnostic 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Time interval between successive WIU Status messages while beaconing. No Destination Address QoS Timed Beacon SNMP Settings - Enabled Broadcast Rate (ms) Source Address 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 7200 EMP Settings Selective Functionality PTC Settings is displayed when a PTC mapping file is loaded. Time between EMP or SNTP external time updates. PTC is disabled if this is exceeded. General WIU Settings Broadcast On Change Software Update Time that beacons are sent with the BeaconTTL = 0 Site ID: undefined Chassis ID: 0 Destination IP Port 4 Destination IP Address 5 Destination IP Port 5 Destination IP Address 6 Destination IP Port 6 Destination IP Address 7 Destination IP Port 7 Destination IP Address 8 Destination IP Port 8 High Availability Enable Mode 3001 0.0.0.0 3001 0.0.0.0 3001 0.0.0.0 3001 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 3001 0.0.0.0 3001 0.0.0.0 3001 No 9000 1000 Data NAK Retry Limit Retransmit Delay (ms) Enables High Availability mode Bidirectional Keep Alive Interval (ms) Data Ack Timeout (ms) Additional message destinations when High Availability is Enabled 3001 Keep Alive Ack Timeout (ms) Data Ack Enabled Message Destination 192.168.0.12 Yes 1000 2 0 Connection Attempt Timeout (ms) 1000 Connection Delay (ms) 1000 Connection Retry Limit -1 Reconnection Limit -1 -1 means retry forever Update Settings Set Non-Vital PTC Settings to the Application Defaults NOTE: Click this button to set all Non-Vital PTC settings to the application defaults. Set PTC Defaults Selection defaults all non-vital PTC parameters to the values in the PTC Configuration file (if it is loaded) or to the controller default values. Figure 6-42, Configuration – PTC Non-Vital Settings 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-41 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 PTC Vital Configuration WARNING An ElectroLogIXS unit must be configured with a unique Wayside Interface Unit (WIU) address for Positive Train Control (PTC) messaging. Failure to ensure the uniqueness of the WIU address could result in death or serious injury. Railroad Configuration Management Procedures must ensure that the proper values are set for each vital timer, vital Configuration setting (vital soft switches), PTC applicability settings, PTC debounce time, PTC WIU address, and vital remote parameter in their ElectroLogIXS/EC5 units. Incorrect settings may result in death or serious injury. When configuring an ElectroLogIXS unit for PTC operation, use only the WIU address value supplied on the site plans. If the WIU address value is not available from the site plans, do not enable PTC operation on the unit. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. The PTC Vital Configuration Page is displayed when a PTC mapping file is loaded. The PTC Vital Configuration page allows the selection of the vital PTC parameters - WIU Enabled, Device Debounce times, and Applicability properties. When "Set PTC Vital Defaults" is clicked, it will set: 1) 2) 3) 4) 6-42 The WIU Address to the value in the PTC Configuration file, otherwise it is set to 000000000000 The WIU Enabled parameter to "Disable" The Debounce times to the default values in the PTC Mapping file The Applicability Properties to the default values in the PTC Mapping file © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Site ID: undefined Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings Diagnostics Log Off Status PTC Vital Configuration System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms PTC WIU Address. Must be nonzero for PTC messaging to be enabled. Check plans for correct setting. Local Presence required to modify the parameters on this page. Click Here to request Local Presence WIU Address Software Update 712345678910 Time Messages Before Sending WSM 5 Time Message Deviation 1 Ignored Time Difference 3 Max Secs Time Change 3 Max Time Change Within Mins 5 Upload Software Apply Software WIU Enabled Enabled PTC Enabled Disabled PTC Time Selective Functionality WIU Enabled - manual enable/disable of PTC messaging. Must be set Disabled to apply a new PTC Mapping file. Setting to Enabled causes the Class D connection attempts to begin. Not Established Selective Function Enable Device PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable signal Debounce Time 0 Status of PTC messaging. The specific reason(s) for being PTC disabled are shown in the PTC Event log on the Diagnostics web page. Applicability Properties msec Update Settings F F F F F F F F - Edit Signal system applicability properties. Check the site plans for correct settings. Length of time to debounce an invalid PTC status in outgoing message. Check the site plans for correct settings. Set PTC Vital Settings to Defaults NOTE: Click this button to set all Vital PTC settings to the application defaults. Set PTC Vital Defaults I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office Serial Ports Diagnostic 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Figure 6-43, Configuration – PTC Vital Settings (1) (Cont. on next page) 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-43 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Site ID: undefined Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings Diagnostics Log Off Status PTC Vital Configuration System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms WIU Address 5 Time Message Deviation 1 Ignored Time Difference 3 Max Secs Time Change 3 Max Time Change Within Mins 5 Software Update WIU Enabled Enabled PTC Enabled Disabled PTC Time Upload Software Apply Software Selective Functionality Selective Function Enable PTC 712345678910 Time Messages Before Sending WSM Device signal Debounce Time 0 Not Established Applicability Properties msec F F F F F F F F - Edit Update Settings PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt SNMP Settings Set PTC Vital Settings to Defaults NOTE: Click this button to set all Vital PTC settings to the application defaults. Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable Set PTC Vital Defaults I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office Figure 6-44, Configuration – PTC Vital Settings (2) 6-44 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface PTC Applicability Properties PTC Applicability Properties page is displayed when the Applicability properties are selected on the PTC Vital Configuration page. Each property can be set true or false as defined on the site plans. Site ID: undefined Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Software Update Upload Software Apply Software Selective Functionality Diagnostics Log Off Status PTC Applicability Properties [PTC Vital Configuration] Device - signal Property - # Board False Property - G Marker False Property - S Marker False Property - F Marker False Property - H Marker False Property - 1 Head False Property - 2 Head False Property - 3 Head False Sets the Applicability Property values for those that the mapping file allows field programmability. Update Settings Selective Function Enable PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office Figure 6-45, Configuration – PTC Vital Applicability Settings 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-45 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 PTC Key Mgmt The PTC Key Mgmt page is displayed when a PTC mapping file is loaded. The PTC Key Mgmt page lets the user upload and apply RC2 Key files and HMAC Keys. The Update PTC HMAC Key function also lets the user upload an HMAC key and set the future time and date when it will automatically be applied. Site ID: undefined Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Software Update Upload Software Apply Software Selective Function Enable PTC Key Management Current Encrypted HMAC Key HMAC Key Current Encrypted HMAC 0x1508BB10D2B76533767B4B0559E4D7182C85F1961DC6B964 Key Current HMAC Key CRCs Current Encrypted HMAC 0x0E371581 CRC 1) Enter 48 character HMAC Key 2) Select Data/Time to apply the new HMAC Key Pending Encrypted HMAC No Future HMAC Key Present Key Pending Encrypted HMAC No Future HMAC Key Present CRC Date to Apply HMAC Key 7 5 Time to Apply HMAC Key 14 : 10 3) Click Upload HMAC Key 2012 : 51 Upload HMAC Key PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable I/O Slots - Log Off Status New HMAC Key 0x 0 Selective Functionality 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Diagnostics Uploaded HMAC Key Status None Apply the new HMAC Key Delete New HMAC Key Upload Default HMAC Key Upload Default HMAC Key Apply New HMAC Key Set HMAC Key to default(Configured in PTC Config file) Delete the new HMAC Key if not already applied 1) Click Browse... 2) Select the RC2 Key File Current RC2 Key CRCs RC2 Key VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Current RC2 Key CRC 0x42B26D64 Upload New RC2 Key File Browse... Upload Uploaded RC2 Key Status None Delete New RC2 Key Delete uploaded RC2 Key File if not already applied Apply New RC2 Key 3) Click Upload Apply the uploaded RC2 Key File. Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office Serial Ports Diagnostic 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Figure 6-46, Configuration – PTC Key Management 6-46 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Configuration - SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration The Active SNMP Configuration page displays the current value for the various configuration settings on the ElectrologIXS SNMP General Configuration and SNMP Trap Configuration pages. This page may be printed or saved electronically from the web browser to capture the current value of the SNMP General Configuration or SNMP Trap Configuration settings. Site ID: undefined Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings Software Update Upload Software Apply Software Selective Functionality Selective Function Enable PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration Temporary SNMP Trap Disable Time Temporary SNMP Trap Disable Destination IP 1 Destination IP 2 Destination IP 3 Destination IP 4 Destination UDP Port 1 Destination UDP Port 2 Destination UDP Port 3 Destination UDP Port 4 Wayside Device Type Location Public Community String Private Community String WIU Hearbeat Trap Logging SNMP Trap Enable Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable I/O Slots VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Trap Text Number of Occurrences Time (seconds) Battery 1 Voltage: Specific Trap Enable Battery 1 Voltage: Trap ID Battery 1 Voltage: Flag Battery 1 Voltage: Priority Battery 1 Voltage: Text Field 1 Battery 1 Voltage: Text Field 2 Battery 1 Cal Required: Specific Trap Enable Battery 1 Cal Required: Trap ID General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office Disabled Disabled Battery Alarm Battery 1 Voltage: Reason Comm Settings 60 Disabled 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 162 162 162 162 ElectroLogIXS undefined SNMP Trap Configuration Trap Enable SNMP Settings - Log Off Status [Print] System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Diagnostics Disabled Alert Specific Data Clear Specific Data Battery Alarm Battery OK N/A N/A 0 0 Enabled 1 Bat 1 Voltage Out of Rng 1 1 2 5 Enabled 3 Battery 1 Cal Required: Reason Bat 1: Cal. Required Battery 1 Cal Required: Flag Battery 1 Cal Required: Priority Battery 1 Cal Required: Text Field 1 Battery 1 Cal Required: Text Field 2 1 1 Battery 1 Ground Fault: Specific Trap Enable Battery 1 Ground Fault: Trap ID 2 Bat 1 Voltage OK 4 Bat 1: Cal. Required OK 2 5 Enabled 5 6 Figure 6-47, Configuration - Active SNMP Configuration (1) (Cont. on next page) 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-47 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Serial Ports Diagnostic 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Battery 1 Ground Fault: Reason Battery 1 Ground Fault: Flag Battery 1 Ground Fault: Priority Battery 1 Ground Fault: Text Field 1 Battery 1 Ground Fault: Text Field 2 Battery 2 Voltage: Specific Trap Enable Battery 2 Voltage: Trap ID Battery 2 Voltage: Reason Battery 2 Voltage: Flag Battery 2 Voltage: Priority Battery 2 Voltage: Text Field 1 Battery 2 Voltage: Text Field 2 Battery 2 Cal Required: Specific Trap Enable Battery 2 Cal Required: Trap ID Bat 1 [Polarity]: Ground Fault 1 1 Enabled 7 Bat 2 Voltage Out of Rng 1 1 9 Bat 2: Cal. Required Battery 2 Cal Required: Flag Battery 2 Cal Required: Priority Battery 2 Cal Required: Text Field 1 Battery 2 Cal Required: Text Field 2 1 1 Battery 2 Ground Fault: Reason Battery 2 Ground Fault: Flag Battery 2 Ground Fault: Priority Battery 2 Ground Fault: Text Field 1 Battery 2 Ground Fault: Text Field 2 Battery 3 Voltage: Specific Trap Enable Battery 3 Voltage: Trap ID Battery 3 Voltage: Reason Battery 3 Voltage: Flag Battery 3 Voltage: Priority Battery 3 Voltage: Text Field 1 Battery 3 Voltage: Text Field 2 Battery 3 Cal Required: Specific Trap Enable Battery 3 Cal Required: Trap ID 8 Bat 2 Voltage OK 2 5 Enabled Battery 2 Cal Required: Reason Battery 2 Ground Fault: Specific Trap Enable Battery 2 Ground Fault: Trap ID Bat 1 [Polarity]: Ground Fault OK 2 5 10 Bat 2: Cal. Required OK 2 5 Enabled 11 Bat 2 [Polarity]: Ground Fault 1 1 12 Bat 2 [Polarity]: Ground Fault OK 2 5 Enabled 13 Bat 3 Voltage Out of Rng 1 1 14 Bat 3 Voltage OK 2 5 Enabled 15 Battery 3 Cal Required: Reason Bat 3: Cal. Required Battery 3 Cal Required: Flag Battery 3 Cal Required: Priority Battery 3 Cal Required: Text Field 1 Battery 3 Cal Required: Text Field 2 1 1 16 Bat 3: Cal. Required OK 2 5 Figure 6-48, Configuration - Active SNMP Configuration (2) (Cont. on next page) 6-48 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Battery 3 Ground Fault: Specific Trap Enable Battery 3 Ground Fault: Trap ID Battery 3 Ground Fault: Reason Battery 3 Ground Fault: Flag Battery 3 Ground Fault: Priority Battery 3 Ground Fault: Text Field 1 Battery 3 Ground Fault: Text Field 2 Enabled 17 Bat 3 [Polarity]: Ground Fault 1 1 18 Bat 3 [Polarity]: Ground Fault OK 2 5 Signaling Alarm Trap Enable Trap Text Number of Occurrences Time (seconds) Light Out Detected: Specific Trap Enable Light Out Detected: Trap ID Light Out Detected: Reason Light Out Detected: Flag Light Out Detected: Priority Light Out Detected: Text Field 1 Light Out Detected: Text Field 2 Open Track CKT Detected: Specific Trap Enable Open Track CKT Detected: Trap ID Open Track CKT Detected: Reason Open Track CKT Detected: Flag Open Track CKT Detected: Priority Open Track CKT Detected: Text Field 1 Open Track CKT Detected: Text Field 2 Disabled Alert Specific Data Clear Specific Data Signaling System Signaling System Alarm Alarm OK N/A N/A N/A N/A Enabled 25 26 S# B# L#: Light Out OK 1 2 1 5 S# B# L#: Light Out Enabled 27 Open Trk Circuit Detected 1 1 28 Open Trk Circuit Detected OK 2 5 System Health Trap Enable Trap Text Number of Occurrences Time (seconds) Module Health: Specific Trap Enable Module Health: Trap ID Module Health: Reason Module Health: Flag Module Health: Priority Module Health: Text Field 1 Module Health: Text Field 2 Module Removed: Specific Trap Enable Module Removed: Trap ID Module Removed: Reason Module Removed: Flag Module Removed: Priority Disabled Alert Specific Data Clear Specific Data System Health System Health OK N/A N/A N/A N/A Enabled 29 [Module] #: [Failure Message] 1 1 30 [Module] #: [Failure Message] OK 2 5 Enabled 31 32 IXC S# Removed IXC S# Removed OK 1 2 1 5 Figure 6-49, Configuration - Active SNMP Configuration (3) (Cont. on next page) 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-49 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Module Removed: Text Field 1 Module Removed: Text Field 2 Module Not Installed: Specific Trap Enable Module Not Installed: Trap ID Module Not Installed: Reason Module Not Installed: Flag Module Not Installed: Priority Module Not Installed: Text Field 1 Module Not Installed: Text Field 2 Enabled 33 [VLD S#:/XCI] Not Installed 1 1 34 [VLD S#:/XCI] Not Installed OK 2 5 Communications Link Trap Enable Trap Text Number of Occurrences Time (seconds) Class D Message Error: Specific Trap Enable Class D Message Error: Trap ID Class D Message Error: Reason Class D Message Error: Flag Class D Message Error: Priority Class D Message Error: Text Field 1 Class D Message Error: Text Field 2 Class D Server Changed: Specific Trap Enable Class D Server Changed: Trap ID Class D Server Changed: Reason Class D Server Changed: Flag Class D Server Changed: Priority Class D Server Changed: Text Field 1 Class D Server Changed: Text Field 2 Vital Remote Link Error: Specific Trap Enable Vital Remote Link Error: Trap ID Vital Remote Link Error: Reason Vital Remote Link Error: Flag Vital Remote Link Error: Priority Vital Remote Link Error: Text Field 1 Vital Remote Link Error: Text Field 2 LCP Link Down: Specific Trap Enable LCP Link Down: Trap ID LCP Link Down: Reason LCP Link Down: Flag LCP Link Down: Priority LCP Link Down: Text Field 1 LCP Link Down: Text Field 2 HAWK Link Down: Specific Trap Enable HAWK Link Down: Trap ID Disabled Alert Specific Data Clear Specific Data Communications link Communications link state OK 0 N/A 0 N/A Enabled 35 Class D port error 1 1 36 Class D port OK 2 5 Enabled 109 Class D Server changed 1 1 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Enabled 37 Remote Link Error 1 1 38 Remote Link OK 2 5 Enabled 39 LCP Link Down 1 1 40 LCP Link Down OK 2 5 Enabled 41 42 Figure 6-50, Configuration - Active SNMP Configuration (4) (Cont. on next page) 6-50 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface HAWK Link Down: Reason HAWK Link Down: Flag HAWK Link Down: Priority HAWK Link Down: Text Field 1 HAWK Link Down: Text Field 2 Office Code Fail: Specific Trap Enable Office Code Fail: Trap ID Office Code Fail: Reason Office Code Fail: Flag Office Code Fail: Priority Office Code Fail: Text Field 1 Office Code Fail: Text Field 2 Office Link Fail: Specific Trap Enable Office Link Fail: Trap ID Office Link Fail: Reason Office Link Fail: Flag Office Link Fail: Priority Office Link Fail: Text Field 1 Office Link Fail: Text Field 2 Dup MAC Detected: Specific Trap Enable Dup MAC Detected: Trap ID Dup MAC Detected: Reason Dup MAC Detected: Flag Dup MAC Detected: Priority Dup MAC Detected: Text Field 1 Dup MAC Detected: Text Field 2 Dup IP Address Detected: Specific Trap Enable Dup IP Address Detected: Trap ID HAWK Link Down HAWK Link Down OK 1 2 1 5 Enabled 43 Office Code Fail 1 1 44 Office Code Fail OK 2 5 Enabled 45 Office Link Fail 1 1 46 Office Link Fail OK 2 5 Enabled 47 Duplicate MAC 1 1 48 Duplicate MAC OK 2 5 Enabled 49 Dup IP Address Detected: Reason Duplicate IP Port # Dup IP Address Detected: Flag Dup IP Address Detected: Priority Dup IP Address Detected: Text Field 1 Dup IP Address Detected: Text Field 2 1 1 50 Duplicate IP Port # OK 2 5 Configuration Change Trap Enable Trap Text Number of Occurrences Time (seconds) Vital Config Change: Specific Trap Enable Vital Config Change: Trap ID Vital Config Change: Reason Vital Config Change: Flag Vital Config Change: Priority Vital Config Change: Text Field 1 Vital Config Change: Text Field 2 Non-Vital Config Change: Specific Trap Enable Non-Vital Config Change: Trap ID Disabled Alert Specific Data Clear Specific Data Configuration Change N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Enabled 67 Vital Config Param Changed 1 1 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Enabled 69 N/A Figure 6-51, Configuration - Active SNMP Configuration (5) (Cont. on next page) 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-51 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Non-Vital Config Change: Reason Non-Vital Config Change: Flag Non-Vital Config Change: Priority Non-Vital Config Change: Text Field 1 Non-Vital Config Change: Text Field 2 Non-Vital Config Param Changed 1 1 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A WIU Health Trap Enable Trap Text Number of Occurrences Time (seconds) PTC Disabled: Specific Trap Enable PTC Disabled: Trap ID PTC Disabled: Reason PTC Disabled: Flag PTC Disabled: Priority PTC Disabled: Text Field 1 PTC Disabled: Text Field 2 Processor Reset: Specific Trap Enable Processor Reset: Trap ID Disabled Alert Specific Data Clear Specific Data WIU Health WIU Health OK N/A N/A 0 0 Enabled 71 PTC Disabled 1 1 Enabled 73 Processor Reset: Reason Processor C Reset Processor Reset: Flag Processor Reset: Priority Processor Reset: Text Field 1 Processor Reset: Text Field 2 1 1 Program Flash Error: Specific Trap Enable Program Flash Error: Trap ID Program Flash Error: Reason Program Flash Error: Flag Program Flash Error: Priority Program Flash Error: Text Field 1 Program Flash Error: Text Field 2 Log Flash Error: Specific Trap Enable Log Flash Error: Trap ID Log Flash Error: Reason Log Flash Error: Flag Log Flash Error: Priority Log Flash Error: Text Field 1 Log Flash Error: Text Field 2 72 PTC Enabled 2 5 74 Processor C Reset clear 2 5 Enabled 75 Program Flash Fault 1 1 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Enabled 77 Log Flash Fault 1 1 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A HMAC Rejection Trap Enable Trap Text Number of Occurrences Time (seconds) HMAC Rejection: Specific Trap Enable HMAC Rejection: Trap ID HMAC Rejection: Reason HMAC Rejection: Flag Disabled Alert Specific Data Clear Specific Data HMAC rejection N/A 0 N/A 0 N/A Enabled 81 HMAC rejection 1 N/A N/A N/A Figure 6-52, Configuration - Active SNMP Configuration (6) (Cont. on next page) 6-52 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface HMAC Rejection: Priority HMAC Rejection: Text Field 1 HMAC Rejection: Text Field 2 1 N/A N/A N/A EMP CRC Rejection Trap Enable Trap Text Number of Occurrences Time (seconds) EMP CRC Rejection: Specific Trap Enable EMP CRC Rejection: Trap ID EMP CRC Rejection: Reason EMP CRC Rejection: Flag EMP CRC Rejection: Priority EMP CRC Rejection: Text Field 1 EMP CRC Rejection: Text Field 2 Disabled Alert Specific Data Clear Specific Data EMP CRC rejection N/A 0 N/A 0 N/A Enabled 83 EMP CRC rejection 1 1 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A HMAC Key Change Trap Enable Trap Text Number of Occurrences Time (seconds) HMAC Key Change: Specific Trap Enable HMAC Key Change: Trap ID HMAC Key Change: Reason HMAC Key Change: Flag HMAC Key Change: Priority HMAC Key Change: Text Field 1 HMAC Key Change: Text Field 2 Disabled Alert Specific Data Clear Specific Data HMAC key change N/A 0 N/A N/A N/A Enabled 85 HMAC key change 1 1 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Time Synchronization Error Trap Enable Trap Text Number of Occurrences Time (seconds) Time Sync Expired: Specific Trap Enable Time Sync Expired: Trap ID Time Sync Expired: Reason Time Sync Expired: Flag Time Sync Expired: Priority Time Sync Expired: Text Field 1 Time Sync Expired: Text Field 2 Time Sync Not Initialized: Specific Trap Enable Time Sync Not Initialized: Trap ID Time Sync Not Initialized: Reason Time Sync Not Initialized: Flag Time Sync Not Initialized: Priority Time Sync Not Initialized: Text Field 1 Time Sync Not Initialized: Text Field 2 Disabled Alert Specific Data Clear Specific Data Time sync error Time sync error clear N/A N/A 0 N/A Enabled 87 Time sync expired 1 1 88 Time sync OK 2 5 Enabled 89 Time sync not initialized 1 1 90 Time sync initialized 2 5 Figure 6-53, Configuration - Active SNMP Configuration (7) (Cont. on next page) 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-53 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Time Sync Delta Msg Time: Specific Trap Enable Time Sync Delta Msg Time: Trap ID Time Sync Delta Msg Time: Reason Time Sync Delta Msg Time: Flag Time Sync Delta Msg Time: Priority Time Sync Delta Msg Time: Text Field 1 Time Sync Delta Msg Time: Text Field 2 Time Sync Msg Window: Specific Trap Enable Time Sync Msg Window: Trap ID Time Sync Msg Window: Reason Time Sync Msg Window: Flag Time Sync Msg Window: Priority Time Sync Msg Window: Text Field 1 Time Sync Msg Window: Text Field 2 Time Sync LRM Time: Specific Trap Enable Time Sync LRM Time: Trap ID Time Sync LRM Time: Reason Time Sync LRM Time: Flag Time Sync LRM Time: Priority Time Sync LRM Time: Text Field 1 Time Sync LRM Time: Text Field 2 Enabled 91 92 Msg Delta Time Msg Delta Time Clear 1 2 1 5 Enabled 93 Msg Delta Time Window 1 1 94 Msg Delta Time Window Clear 2 5 Enabled 95 LRM Msg Delta Time 1 1 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Application Changed Trap Enable Trap Text Number of Occurrences Time (seconds) Signal System App Changed: Specific Trap Enable Signal System App Changed: Trap ID Signal System App Changed: Reason Signal System App Changed: Flag Signal System App Changed: Priority Signal System App Changed: Text Field 1 Signal System App Changed: Text Field 2 PTC Mapping File Changed: Specific Trap Enable PTC Mapping File Changed: Trap ID PTC Mapping File Changed: Reason PTC Mapping File Changed: Flag PTC Mapping File Changed: Priority PTC Mapping File Changed: Text Field 1 PTC Mapping File Changed: Text Field 2 Disabled Alert Specific Data Clear Specific Data Application changed N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Enabled 97 Signal System App changed 1 1 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Enabled 99 PTC Mapping File changed 1 1 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Figure 6-54, Configuration - Active SNMP Configuration (8) (Cont. on next page) 6-54 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface PTC Config File Changed: Specific Trap Enable PTC Config File Changed: Trap ID Enabled 101 PTC Config File changed 1 1 PTC Config File Changed: Reason PTC Config File Changed: Flag PTC Config File Changed: Priority PTC Config File Changed: Text Field 1 PTC Config File Changed: Text Field 2 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Invalid Wayside Device Status Trap Enable Trap Text Number of Occurrences Time (seconds) Disabled Alert Specific Data Clear Specific Data Invalid wayside N/A device status N/A N/A 0 N/A Invalid Wayside Device Status: Specific Trap Enable Invalid Wayside Device Status: Trap ID Invalid Wayside Device Status: Reason Invalid Wayside Device Status: Flag Invalid Wayside Device Status: Priority Invalid Wayside Device Status: Text Field 1 Invalid Wayside Device Status: Text Field 2 Enabled 103 N/A Dev: Val: N/A 1 N/A 1 N/A N/A N/A WIU Heartbeat Trap Enable Trap Text Number of Occurrences Time (seconds) Disabled Alert Specific Data Clear Specific Data WIU Heartbeat N/A N/A N/A 0 N/A WIU Heartbeat: Specific Trap Enable WIU Heartbeat: Trap ID WIU Heartbeat: Reason WIU Heartbeat: Flag WIU Heartbeat: Priority WIU Heartbeat: Text Field 1 WIU Heartbeat: Text Field 2 Enabled 105 WIU Heartbeat 1 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Local Presence Trap Enable Trap Text Number of Occurrences Time (seconds) Disabled Alert Specific Data Clear Specific Data Local Presence Local Presence Established Removed N/A N/A N/A N/A Local Presence: Specific Trap Enable Local Presence: Trap ID Local Presence: Reason Local Presence: Flag Local Presence: Priority Local Presence: Text Field 1 Local Presence: Text Field 2 Enabled 107 Local Presence Established 1 1 108 Local Presence Removed 2 5 Figure 6-55, Configuration - Active SNMP Configuration (9) 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-55 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 SNMP General Configuration The SNMP General Configuration page is used to set up the SNMP destination IP address, SNMP UDP port. SNMP Trap Enable, Public and Private community strings, and location and device identification parameters. This page lets the user enable and disable the SNMP functionality. The SNMP parameters are stored on the VPM-3. The following SNMP General Configuration parameters define the SNMP operations and apply to all the SNMP Traps defined in the system: 6-56 • Temporary SNMP Trap Disable Time: Length of time to expire before Temporary SNMP Trap disabled is set to "stop". • Temporary SNMP Trap Disable: The NMS subsystem will set the Temporary SNMP Trap Disable to stop when the Temporary SNMP Trap Disable is set to "Start/Re-Start", and the time defined by the Temporary SNMP Trap Disable Time has passed. • Destination IP 1-4: IP addresses of the network management systems receiving the traps – Default value 0.0.0.0 • Destination UDP Port 1-4: UDP ports (161, 162) selectable of the network management systems receiving the traps – Default value 162 • Wayside Device Type: Wayside equipment type associated with this WIU. Defaults to the WIU device. (EL1A, EC4, VHLC or ElectroLogIXS) • Location: String used to define the local unit. If a PTC mapping file is loaded, it defaults to WIU Address. If no Mapping file loaded, it defaults to the Site ID • Public Community String: Setting this value grants access to the SNMP site – Defaults to Blanks • Private Community String: Password for internal account on the network management system receiving the traps. – Defaults to blanks • WIU Heartbeat Trap Logging: The SNMP Comm Log will be withheld from logging of the WIU Heartbeat Traps if the "WIU Heartbeat Trap Logging" is set to disable. • SNMP Trap Enable: Indicates if the SNMP Subsystem is active. – Defaults to Disabled © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Site ID: undefined Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Software Update Upload Software Apply Software Selective Functionality Selective Function Enable PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable Diagnostics SNMP General Configuration Destination IP 1 0.0.0.0 Destination IP 2 0.0.0.0 Destination IP 3 0.0.0.0 Destination IP 4 0.0.0.0 Destination UDP Port 1 162 Destination UDP Port 2 162 Destination UDP Port 3 162 Destination UDP Port 4 162 Wayside Device Type Location - IP Address of network management system traps are sent to SNMP UDP Port (161 or 162) User entered value. Defaults to host platform ElectroLogIXS User entered value. Defaults to Site ID undefined Public Community String User entered values Private Community String WIU Heartbeat Trap Logging Disabled SNMP Trap Enable Disabled I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Log Off Status Update Settings VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 SNMP Configuration File Upload SNMP Configuration File Browse... Upload Download SNMP Configuration File Download Set General SNMP Settings to the Defaults Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office NOTE: Click this button to set General SNMP Settings to the defaults. Set SNMP Defaults Figure 6-56, Configuration - SNMP General Configuration 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-57 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 SNMP Trap Configuration The SNMP Trap Configuration page lets the user customize each trap the system is set up to send. Each trap can have one or more specific traps with user editable fields. Enabling and disabling a Trap enables or disables all the specific traps associated with the Trap. All the user customizable fields are independent of the trap implementation in the system and their values have meaning to the network management system that receives the traps. Depending on the trap, a trap can have an associated clear trap that is invoked when the condition that caused the trap no longer applies. For example, if a Communications Link trap is sent when 5 Class D Message errors are detected in 60 seconds. The Communications Link trap clear can be set so that the clear is sent when a single good Class D message is detected. The following SNMP Trap Configuration parameters allow customization of the traps: Trap Name Dropdown list of all generic trap names Trap Enable Enables the Trap defined by Trap Name Alert Configuration data associated with the Alert trap Trap Text user modifiable text field describing the trap Number of Occurrences If applicable, lets the user define the number of times the event has to occur in the time period defined by Time before the trap will be sent Time If applicable, lets the user define the period of time an alert condition has to exist before a trap will be sent. Used in conjunction with Number of Occurrences Clear Configuration data associated with the Clear trap for an alert Trap Text user modifiable text field describing the trap Number of Occurrences If applicable, lets the user define the number of times the event has to occur in the time period defined by Time before the clear trap will be sent Time If applicable, lets the use define the period of time an alert condition has to exist before a clear trap will be sent. Used in conjunction with Number of Occurrences Specific Trap Name Dropdown list of Specific Traps for the selected Generic Trap Trap ID User editable Trap ID. The system ensures that all are unique. Alert Specific Data Reason Fixed field denoting the reason for the trap Flag User editable number providing an additional identifier Priority User editable priority field Text Field 1 User editable text field 6-58 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Text Field 2 User editable text field Clear Specific Data Reason Fixed field denoting the reason for the trap Flag User editable number providing an additional identifier System ensures that this field is different than the Priority associated with the alert. Priority User editable priority field Text Field 1 User editable text field Text Field 2 User editable text field The following traps are defined in the system: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 100373-010 AR0 Battery Voltage – Battery 1 2 or 3 alarms are detected. Only applicable if a VTI-2S or GFD module is installed Battery Voltage Clear Signaling Alarms Signaling Alarms Clear System Health System Health Clear Communications Link Communications Link Clear Configuration Change - Vital Configuration Change, or Non-Vital Configuration Change WIU Health – PTC Disabled, Processor Reset, or Program Flash error WIU Health Clear HMAC Rejection -Incoming message to WIU fails HMAC verification EMP CRC Rejection – Incoming message to WIU fails CRC verification HMAC Key Change -HMAC Key is changed Time Synchronization Error – Time synchronization expires, time synchronization is not initialized, Time Synchronization Delta Message Time, Time Synchronization Message Window, or Time Synchronization LRM Time Time Synchronization Clear Application Changed – Signal System App Changed, PTC Mapping file changed, or PTC Config file is changed Invalid Wayside Device Status – State of any wayside device monitored by the WIU is invalid or unknown WIU Heartbeat – Generic trap sent when Time elapses Local Presence Local Presence – Sent when Local Presence is applied or removed. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-59 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Site ID: undefined Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings Diagnostics Log Off Status SNMP Trap Configuration System Configuration Local Presence SNMP Traps are currently Disabled System Time Application Generic Trap Change Password Data General Configuration Trap Name Local Presence User editable trap text. Vital Timers Default value shown Non-Vital Timers Trap Enable Disabled Vital Configuration Alert Battery Alarms Trap Text Local Presence Established Software Update Upload Software Apply Software Selective Functionality Selective Function Enable PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt Uneditable SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable Dropdown list of defined Generic Traps Sets all specific traps defined for this generic trap to enabled Clear Local Presence Removed Number of Occurrences N/A N/A Time (seconds) N/A N/A Specific Trap Data If no Clear trap is defined for this trap, these fields are greyed out Dropdown list of specific traps defined fo this generic trap Specific Trap Name Local Presence Specific Trap Enable Enabled Clear Specific Data Alert Specific Data Trap ID 107 Reason 108 Local Presence Established Established Local Presence Removed Flag 1 2 Priority 1 5 Text Field 1 I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - Text Field 2 VIO-1010S User editable. System checks for uniqueness VIO-86S Additional user editable Update Settings VLD-R16S fields VLD-R16S Set Local Presence to the Defaults VLD-C6S VIO-44R NOTE: Click this button to set Local Presence to the defaults. CAB-16S Resets all parameters VIO-44S Default Local Presence Back to defaults VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office Serial Ports Diagnostic 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Figure 6-57, Configuration - SNMP Trap Configuration 6-60 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Site ID: undefined Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings SNMP Traps are currently Disabled Generic Trap Data Trap Name Trap Enable Selective Functionality Selective Function Enable PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Enabled Alert Upload Software Apply Software - When a clear trap is defined for the trap these fields are editable Communications Link Clear Communications link state Communications link OK Number of Occurrences 0 N/A Time (seconds) 0 Trap Text Software Update 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Log Off Status SNMP Trap Configuration System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms I/O Slots Diagnostics N/A Time in seconds Event must occur this many times in the time defined by “Time” for the trap to be sent Specific Trap Data Specific Trap Name Class D Message Error Specific Trap Enable Enabled Clear Specific Data Alert Specific Data Trap ID 35 Reason Class D port error 36 Class D port OK Flag 1 2 Priority 1 5 System checks that Flag is unique for this specific trap Text Field 1 Text Field 2 Update Settings Set Communications Link to the Defaults NOTE: Click this button to set Communications Link to the defaults. Default Communications Link Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office Serial Ports Diagnostic 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Figure 6-58, Configuration – SNMP Trap Configuration 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-61 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 SNMP Temporary Disable The SNMP Temporary Disable page allows temporarily disabling the SNMP Traps. Starting the timer disables sending traps until the timer expires. The timer can be set in 30 minute increments up to 8 hours. It defaults to 60 minutes. Site ID: undefined Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Diagnostics Log Off Status SNMP Temporary Disable Local Presence required to modify the parameters on this page. Click Here to request Local Presence Temporary SNMP Trap Disable Time Temporary SNMP Trap Disable 60 Start/ReStart/Re-start Stop Update Settings Software Update Upload Software Apply Software Selective Functionality Selective Function Enable PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office Serial Ports Diagnostic 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Figure 6-59, Configuration - SNMP Temporary Disable 6-62 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Site ID: undefined Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings Diagnostics Log Off Status SNMP Temporary Disable System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Temporary SNMP Trap Disable Time Temporary SNMP Trap Disable Select the time for SNMP traps to be disabled 60 Start/Re-start Stop Update Settings Stops the disable timer and resumes sending traps Start or re-start the timer Software Update Upload Software Apply Software Selective Functionality Selective Function Enable PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office Serial Ports Diagnostic 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Figure 6-60, Configuration - SNMP Temporary Disable 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-63 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 I/O Slots Electro Code Track Circuits The Configuration, Diagnostic, and Status pages for a VIT-2S module are shown in Figures 6-61, 6-62 and 6-63. WARNING Proper track circuit adjustment and operation should always be validated through track circuit shunt testing. Site ID: undefined Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Software Update Upload Software Apply Software Selective Functionality Diagnostics Log Off Status Slot 9 - VTI-2S Settings [Diagnostics][Status] Track 1: RXCODE1-T1 Transmit Output Voltage 0.5 Receive Reference Ratio 6.00 Code 5 Setting Volts NON-ALT Transmit Current 0.07 Amps Track Resistance 7.11 Ohms Receive Current 0.05 Amps Track 2: RXCODE1-T2 Transmit Output Voltage 0.5 Receive Reference Ratio 6.00 Code 5 Setting Selective Function Enable Volts NON-ALT Transmit Current 0.07 Amps PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt Track Resistance 7.11 Ohms Receive Current 0.05 Amps SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable Update Settings I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office Figure 6-61, Configuration - VTI-2S 6-64 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration Live Log Configure Logs Configure Live Log Configure PTC Comm Log Configure Office Log Log Archive Size System Log Configuration Log Data Log GDA Data Logs Alarms PTC Logs PTC Comm Log PTC Event Log PTC Device State Log Office Log View Office Log Log Off Status Slot 9 - VTI-2S Diagnostics Live Log System Logs Diagnostics [Configuration][Status] Local Presence required to modify the parameters on this page. Click Here to request Local Presence Track 1: RXCODE1-T1 Transmit Test Mode OFF Transmit Current 0.07 Amps Receive Test Mode OFF Receive Current 3.25 Amps Track 2: RXCODE1-T2 Transmit Test Mode ON Transmit Current 3.20 Amps Receive Test Mode OFF Receive Current 0.05 Amps I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Update Settings NOTE: Refresh this page to show updates. Communications SNMP Comm Log Ethernet Remote Office Manual Override Serial Ports 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) 373-0692 Figure 6-62, Diagnostics - VTI-2S 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-65 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration All Statuses Watch Statuses Diagnostics Description I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 9-HEALTH TRUE 1CABEN FALSE 50RATE-T1 FALSE 9-3RDPULSE FALSE 9-BROKENRAIL TRUE NON-ALT Selected 9-NON-ALT TRUE Transmit Test Mode 9-TX_TEST TRUE Receive Test Mode 9-RX_TEST TRUE Quick Shunt Code 1 QUICK-TRK1 FALSE Code 1 RXCODE1-T1 FALSE Code 3 RXCODE3-T2 FALSE Code 1 TXCODE1-T1 TRUE Code 3 TXCODE3-T1 FALSE Cab Enable 1 Status Rate 1 3rd Pulse Timer Running Broken Rail 9-STICK TRUE Quick Shunt Code 1 QUICK-TRK2 FALSE Code 1 RXCODE1-T2 FALSE Code 2 RXCODE2-T2 FALSE Code 4 RXCODE4-T2 FALSE Code 1 TXCODE1-T2 FALSE Code 2 TXCODE2-T2 TRUE Code 4 TXCODE4-T2 FALSE Stick 3 - (empty) Internal Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Status Name Value Watch Module Health Comm I/O Ethernet Remote Office Serial Ports 1 - LCP 2 - Remote [Configuration][Diagnostics] Slot 9 - VTI-2S PTC PTC Statuses PTC Device State Log Off Status 2CABEN FALSE 50RATE-T2 FALSE Vital Input 1 9-VIN1 FALSE Vital Input 2 9-VIN2 FALSE Cab Enable 2 Status Rate 1 Figure 6-63, Status - VTI-2S 6-66 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Cab Signaling The status page for the CAB-16 module is shown in Figure 6-64. The CAB-16 module does not have any configuration settings or diagnostic modes of operation. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration All Statuses Watch Statuses PTC Statuses PTC Device State Module Health - [Configuration][Diagnostics] Status Name Value Watch 7-HEALTH FALSE Cab Enable 1 Status CAB1EB TRUE Rate 1 7-CAB50 I/O Slots VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Log Off Status Slot 7 - CAB-16S Description PTC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Diagnostics Rate 2 7-CAB75 FALSE FALSE Rate 3 7-CAB120 TRUE Comm I/O Ethernet Remote Office Serial Ports 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Internal Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers 373-0694 Figure 6-64, Status - CAB -16S 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-67 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Code Select Inputs / Track Decoder Outputs The status page for the VIO-1010 module is shown in Figure 6-65. The VIO-1010 module does not have any configuration settings or diagnostic modes of operation. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration All Statuses Watch Statuses PTC Statuses PTC Device State I/O Slots - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Log Off Status [Configuration][Diagnostics] Slot 1 - VIO-1010S Description PTC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Diagnostics Status Name Value Watch 1-HEALTH FALSE Track Code Select Input 1 TCS-IN1 FALSE Track Code Select Input 2 TCS-IN2 Track Code Select Input 3 TCS-IN3 FALSE FALSE Module Health Track Code Decoder Output 1 7-CODEOUT1 FALSE FALSE Track Code Decoder Output 2 7-CODEOUT2 FALSE Track Code Select Input 4 TCS-IN4 Comm I/O Ethernet Remote Office Serial Ports 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Internal Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers 373-0695 Figure 6-65, Status - VIO-1010S 6-68 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Lamps The Configuration, Diagnostic, and Status pages from the VLD-C6S are shown in Figures 6-66, 6-67 and 668. The Diagnostic and Status pages for the VLD-R16S are shown in Figures 6-69 and 6-70. The VLD-R16 has no field settable configuration settings. Site ID: undefined Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Diagnostics Slot 5 - VLD-C6S Settings [Diagnostics][Status] Flash Rate 30 FPM Manual Voltage Setup: Bank 1 Bank Voltage 10.0 Volts 10.0 Volts Bank 2 Bank Voltage Software Update Upload Software Apply Software Log Off Status Update Settings Automated Voltage Setup: Selective Functionality Selective Function Enable Lamp Setup Grant For Module Is Denied. Bank 1 Target Bulb Voltage PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable 9.5 Volts Start Auto Setup Last Status None Bank 2 Target Bulb Voltage 9.5 Last Status None Volts Start Auto Setup I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office Serial Ports Diagnostic 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Figure 6-66, Configuration - VLD-C6S 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-69 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration Live Log Diagnostics Slot 5 - VLD-C6S Diagnostics Live Log Configure Logs Configure Live Log Configure PTC Comm Log Configure Office Log Log Archive Size System Log Configuration Log Data Log GDA Data Logs Alarms [Configuration][Status] Local Presence required to modify the parameters on this page. Click Here to request Local Presence Lamp Setup Grant For Module Is Denied. Lamp Test Mode System Logs Log Off Status off Bank 1 Lamp Test Enable None Bank 2 Lamp Test Enable None Update Settings PTC Logs PTC Comm Log PTC Event Log PTC Device State Log Office Log View Office Log I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Communications SNMP Comm Log Ethernet Remote Office Manual Override Serial Ports 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) 373-0697 Figure 6-67, Diagnostics - VLD-C6S 6-70 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration All Statuses Watch Statuses PTC Statuses PTC Device State I/O Slots - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm I/O Ethernet Remote Office Serial Ports 1 - LCP 2 - Remote [Configuration][Diagnostics] Status Name Value Watch Module Health 5-HEALTH TRUE Bank 1 Lamp 1 5-B1L1 FALSE 5-B1L1F 5-B1L1OUT FALSE TRUE Bank 1 Lamp 2 5-B1L2 FALSE Bank 1 Flash Lamp 2 5-B1L2F FALSE 5-B1L2OUT FALSE Bank 1 Lamp 3 5-B1L3 FALSE Bank 1 Flash Lamp 3 5-B1L3F FALSE 5-B1L3OUT FALSE Bank 2 Lamp 1 5-B2L1 FALSE Bank 2 Flash Lamp 1 5-B2L1F FALSE Bank 2 Lamp 1 Out 5-B2LIOUT FALSE Non-Vital Output 1 5-NVOUT1 FALSE Non-Vital Input 2 5-NVIN1 Lamp Setup Grant 5-SETUPGRANT FALSE FALSE TRUE Bank 1 Flash Lamp 1 Bank 1 Lamp 1 Out Bank 1 Lamp 2 Out Bank 1 Lamp 3 Out Lamp Normal Mode Log Off Status Slot 5 - VLD-C6S Description PTC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Diagnostics 5-NORMAL 3 - (empty) Internal Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers 373-0698 Figure 6-68, Status - VLD-C6S 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-71 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration Live Log Diagnostics Slot 3 - VLD-R16S Diagnostics Live Log Bank 1 Configure Logs Configure Live Log Configure PTC Comm Log Configure Office Log Log Archive Size Lamp Test Grant For Bank 1 Is Denied. Lamp Test Mode If Test Mode is not available the reason is shown here. off Lamp 1 Enable Lamp 3 Enable System Log Configuration Log Data Log GDA Data Logs Alarms Lamp 4 Enable Lamp 5 Enable Lamp 6 Enable Lamp 7 Enable PTC Logs PTC Comm Log PTC Event Log PTC Device State Log Lamp 8 Enable Bank 2 Lamp Test Mode Office Log on Lamp 9 Enable View Office Log Lamp 10 Enable I/O Slots - [Configuration][Status] Lamp 2 Enable System Logs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Log Off Status when Test Mode is On, Select Lamps to turn on (check box) then select Update Settings Lamp 11 Enable VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Lamp 12 Enable Lamp 13 Enable Lamp 14 Enable Lamp 15 Enable Lamp 16 Enable Update Settings Communications SNMP Comm Log Ethernet Remote Office Manual Override Serial Ports 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) 373-0699 Figure 6-69, Diagnostics - VLD-R16S 6-72 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration All Statuses Watch Statuses PTC Statuses PTC Device State I/O Slots - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm I/O 3-HLTH TRUE 3-VSSR1 TRUE Vital Signal Stop 2 3-VSSR2 Lamp Grant Bank 1 3-B1GRANT TRUE FALSE Lamp Grant Bank 2 3-B2GRANT Bank 1 Health 3-B1HLTH Bank 2 Health 3-B2HLTH Lamp Bank 1 Normal 3-B1NORM FALSE TRUE TRUE TRUE Lamp Bank 2 Normal 3-B2NORM TRUE Lamp Steady On 1 3-LAMP1ON FALSE FALSE Lamp Flash 1 [Configuration][Diagnostics] Status Name Value Watch Vital Signal Stop 1 Module Health Log Off Status Slot 3 - VLD-R16S Status Description PTC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Diagnostics 3-LAMP1FLASH Lamp Alt Flash 1 3-LAMP1ALT Lamp OK Status 1 3-LAMP1OK FALSE FALSE Ethernet Remote Office Serial Ports 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Internal Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers 373-0700 Figure 6-70, Status - VLD-R16S 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-73 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Vital Inputs and Outputs The Configuration and Status pages for the VIO-86 module are shown in Figures 6-71 and 6-72. The VIO-86 has no diagnostic settings. The status page for the VIO-44S is shown in Figure 6-73. The VIO-44S has no configuration or diagnostic pages. The Configuration, Diagnostic, and Status pages for the VIO-44R are shown in Figures 6-74, 6-75 and 6-76. The switchover operation for the redundant banks is provided on the diagnostic page. WARNING For Slow Pick or Release Timers of 9 seconds or more, accuracy will be within +10%/-0%. For Slow Pick or Release Timers of less than 9 seconds, accuracy will be within +1 second under worst case timing conditions. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Software Update Upload Software Apply Software PTC Diagnostics Log Off Status [Diagnostics][Status] Slot 2 - VI O-86S Settings Input Name Vital Input 1 2-VIN1 2 2 Vital Input 2 2-VIN2 2 Disabled Disabled Disabled Vital Input 3 2-VIN3 Vital Input 4 Undefined Vital Input 5 Undefined Vital Input 6 Undefined Vital Input 7 Undefined Vital Input 8 Undefined Slow Pick Defined Input with both Slow Pick & Slow Release Slow Release Input with only Slow Pick Input without Slow Pick or Slow Release Inputs not defined (not used) in the application program. PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration Update Settings I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface Remote Office GENISYS Settings Serial Ports Diagnostic 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) 373-0701 Figure 6-71, Configuration - VIO-86S 6-74 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface All Statuses Watch Statuses 2 PTC PTC Statuses PTC Device State I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm I/O Ethernet Remote Office Serial Ports 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Internal Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers 373-0702 Figure 6-72, Status - VIO-86S 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-75 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration All Statuses Watch Statuses Diagnostics Slot 8 - VIO-44S Status Description PTC PTC Statuses PTC Device State I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 [Configuration][Diagnostics] Status Name Value Watch 8-HEALTH TRUE Vital Input 1 8-VIN1 FALSE Vital Input 3 8-VIN3 FALSE Vital Output 1 8-VOUT1 TRUE Vital Output 4 8-VOUT4 TRUE Module Health Log Off Status Comm I/O Ethernet Remote Office Serial Ports 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Internal Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Figure 6-73, Status - VIO-44S 6-76 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Site ID: undefined Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings Diagnostics Log Off Status Slot 6 - VIO-44R Settings System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms [Diagnostics][Status] Local Presence required to modify the parameters on this page. Click Here to request Local Presence Input Software Update Name Vital Input 1 6-VIN1 Vital Input 2 Undefined Vital Input 3 Undefined Vital Input 4 Undefined Slow Pick Slow Release Disabled Disabled Upload Software Apply Software Selective Functionality Selective Function Enable Update Settings PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office Serial Ports Diagnostic 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Figure 6-74, Configuration - VIO-44R 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-77 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration Live Log Diagnostics Slot 6 - VIO-44R Diagnostics Live Log Log Off Status [Configuration][Status] Active Bank Configure Logs Configure Live Log Configure PTC Comm Log Configure Office Log Log Archive Size Current Active Bank Bank 1 Force Switchover System Logs System Log Configuration Log Data Log GDA Data Logs Alarms PTC Logs PTC Comm Log PTC Event Log PTC Device State Log Office Log View Office Log I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Communications SNMP Comm Log Ethernet Remote Office Manual Override Serial Ports 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) 373-0705 Figure 6-75, Diagnostics - VIO-44R 6-78 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration All Statuses Watch Statuses PTC Statuses PTC Device State I/O Slots - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Module Health Input Redundancy Output Redundancy Vital Input 1 Vital Output 1 Log Off Status Slot 6 - VIO-44R Status Description PTC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Diagnostics [Configuration][Diagnostics] Status Name Value Watch 6-HEALTH TRUE 6-IN-REDUND TRUE 6-OUT-REDUND 6-VIN1 TRUE FALSE 6-VOUT1 FALSE Comm I/O Ethernet Remote Office Serial Ports 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Internal Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers 373-0706 Figure 6-76, Status - VIO-44R 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-79 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Ground Fault Detect The Configuration, and Status pages for the GFD-1 are shown in Figures 6-77 and 6-78. The GFD-1 does not have a Diagnostics page. Site ID: undefined Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Software Update Upload Software Apply Software Diagnostics Log Off Status [Diagnostics][Status] GFD-1 Settings Battery 1 Battery Name Battery 1 Fault Status No Fault Calibrated Voltage Ground Fault Threshold Ground Fault Time 12.0 Volts 10 kOhms 5 seconds Low Battery Alarm Voltage 8.0 Volts High Battery Alarm Voltage 16.5 Volts Battery 2 Battery Name Battery 2 Fault Status Low Battery Selective Functionality Selective Function Enable Ground Fault Time PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable Volts 10 kOhms 5 seconds Low Battery Alarm Voltage 8.0 Volts High Battery Alarm Voltage 16.5 Volts Battery Name VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Battery 3 Fault Status Ground Fault Calibrated Voltage Ground Fault Threshold Ground Fault Time I/O Slots - 12.0 Battery 3 SNMP Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Calibrated Voltage Ground Fault Threshold 12.0 Volts 20 kOhms 5 seconds Low Battery Alarm Voltage 8.0 Volts High Battery Alarm Voltage 16.5 Volts Update Settings Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office Serial Ports Diagnostic 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Figure 6-77, Configuration - Ground Fault Detect 6-80 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration All Statuses Watch Statuses PTC Statuses PTC Device State I/O Slots - [Configuration][Diagnostics] Status Name Value Watch B1FALUT TRUE Battery 1 High Alarm BATT1HIGH Battery 1 Low Alarm BAT1LOW TRUE TRUE Battery 1 Fault Log Off Status Slot 10 - GFD Description PTC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Diagnostics VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm I/O Ethernet Remote Office Serial Ports 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Internal Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers 373-0748 Figure 6-78, Status - Ground Fault Detect 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-81 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Communication Settings General Remote The General Remote Configuration page allows loading of MAC vault, deleting of the loaded MAC vault, starting and re-starting of MAC switchover, canceling of MAC switchover, viewing and updating the MMST value, and defaulting of vital and non-vital parameters. Selecting "Default Non-Vital Parameters" or "Default Vital Parameters" applies the default settings in the loaded application. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Software Update Upload Software Apply Software Selective Functionality Diagnostics Log Off Status Vital Comm General Remote MAC Vault Current Vault No vault present Upload New Vault Uploaded Vault Status None Browse... Upload Delete New Vault MAC Switchover Maximum MAC Switchover Time 1 sec Update Setting MAC Switchover Time 00:00:00 Switchover Enable Remaining Switchover Cancel Selective Function Enable PTC Set Vital Comm Parameters to Application Defaults PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt Default Non-Vital Parameters Default Vital Parameters SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable Note that selecting Default Parameters causes both Ethernet and Serial settings to be reset. I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office Serial Ports Diagnostic 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Figure 6-79, Configuration - General Remote 6-82 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface General Ethernet The General Ethernet Configuration page, shown in Figure 6-80, allows modification of the IP address, subnet mask, DHCP Server Enable/Disable, DHCP Server IP Pool Start, DHCP Server IP Pool End, DHCP Server Default Gateway for each of the two Ethernet ports along with the IP address of the Default Gateway. A Set Ethernet Defaults selection is provided to establish the settings contained in the application. When "Set Ethernet Defaults" is selected on the CDU or Web GUI, the DHCP Server Settings will be defaulted. Note that if the IP address of the Ethernet Port being used for the Web GUI session changes, the user will be logged out and will be required to log in to the new IP address. ElectroLogIXS uses a DHCP address pool from the subnet of each of the two Ethernet ports. The typical case is that the two ports are on different subnets; therefore each has its own pool of IP addresses to assign. An IP address is comprised of a Network field and a Host field. The Network field is identified by the "1s" in the subnet mask while the Host field is identified by the "0s" in the subnet mask. For example 255.255.255.0 The minimum allowable IP Pool address is the third address value from the beginning of the host field (e.g. 192.168.10.2) and the maximum allowable IP Pool address is the third address from the end value of the host field (e.g. 192.168.10.253). The maximum ElectroLogIXS DHCP IP pool range is 32 consecutive IP addresses from each of the possible subnets. Also, the x.x.x.0, x.x.x.1, x.x.x.254, and x.x.x.255 address of a subnet are not assignable as these are reserved for use by routers or other networking devices. Additionally, a DHCP IP pool range cannot span the Ethernet port IP address. That is, if the IP address is set to 192.168.10.20 and the DHCP IP Pool Start address is set to 192.168.0.15, the DHCP IP Pool End must be 192.168.0.19 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-83 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Software Update Upload Software Apply Software Diagnostics Log Off Status Ethernet Settings - General Ethernet Port 1 MAC Address 00:09:91:44:7E:48 IP Address Subnet Mask DHCP Server 192.168.0.11 255.255.255.0 Enabled DHCP Server IP Pool Start 192.168.0.12 DHCP Server IP Pool End 192.168.0.43 DHCP Server Default Gateway 0.0.0.0 Port 2 MAC Address 00:09:91:44:7E:49 Selective Functionality Selective Function Enable IP Address Subnet Mask DHCP Server PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt 192.168.1.12 255.255.255.0 Enabled DHCP Server IP Pool Start 192.168.1.13 DHCP Server IP Pool End 192.168.1.44 DHCP Server Default Gateway 0.0.0.0 Default Gateway 0.0.0.0 SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - Update Settings Enter new parameter Value Select "Update Settings" to go to the confirmation page Set Ethernet Settings to the Application Defaults VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 NOTE: Click this button to set all the Ethernet settings to the application defaults. Set Ethernet Defaults Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office Figure 6-80, Configuration - General Ethernet 6-84 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Routing Table The Routing Table configuration page, shown in Figure 6-81, allows up to eight static route entries to be designated. To manually enter and activate a routing table entry, click the “Enabled” box, enter the IP routing information along with the physical Ethernet port to use for that entry, and select Update Settings. To remove an existing entry from the table, uncheck the “Enabled” box and select Update Settings. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Diagnostics Log Off Status Ethernet Settings - Routing Table Routing Table Enabled Network Destination 3.192.0.0 Subnet Mask 255.255.0.0 Gateway 192.168.1.1 Interface 1 1 1 1 1 Software Update 1 Upload Software Apply Software 1 1 Selective Functionality Selective Function Enable Update Settings PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office Serial Ports Diagnostic 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Figure 6-81, Configuration - Routing Table 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-85 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Web Interface The Web Interface configuration page, shown in Figure 6-82, provides a means to change the TCP Port number to be used for HTTP access, the Inactivity time-out (auto log out time), and the Trusted Source settings for the two Ethernet Ports. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Software Update Upload Software Apply Software Diagnostics Ethernet Settings - Web Interface HTTP Port 80 Inactivity Timeout 60 minutes Trusted Source 1 Trusted Source Enabled Trusted Source Network 192.168.0.0 Trusted Source Netmask 255.255.0.0 Trusted Source 2 Trusted Source Selective Functionality Log Off Status Disabled Trusted Source Network 0.0.0.0 Trusted Source Netmask 0.0.0.0 Selective Function Enable Update Settings PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office Figure 6-82, Configuration - Web Interface 6-86 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Telnet Interface The Telnet Interface configuration page provides a means to change the Username, Password, TCP port number, Inactivity timeout, and the Trusted Source settings for the two Ethernet ports. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings Diagnostics Log Off Status Ethernet Settings - Telnet System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Telnet Configuration Port 1 Disabled Port 2 Disabled Telnet Username admin Telnet Password telnet Do Not Use the Web GUI Password for Telnet Telnet TCP Port Software Update Inactivity Timeout Upload Software Apply Software 23 Disabled minutes Trusted Source 1 Selective Functionality Selective Function Enable Trusted Source Disabled Trusted Source Network 0.0.0.0 Trusted Source Netmask 0.0.0.0 PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt SNMP Settings Trusted Source 2 Trusted Source Disabled Trusted Source Network 0.0.0.0 Trusted Source Netmask 0.0.0.0 Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable Update Settings I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office Figure 6-83, Configuration – Telnet Interface 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-87 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 SSH Interface The Ethernet SSH Interface configuration page provides the means to enable the SSH interface and change the Username, Password, SSH port number, SSH Inactivity Timeout and upload Authorized Key files for the SSH interface. Site ID: Jims Office Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings Diagnostics Log Off Status Ethernet Settings - SSH System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms SSH Configuration SSH Port 1 Enabled SSH Port 2 Enabled SSH Username admin SSH Password sshuser Do Not Use the Web GUI Password for SSH Software Update SSH Server Port Upload Software Apply Software SSH Inactivity Timeout 22 Disabled Timeout value to log off inactive user minutes Update Settings Selective Functionality CRC of current authorized key file Selective Function Enable PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Deletes current authorized key SSH Authorized Keys File Current SSH Authorized Keys File 0xD49B0BF4 CRC [DateTime to Expire 14:56:20 9/11/2013] Delete Current File Pending SSH Authorized Keys File No Future SSH Authorized Keys File CRC Present Delete Pending File Upload New SSH Authorized Keys File Browse... Upload Date to Apply SSH Authorized Keys File 9 Time to Apply SSH Authorized Keys File 15 Date to Expire SSH Authorized Keys File 9 Time to Expire SSH Authorized Keys File 15 11 :4 11 :4 2012 Authorized key file can be uploaded for automatic application at a future date : 34 2013 : 34 Uploaded SSH Authorized None Keys File Status Delete Uploaded File Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office Serial Ports Diagnostic 1 - LCP 2 - Remote Apply New Authorized Keys Set SSH Settings to the Controller Defaults NOTE: Click this button to set all the SSH settings to the controller defaults. Set SSH Defaults 3 - (empty) Figure 6-84, Configuration - SSH Interface 6-88 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Ethernet Vital Remote The Ethernet Vital Remote configuration page allows non-vital parameters of IP address, Port Number, Date/Time update and MAC enable/disable to be configured for each remote. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings Diagnostics Log Off Status Ethernet - Vital Comm Settings System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms [Diagnostics][Status] Attached Remotes # Protocol Software Update Network ID Local Remote IP Address Date/Time Update MAC Key Vital In Settings Use 1 RP2009 1 10 192.168.0.2 8280 Enabled Disabled No Edit 2 RP2000 *** *** 192.168.1.98 8281 Disabled Disabled No Edit 3 Disabled 1 14 192.168.1.96 8282 Disabled Disabled No Edit A*** in this area indicates that the Network IDs have not been set for a remote Upload Software Apply Software Port Update Settings Select “Edit” to go to the vital settings page for a given remote. Selective Functionality Selective Function Enable PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt Displays the state of MAC that is included in the incoming vital remote message. SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office Serial Ports Diagnostic 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Figure 6-85, Configuration - Remote (Ethernet) 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-89 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Ethernet Vital Communication WARNING Railroad Configuration Management Procedures must ensure that the proper values are set for each vital remote parameter in the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 units. Incorrect settings may result in death or serious injury. WARNING When setting a vital remote link Local or Remote Network ID on an ElectroLogIXS/EC5, use only the value supplied on the application circuit plans. If this information is not available from the application circuit plans, do not put that vital remote link into service until this is corrected. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. (See Appendix B for more detailed information) The Ethernet Vital Communication page allows the modification of the various vital settings for a given remote device. Modifications may be fixed or may have parameter ranges defined by the application program. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Software Update Upload Software Apply Software Diagnostics Log Off Status Ethernet - Vital Comm Remote 1 Settings [Vital Comm Settings] Vital Protocol Settings Remote Protocol Enabled RP2009 1 Plan Confirm ID Value with Circuit 10 Remote Network Id Plan Confirm ID Value with Circuit Local Network Id Maximum Send Time Difference 2100 msec Maximum Receive Time 2100 Difference msec Selective Functionality Update Protocol Settings Selective Function Enable PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 RP2009 Time Settings Heartbeat Message Interval 0 248 msec Heartbeat Message Interval 1 4000 msec Heartbeat Message Interval 2 12000 msec Heartbeat Message Interval 3 20000 msec Update Period 248 msec Acknowledge Timeout 992 msec These settings are only shown when RP2009 is the selected protocol Update RP2009 Settings Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office Serial Ports Diagnostic 1 - LCP Figure 6-86, Configuration - Vital Communication (Ethernet) 6-90 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Ethernet Office The Ethernet Office configuration page allows the selection of the office protocol to be used on the Ethernet interface when an Ethernet Office is defined in the application program. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Software Update Upload Software Apply Software Diagnostics Status Office Settings Log Off [Diagnostics][Status] Protocol Selection Office Protocol GENISYS Update Settings Set Office to the Application Defaults NOTE: Click this button to set all the office settings to the application defaults. Set Application Defaults Selective Functionality Selective Function Enable PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office Serial Ports Diagnostic 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Figure 6-87, Configuration - Office (Ethernet) 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-91 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Ethernet GENISYS Settings If the GENISYS protocol is selected for the Ethernet Office, the GENISYS Settings option is displayed in the Side Menu. The protocol settings, UDP Port Number for GENISYS messages and settings for the GENISYS Trusted Source feature may be modified from this page. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Software Update Diagnostics Office Settings - Genisys Protocol Indication Words 1 Unit Address 1 Enabled Indication Delay 0.0 Constant Indication Message Timeout Secure Poll 10 sec Disabled 7169 Trusted Source 1 Trusted Source Disabled Trusted Source Network 0.0.0.0 Selective Function Enable Trusted Source Netmask 0.0.0.0 PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable I/O Slots - sec Disabled Selective Functionality 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 [Diagnostics][Status] words Control Latching Office UDP Port Upload Software Apply Software Log Off Status Trusted Source 2 Trusted Source Disabled Trusted Source Network 0.0.0.0 Trusted Source Netmask 0.0.0.0 Update Settings Set Office to the Application Defaults NOTE: Click this button to set all the office settings to the application defaults. VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Set Application Defaults Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office GENISYS Settings Serial Ports Diagnostic 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Figure 6-88, Configuration - GENISYS Settings (Ethernet) 6-92 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Serial Diagnostic Port Settings for the Diagnostic Serial Port interface are controlled via this page. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Diagnostics Status Log Off Diagnostic Port Settings Diagnostic Port Baud Rate Parity 57600 None Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Flow Control Disabled Update Settings Software Update Upload Software Apply Software Selective Functionality Selective Function Enable PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office GENISYS Settings Serial Ports Diagnostic 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Figure 6-89, Configuration - Diagnostic (Serial Port) 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-93 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Serial LCP The Local Control Panel interface may be enabled or disabled via this page when an LCP interface is defined in the application program. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Diagnostics Status LCP Settings LCP Enabled Log Off [Diagnostics][Status] Enabled Update Settings Software Update Upload Software Apply Software Selective Functionality Selective Function Enable PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office GENISYS Settings Serial Ports Diagnostic 1 - LCP Figure 6-90, Configuration - LCP (Serial Port) 6-94 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Serial Vital Remote The Serial vital remote page provides the ability to set the non-vital parameters for the remotes on a serial interface when defined in the application program. ElectroLogIXS General Configuration Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID : 0 Diagnostic Status Log Off System Settings [Diagnostics][Status] System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Baud Rate Parity Stop Bits Type Mode Local Address Software Update Upload Software Apply Software # PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration Protocol 1 A*** in this area indicates that the Network IDs have not been set. - Select “Edit” to go to the vital settings page for a given remote. Displays the state of MAC that is included in the incoming vital remote message. I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 This field is displayed when MAC switchover is in progress. VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface Remote Office GENISYS Settings Serial Ports Diagnostic 1 - (empty) 2 - HAWK 3 - Remote 373-071 Figure 6-91, Configuration - Remote (Serial Port) 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-95 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Serial Vital Communication WARNING Railroad Configuration Management Procedures must ensure that the proper values are set for each vital remote parameter in the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 units. Incorrect settings may result in death or serious injury. WARNING When setting a vital remote link Local or Remote Network ID on an ElectroLogIXS/EC5, use only the value supplied on the application circuit plans. If this information is not available from the application circuit plans, do not put that vital remote link into service until this is corrected. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. (See Appendix B for more detailed information) The Serial Vital Communication page allows the modification of the various vital settings for a given remote device. Modifications may be fixed or may have parameter ranges defined by the application program. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Software Update Upload Software Apply Software Diagnostics Log Off Status Serial Port 2 - Vital Comm Remote 1 Settings [Vital Comm Settings] Vital Protocol Settings Remote Protocol Enabled RP2009 Local Network Id 0 Plan Confirm ID Value with Circuit Remote Network Id 200 Plan Confirm ID Value with Circuit Maximum Send Time Difference 2100 msec Maximum Receive Time 2100 Difference msec Selective Functionality Update Protocol Settings Selective Function Enable PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Temporary Disable I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 RP2009 Time Settings Heartbeat Message Interval 0 4960 msec Heartbeat Message Interval 1 4960 msec Heartbeat Message Interval 2 4960 msec Heartbeat Message Interval 3 4960 msec Update Period 248 msec Acknowledge Timeout 992 msec These settings are shown only when RP2009 is the selected protocol Update RP2009 Settings Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface SSH Interface Remote Office GENISYS Settings Serial Ports Diagnostic 1 - LCP Figure 6-92, Configuration - Vital Communication (Serial) 6-96 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Serial Office Protocol The Serial Office Protocol page allows selection of the serial office protocol to be used when a serial office is defined in the application program. Serial UCE Office Settings The Serial UCE Office configuration page is available when a Serial Office interface is defined in the application program and the UCE protocol has been selected. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Software Update Diagnostics Status Office Protocol Settings For UCE Baud 9600 Parity None Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Log Off [Diagnostics][Status] bps bits bits Upload Software Apply Software PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt Update Settings SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Set Office to the Application Defaults NOTE: Click this button to set all the office settings to the application defaults. Set Application Defaults Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface Remote Office GENISYS Settings Serial Ports Diagnostic 1 - Office Protocol UCE Settings Figure 6-93, Configuration - UCE Office (Serial Port) 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-97 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Serial SCS-128 Office Settings The Serial SCS-128 Office configuration page is available when a Serial Office interface is defined in the application program and the SCS-128 protocol has been selected. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Software Update Upload Software Apply Software Diagnostics Office Protocol Settings For SCS128 Baud 9600 Parity None Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Log Off Status [Diagnostics] [Status] bps bits bits Unit Address 1 PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt Update Settings SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Set Office to the Application Defaults NOTE: Click this button to set all the office settings to the application defaults. Set Application Defaults Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface Remote Office GENISYS Settings Serial Ports Diagnostic 1 - Office Protocol SCS-128 Settings Figure 6-94, Configuration - SCS-128 Office (Serial Port) 6-98 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Serial GENISYS Office Settings The Serial GENISYS Office configuration page is available when a Serial Office interface is defined in the application program and the GENISYS protocol has been selected. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Software Update Upload Software Apply Software PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration I/O Slots - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface Remote Office GENISYS Settings Serial Ports Diagnostic 1 - Office Protocol Log Off Status Office Protocol Settings For Genisys Baud Rate 9600 Parity None Stop Bits Flow Control 1 [Diagnostics] [Status] bps bits Disabled Indication Words 1 PTC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Diagnostics words Unit Address 1 Control Latching Disabled Indication Delay 0.0 Constant Indication sec Disabled Message Timeout 10 Transmission Delay 0 msec Transmission Cutoff 0 msec CTS Timeout 1.0 Secure Poll sec Disabled Update Settings Set Office to the Application Defaults NOTE: Click this button to set all the office settings to the application defaults. Set Application Defaults GENISYS Settings Figure 6-95, Configuration - GENISYS Office (Serial Port) 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-99 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Serial BCS Office Settings The Serial BCS Office configuration page is available when a Serial Office interface is defined in the application program and the BCS protocol has been selected. Site ID: Chassis ID: General Configur atio n System Settings System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Software Update Upload Software Apply Software PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface Remote Office Diagn ostics Log Off Status Office Protocol Settings For BCS Baud Rate 1200 Parit y Even Stop Bit s Flow Control GETS-G S 0 [Diagnostics ][Status] bps 1 Disabled Indication Words 1 Unit Addre ss 1 words Control Latchin g Disabled Indication D elay 0.0 sec Message Ti meout 10 sec CTS Timeout 1.0 sec Receive Gap Time 15.0 0 msec Indica tion Gap Time 15.0 0 msec Upda te Settings Set Office to the Application Defaults NOTE : Click this button to set all the office settings to the applic ation defaults. Set Appl ication Default s GENISYS Settings Serial Ports Diagnostic 1 - Office Protocol BCS Settings 373-0750 Figure 6-96, Configuration - BCS Office (Serial Port) 6-100 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface HAWK Interface Settings The serial number for the HAWK may be set on this page when an interface to the HAWK is defined in the application. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration System Settings System Configuration Local Presence System Time Application Change Password General Configuration Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Vital Configuration Battery Alarms Software Update Diagnostics HAWK Se ttings Serial Number Log Off Status [Diagnostics][Status] 105139 Update Settings Upload Software Apply Software PTC PTC Non-Vital Configuration PTC Vital Configuration PTC Key Mgmt SNMP Settings Active SNMP Configuration SNMP General Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm Settings General Remote Ethernet General Ethernet Routing Table Web Interface Telnet Interface Remote Office GENISYS Settings Serial Ports Diagnostic 1 - Office Protocol GENISYS Settings 2 - HAWK 373-0719 Figure 6-97, Configuration - HAWK (Serial Port) 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-101 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Diagnostics Main Menu Logging View Live Log Items selected for live logging on the Configure Live Log page are displayed as logging events occur. When this page is first selected, no items will be shown. If another page is loaded then the View Live Log page is selected again, it will start a new live log display from a blank screen. It is possible to capture the live log screen by clicking inside the live log screen area and selecting the text in the logging window by simultaneously pressing the “CTRL” key and the “A” key (CTRL-A), copying the text (CTRL-C) and pasting the text into a text editor such as notepad. Note: View Live Log may not be visible if a Web Content Scanner Add-on is ENABLED on the web browser. To disable Web Content Scanner in Internet Explorer, go to Tools>Manage Add-ons..., and disable the Web Content Scanner Add-on. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration Live Log Diagnostics Log Off Status Live Log Display Live Log Clear Display Configure Logs Configure Live Log Configure PTC Comm Log Configure Office Log Log Archive Size System Logs 03-23-11 03-23-11 03-23-11 03-23-11 03-23-11 Disable Auto-Scrolling 10:34:39: SNMP 10:34:49: SNMP 10:34:54: C:ETD 10:34:59: SNMP 10:34:39: SNMP TRAP: TRAP: TRAP: TRAP: Time sync expired Time sync expired 01801 EMP - Attempting TCP connection... Time sync expired Time sync OK System Log Configuration Log Data Log GDA Data Logs Alarms PTC Logs PTC Comm Log PTC Event Log PTC Device State Log Office Log View Office Log I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Communications SNMP Comm Log Ethernet Remote Office Manual Override Serial Ports 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) 373-0720 Figure 6-98, Diagnostics - View Live Log Note: Certain web browser add-ins for content scanning may prevent information from being properly displayed. You may need to disable any active web browser add-ins to view this page. 6-102 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Configure Live Log The Configure Live Log page allows selection of the specific log information to be displayed on the View Live Log page. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration Live Log Diagnostics Status Log Off Live Log Configuration Live Log Configure Logs Configure Live Log Configure PTC Comm Log Configure Office Log Log Archive Size Live Log Enable: System Log Data Log LCP Log System Logs Controls/Indications Log System Log Configuration Log Data Log GDA Data Logs Alarms Office Protocol Log Code Line Monitor Log SNMP Comm Log PTC Comm Log PTC Logs PTC Comm Log PTC Event Log PTC Device State Log Office Log PTC Event Log PTC Device State Log Update Settings View Office Log I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Communications SNMP Comm Log Ethernet Remote Office Manual Override Serial Ports 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Figure 6-99, Diagnostics - Configure Live Log 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-103 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Configure PTC Comm Log The Configure PTC Comm Log page allows the PTC Comm Log messages to be enabled or disabled. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration Live Log Live Log Configure Logs Configure Live Log Configure PTC Comm Log Configure Office Log Log Archive Size System Logs Diagnostics Status Log Off PTC Comm Log Configuration Memory Log Enable: PTC Comm Log Enable or disable PTC Comm log Update Settings System Log Configuration Log Data Log GDA Data Logs Alarms PTC Logs PTC Comm Log PTC Event Log PTC Device State Log Office Log View Office Log I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Communications SNMP Comm Log Ethernet Remote Office Manual Override Serial Ports 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Figure 6-100, Diagnostics – Configure PTC Communications Log 6-104 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Configure Office Log The Configure Office Log page allows selection of the items to log / display in the Office Log. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration Live Log Configure Logs Configure Live Log Configure PTC Comm Log Configure Office Log Log Archive Size System Log Configuration Log Data Log GDA Data Logs Alarms Log Off Status Office Log Configuration Live Log System Logs Diagnostics Memory Log Enable: Controls/Indications Log Enable or disable log Office Protocol Log Code Line Monitor Log Update Settings PTC Logs PTC Comm Log PTC Event Log PTC Device State Log Office Log View Office Log I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Communications SNMP Comm Log Ethernet Remote Office Manual Override Serial Ports 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Figure 6-101, Diagnostics - Configure Office Log 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-105 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Log Archive Size The Log Archive Size page lets the user modify the size of all but the System and Configuration logs. The logs can be adjusted to the nearest percent log file size. Setting a log to 0 disables the log. The system checks to see that the sum total log file size does not exceed 100%. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration Live Log Configure Logs Configure Live Log Configure PTC Comm Log Configure Office Log Log Archive Size System Logs System Log Configuration Log Data Log GDA Data Logs Alarms PTC Logs PTC Comm Log PTC Event Log PTC Device State Log Office Log View Office Log I/O Slots - Log Off Status Log Size Configuration Live Log 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Diagnostics Log Type New Percent Allocation Current Maximum Log Entries New Maximum Log Entries System Log 4.2% 4.2% 6721 6721 Configuration Log 0.8% 0.8% 1613 1613 61719 61719 Data Log 44.0% 44.0 % Office Log 14.3% 14.3 % Ring Status Log 0.6% 0.6 % 3150 3150 Train Record Log 1.3% 1.3 % 6301 6301 Train Data Log 10.8% 10.8 % 15173 15173 PTC Event Log 7.0% 7.0 % 9237 9237 PTC Comm Log 7.0% 7.0 % 2747 2747 PTC Device State Log 7.0% 7.0 % 10589 10589 SNMP Comm Log 3.0% 3.0 % 3489 3489 Total VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Current Percent Allocation System and Configuration log are not editable 100.0% 100.0% 1802240 (bytes) 1802240 (bytes) Setting a log to 0 disables the log. System ensures that total log size doesn’t exceed 100% Note: Changing size of any log type will erase all configurable logs. When log sizes are changed, configurable log contents are deleted. If necessary, user should save log contents prior to changing sizes. Update Settings Set Maximum Log Archive Sizes to Defaults NOTE: Click this button to default all log archive max sizes. Communications SNMP Comm Log Ethernet Remote Office Manual Override Serial Ports 1 - LCP Set Defaults 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Figure 6-102, Diagnostics – Configure Log Archive Size 6-106 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface System Log The System Log page displays the contents of the stored system log. Navigation buttons are provided to examine the log by page, by month, day, hour, or minute or going to the beginning or ending of the log. The System Log can be cleared and downloaded to the connected computer via the buttons shown. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration Live Log Live Log Diagnostics Log Off Status Navigation buttons allow movement among multiple pages in the log. System Log Configure Logs Configure Live Log Configure PTC Comm Log Configure Office Log Log Archive Size System Logs System Log Configuration Log Data Log GDA Data Logs Alarms PTC Logs PTC Comm Log PTC Event Log PTC Device State Log Office Log View Office Log I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Communications SNMP Comm Log Ethernet Remote Office Manual Override Serial Ports 1 - LCP Selecting / Confirming the "Clear Log" function clears the contents of the displayed log. Clear Log Begin Prev Hour Prev Page 06:31:48 06:31:42 17:37:37 17:37:36 17:07:34 17:07:34 16:37:15 16:37:08 14:30:14 14:30:14 14:02:52 14:02:51 13:32:50 13:32:50 13:06:49 12:50:01 12:36:15 12:36:15 12:31:03 12:30:51 12:30:50 12:30:44 12:30:44 12:30:43 12:30:43 12:30:43 12:30:43 Time Step: Next Hour End Selecting "Download" retrieves the entire log in a text file viewer (e.g. Notepad) for capture, searching, etc. Download Log page currently being displayed. Page 1 of 10 05-06-11 05-06-11 05-05-11 05-05-11 05-05-11 05-05-11 05-05-11 05-05-11 05-05-11 05-05-11 05-05-11 05-05-11 05-05-11 05-05-11 05-05-11 05-05-11 05-05-11 05-05-11 05-05-11 05-05-11 05-05-11 05-05-11 05-05-11 05-05-11 05-05-11 05-05-11 05-05-11 Next Page C:LOGINMAN C:LOGINMAN B:LUPWEB A:LUPWEB B:LUPWEB A:LUPWEB C:LOGINMAN C:LOGINMAN B:PTC_TIME A:PTC_TIME B:LUPWEB A:LUPWEB B:LUPWEB A:LUPWEB C:LOGINMAN C:LOGINMAN B:PTC_TIME A:PTC_TIME C:LCPCNTRL B:TWVO A:TWVO B:VCOM A:VCOM B:VCOM A:VCOM B:VCOM B:VCOM Hour Order: Time step to be used by the navigation buttons at the top of the page. 00955 01095 01158 01158 01170 01170 00955 01095 00461 00461 01158 01158 01170 01170 00955 00955 00474 00474 01213 10204 10204 07182 07182 08753 08753 08753 08753 Web Login Successful from IP Address 192.168.0.5 Web Logout from IP Address 192.168.0.5 (Inactivity Web local user presence removed Web local user presence removed Web local user presence established Web local user presence established Web Login Successful from IP Address 192.168.0.5 Web Logout from IP Address 192.168.0.5 (Inactivity External time update timed out External time update timed out Web local user presence removed Web local user presence removed Web local user presence established Web local user presence established Web Login Successful from IP Address 192.168.0.5 Web Login Successful from IP Address 192.168.0.5 The no time sync message period elapsed The no time sync message period elapsed LCP (Port 1) - Link Down Slot 6 Bank 1 Bank Health Recovered Slot 6 Bank 1 Bank Health Recovered Port 4 Device 1 Remote 1 10 AT Timer Expire Port 4 Device 1 Remote 1 10 AT Timer Expire Port 4 Device ***** Remote 3 ***** Link Down Timer Port 4 Device ***** Remote 3 ***** Link Down Timer Port 4 Device ***** Remote 2 ***** Link Down Timer Port 4 Device 1 Remote 1 10 Link Down Timer Newest Page: Page 1 Navigation to a specific log page is provided in this drop-down menu. Log listing can be from newest to oldest or oldest to newest. 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Figure 6-103, Diagnostics - System Log 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-107 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Configuration Log The Configuration Log page displays the contents of the stored configuration log. Navigation buttons are provided to examine the log by page, by month, day, hour, or minute or going to the beginning or ending of the log. The Configuration Log can be cleared and downloaded to the connected computer via the buttons shown. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration Live Log Diagnostics Log Off Status Configuration Log Live Log Configure Logs Configure Live Log Configure PTC Comm Log Configure Office Log Log Archive Size System Logs System Log Configuration Log Data Log GDA Data Logs Alarms PTC Logs PTC Comm Log PTC Event Log PTC Device State Log Office Log View Office Log I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Clear Log Begin Prev Page Prev Hour Next Page Next Hour End Download Page 1 of 3 05-05-11 05-05-11 05-04-11 05-04-11 05-04-11 05-04-11 05-04-11 05-04-11 05-04-11 05-04-11 05-04-11 05-04-11 05-04-11 05-04-11 05-04-11 05-04-11 05-04-11 05-04-11 05-04-11 05-04-11 05-04-11 05-04-11 05-04-11 05-04-11 05-04-11 14:21:17 14:18:54 09:33:06 09:33:04 09:32:37 07:37:47 07:37:41 07:36:28 07:36:23 07:36:01 07:35:53 07:34:56 07:34:46 07:34:25 07:34:18 07:33:57 07:33:53 07:33:53 07:33:38 07:33:34 07:33:09 07:33:05 07:32:31 07:32:25 07:32:25 Time Step: C: C: A: C: C: C: C: C: C: C: C: C: C: C: C: C: C: C: C: C: C: C: C: C: C: SNMP Trap Settings Changed: Battery 2 Voltage.TrapEnable: Enable SNMP Trap Settings Changed: PTC Mapping File Changed.TrapEnable: VLD Slot 5 Bank 1 And Bank 2 Voltages Initialized to 10.0V NV Timer User Config Defaulted NV Application Changed: #0 CRC=0x521D CHK=0x64E0 To #1 CRC=0x396 PTC: HMAC Key Applied PTC: HMAC Key Uploaded: CRC of 0x0E371581 PTC: HMAC Key Applied PTC: HMAC Key Uploaded: CRC of 0x0E371581 PTC: RC2 Key File Applied PTC: RC2 Key File Uploaded: CRC of 0x42B26D64 PTC: HMAC Key Applied PTC: HMAC Key Uploaded: CRC of 0x887EE5F1 PTC: RC2 Key File Applied PTC: RC2 Key File Uploaded: CRC of 0xB804D9FD PTC: HMAC Key Applied PTC: HMAC Key Defaulted to PTC Config File Value PTC: HMAC Key Uploaded: CRC of 0xA3C1CA20 PTC: HMAC Key Applied PTC: HMAC Key Uploaded: CRC of 0x887EE5F1 PTC: HMAC Key Applied PTC: HMAC Key Uploaded: CRC of 0x887EE5F1 PTC: HMAC Key Applied PTC: HMAC Key Defaulted to PTC Config File Value PTC: HMAC Key Uploaded: CRC of 0xA3C1CA20 Hour Order: Newest Page: Page 1 Communications SNMP Comm Log Ethernet Remote Office Manual Override Serial Ports 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Figure 6-104, Diagnostics - Configuration Log 6-108 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Data Log The Data Log page displays the contents of the stored data log (recorder log). Navigation buttons are provided to examine the log by page, by month, day, hour, or minute or going to the beginning or ending of the log. The Data Log can be cleared and downloaded to the connected computer via the buttons shown. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration Live Log Diagnostics Log Off Status Data Log Live Log Configure Logs Configure Live Log Configure PTC Comm Log Configure Office Log Log Archive Size Clear Log Begin Prev Hour Prev Page Next Page Next Hour End Download Page 1 of 2 System Logs System Log Configuration Log Data Log GDA Data Logs Alarms PTC Comm Log PTC Event Log PTC Device State Log =T 05-05-11 12:30:50 Vital Recorder Entry =T 05-05-11 12:30:50 Vital Recorder Entry 3-B1NORM =T 3-B2NORM =T 3-LAMP1OK =T 05-05-11 12:30:50 Vital Recorder Entry Office Log 2-B2HLTH View Office Log =T 05-05-11 12:30:16 Vital Recorder Entry I/O Slots - 2-B1HLTH 4-HEALTH PTC Logs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 05-05-11 12:30:51 Vital Recorder Entry 2-VIN1 VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 =T 05-05-11 12:30:14 Vital Recorder Entry 2-VOUT4 =T 05-05-11 12:30:14 Vital Recorder Entry 2-VIN4 8-VOUT1 =T =T 2-VOUT1 =T 3-VSSR1 =T 3-VSSR2 =T =F =F =F 2-VIN4 3-VSSR2 4-HEALTH =F =F =F 05-05-11 12:30:13 Vital Recorder Entry Communications SNMP Comm Log Ethernet Remote Office Manual Override Serial Ports 1 - LCP 2-B1HLTH 2-VOUT1 3-B1NORM 8-VOUT1 =F =F =F =F 2-B2HLTH 2-VOUT4 3-B2NORM =F =F =F 2-VIN1 3-VSSR1 3-LAMP1OK 05-05-11 12:30:11 Non-Vital Recorder Entry Time Step: Hour Order: Newest Page: Page 1 2 - Remote 373-0724 3 - (empty) Figure 6-105, Diagnostics - Data Log 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-109 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 GDA Data Logs The GDA (Graphical Data Analyzer format) Data Logs page allows the vital and non-vital GDA data log to be downloaded to the connected computer. The GDA tool is a licensed, proprietary program that is available through GETSGS (P/N: 838-0038-00-006). Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration Live Log Diagnostics Log Off Status GDA Data Logs Live Log Configure Logs Configure Live Log Configure PTC Comm Log Configure Office Log Log Archive Size Vital GDA Log: Download Non-Vital GDA Log: Download System Logs System Log Configuration Log Data Log GDA Data Logs Alarms PTC Logs PTC Comm Log PTC Event Log PTC Device State Log Office Log View Office Log I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Communications SNMP Comm Log Ethernet Remote Office Manual Override Serial Ports 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) 373-0725 Figure 6-106, Diagnostics - GDA Data Logs 6-110 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Alarms The Alarms page displays the alarms that are currently active in the system. If an alarm is clearable, a “Clear” button is displayed next to the alarm entry. Alarms that are not user clearable are displayed without the button. Selecting the “Clear All Alarms” button clears all user-clearable alarms. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration Live Log Configure Logs Configure Live Log Configure PTC Comm Log Configure Office Log Log Archive Size System Log Configuration Log Data Log GDA Data Logs Alarms PTC Logs Log Off Status Alarm s Live Log System Logs Diagnostics Active Alarms: 1 10-26-07 19:43:31 -- VTI S9: High Battery Clear 2 10-26-07 19:43:41 -- Office Link Fail 3 10-26-07 19:44:23 -- LCP Link Down 4 10-26-07 19:52:48 -- VTI S9: Cab Failure Clear 5 10-26-07 19:56:39 -- 1010-1:ModuleFailure Clear Clear All Alarms NOTE: Refresh this page to show updates in alarms. PTC Comm Log PTC Event Log PTC Device State Log Office Log View Office Log I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Communications SNMP Comm Log Ethernet Remote Office Manual Override Serial Ports 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) 373-0726 Figure 6-107, Diagnostics - Alarms 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-111 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 PTC Comm Log The PTC Comm Log page displays the incoming and outgoing PTC messages. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration Diagnostics Log Off Status PTC Comm Log Live Log Live Log Configure Logs Configure Live Log Configure PTC Comm Log Configure Office Log Log Archive Size System Logs System Log Configuration Log Data Log GDA Data Logs Alarms PTC Logs PTC Comm Log PTC Event Log PTC Device State Log Office Log View Office Log I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Communications SNMP Comm Log Ethernet Remote Office Manual Override Serial Ports 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Clear Log Begin Prev Hour Prev Page Next Page Next Hour End Download Page 2 of 55 06-07-10 02 02 00 5E 05 17 00 71 23 06-07-10 02 02 00 5E 04 17 00 71 23 06-07-10 02 02 00 5E 03 17 00 71 23 06-07-10 02 02 00 5E 02 17 00 71 23 06-07-10 02 02 00 5E 01 17 00 71 23 06-07-10 02 02 00 5E 00 17 00 71 23 06-07-10 02 02 00 5D FF 17 00 71 23 06-07-10 02 02 00 5D FE 17 00 71 23 06-07-10 02 02 00 5D FD 17 00 71 23 06-07-10 02 02 00 5D FC 17 00 71 23 06-07-10 02 02 00 5D FB 17 00 71 23 06-07-10 02 02 00 5D FA 17 00 71 23 06-07-10 02 02 00 5D F8 17 00 71 23 06-07-10 02 02 00 17:00:53: EMP TX Message 00 03 D4 01 02 00 00 00 3A 00 0A 00 0A 75 70 2E 77 2E 45 67 89 01 02 05 08 42 7F 17:00:52: EMP TX Message 00 03 D3 01 02 00 00 00 3A 00 0A 00 0A 75 70 2E 77 2E 45 67 89 01 02 04 08 42 04 17:00:51: EMP TX Message 00 03 D2 01 02 00 00 00 3A 00 0A 00 0A 75 70 2E 77 2E 45 67 89 01 02 03 08 42 6D 17:00:50: EMP TX Message 00 03 D1 01 02 00 00 00 3A 00 0A 00 0A 75 70 2E 77 2E 45 67 89 01 02 02 08 42 72 17:00:49: EMP TX Message 00 03 D0 01 02 00 00 00 3A 00 0A 00 0A 75 70 2E 77 2E 45 67 89 01 02 01 08 42 22 17:00:48: EMP TX Message 00 03 CF 01 02 00 00 00 3A 00 0A 00 0A 75 70 2E 77 2E 45 67 89 01 02 00 08 42 F4 17:00:47: EMP TX Message 00 03 CE 01 02 00 00 00 3A 00 0A 00 0A 75 70 2E 77 2E 45 67 89 01 02 0F 08 42 8E 17:00:46: EMP TX Message 00 03 CC 01 02 00 00 00 3A 00 0A 00 0A 75 70 2E 77 2E 45 67 89 01 02 0E 08 42 EC 17:00:45: EMP TX Message 00 03 CB 01 02 00 00 00 3A 00 0A 00 0A 75 70 2E 77 2E 45 67 89 01 02 0D 08 42 86 17:00:44: EMP TX Message 00 03 CA 01 02 00 00 00 3A 00 0A 00 0A 75 70 2E 77 2E 45 67 89 01 02 0C 08 42 84 17:00:43: EMP TX Message 00 03 C9 01 02 00 00 00 3A 00 0A 00 0A 75 70 2E 77 2E 45 67 89 01 02 0B 08 42 46 17:00:42: EMP TX Message 00 03 C8 01 02 00 00 00 3A 00 0A 00 0A 75 70 2E 77 2E 45 67 89 01 02 0A 08 42 69 17:00:41: EMP TX Message 00 03 C7 01 02 00 00 00 3A 00 0A 00 0A 75 70 2E 77 2E 45 67 89 01 02 08 08 42 F5 17:00:40: EMP TX Message 00 03 C6 01 02 00 00 00 3A 04 13 EC 00 09 00 00 0E 00 00 00 00 4C 0D 34 35 36 37 38 39 30 31 3A 77 69 75 00 71 CB 76 87 57 4B 85 03 04 13 EC 00 09 00 00 0E 00 00 00 00 4C 0D 34 35 36 37 38 39 30 31 3A 77 69 75 00 71 79 45 BA B4 C1 29 03 04 13 EC 00 09 00 00 0E 00 00 00 00 4C 0D 34 35 36 37 38 39 30 31 3A 77 69 75 00 43 35 D1 87 B2 15 9A 03 04 13 EC 00 09 00 00 0E 00 00 00 00 4C 0D 34 35 36 37 38 39 30 31 3A 77 69 75 00 98 50 B5 B4 BF B2 3C 03 04 13 EC 00 09 00 00 0E 00 00 00 00 4C 0D 34 35 36 37 38 39 30 31 3A 77 69 75 00 EE 06 7B 5D 80 BA 7F 03 04 13 EC 00 09 00 00 0E 00 00 00 00 4C 0D 34 35 36 37 38 39 30 31 3A 77 69 75 00 33 64 90 53 03 C8 91 03 04 13 EC 00 09 00 00 0E 00 00 00 00 4C 0D 34 35 36 37 38 39 30 31 3A 77 69 75 00 B9 B3 C8 3B CE 0C 46 03 04 13 EC 00 09 00 00 0E 00 00 00 00 4C 0D 34 35 36 37 38 39 30 31 3A 77 69 75 00 66 2E E7 AB F4 88 D0 03 04 13 EC 00 09 00 00 0E 00 00 00 00 4C 0D 34 35 36 37 38 39 30 31 3A 77 69 75 00 BD 9C 0F E4 E2 E5 70 03 04 13 EC 00 09 00 00 0E 00 00 00 00 4C 0D 34 35 36 37 38 39 30 31 3A 77 69 75 00 D2 47 BE 3B 34 3E 35 03 04 13 EC 00 09 00 00 0E 00 00 00 00 4C 0D 34 35 36 37 38 39 30 31 3A 77 69 75 00 5E 60 95 8E 4F BB E9 03 04 13 EC 00 09 00 00 0E 00 00 00 00 4C 0D 34 35 36 37 38 39 30 31 3A 77 69 75 00 8F E1 B2 95 39 47 FA 03 04 13 EC 00 09 00 00 0E 00 00 00 00 4C 0D 34 35 36 37 38 39 30 31 3A 77 69 75 00 8D 25 9A F1 85 71 43 03 04 13 EC 00 09 00 00 0E 00 00 00 00 4C 0D Figure 6-108, Diagnostics – PTC Communications Log 6-112 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface PTC Event Log The PTC Event Log page displays events in the PTC Event log. These include start and stop of PTC beaconing, entering/exiting message holds, PTC enabled /disabled and received messages. When PTC messaging is disabled, this log will indicate the reason(s) for being disabled. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration Diagnostics Log Off Status PTC Event Log Live Log Live Log Configure Logs Configure Live Log Configure PTC Comm Log Configure Office Log Log Archive Size System Logs System Log Configuration Log Data Log GDA Data Logs Alarms PTC Logs PTC Comm Log PTC Event Log PTC Device State Log Office Log View Office Log I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Communications SNMP Comm Log Ethernet Remote Office Manual Override Serial Ports 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Clear Log Begin Prev Hour Prev Page Next Page Next Hour Download End Page 1 of 1 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 06-07-10 17:01:02: 16:59:02: 16:54:03: 16:54:03: 16:51:43: 16:51:42: 16:46:44: 16:46:43: 16:46:05: 16:44:05: 16:39:06: 16:39:06: 16:36:46: 16:36:45: 16:31:49: 16:31:46: 16:26:58: 16:26:50: 16:22:04: 16:21:57: 16:19:39: 16:17:39: 16:12:38: 16:12:38: 16:04:37: 16:02:37: 15:57:35: 15:57:35: 15:49:15: 15:47:15: 15:42:10: 15:42:10: 15:34:11: 15:32:11: 15:27:12: 15:27:12: 15:20:03: 15:18:03: 15:13:03: 15:13:02: 15:01:39: 15:01:38: 14:50:04: 14:48:04: 14:43:04: 14:43:03: 14:38:26: 14:36:26: 14:34:44: Time Step: Hour End PTC Beaconing Start PTC Beacon End Warning Start PTC Beaconing Max Beacon Timer Expired Exiting EMP Msg TX Hold Entering EMP Msg TX Hold Exiting EMP Msg TX Hold Entering EMP Msg TX Hold End PTC Beaconing Start PTC Beacon End Warning Start PTC Beaconing Max Beacon Timer Expired Exiting EMP Msg TX Hold Entering EMP Msg TX Hold Exiting EMP Msg TX Hold Entering EMP Msg TX Hold Exiting EMP Msg TX Hold Entering EMP Msg TX Hold Exiting EMP Msg TX Hold Entering EMP Msg TX Hold End PTC Beaconing Start PTC Beacon End Warning Start PTC Beaconing Max Beacon Timer Expired End PTC Beaconing Start PTC Beacon End Warning Start PTC Beaconing Max Beacon Timer Expired End PTC Beaconing Start PTC Beacon End Warning Start PTC Beaconing Max Beacon Timer Expired End PTC Beaconing Start PTC Beacon End Warning Start PTC Beaconing Max Beacon Timer Expired End PTC Beaconing Start PTC Beacon End Warning Start PTC Beaconing Received EMP msg 0x1450 from BNSF6067 Exiting EMP Msg TX Hold Entering EMP Msg TX Hold End PTC Beaconing Start PTC Beacon End Warning Start PTC Beaconing Received EMP msg 0x1450 from BNSF6067 End PTC Beaconing Start PTC Beacon End Warning PTC Event Log Erased By System Order: Newest Page: Page 1 Figure 6-109, Diagnostics – PTC Event Log 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-113 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 PTC Device State Log The PTC Device State Log page displays the PTC Devices and the states (value and associated rule). An entry is made when the state of a PTC device changes. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration Live Log Diagnostics Log Off Status PTC Device State Log Live Log Configure Logs Configure Live Log Configure PTC Comm Log Configure Office Log Log Archive Size System Logs PTC Logs PTC Comm Log PTC Event Log PTC Device State Log Office Log View Office Log I/O Slots - Begin Prev Page Next Page Next Hour Download End Page 1 of 1 System Log Configuration Log Data Log GDA Data Logs Alarms 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Clear Log Prev Hour VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 08-18-10 signal 08-18-10 signal 08-18-10 signal 08-18-10 signal 08-18-10 signal 08-18-10 signal 08-18-10 signal 08-18-10 signal 08-18-10 signal 08-18-10 signal 08-18-10 08-18-10 08-18-10 16:28:08 PTC Status Entry = 13 - 9.1.13 - RESTRICTING 16:27:58 PTC Status Entry = 12 - 9.1.12 - DIV APPR 16:27:48 PTC Status Entry = 11 - 9.1.11 - DIV APPR MED 16:27:37 PTC Status Entry = 10 - 9.1.10 - DIV APPR DIV 16:26:35 PTC Status Entry = 4 - 9.1.4 - APPR LTD 16:25:29 PTC Status Entry = 11 - 9.1.11 - DIV APPR MED 16:24:26 PTC Status Entry = 5 - 9.1.5 - ADV APPR 16:23:21 PTC Status Entry = 12 - 9.1.12 - DIV APPR 16:22:18 PTC Status Entry = 6 - 9.1.6 - APPR MED 16:21:12 PTC Status Entry = 13 - 9.1.13 - RESTRICTING 16:07:49 A/B Processor Reset 16:07:43 C Processor Reset 16:07:43 Log Erased By System Time Step: Hour Order: Newest Page: Page 1 Communications SNMP Comm Log Ethernet Remote Office Manual Override Serial Ports 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Figure 6-110, Diagnostics – PTC Device State Log 6-114 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface View Office Log The View Office Log page displays the stored contents of the items configured for office logging via the Configure Office Log page. This log can be cleared and downloaded via the option buttons provided. See Chapter 7 - Terminal Program for an explanation of the logged information. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration Live Log Live Log Diagnostics Status View Office Log Configure Logs Configure Live Log Configure PTC Comm Log Configure Office Log Log Archive Size System Logs System Log Configuration Log Data Log GDA Data Logs Alarms PTC Logs PTC Comm Log PTC Event Log PTC Device State Log Office Log View Office Log I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Clear Log Begin Prev Hour Prev Page Next Page Next Hour Download End Page 1 of 1 10-26-07 10-26-07 10-26-07 10-26-07 10-26-07 10-26-07 10-26-07 10-26-07 10-26-07 10-26-07 20:09:56 20:09:56 20:09:56 20:09:56 20:09:56 20:09:56 20:09:56 20:09:56 20:09:54 20:09:54 GENISYS GENISYS GENISYS GENISYS GENISYS GENISYS GENISYS GENISYS GENISYS GENISYS SEND > Pol l LOC/R ECV LOC/R ECV LOC/R ECV LOC/R ECV LOC/R ECV LOC/R ECV < No Indication SEND Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port M: M: M: M: M: M: M: M: M: M: f1 fb 04 03 03 02 01 00 f1 f1 01 01 f6 00 f0 82 01 fb 01 01 f6 82 f0 f6 0. 0 ms 0. 0 ms 0. 0 ms 0. 0 ms 0. 0 ms 329.66 ms f6 f6 10-26-07 20:09:54 Office Link F ail = False 10-26-07 20:09:54 GENISYS > ACK & Poll Port M: fa 0 1 83 60 f6 Port M: 04 f 6 0. 0 ms 10-26-07 20:09:54 GENISYS LOC/R ECV Port M: 03 6 0 0. 0 ms 10-26-07 20:09:54 GENISYS LOC/R ECV 10-26-07 20:09:54 GENISYS LOC/R ECV Port M: 02 8 3 0. 0 ms Port M: 01 0 1 0. 0 ms 10-26-07 20:09:54 GENISYS LOC/R ECV 10-26-07 20:09:54 GENISYS LOC/R ECV Port M: 00 f a 88.78 ms Port M: f2 0 1 00 00 01 00 02 00 03 00 e0 04 36 10-26-07 20:09:54 GENISYS < Ind ication 10-26-07 20:09:54 Ind 032 0000 0000 00000000 00000000 00000000 10-26-07 20:09:54 Memory Log wa s Initialized ** End of Queue ** Time Step: Hour Order: Newest Page: Page 1 Communications SNMP Comm Log Ethernet Remote Office Manual Override Serial Ports 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) 373-0727 Figure 6-111, Diagnostics - View Office Log 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-115 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Communication Diagnostics Ethernet Vital Comm The Ethernet – Remote page displays communication statistics for overall activity as well as for each individual attached remote. The Serial-Remote page displays the same statistics for the remotes attached to a serial interface. Site ID: Chassis ID : General Configuration Diagnostics Status 0 Log Off [Configuration][Status] Live Log Live Log Configure Logs Configure Live Log Configure PTC Comm Log Configure Office Log Log Archive Size System Logs System Log Configuration Log Data Log GDA Data Logs Alarms PTC Logs PTC Comm Log PTC Event Log PTC Device State Log Office Log View Office Log I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Communications SNMP Comm Log Ethernet Remote Office Manual Override Serial Ports 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) 373-0729 Figure 6-112, Diagnostics - Remote (Ethernet) 6-116 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Ethernet Office Comm The Ethernet-office page displays communication statistics for Ethernet office communications. The Serial-office page displays the same statistics for a serial office interface. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration Live Log Current Counts Previous Counts Date Cleared 10-26-07 20:13:54 10-25-07 16:57:19 Configure Logs Configure Live Log Configure PTC Comm Log Configure Office Log Log Archive Size System Log Configuration Log Data Log GDA Data Logs Alarms Log Off Status Message Counts Live Log System Logs Diagnostics Rx Valid 19 0 Rx Errors 0 0 Resent 0 0 Link Fails 2 0 Code Fails 0 0 Clear Current Message Counts PTC Logs PTC Comm Log PTC Event Log PTC Device State Log Office Log View Office Log I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Communications SNMP Comm Log Ethernet Remote Office Manual Override Serial Ports 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) 373-0730 Figure 6-113, Diagnostics - Office (Ethernet) 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-117 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Office Manual Control The office control override page allows the manual override of the office inputs to be enabled or disabled along with controlling the value (TRUE / FALSE) of the application defined control inputs. The override selection will be under Ethernet or Serial Ports depending upon the location of the office interface in the loaded application program. Site ID: Chassis ID: General Configuration Live Log Live Log Configure Logs System Log Configuration Log Data Log GDA Data Logs Alarms PTC Logs PTC Comm Log PTC Event Log PTC Device State Log Office Log View Office Log I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - Log Off Status Office Control Override Office Control Override Override Buffer Size (Bytes) Configure Live Log Configure PTC Comm Log Configure Office Log Log Archive Size System Logs GETS-GS 0 Manual Override of office Manual override of office control inputs inputs is is enabled enabled // disabled control disabledhere. here. Enabled 2 UpdateSettings Settings Update Office Control Override Statuses Byte 0 Bit # Name Bit Byte 1 Bit # Name Bit 0 CNTRL-1 0 1 CNTRL-2 1 CNTRL-10 2 CNTRL-3 2 CNTRL-11 3 CNTRL-4 3 CNTRL-12 Checking the box next to the status name of the control causes the control to be set to TRUE (Logic 1). An unchecked box sets the control value to FALSE (Logic 0). CNTRL-15 The control values are applied when the “Execute” box is selected and confirmed. 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 Execute VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Communications SNMP Comm Log Ethernet Remote Office Manual Override Serial Ports 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) 373-0731 Figure 6-114, Diagnostics - Office Manual Override (Ethernet) 6-118 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface All Statuses The All Statuses page displays every status name and value for the loaded application program. The Statuses are displayed in alphanumeric order of status name. Checking the “watch” box next to a status name places it on the Watch Statuses page along with other selected statuses. Site ID: GETS-GS Chass is ID: 0 General All Statuses Watch Statuses PTC Statuses PTC Device State I/O Slots - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm I/O Ethernet Remote Office Serial Ports 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Internal Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Log Off Status All Statuses A specific page may be selected from this drop-down menu. The name of the first and last status on that page is shown in the list Page 5 (BATT 1HIGH-LCP HEALTH) Page: PTC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Diagnostics Configuration First Page Prev Page Next Page Last Page Pa e 5/7 Description Battery 1 High Alarm Cab Enable 1 Status Link Up Non-Vital Timer Complete Non-Vital Timer Enable Status Name Value Watch BATT 1HIGH TRUE CAB1E B TRUE FALSE EREMOTE2UP GRANT GRANTEN TRUE TRUE Temporary IND-1 Temporary IND-2 FALSE FALSE Temporary IND-5 FALSE Temporary IND-6 Temporary IND-7 FALSE FALSE Vital Setting LAMP1-1F FALSE FALSE Vital Setting LAMP1-1ON FALSE Vital Setting LAMP1-2F Vital Setting LAMP1-2ON FALSE FALSE FALSE Temporary IND-8 Vital Setting LAMP1-3F Vital Setting LAMP1-3ON Vital Setting LAMP2-1F FALSE FALSE Vital Setting LAMP2-1ON FALSE Module Health LCPHEALTH TRUE Check the box next to the status name to show the status value in the “Watch Statuses” page. 373-0732 Figure 6-115, Status - All Statuses 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-119 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Watch Statuses The Watch Statuses page displays the statuses selected for this page. An individual status may be removed by selecting the check-box of that status or by clearing all selected statuses with the button provided. Up to 100 statuses may be shown on the Watch Statuses page. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration All Statuses Watch Statuses PTC Statuses PTC Device State I/O Slots - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Log Off Status Watch Statuses Description PTC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Diagnostics Status Name Value Watch Lamp Steady On 1 Module Health 3-LAMP1ON 4-HEALTH Temporary IND-5 Temporary IND-8 FALSE TRUE FALSE FALSE Individual statuses may be removed from the Watch Statuses page by deselecting the Watch check box. Clear All Selecting "Clear All" removes all statuses from the Watch Statuses page. Comm I/O Ethernet Remote Office Serial Ports 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Internal Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers 373-0733 Figure 6-116, Status - Watch Statuses 6-120 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface PTC Statuses The PTC Statuses page allows viewing the values of the statuses used in the PTC mapping file. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration All Statuses Watch Statuses Diagnostics Status [Conf PTC Statuses Page: Page 1 (AGE-CRE) First Page Prev Page Log Off PTC PTC Statuses PTC Device State I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm I/O Ethernet Remote Office Serial Ports 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Internal Next Page Last Page Page 1/1 Description Status Name Value Watch PTC Status AGE FALSE PTC Status AFYE FALSE PTC Status AYE FALSE PTC Status AFRE FALSE PTC Status ARE TRUE PTC Status BFGE FALSE PTC Status BGE FALSE PTC Status BFYE FALSE PTC Status BYE FALSE PTC Status BLE FALSE PTC Status BFRE FALSE PTC Status BRE TRUE PTC Status CGE FALSE PTC Status CYE FALSE PTC Status CLE FALSE PTC Status CFRE FALSE PTC Status CRE FALSE Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Figure 6-117, Status PTC Statuses 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-121 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 PTC Device State The PTC Device State pages depicts each defined Device and its current state (PTC Value, Rule Number, and Rule Name). Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration All Statuses Watch Statuses Diagnostics Log Off Status [Co PTC Device State Device Name PTC Value Rule Number Rule Name PTC PTC Statuses e PTC Device State signal 9 9.1.9 DIV CLEAR I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm I/O Ethernet Remote Office Serial Ports 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Internal Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Figure 6-118, Status PTC Device State 6-122 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Remote Statuses Input and Output statuses to attached vital remotes are displayed on this page. The specific interface type (Ethernet or Serial) is selected via the Side Menu. The upper left drop-down menu selects the remote of interest by remote number. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration All Statuses Watch Statuses PTC Statuses PTC Device State I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 First Page 1 Prev Page Last Page Pa e 1/1 Description Link Up Remote Input Status Name Value RPIN1 FALSE FALSE RPENETUP RPIN2 FALSE Remote Output RPOUT1 FALSE Remote Output RPOUT2 FALSE Remote Output RPOUT3 FALSE Remote Output RPOUT4 TRUE Remote Input [Configuration][Diagnostics] Page 1 (RPENETUP-RPOUT4) Page: Next Page Log Off Status Ethernet Vital Comm - Status Remote : PTC Diagnostics Select the Remote of interest using this drop-down box. The statuses for that remote are then displayed. Comm I/O Ethernet Remote Office Serial Ports 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Internal Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers 373-0734 Figure 6-119, Status - Remote (Ethernet) 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-123 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Office Statuses Input and Output (controls and indications) for the office interface are displayed on this page. The specific Interface Type (Ethernet or Serial) is selected via the Side Menu. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration Diagnostics Log Off Status All Statuses Watch Statuses Office Protocol Status PTC Page: Page1 (1VPM1DLVRY-1VPM1CTRL16) [Configuration][Diagnostics] PTC Statuses PTC Device State First Page Prev Page I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Comm I/O Ethernet Remote Office Serial Ports 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Internal Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Next Page Last Page Page 1/13 Description Status Name Value Watch 1VPM1DLVRY FALSE Non-Vital Office Code Fail 1VPM1CF FALSE Non-Vital Office Link Fail 1VPM1LF TRUE Non-Vital Delivery Non-Vital Override OfficeInput Enable 1VPM1OVREN TRUE Non-Vital Control 1VPM1CTRL1 FALSE Non-Vital Control 1VPM1CTRL2 TRUE Non-Vital Control 1VPM1CTRL3 FALSE Non-Vital Control 1VPM1CTRL4 FALSE Non-Vital Control 1VPM1CTRL5 FALSE Non-Vital Control 1VPM1CTRL6 FALSE Non-Vital Control 1VPM1CTRL7 FALSE Non-Vital Control 1VPM1CTRL8 FALSE 1VPM1CTRL9 FALSE Non-Vital Control Non-Vital Control 1VPM1CTRL10 FALSE Non-Vital Control 1VPM1CTRL11 FALSE Non-Vital Control 1VPM1CTRL12 FALSE Non-Vital Control 1VPM1CTRL13 FALSE Non-Vital Control 1VPM1CTRL14 FALSE Non-Vital Control 1VPM1CTRL15 FALSE Non-Vital Control 1VPM1CTRL16 FALSE Figure 6-120, Status - Office (Ethernet) 6-124 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Local Control Statuses The input and output statuses for the Local Control Panel are displayed on this page. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration All Statuses Watch Statuses PTC Statuses PTC Device State I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Log Off Status [Configuration][Diagnostics] LCP Status Page 1 (LCPHEALTH-LCPOUT1) Page: PTC Diagnostics First Page Prev Page Next Page Last Page Pa e 1/1 Description Status Name Value Watch Non-Vital LCP Health LCPHEALTH FALSE Non-Vital LCP Input LCP_IN1 Non-Vital LCP Output LCPOUT1 FALSE FALSE Comm I/O Ethernet Remote Office Serial Ports 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Internal Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Figure 6-121, LCP Status 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-125 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Vital and Non-Vital Timers The Vital Timers page and Non-vital Timers page each display the state of the Timer Enable status and the remaining time of the Timer Complete for each defined timer. Both the Timer Enable and the Timer Complete may be selected for viewing on the Watch Statuses page. Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration All Statuses Watch Statuses PTC PTC Statuses PTC Device State I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Diagnostics Log Off Status Timer Statuses Enable Watch Complete Remaining Watch Description Status Name Value Enable Status Name Time Complete Timer 1 5-B1L1EN FALSE 5-B1L1 0:6 Timer 2 5-B1L2EN FALSE 5-B1L2 0:10 Timer 3 5-SETUPEN FALSE 5-SETUPGRANT 0:0 Comm I/O Ethernet Remote Office Serial Ports 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Internal Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers 373-0737 Figure 6-122, Status - Vital Timers 6-126 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Web Graphical User Interface Site ID: GETS-GS Chassis ID: 0 General Configuration Diagnostics All Statuses Watch Statuses Non-Vital Timer Statuses PTC Page: PTC Statuses PTC Device State I/O Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - VIO-1010S VIO-86S VLD-R16S VLD-R16S VLD-C6S VIO-44R CAB-16S VIO-44S VTI-2S GFD-1 Log Off Status Page 1 (5-NVOUT11-_NVEQN) First Page Prev Page Next Page Last Page Remaining Watch Complete Enable Watch Status Name Value Enable Status Name Complete Time 5-NVOUT11EN FALSE 5-NVOUT11 00:20.0 ANVEQNT FALSE A_NV_EQN 00:00.0 GRANTEN FALSE GRANT 00:20.0 IND3-T FALSE IND-3 00:00.0 ZR_NVEQMT FALSE R_NVEQM 00:00.2 R_NVEQNT FALSE R_NVEQN 00:00.2 _NVEQNT FALSE _NVEQN 00:00.2 Comm I/O Ethernet Remote Office Serial Ports 1 - LCP 2 - Remote 3 - (empty) Internal Vital Timers Non-Vital Timers Figure 6-123, Status - Non-Vital Timers 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 6-127 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 6-128 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Terminal Program Chapter 7 – Terminal Program Contents Diagnostic Terminal and Telnet Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 ElectroLogIXS - Configured with VPM-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 ElectroLogIXS - Configured with VPM-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 EC5 – Configured with VPM-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 EC5 – Configured with VPM-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Diagnostic Terminal Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Diagnostic Terminal Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Telnet Interface Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Telnet Interface Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Checksum/CRC Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Print Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Print (P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Print Alarm Messages (PA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Print Mnemonics (PM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Print Condensed Data Dump (PD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Print Error Log (PE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Print Configuration Log (PC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Print Recorder Range (PR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Site ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Display Site ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Set New Site ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Information Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display VPM-3A Processor EPROM Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display VPM-3B Processor EPROM Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display VPM-3C Processor EPROM Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display VTI-2S D - DSP EPROM Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display VTI-2S E - DSP EPROM Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Application EPROM Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 7-13 7-13 7-14 7-14 7-14 7-15 Real Time Error Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Real Time Error Output Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enable Real Time Error Output Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disable Real Time Error Output Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 7-15 7-15 7-16 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 7-i ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Live Data Log Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Live Data Log Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enable Live Data Log Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disable Live Data Log Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 7-16 7-16 7-16 Live Mnemonics Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Live Mnemonics Display Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enable Live Mnemonics Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disable Live Mnemonics Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 7-17 7-17 7-17 Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Display Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Set Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Communications Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Logging Options Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 Communications Logging Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATCS Logging Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logging Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LCP Logging Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21 7-21 7-26 7-30 Displaying Stored Communications Memory Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31 Displaying Communication Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32 Clearing Communication Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33 Office Control Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34 Enabling Office Control Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34 Setting the Number of Office Control Override Bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35 Modifying the Office Control Override Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35 Executing the Office Override Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36 Disabling Office Control Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36 Remote Config MAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36 MAC Key Vault Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36 Zap (Erase) Logs/Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ZA - Erase Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ZD - Erase Data Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ZE - Erase Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37 7-37 7-37 7-37 Set Application Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38 SE - Default Ethernet Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38 7-ii © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Terminal Program Chapter 7 – Terminal Program Diagnostic Terminal and Telnet Interface Connecting a diagnostic terminal or a PC (Personal Computer) to the CIO-1/CIO-1A/CIO-CLA (Communication Input/Output) Module diagnostic port, the VPM-2/VPM-2+ diagnostic port, or a VPM-3 Ethernet port’s Telnet Interface allows local control, memory dumps, and more extensive diagnostics than does the CDU (Control Display Unit). Diagnostic terminal commands typed on the keyboard perform various functions, such as examining data or controlling diagnostic terminal logging. Logging to the screen is more convenient than directly to a printer, and, when using a PC, most communications programs allow simultaneous screen and printer logging. ElectroLogIXS - Configured with VPM-2 PC to CIO-1A or CIO-CLA Diagnostic Port Figure 7-1, Serial Diagnostic Terminal Connection for ElectroLogIXS 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 7-1 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 ElectroLogIXS - Configured with VPM-3 Serial Diagnostic Port Figure 7-2, Serial Diagnostic Terminal Connection for ElectroLogIXS EC5 – Configured with VPM-2 Serial Diagnostic Terminal Connection Figure 7-3, Serial Diagnostic Terminal Connection for EC5 7-2 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Terminal Program EC5 – Configured with VPM-3 Attach diagnostic terminal or PC to CIO-1 or CIO-CLA Diagnostic Port VPM-3 Ethernet Ports Figure 7-4, Serial Diagnostic Terminal Connection for EC5 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 7-3 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Diagnostic Terminal Connection WARNING The VPM-2 Diagnostic Port does not provide isolation protection against Ground Faults. This port is intended for short-term use by on-site personnel who are trained to observe any operational anomalies. If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 is powered from Signal or Equipment battery, Ground Faults in external equipment attached to the VPM-2 Diagnostic Port may be passed through to the powering battery. Undetected Ground Faults to Signal or Equipment battery may result in hazardous rail operation. If a connection to the VPM-2 Diagnostic Port is left unattended, the connected equipment must provide any required Ground Fault protection. Ground Fault testing must be performed after the connection is established, and at FRA mandated intervals thereafter. or CIO-CLA or CIO-CLA or CIO-CLA Figure 7-5, Diagnostic Cable with Connectors. To use the diagnostic features, connect a diagnostic terminal or PC to the CIO-1/CIO-1A or CIO-CLA Diagnostic Port. The port is a DTE port, with a DB-9 female connector. The connector on your terminal may be a DB-9 or DB-25 female or male. The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 to diagnostic terminal cable can be made as shown above or using the table below. CIO-1/CIO-1A/CIO-CLA Diagnostic Port (DTE) 2 (RxD) 3 (TxD) 5 (COMM) PC with DB-9 Comm Port (DTE) PC with DB-25 Comm Port (DTE) 3 2 5 2 3 7 Modem DB-25 (DCE) Printer or Terminal DB-25 (DTE) 3 2 7 2 3 7 * The remaining pins in the connector are not used. 7-4 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Terminal Program Diagnostic Terminal Setup Make sure the diagnostic port and the diagnostic terminal are using the same baud rate, stop bits, parity, and data word length. These settings can be verified using the CDU-1. When using a PC, a communications programs must be used to communicate with the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 diagnostic port. Make sure the diagnostic port and the communication program are using the same baud rate, flow control, stop bits, parity, and data word length. Telnet Interface Connection To use the Telnet Interface for diagnostic purposes, connect a PC to an Ethernet port of the VPM-3 using an Ethernet cable. Telnet Interface Setup Ensure the Telnet Interface for the Ethernet port is enabled through the CDU-1 or Web GUI. Using a terminal program, such as HyperTerminal, connect to the IP address that is set for the port on the VPM-3 module that you are connecting to. Once connected, a login prompt will be displayed. The username and password for the Telnet Interface may be set through the Web GUI or viewed through either the CDU-1 or the Web GUI. After a definable period of inactivity, the Telnet Interface will be closed. The inactivity timeout may be set through the CDU-1 or Web GUI. Commands In addition to the commands listed on the main menu, several additional functions are available. Z Use the backspace key to correct a keystroke when entering a command. ENTER Press ENTER to execute a command H Press H then ENTER to display the main (Help) menu. [] Items shown in brackets indicate possible options for the command; you may enter some of these letters or choose to omit them. Do not type in the brackets. <option> For help on a specific option, type the option letter and a question mark and press the ENTER key. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 7-5 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Menu Options To display the Menu Options Help screen press ? or H and press the Enter key. Menu Options ? H C P [A/C/D/E/M] E [Site ID] I [A/B/C/D/E/X/R/T] L [E/D] R [E/D] M [E/D] T [YYMMDDhhmmss] D [C/R/P/M/L/Z] V [N/D/C/T/X/S/F] G [V/S/D/A/B/C/L] Z [A/D/E] S [E] - Help Help Checksum/CRC data Print Logs Edit Site ID Information Live Error Output Live Data Output Live Mnemonic Status - Time and Date Communications Diagnostics Office Control Override Remote Config MAC Zap Alarms/Logs Set Defaults Menu Options. 7-6 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Terminal Program Checksum/CRC Data Use the Checksum/CRC Data Commands to display the Application EPROM Checksum and CRC. To display the Application EPROM Checksum and CRC, type C and press the ENTER key. C Application CRC = xxxx Checksum = xxxx Application EPROM Checksum and CRC Options. Print Commands Use the Print Commands to retrieve recorded data. The data may be displayed on a PC, saved as a file, or printed on a printer. To send data directly to a printer, a communications program must be used. To display the Print Commands Screen, type P? and press the ENTER key. Print P PA PM PD PE PC PR commands Print 216DL recorder log Print alarm messages Print mnemonics Print condensed data dump Print errorlog Print configuration log Print recorder range Print Commands Screen. This procedure may be used to print Data Logs to a printer, if a printer is connected to you terminal device, or to save the Data Logs to a file if not printer is available. For saving the Data Log to a file, make sure you communication program is set to receive a text file. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 7-7 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Print (P) The Print function prints the recorded data information in a 216DL Style Recorder Log. The data is printed to an attached printer or displayed on an attached PC or terminal. 1. Type ? to display the Menu Options screen. 2. Type P and press the ENTER key. The 216DL Style Recorder Logs will be printed. P --------- LEFT (1) -------- --------- RIGHT (2) ------DATE TIME PO ST WP ULO LLO ASP IN OUT WP ULO LLO ASP IN OUT -----------------------------------------------------------------------------01-12 10:15:55 PO WP GYR GYR Y/ Y 12 12 WP GYR GYR Y/ Y 12 12 01-12 10:15:41 P0 WP GYR GYR Y/ Y 12 12 WP GYR GYR Y/ Y 12 12 01-12 10:13:50 P0 WP GYR GYR Y/ Y 12 12 WP GYR GYR Y/ Y 12 12 01-12 10:13:26 P0 WP GYR GYR Y/ Y 12 12 WP GYR GYR Y/ Y 12 12 01-12 10:13:11 PO WP GYR GYR Y/ Y 12 12 WP GYR GYR Y/ Y 12 12 01-12 10:13:04 P0 WP GYR GYR Y/ Y 12 12 WP GYR GYR Y/ Y 12 12 01-12 10:11:48 P0 WP GYR GYR Y/ Y 12 12 WP GYR GYR Y/ Y 12 12 01-12 10:11:47 PO WP GYR GYR Y/ Y 12 12 WP GYR GYR Y/ Y 12 12 01-12 10:11:47 P0 WP GYR GYR Y/ Y 12 12 WP GYR GYR Y/ Y 12 12 01-12 10:11:45 PO WP GYR GYR Y/ Y 12 12 WP GYR GYR Y/ Y 12 12 01-12 10:11:24 P0 WP GYR GYR Y/ Y 12 12 WP GYR GYR Y/ Y 12 12 01-12 10:10:34 P0 WP GYR GYR Y/ Y 12 12 WP GYR GYR Y/ Y 12 12 Recorder Log Sample Print Out. The log reads as follows: 1. 7-8 Date: 01/12 Time: 10:15:55 the left aspect is yellow over yellow. Left codes in are 1 and 2 and the left codes out are 1 and 2. The Right aspect is yellow over yellow. Right codes in are 1 and 2 and right codes out are 1 and 2. © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Terminal Program Print Alarm Messages (PA) The Print Alarm Message function allows you to print system alarm messages. To Print Alarm Messages, type PA and press the Enter key. The Alarm Messages will be printed. PA System Alarm(s): 01: VTI:Module Failure Print Alarm Messages Sample. If no alarms are present, the screen display will be as shown below: PA No active alarm(s): No Alarms Present Sample. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 7-9 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Print Mnemonics (PM) The Print Mnemonics function allows you to print application mnemonics. The status name of the mnemonic is printed as well status condition (True or False). To Print Mnemonics, type PM and press the Enter key. The Mnemonics will be printed. PM LUGREENI DLV_STATUS T13RDPULSE T1RECV T1RC_3 T1RC_7 T1TC_1 T1TC_5 T1TC_9 T2BR T2QS T2RC_4 T2RC_8 T2TC_2 T2TC_6 T2TC_M VLD1HEALTH LUYELLOW LUFRED LLGREENOUT LLRED NVO_1 NVO_3 VLD1_LNM RUGREENOUT RURED RLFGREEN RLYELLOWOUT NVI_5 NVI_7 VLD2_LSG =F =F =F =T =F =F =F =F =F =T =F =F =F =F =F =F =T =T =F =T =F =F =F =T =T =T =F =T =F =F =F LLGREENI LOBAT T1BR T1QS T1RC_4 T1RC_8 T1TC_2 T1TC_6 T1TC_M T2NALT T2RC_1 T2RC_5 T2RC_9 T2TC_3 T2TC_7 T2STICK LUGREEN LUFYELLOW LUREDOUT LLYELLOW LLFRED NVI_2 NVI_4 VLD2HEALTH RUYELLOW RUFRED RLGREENOUT RLRED NVO_5 NVO_7 VLD2_LNM =F =F =F =T =T =F =F =F =F =F =F =F =F =F =F =F =F =T =T =T =F =F =F =T =F =F =T =T =F =F =T RUGREENI HIBAT T1NALT T1RC_1 T1RC_5 T1RC_9 T1TC_3 T1TC_7 T1STICK T2XMIT T2RC_2 T2RC_6 T2RC_M T2TC_4 T2TC_8 VI01 LUFGREEN LUYELLOWOUT LLGREEN LLFYELLOW LLREDOUT NVO_2 NVO_4 RUGREEN RUFYELLOW RUREDOUT RLYELLOW RLFRED NVI_6 NVI_8 =F =F =F =T =T =F =F =F =F =T =F =F =F =T =F =F =F =T =F =T =T =F =F =F =F =T =F =F =F =F RLGREENI VTIHEALTH T1XMIT T1RC_2 T1RC_6 T1RC_M T1TC_4 T1TC_8 T23RDPULSE T2RECV T2RC_3 T2RC_7 T2TC_1 T2TC_5 T2TC_9 VI02 LUGREENOUT LURED LLFGREEN LLYELLOWOUT NVI_1 NVI_3 VLD1_LSG RUFGREEN RUYELLOWOUT RLGREEN RLFYELLOW RLREDOUT NVO_6 NVO_8 =F =T =T =F =F =F =F =F =F =T =F =F =T =T =F =F =T =F =F =T =F =F =F =F =T =F =F =T =F =F Print Mnemonics Sample. Print Condensed Data Dump (PD) This function prints the recorded data to be printed on compressed data format. To analyze this type of data you must use the GDA (Graphic Data Analyzer). The Print Condensed Data Dump is the preferred data download mode when troubleshooting assistance is requested from GETSGS. The data is printed to an attached printer or displayed on an attached computer. The GDA is a licensed, proprietary program that is available through GETSGS (P/N: 838-003800-006). To print a condensed data dump, type PD and press the ENTER key. 7-10 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Terminal Program Print Error Log (PE) The Error Log provides the user with system error messages. Error Log messages contain information such as track setup, lamp setup, and other I/O problems in the system. Up to 1,000 Error Logs may be stored. To print the Error Log, type PE (Print Error Log), and press the ENTER key. PE 02-08 02-08 02-08 02-08 02-08 02-08 12:18:45 12:22:54 12:34:45 12:35:42 12:51:39 12:51:46 C:DIAGPORT A:VLDTEST B:VLDTEST B:TICGMAIN A:TICGMAIN A:TICGMAIN 00752 05519 06374 17712 17744 23854 Errorlog Erased (User Request) Slot 3 Bank 1 Lamp 3 Voltage Drifted Value = 11077 Slot 2 Bank 1 Lamp 3 Light Out SLOT 1 VTI Reference Designators Do Not Match SLOT 1 VTI Transmit Correspondence Error on Track 1 SLOT 1 VTI Open Track Circuit Detected on Track 1 Print Error Log Sample. Print Configuration Log (PC) The Configuration Log contains changes made to the configuration information. Examples of configurations are track settings, lamp settings, and vital configuration settings, and vital timer settings. To print the Configuration Log, type PC and press the ENTER key. PC 08-19-98 08-19-98 08-19-98 08-19-98 08-19-98 08-19-98 08-20-98 08-20-98 08-20-98 08-20-98 08-20-98 08-20-98 08-20-98 08-21-98 08-24-98 09-03-98 09-03-98 09-03-98 09-03-98 09-03-98 09-03-98 09-03-98 09-03-98 19:10:08 19:10:32 19:10:49 19:11:07 19:13:50 19:14:12 16:17:58 16:18:19 16:54:38 16:55:55 16:59:13 16:59:48 17:24:42 17:01:15 13:33:42 09:58:31 09:59:19 09:59:59 10:00:16 10:04:31 13:41:06 13:42:13 13:46:18 VLD Slot 2 Bank 1 Voltage Changed From 10.0V To 12.0V VLD Slot 2 Bank 1 Voltage Changed From 12.0V To 10.0V VLD Slot 2 Bank 1 Voltage Changed From 10.0V To 12.0V VLD Slot 2 Bank 1 Voltage Changed From 12.0V To 12.0V Track 2 Non-Alternating Selection Now = ALT Track 2 Non-Alternating Selection Now = NON-ALT Track 1 Non-Alternating Selection Now = ALT Track 2 Non-Alternating Selection Now = ALT Track 1 Track Output Voltage Now = 2.50 V Track 1 Track Output Voltage Now = 1.00 V Track 1 Track Output Voltage Now = 1.50 V Track 1 Track Input Current Ration Now = 1.11 Track 1 Track Output Voltage Now = 0 V Track 1 Track Output Voltage Now = 1.50 V Track 1 Track Output Voltage Now = 1.00 V Track 1 Track Output Voltage Now = 1.5 V Track 1 Track Input Current Ration Now = 0.85 Track 2 Track Output Voltage Now = 1.5 V Track 2 Track Input Current Reference Now = 0.85 Vital Timer Change: LUGRNT Changed From 10 To 2 VLD Slot 2 Bank 1 Voltage Changed From 12.0V To 11.0V VLD Slot 2 Bank 1 Voltage Changed From 11.0V To 12.0V Vital Configuration Setting Change Print Configuration Log Sample. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 7-11 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Print Recorder Range (PR) The Print Recorder Range function displays the dates (from beginning to end) of the Recorded Data. In the example below, data started being recorded at 11:58:32 on 01-22 and was recorded until 15:03:32 on 02-08. In addition, the Print Recorder Range function displays the number of recorded entries. In the example below, 4216 entries have been recorded. To print the Recorder Range, type PR and press the ENTER key. PR Recorded Data Range: 01-22 11:58:32 to 02-08 15:03:32 (4216 entries) Print Configuration Log Sample. Site ID The Site ID is a descriptive identifier, up to 80 characters, for the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 location. For example, it could say "Signal at 5th and Main" or "Signal at mile marker 143". To display the Site ID Help screen press E? and press the ENTER key. E E[id] Display Site ID Sets new site ID Site ID Help. Display Site ID Use of this function displays the Site ID for the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 location. To display the Site ID type E and press the ENTER key. E Site ID: Signal at 5th and Main Site ID Sample. Set New Site ID The Set New Site ID function allows you to enter a new identifier for the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 site. The Site ID may be up to 80 characters. To set a new Site ID, type E, the new Site ID, and press the ENTER key. Note: There is no space between the command and the new Site ID being set. ESignal at 6th and Main Set New Site ID Sample. 7-12 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Terminal Program Information Commands To display the Information Commands help screen press I? and press the Enter key. Information Commands IA - VPM-A Processor IB - VPM-B Processor IC - VPM-C Processor ID - VTI DSP-D Processor IE VTI DSP-E Processor IT Application EPROM Information Commands. Display VPM-3 A Processor EPROM Information This function displays the EPROM information for processor A on the VPM-3 Module. To display the EPROM information for processor A, type IA and press the ENTER key. IA PN: PTC IT4 B13 Ver: FULL Bld0064F Module: VPM-3 Processor: A Copyright: GETS Global Signaling, LLC © 2010 CRC: AB5585E4 Sample Display of Processor A EPROM Information. Display VPM-3 B Processor EPROM Information This function displays the EPROM information for processor B on the VPM-3 Module. To display the EPROM information for processor B, type IB and press the ENTER key. IB PN: PTC IT4 B13 Ver: FULL Bld0064F Module: VPM-3 Processor: B Copyright: GETS Global Signaling, LLC © 2010 CRC: C338B666 Sample Display of Processor B EPROM Information. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 7-13 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Display VPM-3 C Processor EPROM Information This function displays the EPROM information for processor C on the VPM-3 Module. To display the EPROM information for processor C, type IC and press the ENTER key. IC PN: PTC IT4 B13 Ver: FULL Bld0064F Module: VPM-3 Processor: C Copyright: GETS Global Signaling, LLC © 2010 CRC: 38AE3A1 Sample Display of Processor C EPROM Information. Display VTI-2S D - DSP EPROM Information This function displays the EPROM information for DSP (Digital Signal Processor) - D on the VTI-2S Module. To display the EPROM information for DSP - D, type ID and press the ENTER key. ID PN:202550-000 Ver:2.1 Module:VTI Processor:D Ref: U76 Copyright:Harmon Industries Inc. (C) 2000 Sample Display of D - DSP EPROM Information. Display VTI-2S E - DSP EPROM Information This function displays the EPROM information for DSP - E on the VTI-2S Module. To display the EPROM information for DSP - E, type IE and press the ENTER key. IE PN:202550-000 Ver:2.1 Module:VTI Processor:E Ref: U86 Copyright:Harmon Industries Inc. (C) 2000 Sample Display of E - DSP EPROM Information. 7-14 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Terminal Program Display Application EPROM Information This function displays the EPROM information for the Application EPROM installed in the CI Module. To display the Application EPROM information, type IT and press the ENTER key. IT ACE Version: 3.0.0 EC5/ElectroLogIXS Compiler Version: 1.0.0 Railroad: GETS GS Designed by: Bob Chaney Subdivision: Grain Valley Location Number: 0 Flashrate (flash/per sec): 45 Chassis ID: 0 Comments: This application was for GETS GS Railroad Date: 2/28/03 Sample Display of Processor E EPROM Information. Real Time Error Output The Real Time Error Output logging function allows you to enable or disable real time error logging to the PC, diagnostic terminal, or printer. The default setting for Real Time Error Output logging is enabled. To display the Real Time Error Output Help screen press L? and press the ENTER key. Real L LE LD Time Error Output Commands - Current output status - Enable output - Disable output Real Time Error Output Commands. View Real Time Error Output Status To view the Real Time Error Output Status (Enabled or Disabled), type L and press the ENTER key. L Live errorlog display ENABLED View Real Time Error Output Status. Enable Real Time Error Output Status To enable the Real Time Error Output Status, type LE and press the ENTER key. LE Live errorlog display ENABLED Enable Real Time Error Output Status. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 7-15 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Disable Real Time Error Output Status To disable the Real Time Error Output Status, type LD and press the ENTER key. LD Live errorlog display DISABLED Disable Real Time Error Output Status. Live Data Log Display The Live Data Log Display logging function allows you to enable or disable real time Data Log logging to the PC, diagnostic terminal, or printer. The default setting for Live Data Log Display logging is enabled. To display the Live Data Log Display Help screen press R? and press the ENTER key. Live R RE RD datalog display commands - Show current status - Enable output - Disable output Live Data Log Display. View Live Data Log Status To view the Live Data Log Status (Enabled or Disabled), type R and press the ENTER key. R Live datalog display ENABLED Live Data Log Display Status. Enable Live Data Log Display To enable the Live Data Log Display, type RE and press the ENTER key. RE Live datalog display ENABLED Enable Live Data Log Display. Disable Live Data Log Display To disable the Live Data Log Display, type RD and press the ENTER key. RD Live datalog display DISABLED Disable Live Data Log Display. 7-16 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0 Terminal Program Live Mnemonics Display The Live Mnemonics Display logging function allows you to enable or disable real time Mnemonics logging to the PC, diagnostic terminal, or printer. The default setting for Live Mnemonics Display logging is enabled. To display the Live Mnemonics Help screen press M? and press the ENTER key. M? Live M ME MD mnemonic display commands - Show current status - Enable output - Disable output Live Mnemonics Display Help Screen. View Live Mnemonics Display Status To view the Live Mnemonics Display Status (Enabled or Disabled), type M and press the ENTER key. M Live mnemonic display DISABLED Live Mnemonics Display Status. Enable Live Mnemonics Display To enable the Live Mnemonics Display, type ME and press the ENTER key. ME Live mnemonic display ENABLED Enable Live Mnemonics Display. Disable Live Mnemonics Display To disable the Live Mnemonics Display, type MD and press the ENTER key. MD Live mnemonic display DISABLED Disable Live Mnemonic Display. 100373-010 AR0 © 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 7-17 ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 Time and Date To display the Time and Date Commands screen press T? and press the En

idoc.pub manual-electrologixs-vlc-and-ec5-100373-010-rev-ar0

Add this document to collection(s)

Add this document to saved

Suggest us how to improve StudyLib